NeoAnd/Docling
1
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Pull Requests Actions Packages Projects Releases Wiki Activity

feat: create a backend to parse USPTO patents into DoclingDocument (#606)

Browse Source 
* feat: add PATENT_USPTO as input format

Signed-off-by: Cesar Berrospi Ramis <ceb@zurich.ibm.com>

* feat: add USPTO backend parser

Add a backend implementation to parse patent applications and
grants from the United States Patent Office (USPTO).

Signed-off-by: Cesar Berrospi Ramis <75900930+ceberam@users.noreply.github.com>

* refactor: change the name of the USPTO input format

Change the name of the patent USPTO input format to show the typical format (XML).

Signed-off-by: Cesar Berrospi Ramis <75900930+ceberam@users.noreply.github.com>

* refactor: address several input formats with same mime type

Signed-off-by: Cesar Berrospi Ramis <75900930+ceberam@users.noreply.github.com>

* refactor: group XML backend parsers in a subfolder

Signed-off-by: Cesar Berrospi Ramis <75900930+ceberam@users.noreply.github.com>

* chore: add safe initialization of PatentUsptoDocumentBackend

Signed-off-by: Cesar Berrospi Ramis <75900930+ceberam@users.noreply.github.com>

---------

Signed-off-by: Cesar Berrospi Ramis <ceb@zurich.ibm.com>
Signed-off-by: Cesar Berrospi Ramis <75900930+ceberam@users.noreply.github.com>
This commit is contained in:
Cesar Berrospi Ramis 2024-12-17 16:35:23 +01:00 committed by GitHub
parent 3e599c7bbe
commit 4e087504cc
No known key found for this signature in database
GPG Key ID: B5690EEEBB952194
32 changed files with 54419 additions and 18 deletions
Show Stats Download Patch File Download Diff File Expand all files Collapse all files

0
docling/backend/xml/__init__.py Normal file
View File

1888
docling/backend/xml/uspto_backend.py Normal file
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

13
docling/datamodel/base_models.py
View File

@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
from enum import Enum, auto
from enum import Enum
from typing import TYPE_CHECKING, Dict, List, Optional, Union
from docling_core.types.doc import (
@ -28,6 +28,8 @@ class ConversionStatus(str, Enum):
class InputFormat(str, Enum):
"""A document format supported by document backend parsers."""
DOCX = "docx"
PPTX = "pptx"
HTML = "html"
@ -36,6 +38,7 @@ class InputFormat(str, Enum):
ASCIIDOC = "asciidoc"
MD = "md"
XLSX = "xlsx"
XML_USPTO = "xml_uspto"
class OutputFormat(str, Enum):
@ -55,6 +58,7 @@ FormatToExtensions: Dict[InputFormat, List[str]] = {
InputFormat.IMAGE: ["jpg", "jpeg", "png", "tif", "tiff", "bmp"],
InputFormat.ASCIIDOC: ["adoc", "asciidoc", "asc"],
InputFormat.XLSX: ["xlsx"],
InputFormat.XML_USPTO: ["xml", "txt"],
}
FormatToMimeType: Dict[InputFormat, List[str]] = {
@ -81,10 +85,13 @@ FormatToMimeType: Dict[InputFormat, List[str]] = {
InputFormat.XLSX: [
"application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.spreadsheetml.sheet"
],
InputFormat.XML_USPTO: ["application/xml", "text/plain"],
}
MimeTypeToFormat = {
mime: fmt for fmt, mimes in FormatToMimeType.items() for mime in mimes
MimeTypeToFormat: dict[str, list[InputFormat]] = {
mime: [fmt for fmt in FormatToMimeType if mime in FormatToMimeType[fmt]]
for value in FormatToMimeType.values()
for mime in value
}

86
docling/datamodel/document.py
View File

@ -3,7 +3,17 @@ import re
from enum import Enum
from io import BytesIO
from pathlib import Path, PurePath
from typing import TYPE_CHECKING, Dict, Iterable, List, Optional, Set, Type, Union
from typing import (
TYPE_CHECKING,
Dict,
Iterable,
List,
Literal,
Optional,
Set,
Type,
Union,
)
import filetype
from docling_core.types.doc import (
@ -235,7 +245,7 @@ class _DocumentConversionInput(BaseModel):
if isinstance(obj, Path):
yield InputDocument(
path_or_stream=obj,
format=format,
format=format, # type: ignore[arg-type]
filename=obj.name,
limits=self.limits,
backend=backend,
@ -243,7 +253,7 @@ class _DocumentConversionInput(BaseModel):
elif isinstance(obj, DocumentStream):
yield InputDocument(
path_or_stream=obj.stream,
format=format,
format=format, # type: ignore[arg-type]
filename=obj.name,
limits=self.limits,
backend=backend,
@ -251,15 +261,15 @@ class _DocumentConversionInput(BaseModel):
else:
raise RuntimeError(f"Unexpected obj type in iterator: {type(obj)}")
def _guess_format(self, obj: Union[Path, DocumentStream]):
def _guess_format(self, obj: Union[Path, DocumentStream]) -> Optional[InputFormat]:
content = b"" # empty binary blob
format = None
formats: list[InputFormat] = []
if isinstance(obj, Path):
mime = filetype.guess_mime(str(obj))
if mime is None:
ext = obj.suffix[1:]
mime = self._mime_from_extension(ext)
mime = _DocumentConversionInput._mime_from_extension(ext)
if mime is None: # must guess from
with obj.open("rb") as f:
content = f.read(1024) # Read first 1KB
@ -274,15 +284,53 @@ class _DocumentConversionInput(BaseModel):
if ("." in obj.name and not obj.name.startswith("."))
else ""
)
mime = self._mime_from_extension(ext)
mime = _DocumentConversionInput._mime_from_extension(ext)
mime = mime or self._detect_html_xhtml(content)
mime = mime or _DocumentConversionInput._detect_html_xhtml(content)
mime = mime or "text/plain"
formats = MimeTypeToFormat.get(mime, [])
if formats:
# TODO: remove application/xml case after adding another XML parse
if len(formats) == 1 and mime not in ("text/plain", "application/xml"):
return formats[0]
else: # ambiguity in formats
return _DocumentConversionInput._guess_from_content(
content, mime, formats
)
else:
return None
format = MimeTypeToFormat.get(mime)
return format
@staticmethod
def _guess_from_content(
content: bytes, mime: str, formats: list[InputFormat]
) -> Optional[InputFormat]:
"""Guess the input format of a document by checking part of its content."""
input_format: Optional[InputFormat] = None
content_str = content.decode("utf-8")
def _mime_from_extension(self, ext):
if mime == "application/xml":
match_doctype = re.search(r"<!DOCTYPE [^>]+>", content_str)
if match_doctype:
xml_doctype = match_doctype.group()
if InputFormat.XML_USPTO in formats and any(
item in xml_doctype
for item in (
"us-patent-application-v4",
"us-patent-grant-v4",
"us-grant-025",
"patent-application-publication",
)
):
input_format = InputFormat.XML_USPTO
elif mime == "text/plain":
if InputFormat.XML_USPTO in formats and content_str.startswith("PATN\r\n"):
input_format = InputFormat.XML_USPTO
return input_format
@staticmethod
def _mime_from_extension(ext):
mime = None
if ext in FormatToExtensions[InputFormat.ASCIIDOC]:
mime = FormatToMimeType[InputFormat.ASCIIDOC][0]
@ -293,7 +341,19 @@ class _DocumentConversionInput(BaseModel):
return mime
def _detect_html_xhtml(self, content):
@staticmethod
def _detect_html_xhtml(
content: bytes,
) -> Optional[Literal["application/xhtml+xml", "application/xml", "text/html"]]:
"""Guess the mime type of an XHTML, HTML, or XML file from its content.
Args:
content: A short piece of a document from its beginning.
Returns:
The mime type of an XHTML, HTML, or XML file, or None if the content does
not match any of these formats.
"""
content_str = content.decode("ascii", errors="ignore").lower()
# Remove XML comments
content_str = re.sub(r"<!--(.*?)-->", "", content_str, flags=re.DOTALL)
@ -302,6 +362,8 @@ class _DocumentConversionInput(BaseModel):
if re.match(r"<\?xml", content_str):
if "xhtml" in content_str[:1000]:
return "application/xhtml+xml"
else:
return "application/xml"
if re.match(r"<!doctype\s+html|<html|<head|<body", content_str):
return "text/html"

13
docling/document_converter.py
View File

@ -15,6 +15,7 @@ from docling.backend.md_backend import MarkdownDocumentBackend
from docling.backend.msexcel_backend import MsExcelDocumentBackend
from docling.backend.mspowerpoint_backend import MsPowerpointDocumentBackend
from docling.backend.msword_backend import MsWordDocumentBackend
from docling.backend.xml.uspto_backend import PatentUsptoDocumentBackend
from docling.datamodel.base_models import (
ConversionStatus,
DoclingComponentType,
@ -82,12 +83,17 @@ class HTMLFormatOption(FormatOption):
backend: Type[AbstractDocumentBackend] = HTMLDocumentBackend
class PdfFormatOption(FormatOption):
class PatentUsptoFormatOption(FormatOption):
pipeline_cls: Type = SimplePipeline
backend: Type[PatentUsptoDocumentBackend] = PatentUsptoDocumentBackend
class ImageFormatOption(FormatOption):
pipeline_cls: Type = StandardPdfPipeline
backend: Type[AbstractDocumentBackend] = DoclingParseV2DocumentBackend
class ImageFormatOption(FormatOption):
class PdfFormatOption(FormatOption):
pipeline_cls: Type = StandardPdfPipeline
backend: Type[AbstractDocumentBackend] = DoclingParseV2DocumentBackend
@ -112,6 +118,9 @@ def _get_default_option(format: InputFormat) -> FormatOption:
InputFormat.HTML: FormatOption(
pipeline_cls=SimplePipeline, backend=HTMLDocumentBackend
),
InputFormat.XML_USPTO: FormatOption(
pipeline_cls=SimplePipeline, backend=PatentUsptoDocumentBackend
),
InputFormat.IMAGE: FormatOption(
pipeline_cls=StandardPdfPipeline, backend=DoclingParseV2DocumentBackend
),

185
tests/data/groundtruth/docling_v2/ipa20180000016.itxt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,185 @@
item-0 at level 0: unspecified: group _root_
item-1 at level 1: title: LIGHT EMITTING DEVICE AND PLANT CULTIVATION METHOD
item-2 at level 2: section_header: ABSTRACT
item-3 at level 3: paragraph: Provided is a light emitting device that includes a light emitting element having a light emission peak wavelength ranging from 380 nm to 490 nm, and a fluorescent material excited by light from the light emitting element and emitting light having at a light emission peak wavelength ranging from 580 nm or more to less than 680 nm. The light emitting device emits light having a ratio R/B of a photon flux density R to a photon flux density B ranging from 2.0 to 4.0 and a ratio R/FR of the photon flux density R to a photon flux density FR ranging from 0.7 to 13.0, the photon flux density R being in a wavelength range of 620 nm or more and less than 700 nm, the photon flux density B being in a wavelength range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, and the photon flux density FR being in a wavelength range of 700 nm or more and 780 nm or less.
item-4 at level 2: section_header: CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION
item-5 at level 3: paragraph: The application claims benefit of Japanese Patent Application No. 2016-128835 filed on Jun. 29, 2016, the entire disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
item-6 at level 2: section_header: BACKGROUND
item-7 at level 2: section_header: Technical Field
item-8 at level 3: paragraph: The present disclosure relates to a light emitting device and a plant cultivation method.
item-9 at level 2: section_header: Description of Related Art
item-10 at level 3: paragraph: With environmental changes due to climate change and other artificial disruptions, plant factories are expected to increase production efficiency of vegetables and be capable of adjusting production in order to make it possible to stably supply vegetables. Plant factories that are capable of artificial management can stably supply clean and safe vegetables to markets, and therefore are expected to be the next-generation industries.
item-11 at level 3: paragraph: Plant factories that are completely isolated from external environment make it possible to artificially control and collect various data such as growth method, growth rate data, yield data, depending on classification of plants. Based on those data, plant factories are able to plan production according to the balance between supply and demand in markets, and supply plants such as vegetables without depending on surrounding conditions such as climatic environment. Particularly, an increase in food production is indispensable with world population growth. If plants can be systematically produced without the influence by surrounding conditions such as climatic environment, vegetables produced in plant factories can be stably supplied within a country, and additionally can be exported abroad as viable products.
item-12 at level 3: paragraph: In general, vegetables that are grown outdoors get sunlight, grow while conducting photosynthesis, and are gathered. On the other hand, vegetables that are grown in plant factories are required to be harvested in a short period of time, or are required to grow in larger than normal sizes even in an ordinary growth period.
item-13 at level 3: paragraph: In plant factories, the light source used in place of sunlight affect a growth period, growth of plants. LED lighting is being used in place of conventional fluorescent lamps, from a standpoint of power consumption reduction.
item-14 at level 3: paragraph: For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-125007 discloses a plant growth method. In this method, the plants is irradiated with light emitted from a first LED light emitting element and/or a second LED light emitting element at predetermined timings using a lighting apparatus including the first LED light emitting element emitting light having a wavelength region of 625 to 690 nm and the second LED light emitting element emitting light having a wavelength region of 420 to 490 nm in order to emit lights having sufficient intensities and different wavelengths from each other.
item-15 at level 2: section_header: SUMMARY
item-16 at level 3: paragraph: However, even though plants are merely irradiated with lights having different wavelengths as in the plant growth method disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-125007, the effect of promoting plant growth is not sufficient. Further improvement is required in promotion of plant growth.
item-17 at level 3: paragraph: Accordingly, an object of the present disclosure is to provide a light emitting device capable of promoting growth of plants and a plant cultivation method.
item-18 at level 3: paragraph: Means for solving the above problems are as follows, and the present disclosure includes the following embodiments.
item-19 at level 3: paragraph: A first embodiment of the present disclosure is a light emitting device including a light emitting element having a light emission peak wavelength in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, and a fluorescent material that is excited by light from the light emitting element and emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm. The light emitting device emits light having a ratio R/B of a photon flux density R to a photon flux density B within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less, and a ratio R/FR of a photon flux density R to a photon flux density FR within a range of 0.7 or more and 13.0 or less, where the photon flux density R is the number of light quanta (μmol·m⁻²·g⁻¹) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 620 nm or more and less than 700 nm, the photon flux density B is the number of light quanta (μmol·m⁻²·g⁻¹) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, and the photon flux density FR is the number of light quanta (μmol·m⁻²·g⁻¹) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 700 nm or more and 780 nm or less.
item-20 at level 3: paragraph: A second embodiment of the present disclosure is a plant cultivation method including irradiating plants with light from the light emitting device.
item-21 at level 3: paragraph: According to embodiments of the present disclosure, a light emitting device capable of promoting growth of plants and a plant cultivation method can be provided.
item-22 at level 2: section_header: BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
item-23 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 1 is a schematic cross sectional view of a light emitting device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
item-24 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 2 is a diagram showing spectra of wavelengths and relative photon flux densities of exemplary light emitting devices according to embodiments of the present disclosure and a comparative light emitting devices.
item-25 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 3 is a graph showing fresh weight (edible part) at the harvest time of each plant grown by irradiating the plant with light from exemplary light emitting devices according to embodiments of the present disclosure and a comparative light emitting device.
item-26 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 4 is a graph showing nitrate nitrogen content in each plant grown by irradiating the plant with light from exemplary light emitting devices according to embodiments of the present disclosure and a comparative light emitting device.
item-27 at level 2: section_header: DETAILED DESCRIPTION
item-28 at level 3: paragraph: A light emitting device and a plant cultivation method according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment. However, the embodiment described below only exemplifies the technical concept of the present invention, and the present invention is not limited to the light emitting device and plant cultivation method described below. In the present specification, the relationship between the color name and the chromaticity coordinate, the relationship between the wavelength range of light and the color name of monochromatic light follows JIS Z8110.
item-29 at level 3: section_header: Light Emitting Device
item-30 at level 4: paragraph: An embodiment of the present disclosure is a light emitting device including a light emitting element having a light emission peak wavelength in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “region of from near ultraviolet to blue color”), and a first fluorescent material emitting light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm by being excited by light from the light emitting element. The light emitting device emits light having a ratio R/B of a photon flux density R to a photon flux density B within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less, and a ratio R/FR of the photon flux density R to a photon flux density FR within a range of 0.7 or more and 13.0 or less, where the photon flux density R is the number of light quanta (μmol·m⁻²·g⁻¹) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 620 nm or more and less than 700 nm, the photon flux density B is the number of light quanta (μmol·m⁻²·g⁻¹) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, and the photon flux density FR is the number of light quanta (μmol·m⁻²·g⁻¹) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 700 nm or more and 780 nm or less.
item-31 at level 4: paragraph: An example of the light emitting device according to one embodiment of the present disclosure is described below based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a schematic cross sectional view showing a light emitting device 100 according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
item-32 at level 4: paragraph: The light emitting device 100 includes a molded article 40, a light emitting element 10 and a fluorescent member 50, as shown in FIG. 1. The molded article 40 includes a first lead 20 and a second lead 30 that are integrally molded with a resin portion 42 containing a thermoplastic resin or a thermosetting resin. The molded article 40 forms a depression having a bottom and sides, and the light emitting element 10 is placed on the bottom of the depression. The light emitting element 10 has a pair of an anode and a cathode, and the anode and the cathode are electrically connected to the first lead 20 and the second lead 30 respectively through the respective wires 60. The light emitting element 10 is covered with the fluorescent member 50. The fluorescent member 50 includes, for example, a fluorescent material 70 performing wavelength conversion of light from the light emitting element 10, and a resin. The fluorescent material 70 includes a first fluorescent material 71 and a second fluorescent material 72. A part of the first lead 20 and the second lead 30 that are connected to a pair of the anode and the cathode of the light emitting element 10 is exposed toward outside a package constituting the light emitting element 100. The light emitting device 100 can emit light by receiving electric power supply from the outside through the first lead 20 and the second lead 30.
item-33 at level 4: paragraph: The fluorescent member 50 not only performs wavelength conversion of light emitted from the light emitting element 10, but functions as a member for protecting the light emitting element 10 from the external environment. In FIG. 1, the fluorescent material 70 is localized in the fluorescent member 50 in the state that the first fluorescent material 71 and the second fluorescent material 72 are mixed with each other, and is arranged adjacent to the light emitting element 10. This constitution can efficiently perform the wavelength conversion of light from the light emitting element 10 in the fluorescent material 70, and as a result, can provide a light emitting device having excellent light emission efficiency. The arrangement of the fluorescent member 50 containing the fluorescent material 70, and the light emitting element 10 is not limited to the embodiment that the fluorescent material 70 is arranged adjacent to the light emitting element 10 as shown in FIG. 1, and considering the influence of heat generated from the light emitting element 10, the fluorescent material 70 can be arranged separated from the light emitting element 10 in the fluorescent member 50. Furthermore, light having suppressed color unevenness can be emitted from the light emitting device 100 by arranging the fluorescent material 70 almost evenly in the fluorescent member 50. In FIG. 1, the fluorescent material 70 is arranged in the state that the first fluorescent material 71 and the second fluorescent material 72 are mixed with each other. However, for example, the first fluorescent material 71 may be arranged in a layer state and the second fluorescent material 72 may be arranged thereon in another layer state. Alternatively, the second fluorescent material 72 may be arranged in a layer state and the first fluorescent material 71 may be arranged thereon in another layer state.
item-34 at level 4: paragraph: The light emitting device 100 includes the first fluorescent material 71 having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm by being excited by light from the light emitting element 10, and preferably further includes the second fluorescent material 72 having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less by being excited by light from the light emitting element 10.
item-35 at level 4: paragraph: The first fluorescent material 71 and the second fluorescent material 72 are contained in, for example, the fluorescent member 50 covering the light emitting element 10. The light emitting device 100 in which the light emitting element 10 has been covered with the fluorescent member 50 containing the first fluorescent material 71 and the second fluorescent material 72 emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm by a part of light emission of the light emitting element 10 that is absorbed in the first fluorescent material 71. Furthermore, the light emitting device 100 emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less by a part of light emission of the light emitting element 10 that is absorbed in the second fluorescent material 72.
item-36 at level 4: paragraph: Plants grow when a pigment (chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b) present in chlorophyll thereof absorbs light and additionally takes carbon dioxide gas and water therein, and these are converted to carbohydrates (saccharides) by photosynthesis. Chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b used in growth promotion of plants particularly have absorption peaks in a red region of 625 nm or more and 675 nm or less and a blue region of 425 nm or more and 475 nm or less. The action of photosynthesis by chlorophylls of plants mainly occurs in a wavelength range of 400 nm or more and 700 nm or less, but chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b further have local absorption peaks in a region of 700 nm or more and 800 nm or less.
item-37 at level 4: paragraph: For example, when plants are irradiated with light having longer wavelength than and absorption peak (in the vicinity of 680 nm) in a red region of chlorophyll a, a phenomenon called red drop, in which activity of photosynthesis rapidly decreases, occurs. However, it is known that when plants are irradiated with light containing near infrared region together with light of red region, photosynthesis is accelerated by a synergistic effect of those two kinds of lights. This phenomenon is called the Emerson effect.
item-38 at level 4: paragraph: Intensity of light with which plants are irradiated is represented by photon flux density. The photon flux density (μmol·m⁻²·s⁻¹) is the number of photons reaching a unit area per unit time. The amount of photosynthesis depends on the number of photons, and therefore does not depend on other optical characteristics if the photon flux density is the same. However, wavelength dependency activating photosynthesis differs depending on photosynthetic pigment. Intensity of light necessary for photosynthesis of plants is sometimes represented by Photosynthetic Photon Flux Density (PPFD).
item-39 at level 4: paragraph: The light emitting device 100 emits light having a ratio R/B of a photon flux density R to a photon flux density B within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less, and a ratio R/FR of the photon flux density R to a photon flux density FR within a range of 0.7 or more and 13.0 or less, where the photon flux density R is the number of light quanta (μmol·m⁻²·g⁻¹) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 620 nm or more and less than 700 nm, the photon flux density B is the number of light quanta (μmol·m⁻²·g⁻¹) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, and the photon flux density FR is the number of light quanta (μmol·m⁻²·g⁻¹) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 700 nm or more and 780 nm or less.
item-40 at level 4: paragraph: It is estimated that in plants, which are irradiated with light containing the photon flux density FR from the light emitting device 100, photosynthesis is activated by Emerson effect, and as a result, growth of plants can be promoted. Furthermore, when plants are irradiated with light containing the photon flux density FR, growth of the plants can be promoted by a reversible reaction between red light irradiation, to which chlorophyll as chromoprotein contained in plants has participated, and far infrared light irradiation.
item-41 at level 4: paragraph: Examples of nutrients necessary for growth of plants include nitrogen, phosphoric acid, and potassium. Of those nutrients, nitrogen is absorbed in plants as nitrate nitrogen (nitrate ion: NO₃⁻). The nitrate nitrogen changes into nitrite ion (NO₂⁻) by a reduction reaction, and when the nitrite ion is further reacted with fatty acid amine, nitrosoamine is formed. It is known that nitrite ion acts to hemoglobin in blood, and it is known that a nitroso compound sometimes affects health of a human body. Mechanism of converting nitrate nitrogen into nitrite ion in vivo is complicated, and the relationship between the amount of intake of nitrate nitrogen and the influence to health of a human body is not clarified. However, it is desired that the content of nitrate nitrogen having a possibility of affecting health of a human body is smaller.
item-42 at level 4: paragraph: For the above reasons, nitrogen is one of nutrients necessary for growth of plants, but it is preferred that the content of nitrate nitrogen in food plants be reduced to a range that does not disturb the growth of plants.
item-43 at level 4: paragraph: It is preferred that the light emitting device 100 further include the second fluorescent material 72 having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less by being excited by light from the light emitting element 10, wherein the R/FR ratio is within a range of 0.7 or more and 5.0 or less. The R/FR ratio is more preferably within a range of 0.7 or more and 2.0 or less.
item-44 at level 3: section_header: Light Emitting Element
item-45 at level 4: paragraph: The light emitting element 10 is used as an excitation light source, and is a light emitting element emitting light having a light emission peak wavelength in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less. As a result, a stable light emitting device having high efficiency, high linearity of output to input and strong mechanical impacts can be obtained.
item-46 at level 4: paragraph: The range of the light emission peak wavelength of the light emitting element 10 is preferably in a range of 390 nm or more and 480 nm or less, more preferably in a range of 420 nm or more and 470 nm or less, and still more preferably in a range of 440 nm or more and 460 nm or less, and particularly preferably in a range of 445 nm or more and 455 nm or less. A light emitting element including a nitride semiconductor (InₓAlyGa₁₋ₓ₋yN, 0≦X, 0≦Y and X+Y≦1) is preferably used as the light emitting element 10.
item-47 at level 4: paragraph: The half value width of emission spectrum of the light emitting element 10 can be, for example, 30 nm or less.
item-48 at level 3: section_header: Fluorescent Member
item-49 at level 4: paragraph: The fluorescent member 50 used in the light emitting device 100 preferably includes the first fluorescent material 71 and a sealing material, and more preferably further includes the second fluorescent material 72. A thermoplastic resin and a thermosetting resin can be used as the sealing material. The fluorescent member 50 may contain other components such as a filler, a light stabilizer and a colorant, in addition to the fluorescent material and the sealing material. Examples of the filler include silica, barium titanate, titanium oxide and aluminum oxide.
item-50 at level 4: paragraph: The content of other components other than the fluorescent material 70 and the sealing material in the fluorescent member 50 is preferably in a range of 0.01 parts by mass or more and 20 parts by mass or less, per 100 parts by mass of the sealing material.
item-51 at level 4: paragraph: The total content of the fluorescent material 70 in the fluorescent member 50 can be, for example, 5 parts by mass or more and 300 parts by mass or less, per 100 parts by mass of the sealing material. The total content is preferably 10 parts by mass or more and 250 parts by mass or less, more preferably 15 parts by mass or more and 230 parts by mass or less, and still more preferably 15 parts by mass or more and 200 parts by mass or less. When the total content of the fluorescent material 70 in the fluorescent member 50 is within the above range, the light emitted from the light emitting element 10 can be efficiently subjected to wavelength conversion in the fluorescent material 70.
item-52 at level 3: section_header: First Fluorescent Material
item-53 at level 4: paragraph: The first fluorescent material 71 is a fluorescent material that is excited by light from the light emitting element 10 and emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm. Examples of the first fluorescent material 71 include an Mn⁴⁺-activated fluorogermanate fluorescent material, an Eu²⁺-activated nitride fluorescent material, an Eu²⁺-activated alkaline earth sulfide fluorescent material and an Mn⁴⁺-activated halide fluorescent material. The first fluorescent material 71 may use one selected from those fluorescent materials and may use a combination of two or more thereof. The first fluorescent material preferably contains an Eu²⁺-activated nitride fluorescent material and an Mn⁴⁺-activated fluorogermanate fluorescent material.
item-54 at level 4: paragraph: The Eu²⁺-activated nitride fluorescent material is preferably a fluorescent material that has a composition including at least one element selected from Sr and Ca, and Al and contains silicon nitride that is activated by Eu²⁺, or a fluorescent material that has a composition including at least one element selected from the group consisting of alkaline earth metal elements and at least one element selected from the group consisting of alkali metal elements and contains aluminum nitride that is activated by Eu²⁺.
item-55 at level 4: paragraph: The halide fluorescent material that is activated by Mn⁴⁺ is preferably a fluorescent material that has a composition including at least one element or ion selected from the group consisting of alkali metal elements and an ammonium ion (NH⁴⁺) and at least one element selected from the group consisting of Group 4 elements and Group 14 elements and contains a fluoride that is activated by Mn⁴⁺.
item-56 at level 4: paragraph: Examples of the first fluorescent material 71 specifically include fluorescent materials having any one composition of the following formulae (I) to (VI).
item-57 at level 4: paragraph: (i−j)MgO.(j/2)Sc₂O₃.kMgF₂.mCaF₂.(1−n)GeO₂.(n/2)Mt₂O₃:zMn⁴⁺ (I)
item-58 at level 4: paragraph: wherein Mt is at least one selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, and In, and j, k, m, n, and z are numbers satisfying 2≦i≦4, 0≦j<0.5, 0<k<1.5, 0≦m<1.5, 0<n<0.5, and 0<z<0.05, respectively.
item-59 at level 4: paragraph: (Ca₁₋p₋qSrpEuq)AlSiN₃ (II)
item-60 at level 4: paragraph: wherein p and q are numbers satisfying 0≦p≦1.0, 0<q<1.0, and p+q<1.0.
item-61 at level 4: paragraph: MªvMbwMcfAl₃₋gSigNh (III)
item-62 at level 4: paragraph: wherein Mª is at least one element selected from the group consisting of Ca, Sr, Ba, and Mg, Mb is at least one element selected from the group consisting of Li, Na, and K, Mc is at least one element selected from the group consisting of Eu, Ce, Tb, and Mn, v, w, f, g, and h are numbers satisfying 0.80≦v≦1.05, 0.80≦w≦1.05, 0.001<f≦0.1, 0≦g≦0.5, and 3.0≦h≦5.0, respectively.
item-63 at level 4: paragraph: (Ca₁₋r₋s₋tSrrBasEut)₂Si₅N₈ (IV)
item-64 at level 4: paragraph: wherein r, s, and t are numbers satisfying 0≦r≦1.0, 0≦s≦1.0, 0<t<1.0, and r+s+t≦1.0.
item-65 at level 4: paragraph: (Ca,Sr)S:Eu (V)
item-66 at level 4: paragraph: A₂[M¹₁₋uMn⁴⁺uF₆] (VI)
item-67 at level 4: paragraph: wherein A is at least one selected from the group consisting of K, Li, Na, Rb, Cs, and NH₄⁺, M¹ is at least one element selected from the group consisting of Group 4 elements and Group 14 elements, and u is the number satisfying 0<u<0.2.
item-68 at level 4: paragraph: The content of the first fluorescent material 71 in the fluorescent member 50 is not particularly limited as long as the R/B ratio is within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less. The content of the first fluorescent material 71 in the fluorescent member 50 is, for example, 1 part by mass or more, preferably 5 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 8 parts by mass or more, per 100 parts by mass of the sealing material, and is preferably 200 parts by mass or less, more preferably 150 parts by mass or less, and still more preferably 100 parts by mass or less, per 100 parts by mass of the sealing material. When the content of the first fluorescent material 71 in the fluorescent member 50 is within the aforementioned range, the light emitted from the light emitting element 10 can be efficiently subjected to wavelength conversion, and light capable of promoting growth of plant can be emitted from the light emitting device 100.
item-69 at level 4: paragraph: The first fluorescent material 71 preferably contains at least two fluorescent materials, and in the case of containing at least two fluorescent materials, the first fluorescent material preferably contains a fluorogermanate fluorescent material that is activated by Mn⁴⁺ (hereinafter referred to as “MGF fluorescent material”), and a fluorescent material that has a composition including at least one element selected from Sr and Ca, and Al, and contains silicon nitride that is activated by Eu²⁺ (hereinafter referred to as “CASN fluorescent material”).
item-70 at level 4: paragraph: In the case where the first fluorescent material 71 contains at least two fluorescent materials and two fluorescent materials are a MGF fluorescent material and a CASN fluorescent material, where a compounding ratio thereof (MGF fluorescent material:CASN fluorescent material) is preferably in a range of 50:50 or more and 99:1 or less, more preferably in a range of 60:40 or more and 97:3 or less, and still more preferably in a range of 70:30 or more and 96:4 or less, in mass ratio. In the case where the first fluorescent material contains two fluorescent materials, when those fluorescent materials are a MGF fluorescent material and a CASN fluorescent material and the mass ratio thereof is within the aforementioned range, the light emitted from the light emitting element 10 can be efficiently subjected to wavelength conversion in the first fluorescent material 71. In addition, the R/B ratio can be adjusted to within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less, and the R/FR ratio is easy to be adjusted to within a range of 0.7 or more and 13.0 or less.
item-71 at level 3: section_header: Second Fluorescent Material
item-72 at level 4: paragraph: The second fluorescent material 72 is a fluorescent material that is excited by the light from the light emitting element 10 and emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less.
item-73 at level 4: paragraph: The second fluorescent material 72 used in the light emitting device according to one embodiment of the present disclosure is a fluorescent material that contains a first element Ln containing at least one element selected from the group consisting of rare earth elements excluding Ce, a second element M containing at least one element selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, In, Ce, and Cr, and has a composition of an aluminate fluorescent material. When a molar ratio of the second element M is taken as 5, it is preferred that a molar ratio of Ce be a product of a value of a parameter x and 3, and a molar ratio of Cr be a product of a value of a parameter y and 3, wherein the value of the parameter x is in a range of exceeding 0.0002 and less than 0.50, and the value of the parameter y is in a range of exceeding 0.0001 and less than 0.05.
item-74 at level 4: paragraph: The second fluorescent material 72 is preferably a fluorescent material having the composition represented by the following formula (1):
item-75 at level 4: paragraph: (Ln₁₋ₓ₋yCeₓCry)₃M₅O₁₂ (1)
item-76 at level 4: paragraph: wherein Ln is at least one rare earth element selected from the group consisting of rare earth elements excluding Ce, M is at least one element selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, and In, and x and y are numbers satisfying 0.0002<x<0.50 and 0.0001<y<0.05, respectively.
item-77 at level 4: paragraph: In this case, the second fluorescent material 72 has a composition constituting a garnet structure, and therefore is tough against heat, light, and water, has an absorption peak wavelength of excited absorption spectrum in the vicinity of 420 nm or more and 470 nm or less, and sufficiently absorbs the light from the light emitting element 10, thereby enhancing light emitting intensity of the second fluorescent material 72, which is preferred. Furthermore, the second fluorescent material 72 is excited by light having light emission peak wavelength in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less and emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less.
item-78 at level 4: paragraph: In the second fluorescent material 72, from the standpoint of stability of a crystal structure, Ln is preferably at least one rare earth element selected from the group consisting of Y, Gd, Lu, La, Tb, and Pr, and M is preferably Al or Ga.
item-79 at level 4: paragraph: In the second fluorescent material 72, the value of the parameter x is more preferably in a range of 0.0005 or more and 0.400 or less (0.0005≦x≦0.400), and still more preferably in a range of 0.001 or more and 0.350 or less (0.001≦x≦0.350).
item-80 at level 4: paragraph: In the second fluorescent material 72, the value of the parameter y is preferably in a range of exceeding 0.0005 and less than 0.040 (0.0005<y<0.040), and more preferably in a range of 0.001 or more and 0.026 or less (0.001≦y≦0.026).
item-81 at level 4: paragraph: The parameter x is an activation amount of Ce and the value of the parameter x is in a range of exceeding 0.0002 and less than 0.50 (0.0002<x<0.50), and the parameter y is an activation amount of Cr. When the value of the parameter y is in a range of exceeding 0.0001 and less than 0.05 (0.0001<y<0.05), the activation amount of Ce and the activation amount of Cr that are light emission centers contained in the crystal structure of the fluorescent material are within optimum ranges, the decrease of light emission intensity due to the decrease of light emission center can be suppressed, the decrease of light emission intensity due to concentration quenching caused by the increase of the activation amount can be suppressed, and light emission intensity can be enhanced.
item-82 at level 3: section_header: Production Method of Second Fluorescent Material
item-83 at level 4: paragraph: A method for producing the second fluorescent material 72 includes the following method.
item-84 at level 4: paragraph: A compound containing at least one rare earth element Ln selected from the group consisting of rare earth elements excluding Ce, a compound containing at least one element M selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, and In, a compound containing Ce and a compound containing Cr are mixed such that, when the total molar composition ratio of the M is taken as 5 as the standard, in the case where the total molar composition ratio of Ln, Ce, and Nd is 3, the molar ratio of Ce is a product of 3 and a value of a parameter x, and the molar ratio of Cr is a product of 3 and a value of a parameter y, the value of the parameter x is in a range of exceeding 0.0002 and less than 0.50 and the value of the parameter y is in a range of exceeding 0.0001 and less than 0.05, thereby obtaining a raw material mixture, the raw material mixture is heat-treated, followed by classification and the like, thereby obtaining the second fluorescent material.
item-85 at level 3: section_header: Compound Containing Rare Earth Element Ln
item-86 at level 4: paragraph: Examples of the compound containing rare earth element Ln include oxides, hydroxides, nitrides, oxynitrides, fluorides, and chlorides, that contain at least one rare earth element Ln selected from the group consisting of rare earth elements excluding Ce. Those compounds may be hydrates. At least a part of the compounds containing rare earth element may use a metal simple substance or an alloy containing rare earth element. The compound containing rare earth element is preferably a compound containing at least one rare earth element Ln selected from the group consisting of Y, Gd, Lu, La, Tb, and Pr. The compound containing rare earth element may be used alone or may be used as a combination of at least two compounds containing rare earth element.
item-87 at level 4: paragraph: The compound containing rare earth element is preferably an oxide that does not contain elements other than the target composition, as compared with other materials. Examples of the oxide specifically include Y₂O₃, Gd₂O₃, Lu₂O₃, La₂O₃, Tb₄O₇ and Pr₆O₁₁.
item-88 at level 3: section_header: Compound Containing M
item-89 at level 4: paragraph: Examples of the compound containing at least one element M selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, and In include oxides, hydroxides, nitrides, oxynitrides, fluorides, and chlorides, that contain Al, Ga, or In. Those compounds may be hydrates. Furthermore, Al metal simple substance, Ga metal simple substance, In metal simple substance, Al alloy, Ga alloy or In alloy may be used, and metal simple substance or an alloy may be used in place of at least a part of the compound. The compound containing Al, Ga, or In may be used alone or may be used as a combination of two or more thereof. The compound containing at least one element selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, and In is preferably an oxide. The reason for this is that an oxide that does not contain elements other than the target composition, as compared with other materials, and a fluorescent material having a target composition are easy to be obtained. When a compound containing elements other than the target composition has been used, residual impurity elements are sometimes present in the fluorescent material obtained. The residual impurity element becomes a killer factor in light emission, leading to the possibility of remarkable decrease of light emission intensity.
item-90 at level 4: paragraph: Examples of the compound containing Al, Ga, or In specifically include Al₂O₃, Ga₂O₃, and In₂O₃.
item-91 at level 3: section_header: Compound Containing Ce and Compound Containing Cr
item-92 at level 4: paragraph: Examples of the compound containing Ce or the compound containing Cr include oxides, hydroxides, nitrides, fluorides, and chlorides, that contain cerium (Ce) or chromium (Cr). Those compounds may be hydrates. Ce metal simple substance, Ce alloy, Cr metal simple substance, or Cr alloy may be used, and a metal simple substance or an alloy may be used in place of a part of the compound. The compound containing Ce or the compound containing Cr may be used alone or may be used as a combination of two or more thereof. The compound containing Ce or the compound containing Cr is preferably an oxide. The reason for this is that an oxide that does not contain elements other than the target composition, as compared with other materials, and a fluorescent material having a target composition are easy to be obtained. When a compound containing elements other than the target composition has been used, residual impurity elements are sometimes present in the fluorescent material obtained. The residual impurity element becomes a killer factor in light emission, leading to the possibility of remarkable decrease of light emission intensity.
item-93 at level 4: paragraph: Example of the compound containing Ce specifically includes CeO₂, and example of the compound containing Cr specifically includes Cr₂O₃.
item-94 at level 4: paragraph: The raw material mixture may contain a flux such as a halide, as necessary. When a flux is contained in the raw material mixture, reaction of raw materials with each other is accelerated, and a solid phase reaction is easy to proceed further uniformly. It is considered that a temperature for heat-treating the raw material mixture is almost the same as a formation temperature of a liquid phase of a halide used as a flux or is a temperature higher than the formation temperature, and, as a result, the reaction is accelerated.
item-95 at level 4: paragraph: Examples of the halide include fluorides, chlorides of rare earth metals, alkali earth metals, and alkali metals. When a halide of rare earth metal is used as the flux, the flux can be added as a compound so as to achieve a target composition. Examples of the flux specifically include BaF₂ and CaF₂. Of those, BaF₂ is preferably used. When barium fluoride is used as the flux, a garnet crystal structure is stabilized and a composition of a garnet crystal structure is easy to be formed.
item-96 at level 4: paragraph: When the raw material mixture contains a flux, the content of the flux is preferably 20 mass % or less, and more preferably 10 mass % or less, and is preferably 0.1 mass % or more, on the basis of the raw material mixture (100 mass %). When the flux content is within the aforementioned range, the problem that it is difficult to form a garnet crystal structure due to the insufficiency of particle growth by small amount of the flux is prevented, and furthermore, the problem that it is difficult to form a garnet crystal structure due to too large amount of the flux is prevented.
item-97 at level 4: paragraph: The raw material mixture is prepared, for example, as follows. Each of raw materials is weighed so as to be a compounding ratio. Thereafter, the raw materials are subjected to mixed grinding using a dry grinding machine such as ball mill, are subjected to mixed grinding using a mortar and a pestle, are subjected to mixing using a mixing machine such as a ribbon blender, for example, or are subjected to mixed grinding using both a dry grinding machine and a mixing machine. As necessary, the raw material mixture may be classified using a wet separator such as a setting tank generally used industrially, or a dry classifier such as a cyclone. The mixing may be conducted by dry mixing or may be conducted by wet mixing by adding a solvent. The mixing is preferably dry mixing. The reason for this is that dry mixing can shorten a processing time as compared with wet drying, and this leads to the improvement of productivity.
item-98 at level 4: paragraph: The raw material mixture after mixing each raw material is dissolved in an acid, the resulting solution is co-precipitated in oxalic acid, a product formed by the co-precipitation is baked to obtain an oxide, and the oxide may be used as the raw material mixture.
item-99 at level 4: paragraph: The raw material mixture can be heat-treated by placing it in a crucible, a boat made of a carbon material (such as graphite), boron nitride (BN), aluminum oxide (alumina), tungsten (W) or molybdenum (Mo).
item-100 at level 4: paragraph: From the standpoint of stability of a crystal structure, the temperature for heat-treating the raw material mixture is preferably in a range of 1,000° C. or higher and 2,100° C. or lower, more preferably in a range of 1,100° C. or higher and 2,000° C. or lower, still more preferably in a range of 1,200° C. or higher and 1,900° C. or lower, and particularly preferably in a range of 1,300° C. or higher and 1,800° C. or lower. The heat treatment can use an electric furnace or a gas furnace.
item-101 at level 4: paragraph: The heat treatment time varies depending on a temperature rising rate, a heat treatment atmosphere. The heat treatment time after reaching the heat treatment temperature is preferably 1 hour or more, more preferably 2 hours or more, and still more preferably 3 hours or more, and is preferably 20 hours or less, more preferably 18 hours or less and still more preferably 15 hours or less.
item-102 at level 4: paragraph: The atmosphere for heat-treating the raw material mixture is an inert atmosphere such as argon or nitrogen, a reducing atmosphere containing hydrogen, or an oxidizing atmosphere such as the air. The raw material mixture may be subjected to a two-stage heat treatment of a first heat treatment of heat-treating in the air or a weakly reducing atmosphere from the standpoint of, for example, prevention of blackening, and a second heat treatment of heat-treating in a reducing atmosphere from the standpoint of enhancing absorption efficiency of light having a specific light emission peak wavelength. The fluorescent material constituting a garnet structure is that reactivity of the raw material mixture is improved in an atmosphere having high reducing power such as a reducing atmosphere. Therefore, the fluorescent material can be heat-treated under the atmospheric pressure without pressurizing. For example, the heat treatment can be conducted by the method disclosed in Japanese Patent Application No. 2014-260421.
item-103 at level 4: paragraph: The fluorescent material obtained may be subjected to post-treatment steps such as a solid-liquid separation by a method such as cleaning or filtration, drying by a method such as vacuum drying, and classification by dry sieving. After those post-treatment steps, a fluorescent material having a desired average particle diameter is obtained.
item-104 at level 3: section_header: Other Fluorescent Materials
item-105 at level 4: paragraph: The light emitting device 100 may contain other kinds of fluorescent materials, in addition to the first fluorescent material 71.
item-106 at level 4: paragraph: Examples of other kinds of fluorescent materials include a green fluorescent material emitting green color by absorbing a part of the light emitted from the light emitting element 10, a yellow fluorescent material emitting yellow color, and a fluorescent material having a light emission peak wavelength in a wavelength range exceeding 680 nm.
item-107 at level 4: paragraph: Examples of the green fluorescent material specifically include fluorescent materials having any one of compositions represented by the following formulae (i) to (iii).
item-108 at level 4: paragraph: M¹¹₈MgSi₄O₁₆X¹¹:Eu (i)
item-109 at level 4: paragraph: wherein M¹¹ is at least one selected from the group consisting of Ca, Sr, Ba, and Zn, and X¹¹ is at least one selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, and I.
item-110 at level 4: paragraph: Si₆₋bAlbObN₈₋b:Eu (ii)
item-111 at level 4: paragraph: wherein b satisfies 0<b<4.2.
item-112 at level 4: paragraph: M¹³Ga₂S₄:Eu (iii)
item-113 at level 4: paragraph: wherein M¹³ is at least one selected from the group consisting of Mg, Ca, Sr, and
item-114 at level 4: paragraph: Ba.
item-115 at level 4: paragraph: Examples of the yellow fluorescent material specifically include fluorescent materials having any one of compositions represented by the following formulae (iv) to (v).
item-116 at level 4: paragraph: M¹⁴c/dSi₁₂₋₍c₊d₎Al₍c₊d₎OdN₍₁₆₋d₎:Eu (iv)
item-117 at level 4: paragraph: wherein M¹⁴ is at least one selected from the group consisting of Sr, Ca, Li, and Y. A value of a parameter c is in a range of 0.5 to 5, a value of a parameter d is in a range of 0 to 2.5, and the parameter d is an electrical charge of M¹⁴.
item-118 at level 4: paragraph: M¹⁵₃Al₅O₁₂:Ce (v)
item-119 at level 4: paragraph: wherein M¹⁵ is at least one selected from the group consisting of Y and Lu.
item-120 at level 4: paragraph: Examples of the fluorescent material having light emission peak wavelength in a wavelength range exceeding 680 nm specifically include fluorescent materials having any one of compositions represented by the following formulae (vi) to (x).
item-121 at level 4: paragraph: Al₂O₃:Cr (vi)
item-122 at level 4: paragraph: CaYAlO₄:Mn (vii)
item-123 at level 4: paragraph: LiAlO₂:Fe (viii)
item-124 at level 4: paragraph: CdS:Ag (ix)
item-125 at level 4: paragraph: GdAlO₃:Cr (x)
item-126 at level 4: paragraph: The light emitting device 100 can be utilized as a light emitting device for plant cultivation that can activate photosynthesis of plants and promote growth of plants so as to have favorable form and weight.
item-127 at level 3: section_header: Plant Cultivation Method
item-128 at level 4: paragraph: The plant cultivation method of one embodiment of the present disclosure is a method for cultivating plants, including irradiating plants with light emitted from the light emitting device 100. In the plant cultivation method, plants can be irradiated with light from the light emitting device 100 in plant factories that are completely isolated from external environment and make it possible for artificial control. The kind of plants is not particularly limited. However, the light emitting device 100 of one embodiment of the present disclosure can activate photosynthesis of plants and promote growth of plants such that a stem, a leaf, a root, a fruit have favorable form and weight, and therefore is preferably applied to cultivation of vegetables, flowers that contain much chlorophyll performing photosynthesis. Examples of the vegetables include lettuces such as garden lettuce, curl lettuce, Lamb's lettuce, Romaine lettuce, endive, Lollo Rosso, Rucola lettuce, and frill lettuce; Asteraceae vegetables such as “shungiku” (chrysanthemum coronarium); morning glory vegetables such as spinach; Rosaceae vegetables such as strawberry; and flowers such as chrysanthemum, gerbera, rose, and tulip.
item-129 at level 2: section_header: EXAMPLES
item-130 at level 3: paragraph: The present invention is further specifically described below by Examples and Comparative Examples.
item-131 at level 2: section_header: Examples 1 to 5
item-132 at level 3: section_header: First Fluorescent Material
item-133 at level 4: paragraph: Two fluorescent materials of fluorogarmanate fluorescent material that is activated by Mn⁴⁺, having a light emission peak at 660 nm and fluorescent material containing silicon nitride that are activated by Eu²⁺, having a light emission peak at 660 nm were used as the first fluorescent material 71. In the first fluorescent material 71, a mass ratio of a MGF fluorescent material to a CASN fluorescent material (MGF:CASN) was 95:5.
item-134 at level 3: section_header: Second Fluorescent Material
item-135 at level 4: paragraph: Fluorescent material that is obtained by the following production method was used as the second fluorescent material 72.
item-136 at level 4: paragraph: 55.73 g of Y₂O₃ (Y₂O₃ content: 100 mass %), 0.78 g of CeO₂ (CeO₂ content: 100 mass %), 0.54 g of Cr₂O₃ (Cr₂O₃ content: 100 mass %,) and 42.95 g of Al₂O₃ (Al₂O₃ content: 100 mass %) were weighed as raw materials, and 5.00 g of BaF₂ as a flux was added to the mixture. The resulting raw materials were dry mixed for 1 hour by a ball mill. Thus, a raw material mixture was obtained.
item-137 at level 4: paragraph: The raw material mixture obtained was placed in an alumina crucible, and a lid was put on the alumina crucible. The raw material mixture was heat-treated at 1,500° C. for 10 hours in a reducing atmosphere of H₂: 3 vol % and N₂: 97 vol %. Thus, a calcined product was obtained. The calcined product was passed through a dry sieve to obtain a second fluorescent material. The second fluorescent material obtained was subjected to composition analysis by ICP-AES emission spectrometry using an inductively coupled plasma emission analyzer (manufactured by Perkin Elmer). The composition of the second fluorescent material obtained was (Y₀.₉₇₇Ce₀.₀₀₉Cr₀.₀₁₄)₃Al₅O₁₂ (hereinafter referred to as “YAG: Ce, Cr”).
item-138 at level 3: section_header: Light Emitting Device
item-139 at level 4: paragraph: Nitride semiconductor having a light emission peak wavelength of 450 nm was used as the light emitting element 10 in the light emitting device 100.
item-140 at level 4: paragraph: Silicone resin was used as a sealing material constituting the fluorescent member 50, the first fluorescent material 71 and/or the second fluorescent material 72 was added to 100 parts by mass of the silicone resin in the compounding ratio (parts by mass) shown in Table 1, and 15 parts by mass of silica filler were further added thereto, followed by mixing and dispersing. The resulting mixture was degassed to obtain a resin composition constituting a fluorescent member. In each of resin compositions of Examples 1 to 5, the compounding ratio of the first fluorescent material 71 and the second fluorescent material 72 was adjusted as shown in Table 1, and those materials are compounded such that the R/B ratio is within a range of 2.0 or more and 2.4 or less, and the R/FR ratio is within a range of 1.4 or more and 6.0 or less.
item-141 at level 4: paragraph: The resin composition was poured on the light emitting element 10 of a depressed portion of the molded article 40 to fill the depressed portion, and heated at 150° C. for 4 hours to cure the resin composition, thereby forming the fluorescent member 50. Thus, the light emitting device 100 as shown in FIG. 1 was produced in each of Examples 1 to 5.
item-142 at level 2: section_header: Comparative Example 1
item-143 at level 3: paragraph: A light emitting device X including a semiconductor light emitting element having a light emission peak wavelength of 450 nm and a light emitting device Y including a semiconductor light emitting element having a light emission peak length of 660 nm were used, and the R/B ratio was adjusted to 2.5.
item-144 at level 3: section_header: Evaluation
item-145 at level 3: section_header: Photon Flux Density
item-146 at level 4: paragraph: Photon flux densities of lights emitted from the light emitting device 100 used in Examples 1 to 5 and the light emitting devices X and Y used in Comparative Example 1 were measured using a photon measuring device (LI-250A, manufactured by Li-COR). The photon flux density B, the photon flux density R, and the photon flux density FR of lights emitted from the light emitting devices used in each of the Examples and Comparative Example; the R/B ratio; and the R/FR ratio are shown in Table 1. FIG. 2 shows spectra showing the relationship between a wavelength and a relative photon flux density, in the light emitting devices used in each Example and Comparative Example.
item-147 at level 3: section_header: Plant Cultivation Test
item-148 at level 4: paragraph: The plant cultivation method includes a method of conducting by “growth period by RGB light source (hereinafter referred to as a first growth period)” and “growth period by light source for plant growth (hereinafter referred to as a second growth period)” using a light emitting device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure as a light source.
item-149 at level 4: paragraph: The first growth period uses RGB light source, and RGB type LED generally known can be used as the RGB light source. The reason for irradiating plants with RGB type LED in the initial stage of the plant growth is that length of a stem and the number and size of true leaves in the initial stage of plant growth are made equal, thereby clarifying the influence by the difference of light quality in the second growth period.
item-150 at level 4: paragraph: The first growth period is preferably about 2 weeks. In the case where the first growth period is shorter than 2 weeks, it is necessary to confirm that two true leaves develop and a root reaches length that can surely absorb water in the second growth period. In the case where the first growth period exceeds 2 weeks, variation in the second growth period tends to increase. The variation is easy to be controlled by RGB light source by which stem extension is inhibitory, rather than a fluorescent lamp by which stem extension is easy to occur.
item-151 at level 4: paragraph: After completion of the first growth period, the second growth period immediately proceeds. It is preferred that plants are irradiated with light emitted from a light emitting device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. Photosynthesis of plants is activated by irradiating plants with light emitted from the light emitting device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, and the growth of plants can be promoted so as to have favorable form and weight.
item-152 at level 4: paragraph: The total growth period of the first growth period and the second growth period is about 4 to 6 weeks, and it is preferred that shippable plants can be obtained within the period.
item-153 at level 4: paragraph: The cultivation test was specifically conducted by the following method.
item-154 at level 4: paragraph: Romaine lettuce (green romaine, produced by Nakahara Seed Co., Ltd.) was used as cultivation plant.
item-155 at level 3: section_header: First Growth Period
item-156 at level 4: paragraph: Urethane sponges (salad urethane, manufactured by M Hydroponic Research Co., Ltd.) having Romaine lettuce seeded therein were placed side by side on a plastic tray, and were irradiated with light from RGB-LED light source (manufactured by Shibasaki Inc.) to cultivate plants. The plants were cultivated for 16 days under the conditions of room temperature: 22 to 23° C., humidity: 50 to 60%, photon flux density from light emitting device: 100 μmol·m⁻²·s⁻¹ and daytime hour: 16 hours/day. Only water was given until germination, and after the germination (about 4 days later), a solution obtained by mixing Otsuka House #1 (manufactured by Otsuka Chemical Co., Ltd.) and Otsuka House #2 (manufactured by Otsuka Chemical Co., Ltd.) in a mass ratio of 3:2 and dissolving the mixture in water was used as a nutrient solution (Otsuka Formulation A). Conductivity of the nutrient was 1.5 ms·cm⁻¹.
item-157 at level 3: section_header: Second Growth Period
item-158 at level 4: paragraph: After the first growth period, the plants were irradiated with light from the light emitting devices of Examples 1 to 5 and Comparative Example 1, and were subjected to hydroponics.
item-159 at level 4: paragraph: The plants were cultivated for 19 days under the conditions of room temperature: 22 to 24° C., humidity: 60 to 70%, CO₂ concentration: 600 to 700 ppm, photon flux density from light emitting device: 125 μmol·m⁻²·s⁻¹ and daytime hour: 16 hours/day. Otsuka Formulation A was used as the nutrient solution. Conductivity of the nutrient was 1.5 ms·cm⁻¹. The values of the R/B and R/FR ratios of light for plant irradiation from each light emitting device in the second growth period are shown in Table 1.
item-160 at level 3: section_header: Measurement of Fresh Weight (Edible Part)
item-161 at level 4: paragraph: The plants after cultivation were harvested, and wet weights of a terrestrial part and a root were measured. The wet weight of a terrestrial part of each of 6 cultivated plants having been subjected to hydroponics by irradiating with light from the light emitting devices of Examples 1 to 5 and Comparative Example 1 was measured as a fresh weight (edible part) (g). The results obtained are shown in Table 1 and FIG. 3.
item-162 at level 3: section_header: Measurement of Nitrate Nitrogen Content
item-163 at level 4: paragraph: The edible part (about 20 g) of each of the cultivated plants, from which a foot about 5 cm had been removed, was frozen with liquid nitrogen and crushed with a juice mixer (laboratory mixer LM-PLUS, manufactured by Osaka Chemical Co., Ltd.) for 1 minute. The resulting liquid was filtered with Miracloth (manufactured by Milipore), and the filtrate was centrifuged at 4° C. and 15,000 rpm for 5 minutes. The nitrate nitrogen content (mg/100 g) in the cultivated plant in the supernatant was measured using a portable reflection photometer system (product name: RQ flex system, manufactured by Merck) and a test paper (product name: Reflectoquant (registered trade mark), manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.). The results are shown in Table 1 and FIG. 4.
item-164 at level 4: table with [13x10]
item-165 at level 4: paragraph: As shown in Table 1, for the light emitting devices in Examples 1 to 5, the R/B ratios are within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less and the R/FR ratios are within the range of 0.7 or more and 13.0 or less. For Romaine lettuce cultivated by irradiating with light from the light emitting device in Examples 1 to 5, the fresh weight (edible part) was increased as compared with Romaine lettuce cultivated by irradiating with light from the light emitting device used in Comparative Example 1. Therefore, cultivation of plants was promoted, as shown in Table 1 and FIG. 3.
item-166 at level 4: paragraph: As shown in FIG. 2, the light emitting device 100 in Example 1 had at least one maximum value of the relative photon flux density in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less and in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm. The light emitting devices 100 in Examples 2 to 5 had at least one maximum value of relative photon flux density in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm and in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less, respectively. The maximum value of the relative photon flux density in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less is due to the light emission of the light emitting element having light emission peak wavelength in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, the maximum value of the relative photon flux density in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm is due to the first fluorescent material emitting the light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm, and the maximum value of the relative photon flux density in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less is due to the second fluorescent material emitting the light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less.
item-167 at level 4: paragraph: As shown in Table 1, for the light emitting devices 100 in Examples 4 and 5, the R/B ratios are 2.0 and 2.3, respectively, and the R/FR ratios are 1.6 and 1.4, respectively. The R/B ratios are within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less, and the R/FR ratios are within a range of 0.7 or more and 2.0 or less. For Romaine lettuces cultivated by irradiating with lights from the light emitting devices 100, the nitrate nitrogen content is decreased as compared with Comparative Example 1. Plants, in which the nitrate nitrogen content having the possibility of adversely affecting health of human body had been reduced to a range that does not inhibit the cultivation of plants, could be cultivated, as shown in Table 1 and FIG. 4.
item-168 at level 4: paragraph: The light emitting device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure can be utilized as a light emitting device for plant cultivation that can activate photosynthesis and is capable of promoting growth of plants. Furthermore, the plant cultivation method, in which plants are irradiated with the light emitted from the light emitting device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, can cultivate plants that can be harvested in a relatively short period of time and can be used in a plant factory.
item-169 at level 4: paragraph: Although the present disclosure has been described with reference to several exemplary embodiments, it shall be understood that the words that have been used are words of description and illustration, rather than words of limitation. Changes may be made within the purview of the appended claims, as presently stated and as amended, without departing from the scope and spirit of the disclosure in its aspects. Although the disclosure has been described with reference to particular examples, means, and embodiments, the disclosure may be not intended to be limited to the particulars disclosed; rather the disclosure extends to all functionally equivalent structures, methods, and uses such as are within the scope of the appended claims.
item-170 at level 4: paragraph: One or more examples or embodiments of the disclosure may be referred to herein, individually and/or collectively, by the term “disclosure” merely for convenience and without intending to voluntarily limit the scope of this application to any particular disclosure or inventive concept. Moreover, although specific examples and embodiments have been illustrated and described herein, it should be appreciated that any subsequent arrangement designed to achieve the same or similar purpose may be substituted for the specific examples or embodiments shown. This disclosure may be intended to cover any and all subsequent adaptations or variations of various examples and embodiments. Combinations of the above examples and embodiments, and other examples and embodiments not specifically described herein, will be apparent to those of skill in the art upon reviewing the description.
item-171 at level 4: paragraph: In addition, in the foregoing Detailed Description, various features may be grouped together or described in a single embodiment for the purpose of streamlining the disclosure. This disclosure may be not to be interpreted as reflecting an intention that the claimed embodiments require more features than are expressly recited in each claim. Rather, as the following claims reflect, inventive subject matter may be directed to less than all of the features of any of the disclosed embodiments. Thus, the following claims are incorporated into the Detailed Description, with each claim standing on its own as defining separately claimed subject matter.
item-172 at level 4: paragraph: The above disclosed subject matter shall be considered illustrative, and not restrictive, and the appended claims are intended to cover all such modifications, enhancements, and other embodiments which fall within the true spirit and scope of the present disclosure. Thus, to the maximum extent allowed by law, the scope of the present disclosure may be determined by the broadest permissible interpretation of the following claims and their equivalents, and shall not be restricted or limited by the foregoing detailed description.
item-173 at level 2: section_header: CLAIMS
item-174 at level 3: paragraph: 1. A light emitting device comprising: a light emitting element having a light emission peak wavelength in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less; and a fluorescent material that is excited by light from the light emitting element and emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm, wherein the light emitting device emits light having a ratio R/B of a photon flux density R to a photon flux density B within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less, and a ratio R/FR of the photon flux density R to a photon flux density FR within a range of 0.7 or more and 13.0 or less, wherein the photon flux density R is in a wavelength range of 620 nm or more and less than 700 nm, the photon flux density B is in a wavelength range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, and the photon flux density FR is in a wavelength range of 700 nm or more and 780 nm or less.
item-175 at level 3: paragraph: 2. The light emitting device according to claim 1, further comprising another fluorescent material that is excited by light from the light emitting element and emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less, wherein the ratio R/FR is within a range of 0.7 or more and 5.0 or less.
item-176 at level 3: paragraph: 3. The light emitting device according to claim 2, wherein the ratio R/FR is within a range of 0.7 or more and 2.0 or less.
item-177 at level 3: paragraph: 4. The light emitting device according to claim 2, wherein the another fluorescent material contains a first element Ln containing at least one element selected from the group consisting of rare earth elements excluding Ce, a second element M containing at least one element selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga and In, Ce, and Cr, and has a composition of an aluminate fluorescent material, and when a molar ratio of the second element M is taken as 5, a molar ratio of Ce is a product of a value of a parameter x and 3, and a molar ratio of Cr is a product of a value of a parameter y and 3, the value of the parameter x being in a range of exceeding 0.0002 and less than 0.50, and the value of the parameter y being in a range of exceeding 0.0001 and less than 0.05.
item-178 at level 3: paragraph: 5. The light emitting device according to claim 2, wherein the another fluorescent material has the composition represented by the following formula (I): (Ln₁₋ₓ₋yCeₓCry)₃M₅O₁₂ (I) wherein Ln is at least one rare earth element selected from the group consisting of rare earth elements excluding Ce, M is at least one element selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, and In, and x and y are numbers satisfying 0.0002<x<0.50 and 0.0001<y<0.05.
item-179 at level 3: paragraph: 6. The light emitting device according to claim 2, the light emitting device being used in plant cultivation.
item-180 at level 3: paragraph: 7. The light emitting device according to claim 1, wherein the fluorescent material is at least one selected from the group consisting of: a fluorogermanate fluorescent material that is activated by Mn⁴⁺, a fluorescent material that has a composition containing at least one element selected from Sr and Ca, and Al, and contains silicon nitride that is activated by Eu²⁺, a fluorescent material that has a composition containing at least one element selected from the group consisting of alkaline earth metal elements and at least one element selected from the group consisting of alkali metal elements, and contains aluminum nitride that is activated by Eu²⁺, a fluorescent material containing a sulfide of Ca or Sr that is activated by Eu²⁺, and a fluorescent material that has a composition containing at least one element or ion selected from the group consisting of alkali metal elements, and an ammonium ion (NH₄⁺), and at least one element selected from the group consisting of Group 4 elements and Group 14 elements, and contains a fluoride that is activated by Mn⁴⁺.
item-181 at level 3: paragraph: 8. The light emitting device according to claim 1, wherein the fluorescent material contains: a fluorogermanate fluorescent material that is activated by Mn⁴⁺, and a fluorescent material that has a composition containing at least one element selected from Sr and Ca, and Al, and contains silicon nitride that is activated by Eu²⁺, wherein the compounding ratio between the fluorogermanate fluorescent material and the fluorescent material containing silicon nitride (fluorogermanate fluorescent material:fluorescent material containing silicon nitride) is in a range of 50:50 or more and 99:1 or less.
item-182 at level 3: paragraph: 9. The light emitting device according to claim 1, the light emitting device being used in plant cultivation.
item-183 at level 3: paragraph: 10. A plant cultivation method comprising irradiating plants with light emitted from the light emitting device according to claim 1.
item-184 at level 3: paragraph: 11. A plant cultivation method comprising irradiating plants with light emitted from the light emitting device according to claim 2.

5827
tests/data/groundtruth/docling_v2/ipa20180000016.json Normal file
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

380
tests/data/groundtruth/docling_v2/ipa20180000016.md Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,380 @@
# LIGHT EMITTING DEVICE AND PLANT CULTIVATION METHOD
## ABSTRACT
Provided is a light emitting device that includes a light emitting element having a light emission peak wavelength ranging from 380 nm to 490 nm, and a fluorescent material excited by light from the light emitting element and emitting light having at a light emission peak wavelength ranging from 580 nm or more to less than 680 nm. The light emitting device emits light having a ratio R/B of a photon flux density R to a photon flux density B ranging from 2.0 to 4.0 and a ratio R/FR of the photon flux density R to a photon flux density FR ranging from 0.7 to 13.0, the photon flux density R being in a wavelength range of 620 nm or more and less than 700 nm, the photon flux density B being in a wavelength range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, and the photon flux density FR being in a wavelength range of 700 nm or more and 780 nm or less.
## CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION
The application claims benefit of Japanese Patent Application No. 2016-128835 filed on Jun. 29, 2016, the entire disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
## BACKGROUND
## Technical Field
The present disclosure relates to a light emitting device and a plant cultivation method.
## Description of Related Art
With environmental changes due to climate change and other artificial disruptions, plant factories are expected to increase production efficiency of vegetables and be capable of adjusting production in order to make it possible to stably supply vegetables. Plant factories that are capable of artificial management can stably supply clean and safe vegetables to markets, and therefore are expected to be the next-generation industries.
Plant factories that are completely isolated from external environment make it possible to artificially control and collect various data such as growth method, growth rate data, yield data, depending on classification of plants. Based on those data, plant factories are able to plan production according to the balance between supply and demand in markets, and supply plants such as vegetables without depending on surrounding conditions such as climatic environment. Particularly, an increase in food production is indispensable with world population growth. If plants can be systematically produced without the influence by surrounding conditions such as climatic environment, vegetables produced in plant factories can be stably supplied within a country, and additionally can be exported abroad as viable products.
In general, vegetables that are grown outdoors get sunlight, grow while conducting photosynthesis, and are gathered. On the other hand, vegetables that are grown in plant factories are required to be harvested in a short period of time, or are required to grow in larger than normal sizes even in an ordinary growth period.
In plant factories, the light source used in place of sunlight affect a growth period, growth of plants. LED lighting is being used in place of conventional fluorescent lamps, from a standpoint of power consumption reduction.
For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-125007 discloses a plant growth method. In this method, the plants is irradiated with light emitted from a first LED light emitting element and/or a second LED light emitting element at predetermined timings using a lighting apparatus including the first LED light emitting element emitting light having a wavelength region of 625 to 690 nm and the second LED light emitting element emitting light having a wavelength region of 420 to 490 nm in order to emit lights having sufficient intensities and different wavelengths from each other.
## SUMMARY
However, even though plants are merely irradiated with lights having different wavelengths as in the plant growth method disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-125007, the effect of promoting plant growth is not sufficient. Further improvement is required in promotion of plant growth.
Accordingly, an object of the present disclosure is to provide a light emitting device capable of promoting growth of plants and a plant cultivation method.
Means for solving the above problems are as follows, and the present disclosure includes the following embodiments.
A first embodiment of the present disclosure is a light emitting device including a light emitting element having a light emission peak wavelength in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, and a fluorescent material that is excited by light from the light emitting element and emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm. The light emitting device emits light having a ratio R/B of a photon flux density R to a photon flux density B within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less, and a ratio R/FR of a photon flux density R to a photon flux density FR within a range of 0.7 or more and 13.0 or less, where the photon flux density R is the number of light quanta (μmol·m⁻²·g⁻¹) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 620 nm or more and less than 700 nm, the photon flux density B is the number of light quanta (μmol·m⁻²·g⁻¹) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, and the photon flux density FR is the number of light quanta (μmol·m⁻²·g⁻¹) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 700 nm or more and 780 nm or less.
A second embodiment of the present disclosure is a plant cultivation method including irradiating plants with light from the light emitting device.
According to embodiments of the present disclosure, a light emitting device capable of promoting growth of plants and a plant cultivation method can be provided.
## BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
FIG. 1 is a schematic cross sectional view of a light emitting device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing spectra of wavelengths and relative photon flux densities of exemplary light emitting devices according to embodiments of the present disclosure and a comparative light emitting devices.
FIG. 3 is a graph showing fresh weight (edible part) at the harvest time of each plant grown by irradiating the plant with light from exemplary light emitting devices according to embodiments of the present disclosure and a comparative light emitting device.
FIG. 4 is a graph showing nitrate nitrogen content in each plant grown by irradiating the plant with light from exemplary light emitting devices according to embodiments of the present disclosure and a comparative light emitting device.
## DETAILED DESCRIPTION
A light emitting device and a plant cultivation method according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment. However, the embodiment described below only exemplifies the technical concept of the present invention, and the present invention is not limited to the light emitting device and plant cultivation method described below. In the present specification, the relationship between the color name and the chromaticity coordinate, the relationship between the wavelength range of light and the color name of monochromatic light follows JIS Z8110.
### Light Emitting Device
An embodiment of the present disclosure is a light emitting device including a light emitting element having a light emission peak wavelength in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “region of from near ultraviolet to blue color”), and a first fluorescent material emitting light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm by being excited by light from the light emitting element. The light emitting device emits light having a ratio R/B of a photon flux density R to a photon flux density B within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less, and a ratio R/FR of the photon flux density R to a photon flux density FR within a range of 0.7 or more and 13.0 or less, where the photon flux density R is the number of light quanta (μmol·m⁻²·g⁻¹) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 620 nm or more and less than 700 nm, the photon flux density B is the number of light quanta (μmol·m⁻²·g⁻¹) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, and the photon flux density FR is the number of light quanta (μmol·m⁻²·g⁻¹) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 700 nm or more and 780 nm or less.
An example of the light emitting device according to one embodiment of the present disclosure is described below based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a schematic cross sectional view showing a light emitting device 100 according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
The light emitting device 100 includes a molded article 40, a light emitting element 10 and a fluorescent member 50, as shown in FIG. 1. The molded article 40 includes a first lead 20 and a second lead 30 that are integrally molded with a resin portion 42 containing a thermoplastic resin or a thermosetting resin. The molded article 40 forms a depression having a bottom and sides, and the light emitting element 10 is placed on the bottom of the depression. The light emitting element 10 has a pair of an anode and a cathode, and the anode and the cathode are electrically connected to the first lead 20 and the second lead 30 respectively through the respective wires 60. The light emitting element 10 is covered with the fluorescent member 50. The fluorescent member 50 includes, for example, a fluorescent material 70 performing wavelength conversion of light from the light emitting element 10, and a resin. The fluorescent material 70 includes a first fluorescent material 71 and a second fluorescent material 72. A part of the first lead 20 and the second lead 30 that are connected to a pair of the anode and the cathode of the light emitting element 10 is exposed toward outside a package constituting the light emitting element 100. The light emitting device 100 can emit light by receiving electric power supply from the outside through the first lead 20 and the second lead 30.
The fluorescent member 50 not only performs wavelength conversion of light emitted from the light emitting element 10, but functions as a member for protecting the light emitting element 10 from the external environment. In FIG. 1, the fluorescent material 70 is localized in the fluorescent member 50 in the state that the first fluorescent material 71 and the second fluorescent material 72 are mixed with each other, and is arranged adjacent to the light emitting element 10. This constitution can efficiently perform the wavelength conversion of light from the light emitting element 10 in the fluorescent material 70, and as a result, can provide a light emitting device having excellent light emission efficiency. The arrangement of the fluorescent member 50 containing the fluorescent material 70, and the light emitting element 10 is not limited to the embodiment that the fluorescent material 70 is arranged adjacent to the light emitting element 10 as shown in FIG. 1, and considering the influence of heat generated from the light emitting element 10, the fluorescent material 70 can be arranged separated from the light emitting element 10 in the fluorescent member 50. Furthermore, light having suppressed color unevenness can be emitted from the light emitting device 100 by arranging the fluorescent material 70 almost evenly in the fluorescent member 50. In FIG. 1, the fluorescent material 70 is arranged in the state that the first fluorescent material 71 and the second fluorescent material 72 are mixed with each other. However, for example, the first fluorescent material 71 may be arranged in a layer state and the second fluorescent material 72 may be arranged thereon in another layer state. Alternatively, the second fluorescent material 72 may be arranged in a layer state and the first fluorescent material 71 may be arranged thereon in another layer state.
The light emitting device 100 includes the first fluorescent material 71 having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm by being excited by light from the light emitting element 10, and preferably further includes the second fluorescent material 72 having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less by being excited by light from the light emitting element 10.
The first fluorescent material 71 and the second fluorescent material 72 are contained in, for example, the fluorescent member 50 covering the light emitting element 10. The light emitting device 100 in which the light emitting element 10 has been covered with the fluorescent member 50 containing the first fluorescent material 71 and the second fluorescent material 72 emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm by a part of light emission of the light emitting element 10 that is absorbed in the first fluorescent material 71. Furthermore, the light emitting device 100 emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less by a part of light emission of the light emitting element 10 that is absorbed in the second fluorescent material 72.
Plants grow when a pigment (chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b) present in chlorophyll thereof absorbs light and additionally takes carbon dioxide gas and water therein, and these are converted to carbohydrates (saccharides) by photosynthesis. Chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b used in growth promotion of plants particularly have absorption peaks in a red region of 625 nm or more and 675 nm or less and a blue region of 425 nm or more and 475 nm or less. The action of photosynthesis by chlorophylls of plants mainly occurs in a wavelength range of 400 nm or more and 700 nm or less, but chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b further have local absorption peaks in a region of 700 nm or more and 800 nm or less.
For example, when plants are irradiated with light having longer wavelength than and absorption peak (in the vicinity of 680 nm) in a red region of chlorophyll a, a phenomenon called red drop, in which activity of photosynthesis rapidly decreases, occurs. However, it is known that when plants are irradiated with light containing near infrared region together with light of red region, photosynthesis is accelerated by a synergistic effect of those two kinds of lights. This phenomenon is called the Emerson effect.
Intensity of light with which plants are irradiated is represented by photon flux density. The photon flux density (μmol·m⁻²·s⁻¹) is the number of photons reaching a unit area per unit time. The amount of photosynthesis depends on the number of photons, and therefore does not depend on other optical characteristics if the photon flux density is the same. However, wavelength dependency activating photosynthesis differs depending on photosynthetic pigment. Intensity of light necessary for photosynthesis of plants is sometimes represented by Photosynthetic Photon Flux Density (PPFD).
The light emitting device 100 emits light having a ratio R/B of a photon flux density R to a photon flux density B within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less, and a ratio R/FR of the photon flux density R to a photon flux density FR within a range of 0.7 or more and 13.0 or less, where the photon flux density R is the number of light quanta (μmol·m⁻²·g⁻¹) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 620 nm or more and less than 700 nm, the photon flux density B is the number of light quanta (μmol·m⁻²·g⁻¹) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, and the photon flux density FR is the number of light quanta (μmol·m⁻²·g⁻¹) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 700 nm or more and 780 nm or less.
It is estimated that in plants, which are irradiated with light containing the photon flux density FR from the light emitting device 100, photosynthesis is activated by Emerson effect, and as a result, growth of plants can be promoted. Furthermore, when plants are irradiated with light containing the photon flux density FR, growth of the plants can be promoted by a reversible reaction between red light irradiation, to which chlorophyll as chromoprotein contained in plants has participated, and far infrared light irradiation.
Examples of nutrients necessary for growth of plants include nitrogen, phosphoric acid, and potassium. Of those nutrients, nitrogen is absorbed in plants as nitrate nitrogen (nitrate ion: NO₃⁻). The nitrate nitrogen changes into nitrite ion (NO₂⁻) by a reduction reaction, and when the nitrite ion is further reacted with fatty acid amine, nitrosoamine is formed. It is known that nitrite ion acts to hemoglobin in blood, and it is known that a nitroso compound sometimes affects health of a human body. Mechanism of converting nitrate nitrogen into nitrite ion in vivo is complicated, and the relationship between the amount of intake of nitrate nitrogen and the influence to health of a human body is not clarified. However, it is desired that the content of nitrate nitrogen having a possibility of affecting health of a human body is smaller.
For the above reasons, nitrogen is one of nutrients necessary for growth of plants, but it is preferred that the content of nitrate nitrogen in food plants be reduced to a range that does not disturb the growth of plants.
It is preferred that the light emitting device 100 further include the second fluorescent material 72 having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less by being excited by light from the light emitting element 10, wherein the R/FR ratio is within a range of 0.7 or more and 5.0 or less. The R/FR ratio is more preferably within a range of 0.7 or more and 2.0 or less.
### Light Emitting Element
The light emitting element 10 is used as an excitation light source, and is a light emitting element emitting light having a light emission peak wavelength in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less. As a result, a stable light emitting device having high efficiency, high linearity of output to input and strong mechanical impacts can be obtained.
The range of the light emission peak wavelength of the light emitting element 10 is preferably in a range of 390 nm or more and 480 nm or less, more preferably in a range of 420 nm or more and 470 nm or less, and still more preferably in a range of 440 nm or more and 460 nm or less, and particularly preferably in a range of 445 nm or more and 455 nm or less. A light emitting element including a nitride semiconductor (InₓAlyGa₁₋ₓ₋yN, 0≦X, 0≦Y and X+Y≦1) is preferably used as the light emitting element 10.
The half value width of emission spectrum of the light emitting element 10 can be, for example, 30 nm or less.
### Fluorescent Member
The fluorescent member 50 used in the light emitting device 100 preferably includes the first fluorescent material 71 and a sealing material, and more preferably further includes the second fluorescent material 72. A thermoplastic resin and a thermosetting resin can be used as the sealing material. The fluorescent member 50 may contain other components such as a filler, a light stabilizer and a colorant, in addition to the fluorescent material and the sealing material. Examples of the filler include silica, barium titanate, titanium oxide and aluminum oxide.
The content of other components other than the fluorescent material 70 and the sealing material in the fluorescent member 50 is preferably in a range of 0.01 parts by mass or more and 20 parts by mass or less, per 100 parts by mass of the sealing material.
The total content of the fluorescent material 70 in the fluorescent member 50 can be, for example, 5 parts by mass or more and 300 parts by mass or less, per 100 parts by mass of the sealing material. The total content is preferably 10 parts by mass or more and 250 parts by mass or less, more preferably 15 parts by mass or more and 230 parts by mass or less, and still more preferably 15 parts by mass or more and 200 parts by mass or less. When the total content of the fluorescent material 70 in the fluorescent member 50 is within the above range, the light emitted from the light emitting element 10 can be efficiently subjected to wavelength conversion in the fluorescent material 70.
### First Fluorescent Material
The first fluorescent material 71 is a fluorescent material that is excited by light from the light emitting element 10 and emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm. Examples of the first fluorescent material 71 include an Mn⁴⁺-activated fluorogermanate fluorescent material, an Eu²⁺-activated nitride fluorescent material, an Eu²⁺-activated alkaline earth sulfide fluorescent material and an Mn⁴⁺-activated halide fluorescent material. The first fluorescent material 71 may use one selected from those fluorescent materials and may use a combination of two or more thereof. The first fluorescent material preferably contains an Eu²⁺-activated nitride fluorescent material and an Mn⁴⁺-activated fluorogermanate fluorescent material.
The Eu²⁺-activated nitride fluorescent material is preferably a fluorescent material that has a composition including at least one element selected from Sr and Ca, and Al and contains silicon nitride that is activated by Eu²⁺, or a fluorescent material that has a composition including at least one element selected from the group consisting of alkaline earth metal elements and at least one element selected from the group consisting of alkali metal elements and contains aluminum nitride that is activated by Eu²⁺.
The halide fluorescent material that is activated by Mn⁴⁺ is preferably a fluorescent material that has a composition including at least one element or ion selected from the group consisting of alkali metal elements and an ammonium ion (NH⁴⁺) and at least one element selected from the group consisting of Group 4 elements and Group 14 elements and contains a fluoride that is activated by Mn⁴⁺.
Examples of the first fluorescent material 71 specifically include fluorescent materials having any one composition of the following formulae (I) to (VI).
(i−j)MgO.(j/2)Sc₂O₃.kMgF₂.mCaF₂.(1−n)GeO₂.(n/2)Mt₂O₃:zMn⁴⁺ (I)
wherein Mt is at least one selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, and In, and j, k, m, n, and z are numbers satisfying 2≦i≦4, 0≦j<0.5, 0<k<1.5, 0≦m<1.5, 0<n<0.5, and 0<z<0.05, respectively.
(Ca₁₋p₋qSrpEuq)AlSiN₃ (II)
wherein p and q are numbers satisfying 0≦p≦1.0, 0<q<1.0, and p+q<1.0.
MªvMbwMcfAl₃₋gSigNh (III)
wherein Mª is at least one element selected from the group consisting of Ca, Sr, Ba, and Mg, Mb is at least one element selected from the group consisting of Li, Na, and K, Mc is at least one element selected from the group consisting of Eu, Ce, Tb, and Mn, v, w, f, g, and h are numbers satisfying 0.80≦v≦1.05, 0.80≦w≦1.05, 0.001<f≦0.1, 0≦g≦0.5, and 3.0≦h≦5.0, respectively.
(Ca₁₋r₋s₋tSrrBasEut)₂Si₅N₈ (IV)
wherein r, s, and t are numbers satisfying 0≦r≦1.0, 0≦s≦1.0, 0<t<1.0, and r+s+t≦1.0.
(Ca,Sr)S:Eu (V)
A₂[M¹₁₋uMn⁴⁺uF₆] (VI)
wherein A is at least one selected from the group consisting of K, Li, Na, Rb, Cs, and NH₄⁺, M¹ is at least one element selected from the group consisting of Group 4 elements and Group 14 elements, and u is the number satisfying 0<u<0.2.
The content of the first fluorescent material 71 in the fluorescent member 50 is not particularly limited as long as the R/B ratio is within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less. The content of the first fluorescent material 71 in the fluorescent member 50 is, for example, 1 part by mass or more, preferably 5 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 8 parts by mass or more, per 100 parts by mass of the sealing material, and is preferably 200 parts by mass or less, more preferably 150 parts by mass or less, and still more preferably 100 parts by mass or less, per 100 parts by mass of the sealing material. When the content of the first fluorescent material 71 in the fluorescent member 50 is within the aforementioned range, the light emitted from the light emitting element 10 can be efficiently subjected to wavelength conversion, and light capable of promoting growth of plant can be emitted from the light emitting device 100.
The first fluorescent material 71 preferably contains at least two fluorescent materials, and in the case of containing at least two fluorescent materials, the first fluorescent material preferably contains a fluorogermanate fluorescent material that is activated by Mn⁴⁺ (hereinafter referred to as “MGF fluorescent material”), and a fluorescent material that has a composition including at least one element selected from Sr and Ca, and Al, and contains silicon nitride that is activated by Eu²⁺ (hereinafter referred to as “CASN fluorescent material”).
In the case where the first fluorescent material 71 contains at least two fluorescent materials and two fluorescent materials are a MGF fluorescent material and a CASN fluorescent material, where a compounding ratio thereof (MGF fluorescent material:CASN fluorescent material) is preferably in a range of 50:50 or more and 99:1 or less, more preferably in a range of 60:40 or more and 97:3 or less, and still more preferably in a range of 70:30 or more and 96:4 or less, in mass ratio. In the case where the first fluorescent material contains two fluorescent materials, when those fluorescent materials are a MGF fluorescent material and a CASN fluorescent material and the mass ratio thereof is within the aforementioned range, the light emitted from the light emitting element 10 can be efficiently subjected to wavelength conversion in the first fluorescent material 71. In addition, the R/B ratio can be adjusted to within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less, and the R/FR ratio is easy to be adjusted to within a range of 0.7 or more and 13.0 or less.
### Second Fluorescent Material
The second fluorescent material 72 is a fluorescent material that is excited by the light from the light emitting element 10 and emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less.
The second fluorescent material 72 used in the light emitting device according to one embodiment of the present disclosure is a fluorescent material that contains a first element Ln containing at least one element selected from the group consisting of rare earth elements excluding Ce, a second element M containing at least one element selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, In, Ce, and Cr, and has a composition of an aluminate fluorescent material. When a molar ratio of the second element M is taken as 5, it is preferred that a molar ratio of Ce be a product of a value of a parameter x and 3, and a molar ratio of Cr be a product of a value of a parameter y and 3, wherein the value of the parameter x is in a range of exceeding 0.0002 and less than 0.50, and the value of the parameter y is in a range of exceeding 0.0001 and less than 0.05.
The second fluorescent material 72 is preferably a fluorescent material having the composition represented by the following formula (1):
(Ln₁₋ₓ₋yCeₓCry)₃M₅O₁₂ (1)
wherein Ln is at least one rare earth element selected from the group consisting of rare earth elements excluding Ce, M is at least one element selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, and In, and x and y are numbers satisfying 0.0002<x<0.50 and 0.0001<y<0.05, respectively.
In this case, the second fluorescent material 72 has a composition constituting a garnet structure, and therefore is tough against heat, light, and water, has an absorption peak wavelength of excited absorption spectrum in the vicinity of 420 nm or more and 470 nm or less, and sufficiently absorbs the light from the light emitting element 10, thereby enhancing light emitting intensity of the second fluorescent material 72, which is preferred. Furthermore, the second fluorescent material 72 is excited by light having light emission peak wavelength in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less and emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less.
In the second fluorescent material 72, from the standpoint of stability of a crystal structure, Ln is preferably at least one rare earth element selected from the group consisting of Y, Gd, Lu, La, Tb, and Pr, and M is preferably Al or Ga.
In the second fluorescent material 72, the value of the parameter x is more preferably in a range of 0.0005 or more and 0.400 or less (0.0005≦x≦0.400), and still more preferably in a range of 0.001 or more and 0.350 or less (0.001≦x≦0.350).
In the second fluorescent material 72, the value of the parameter y is preferably in a range of exceeding 0.0005 and less than 0.040 (0.0005<y<0.040), and more preferably in a range of 0.001 or more and 0.026 or less (0.001≦y≦0.026).
The parameter x is an activation amount of Ce and the value of the parameter x is in a range of exceeding 0.0002 and less than 0.50 (0.0002<x<0.50), and the parameter y is an activation amount of Cr. When the value of the parameter y is in a range of exceeding 0.0001 and less than 0.05 (0.0001<y<0.05), the activation amount of Ce and the activation amount of Cr that are light emission centers contained in the crystal structure of the fluorescent material are within optimum ranges, the decrease of light emission intensity due to the decrease of light emission center can be suppressed, the decrease of light emission intensity due to concentration quenching caused by the increase of the activation amount can be suppressed, and light emission intensity can be enhanced.
### Production Method of Second Fluorescent Material
A method for producing the second fluorescent material 72 includes the following method.
A compound containing at least one rare earth element Ln selected from the group consisting of rare earth elements excluding Ce, a compound containing at least one element M selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, and In, a compound containing Ce and a compound containing Cr are mixed such that, when the total molar composition ratio of the M is taken as 5 as the standard, in the case where the total molar composition ratio of Ln, Ce, and Nd is 3, the molar ratio of Ce is a product of 3 and a value of a parameter x, and the molar ratio of Cr is a product of 3 and a value of a parameter y, the value of the parameter x is in a range of exceeding 0.0002 and less than 0.50 and the value of the parameter y is in a range of exceeding 0.0001 and less than 0.05, thereby obtaining a raw material mixture, the raw material mixture is heat-treated, followed by classification and the like, thereby obtaining the second fluorescent material.
### Compound Containing Rare Earth Element Ln
Examples of the compound containing rare earth element Ln include oxides, hydroxides, nitrides, oxynitrides, fluorides, and chlorides, that contain at least one rare earth element Ln selected from the group consisting of rare earth elements excluding Ce. Those compounds may be hydrates. At least a part of the compounds containing rare earth element may use a metal simple substance or an alloy containing rare earth element. The compound containing rare earth element is preferably a compound containing at least one rare earth element Ln selected from the group consisting of Y, Gd, Lu, La, Tb, and Pr. The compound containing rare earth element may be used alone or may be used as a combination of at least two compounds containing rare earth element.
The compound containing rare earth element is preferably an oxide that does not contain elements other than the target composition, as compared with other materials. Examples of the oxide specifically include Y₂O₃, Gd₂O₃, Lu₂O₃, La₂O₃, Tb₄O₇ and Pr₆O₁₁.
### Compound Containing M
Examples of the compound containing at least one element M selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, and In include oxides, hydroxides, nitrides, oxynitrides, fluorides, and chlorides, that contain Al, Ga, or In. Those compounds may be hydrates. Furthermore, Al metal simple substance, Ga metal simple substance, In metal simple substance, Al alloy, Ga alloy or In alloy may be used, and metal simple substance or an alloy may be used in place of at least a part of the compound. The compound containing Al, Ga, or In may be used alone or may be used as a combination of two or more thereof. The compound containing at least one element selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, and In is preferably an oxide. The reason for this is that an oxide that does not contain elements other than the target composition, as compared with other materials, and a fluorescent material having a target composition are easy to be obtained. When a compound containing elements other than the target composition has been used, residual impurity elements are sometimes present in the fluorescent material obtained. The residual impurity element becomes a killer factor in light emission, leading to the possibility of remarkable decrease of light emission intensity.
Examples of the compound containing Al, Ga, or In specifically include Al₂O₃, Ga₂O₃, and In₂O₃.
### Compound Containing Ce and Compound Containing Cr
Examples of the compound containing Ce or the compound containing Cr include oxides, hydroxides, nitrides, fluorides, and chlorides, that contain cerium (Ce) or chromium (Cr). Those compounds may be hydrates. Ce metal simple substance, Ce alloy, Cr metal simple substance, or Cr alloy may be used, and a metal simple substance or an alloy may be used in place of a part of the compound. The compound containing Ce or the compound containing Cr may be used alone or may be used as a combination of two or more thereof. The compound containing Ce or the compound containing Cr is preferably an oxide. The reason for this is that an oxide that does not contain elements other than the target composition, as compared with other materials, and a fluorescent material having a target composition are easy to be obtained. When a compound containing elements other than the target composition has been used, residual impurity elements are sometimes present in the fluorescent material obtained. The residual impurity element becomes a killer factor in light emission, leading to the possibility of remarkable decrease of light emission intensity.
Example of the compound containing Ce specifically includes CeO₂, and example of the compound containing Cr specifically includes Cr₂O₃.
The raw material mixture may contain a flux such as a halide, as necessary. When a flux is contained in the raw material mixture, reaction of raw materials with each other is accelerated, and a solid phase reaction is easy to proceed further uniformly. It is considered that a temperature for heat-treating the raw material mixture is almost the same as a formation temperature of a liquid phase of a halide used as a flux or is a temperature higher than the formation temperature, and, as a result, the reaction is accelerated.
Examples of the halide include fluorides, chlorides of rare earth metals, alkali earth metals, and alkali metals. When a halide of rare earth metal is used as the flux, the flux can be added as a compound so as to achieve a target composition. Examples of the flux specifically include BaF₂ and CaF₂. Of those, BaF₂ is preferably used. When barium fluoride is used as the flux, a garnet crystal structure is stabilized and a composition of a garnet crystal structure is easy to be formed.
When the raw material mixture contains a flux, the content of the flux is preferably 20 mass % or less, and more preferably 10 mass % or less, and is preferably 0.1 mass % or more, on the basis of the raw material mixture (100 mass %). When the flux content is within the aforementioned range, the problem that it is difficult to form a garnet crystal structure due to the insufficiency of particle growth by small amount of the flux is prevented, and furthermore, the problem that it is difficult to form a garnet crystal structure due to too large amount of the flux is prevented.
The raw material mixture is prepared, for example, as follows. Each of raw materials is weighed so as to be a compounding ratio. Thereafter, the raw materials are subjected to mixed grinding using a dry grinding machine such as ball mill, are subjected to mixed grinding using a mortar and a pestle, are subjected to mixing using a mixing machine such as a ribbon blender, for example, or are subjected to mixed grinding using both a dry grinding machine and a mixing machine. As necessary, the raw material mixture may be classified using a wet separator such as a setting tank generally used industrially, or a dry classifier such as a cyclone. The mixing may be conducted by dry mixing or may be conducted by wet mixing by adding a solvent. The mixing is preferably dry mixing. The reason for this is that dry mixing can shorten a processing time as compared with wet drying, and this leads to the improvement of productivity.
The raw material mixture after mixing each raw material is dissolved in an acid, the resulting solution is co-precipitated in oxalic acid, a product formed by the co-precipitation is baked to obtain an oxide, and the oxide may be used as the raw material mixture.
The raw material mixture can be heat-treated by placing it in a crucible, a boat made of a carbon material (such as graphite), boron nitride (BN), aluminum oxide (alumina), tungsten (W) or molybdenum (Mo).
From the standpoint of stability of a crystal structure, the temperature for heat-treating the raw material mixture is preferably in a range of 1,000° C. or higher and 2,100° C. or lower, more preferably in a range of 1,100° C. or higher and 2,000° C. or lower, still more preferably in a range of 1,200° C. or higher and 1,900° C. or lower, and particularly preferably in a range of 1,300° C. or higher and 1,800° C. or lower. The heat treatment can use an electric furnace or a gas furnace.
The heat treatment time varies depending on a temperature rising rate, a heat treatment atmosphere. The heat treatment time after reaching the heat treatment temperature is preferably 1 hour or more, more preferably 2 hours or more, and still more preferably 3 hours or more, and is preferably 20 hours or less, more preferably 18 hours or less and still more preferably 15 hours or less.
The atmosphere for heat-treating the raw material mixture is an inert atmosphere such as argon or nitrogen, a reducing atmosphere containing hydrogen, or an oxidizing atmosphere such as the air. The raw material mixture may be subjected to a two-stage heat treatment of a first heat treatment of heat-treating in the air or a weakly reducing atmosphere from the standpoint of, for example, prevention of blackening, and a second heat treatment of heat-treating in a reducing atmosphere from the standpoint of enhancing absorption efficiency of light having a specific light emission peak wavelength. The fluorescent material constituting a garnet structure is that reactivity of the raw material mixture is improved in an atmosphere having high reducing power such as a reducing atmosphere. Therefore, the fluorescent material can be heat-treated under the atmospheric pressure without pressurizing. For example, the heat treatment can be conducted by the method disclosed in Japanese Patent Application No. 2014-260421.
The fluorescent material obtained may be subjected to post-treatment steps such as a solid-liquid separation by a method such as cleaning or filtration, drying by a method such as vacuum drying, and classification by dry sieving. After those post-treatment steps, a fluorescent material having a desired average particle diameter is obtained.
### Other Fluorescent Materials
The light emitting device 100 may contain other kinds of fluorescent materials, in addition to the first fluorescent material 71.
Examples of other kinds of fluorescent materials include a green fluorescent material emitting green color by absorbing a part of the light emitted from the light emitting element 10, a yellow fluorescent material emitting yellow color, and a fluorescent material having a light emission peak wavelength in a wavelength range exceeding 680 nm.
Examples of the green fluorescent material specifically include fluorescent materials having any one of compositions represented by the following formulae (i) to (iii).
M¹¹₈MgSi₄O₁₆X¹¹:Eu (i)
wherein M¹¹ is at least one selected from the group consisting of Ca, Sr, Ba, and Zn, and X¹¹ is at least one selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, and I.
Si₆₋bAlbObN₈₋b:Eu (ii)
wherein b satisfies 0<b<4.2.
M¹³Ga₂S₄:Eu (iii)
wherein M¹³ is at least one selected from the group consisting of Mg, Ca, Sr, and
Ba.
Examples of the yellow fluorescent material specifically include fluorescent materials having any one of compositions represented by the following formulae (iv) to (v).
M¹⁴c/dSi₁₂₋₍c₊d₎Al₍c₊d₎OdN₍₁₆₋d₎:Eu (iv)
wherein M¹⁴ is at least one selected from the group consisting of Sr, Ca, Li, and Y. A value of a parameter c is in a range of 0.5 to 5, a value of a parameter d is in a range of 0 to 2.5, and the parameter d is an electrical charge of M¹⁴.
M¹⁵₃Al₅O₁₂:Ce (v)
wherein M¹⁵ is at least one selected from the group consisting of Y and Lu.
Examples of the fluorescent material having light emission peak wavelength in a wavelength range exceeding 680 nm specifically include fluorescent materials having any one of compositions represented by the following formulae (vi) to (x).
Al₂O₃:Cr (vi)
CaYAlO₄:Mn (vii)
LiAlO₂:Fe (viii)
CdS:Ag (ix)
GdAlO₃:Cr (x)
The light emitting device 100 can be utilized as a light emitting device for plant cultivation that can activate photosynthesis of plants and promote growth of plants so as to have favorable form and weight.
### Plant Cultivation Method
The plant cultivation method of one embodiment of the present disclosure is a method for cultivating plants, including irradiating plants with light emitted from the light emitting device 100. In the plant cultivation method, plants can be irradiated with light from the light emitting device 100 in plant factories that are completely isolated from external environment and make it possible for artificial control. The kind of plants is not particularly limited. However, the light emitting device 100 of one embodiment of the present disclosure can activate photosynthesis of plants and promote growth of plants such that a stem, a leaf, a root, a fruit have favorable form and weight, and therefore is preferably applied to cultivation of vegetables, flowers that contain much chlorophyll performing photosynthesis. Examples of the vegetables include lettuces such as garden lettuce, curl lettuce, Lamb's lettuce, Romaine lettuce, endive, Lollo Rosso, Rucola lettuce, and frill lettuce; Asteraceae vegetables such as “shungiku” (chrysanthemum coronarium); morning glory vegetables such as spinach; Rosaceae vegetables such as strawberry; and flowers such as chrysanthemum, gerbera, rose, and tulip.
## EXAMPLES
The present invention is further specifically described below by Examples and Comparative Examples.
## Examples 1 to 5
### First Fluorescent Material
Two fluorescent materials of fluorogarmanate fluorescent material that is activated by Mn⁴⁺, having a light emission peak at 660 nm and fluorescent material containing silicon nitride that are activated by Eu²⁺, having a light emission peak at 660 nm were used as the first fluorescent material 71. In the first fluorescent material 71, a mass ratio of a MGF fluorescent material to a CASN fluorescent material (MGF:CASN) was 95:5.
### Second Fluorescent Material
Fluorescent material that is obtained by the following production method was used as the second fluorescent material 72.
55.73 g of Y₂O₃ (Y₂O₃ content: 100 mass %), 0.78 g of CeO₂ (CeO₂ content: 100 mass %), 0.54 g of Cr₂O₃ (Cr₂O₃ content: 100 mass %,) and 42.95 g of Al₂O₃ (Al₂O₃ content: 100 mass %) were weighed as raw materials, and 5.00 g of BaF₂ as a flux was added to the mixture. The resulting raw materials were dry mixed for 1 hour by a ball mill. Thus, a raw material mixture was obtained.
The raw material mixture obtained was placed in an alumina crucible, and a lid was put on the alumina crucible. The raw material mixture was heat-treated at 1,500° C. for 10 hours in a reducing atmosphere of H₂: 3 vol % and N₂: 97 vol %. Thus, a calcined product was obtained. The calcined product was passed through a dry sieve to obtain a second fluorescent material. The second fluorescent material obtained was subjected to composition analysis by ICP-AES emission spectrometry using an inductively coupled plasma emission analyzer (manufactured by Perkin Elmer). The composition of the second fluorescent material obtained was (Y₀.₉₇₇Ce₀.₀₀₉Cr₀.₀₁₄)₃Al₅O₁₂ (hereinafter referred to as “YAG: Ce, Cr”).
### Light Emitting Device
Nitride semiconductor having a light emission peak wavelength of 450 nm was used as the light emitting element 10 in the light emitting device 100.
Silicone resin was used as a sealing material constituting the fluorescent member 50, the first fluorescent material 71 and/or the second fluorescent material 72 was added to 100 parts by mass of the silicone resin in the compounding ratio (parts by mass) shown in Table 1, and 15 parts by mass of silica filler were further added thereto, followed by mixing and dispersing. The resulting mixture was degassed to obtain a resin composition constituting a fluorescent member. In each of resin compositions of Examples 1 to 5, the compounding ratio of the first fluorescent material 71 and the second fluorescent material 72 was adjusted as shown in Table 1, and those materials are compounded such that the R/B ratio is within a range of 2.0 or more and 2.4 or less, and the R/FR ratio is within a range of 1.4 or more and 6.0 or less.
The resin composition was poured on the light emitting element 10 of a depressed portion of the molded article 40 to fill the depressed portion, and heated at 150° C. for 4 hours to cure the resin composition, thereby forming the fluorescent member 50. Thus, the light emitting device 100 as shown in FIG. 1 was produced in each of Examples 1 to 5.
## Comparative Example 1
A light emitting device X including a semiconductor light emitting element having a light emission peak wavelength of 450 nm and a light emitting device Y including a semiconductor light emitting element having a light emission peak length of 660 nm were used, and the R/B ratio was adjusted to 2.5.
### Evaluation
### Photon Flux Density
Photon flux densities of lights emitted from the light emitting device 100 used in Examples 1 to 5 and the light emitting devices X and Y used in Comparative Example 1 were measured using a photon measuring device (LI-250A, manufactured by Li-COR). The photon flux density B, the photon flux density R, and the photon flux density FR of lights emitted from the light emitting devices used in each of the Examples and Comparative Example; the R/B ratio; and the R/FR ratio are shown in Table 1. FIG. 2 shows spectra showing the relationship between a wavelength and a relative photon flux density, in the light emitting devices used in each Example and Comparative Example.
### Plant Cultivation Test
The plant cultivation method includes a method of conducting by “growth period by RGB light source (hereinafter referred to as a first growth period)” and “growth period by light source for plant growth (hereinafter referred to as a second growth period)” using a light emitting device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure as a light source.
The first growth period uses RGB light source, and RGB type LED generally known can be used as the RGB light source. The reason for irradiating plants with RGB type LED in the initial stage of the plant growth is that length of a stem and the number and size of true leaves in the initial stage of plant growth are made equal, thereby clarifying the influence by the difference of light quality in the second growth period.
The first growth period is preferably about 2 weeks. In the case where the first growth period is shorter than 2 weeks, it is necessary to confirm that two true leaves develop and a root reaches length that can surely absorb water in the second growth period. In the case where the first growth period exceeds 2 weeks, variation in the second growth period tends to increase. The variation is easy to be controlled by RGB light source by which stem extension is inhibitory, rather than a fluorescent lamp by which stem extension is easy to occur.
After completion of the first growth period, the second growth period immediately proceeds. It is preferred that plants are irradiated with light emitted from a light emitting device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. Photosynthesis of plants is activated by irradiating plants with light emitted from the light emitting device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, and the growth of plants can be promoted so as to have favorable form and weight.
The total growth period of the first growth period and the second growth period is about 4 to 6 weeks, and it is preferred that shippable plants can be obtained within the period.
The cultivation test was specifically conducted by the following method.
Romaine lettuce (green romaine, produced by Nakahara Seed Co., Ltd.) was used as cultivation plant.
### First Growth Period
Urethane sponges (salad urethane, manufactured by M Hydroponic Research Co., Ltd.) having Romaine lettuce seeded therein were placed side by side on a plastic tray, and were irradiated with light from RGB-LED light source (manufactured by Shibasaki Inc.) to cultivate plants. The plants were cultivated for 16 days under the conditions of room temperature: 22 to 23° C., humidity: 50 to 60%, photon flux density from light emitting device: 100 μmol·m⁻²·s⁻¹ and daytime hour: 16 hours/day. Only water was given until germination, and after the germination (about 4 days later), a solution obtained by mixing Otsuka House #1 (manufactured by Otsuka Chemical Co., Ltd.) and Otsuka House #2 (manufactured by Otsuka Chemical Co., Ltd.) in a mass ratio of 3:2 and dissolving the mixture in water was used as a nutrient solution (Otsuka Formulation A). Conductivity of the nutrient was 1.5 ms·cm⁻¹.
### Second Growth Period
After the first growth period, the plants were irradiated with light from the light emitting devices of Examples 1 to 5 and Comparative Example 1, and were subjected to hydroponics.
The plants were cultivated for 19 days under the conditions of room temperature: 22 to 24° C., humidity: 60 to 70%, CO₂ concentration: 600 to 700 ppm, photon flux density from light emitting device: 125 μmol·m⁻²·s⁻¹ and daytime hour: 16 hours/day. Otsuka Formulation A was used as the nutrient solution. Conductivity of the nutrient was 1.5 ms·cm⁻¹. The values of the R/B and R/FR ratios of light for plant irradiation from each light emitting device in the second growth period are shown in Table 1.
### Measurement of Fresh Weight (Edible Part)
The plants after cultivation were harvested, and wet weights of a terrestrial part and a root were measured. The wet weight of a terrestrial part of each of 6 cultivated plants having been subjected to hydroponics by irradiating with light from the light emitting devices of Examples 1 to 5 and Comparative Example 1 was measured as a fresh weight (edible part) (g). The results obtained are shown in Table 1 and FIG. 3.
### Measurement of Nitrate Nitrogen Content
The edible part (about 20 g) of each of the cultivated plants, from which a foot about 5 cm had been removed, was frozen with liquid nitrogen and crushed with a juice mixer (laboratory mixer LM-PLUS, manufactured by Osaka Chemical Co., Ltd.) for 1 minute. The resulting liquid was filtered with Miracloth (manufactured by Milipore), and the filtrate was centrifuged at 4° C. and 15,000 rpm for 5 minutes. The nitrate nitrogen content (mg/100 g) in the cultivated plant in the supernatant was measured using a portable reflection photometer system (product name: RQ flex system, manufactured by Merck) and a test paper (product name: Reflectoquant (registered trade mark), manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.). The results are shown in Table 1 and FIG. 4.
| | TABLE 1 | TABLE 1 | TABLE 1 | TABLE 1 | TABLE 1 | TABLE 1 | | | |
|-------------|----------------------|----------------------|--------------------|--------------------|--------------------|----------------|----------------|---------------|------------------|
| | Fluorescent material | Fluorescent material | | | | | | | |
| | (parts by mass) | (parts by mass) | Photon flux | Photon flux | Photon flux | Ratio of | Ratio of | | |
| | First fluorescent | Second fluorescent | density | density | density | photon | photon | Fresh weight | Nitrate nitrogen |
| | material | material | (μmol · m−2 · s−1) | (μmol · m−2 · s−1) | (μmol · m−2 · s−1) | flux densities | flux densities | (Edible part) | content |
| | (MGF/CASN = 95:5) | (YAG: Ce, Cr) | B | R | FR | R/B | R/FR | (g) | (mg/100 g) |
| Comparative | — | — | 35.5 | 88.8 | 0.0 | 2.5 | — | 26.2 | 361.2 |
| Example 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| Example 1 | 60 | — | 31.5 | 74.9 | 12.6 | 2.4 | 6.0 | 35.4 | 430.8 |
| Example 2 | 50 | 10 | 28.5 | 67.1 | 21.7 | 2.4 | 3.1 | 34.0 | 450.0 |
| Example 3 | 40 | 20 | 25.8 | 62.0 | 28.7 | 2.4 | 2.2 | 33.8 | 452.4 |
| Example 4 | 30 | 30 | 26.8 | 54.7 | 33.5 | 2.0 | 1.6 | 33.8 | 345.0 |
| Example 5 | 25 | 39 | 23.4 | 52.8 | 38.1 | 2.3 | 1.4 | 28.8 | 307.2 |
As shown in Table 1, for the light emitting devices in Examples 1 to 5, the R/B ratios are within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less and the R/FR ratios are within the range of 0.7 or more and 13.0 or less. For Romaine lettuce cultivated by irradiating with light from the light emitting device in Examples 1 to 5, the fresh weight (edible part) was increased as compared with Romaine lettuce cultivated by irradiating with light from the light emitting device used in Comparative Example 1. Therefore, cultivation of plants was promoted, as shown in Table 1 and FIG. 3.
As shown in FIG. 2, the light emitting device 100 in Example 1 had at least one maximum value of the relative photon flux density in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less and in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm. The light emitting devices 100 in Examples 2 to 5 had at least one maximum value of relative photon flux density in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm and in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less, respectively. The maximum value of the relative photon flux density in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less is due to the light emission of the light emitting element having light emission peak wavelength in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, the maximum value of the relative photon flux density in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm is due to the first fluorescent material emitting the light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm, and the maximum value of the relative photon flux density in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less is due to the second fluorescent material emitting the light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less.
As shown in Table 1, for the light emitting devices 100 in Examples 4 and 5, the R/B ratios are 2.0 and 2.3, respectively, and the R/FR ratios are 1.6 and 1.4, respectively. The R/B ratios are within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less, and the R/FR ratios are within a range of 0.7 or more and 2.0 or less. For Romaine lettuces cultivated by irradiating with lights from the light emitting devices 100, the nitrate nitrogen content is decreased as compared with Comparative Example 1. Plants, in which the nitrate nitrogen content having the possibility of adversely affecting health of human body had been reduced to a range that does not inhibit the cultivation of plants, could be cultivated, as shown in Table 1 and FIG. 4.
The light emitting device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure can be utilized as a light emitting device for plant cultivation that can activate photosynthesis and is capable of promoting growth of plants. Furthermore, the plant cultivation method, in which plants are irradiated with the light emitted from the light emitting device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, can cultivate plants that can be harvested in a relatively short period of time and can be used in a plant factory.
Although the present disclosure has been described with reference to several exemplary embodiments, it shall be understood that the words that have been used are words of description and illustration, rather than words of limitation. Changes may be made within the purview of the appended claims, as presently stated and as amended, without departing from the scope and spirit of the disclosure in its aspects. Although the disclosure has been described with reference to particular examples, means, and embodiments, the disclosure may be not intended to be limited to the particulars disclosed; rather the disclosure extends to all functionally equivalent structures, methods, and uses such as are within the scope of the appended claims.
One or more examples or embodiments of the disclosure may be referred to herein, individually and/or collectively, by the term “disclosure” merely for convenience and without intending to voluntarily limit the scope of this application to any particular disclosure or inventive concept. Moreover, although specific examples and embodiments have been illustrated and described herein, it should be appreciated that any subsequent arrangement designed to achieve the same or similar purpose may be substituted for the specific examples or embodiments shown. This disclosure may be intended to cover any and all subsequent adaptations or variations of various examples and embodiments. Combinations of the above examples and embodiments, and other examples and embodiments not specifically described herein, will be apparent to those of skill in the art upon reviewing the description.
In addition, in the foregoing Detailed Description, various features may be grouped together or described in a single embodiment for the purpose of streamlining the disclosure. This disclosure may be not to be interpreted as reflecting an intention that the claimed embodiments require more features than are expressly recited in each claim. Rather, as the following claims reflect, inventive subject matter may be directed to less than all of the features of any of the disclosed embodiments. Thus, the following claims are incorporated into the Detailed Description, with each claim standing on its own as defining separately claimed subject matter.
The above disclosed subject matter shall be considered illustrative, and not restrictive, and the appended claims are intended to cover all such modifications, enhancements, and other embodiments which fall within the true spirit and scope of the present disclosure. Thus, to the maximum extent allowed by law, the scope of the present disclosure may be determined by the broadest permissible interpretation of the following claims and their equivalents, and shall not be restricted or limited by the foregoing detailed description.
## CLAIMS
1. A light emitting device comprising: a light emitting element having a light emission peak wavelength in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less; and a fluorescent material that is excited by light from the light emitting element and emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm, wherein the light emitting device emits light having a ratio R/B of a photon flux density R to a photon flux density B within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less, and a ratio R/FR of the photon flux density R to a photon flux density FR within a range of 0.7 or more and 13.0 or less, wherein the photon flux density R is in a wavelength range of 620 nm or more and less than 700 nm, the photon flux density B is in a wavelength range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, and the photon flux density FR is in a wavelength range of 700 nm or more and 780 nm or less.
2. The light emitting device according to claim 1, further comprising another fluorescent material that is excited by light from the light emitting element and emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less, wherein the ratio R/FR is within a range of 0.7 or more and 5.0 or less.
3. The light emitting device according to claim 2, wherein the ratio R/FR is within a range of 0.7 or more and 2.0 or less.
4. The light emitting device according to claim 2, wherein the another fluorescent material contains a first element Ln containing at least one element selected from the group consisting of rare earth elements excluding Ce, a second element M containing at least one element selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga and In, Ce, and Cr, and has a composition of an aluminate fluorescent material, and when a molar ratio of the second element M is taken as 5, a molar ratio of Ce is a product of a value of a parameter x and 3, and a molar ratio of Cr is a product of a value of a parameter y and 3, the value of the parameter x being in a range of exceeding 0.0002 and less than 0.50, and the value of the parameter y being in a range of exceeding 0.0001 and less than 0.05.
5. The light emitting device according to claim 2, wherein the another fluorescent material has the composition represented by the following formula (I): (Ln₁₋ₓ₋yCeₓCry)₃M₅O₁₂ (I) wherein Ln is at least one rare earth element selected from the group consisting of rare earth elements excluding Ce, M is at least one element selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, and In, and x and y are numbers satisfying 0.0002<x<0.50 and 0.0001<y<0.05.
6. The light emitting device according to claim 2, the light emitting device being used in plant cultivation.
7. The light emitting device according to claim 1, wherein the fluorescent material is at least one selected from the group consisting of: a fluorogermanate fluorescent material that is activated by Mn⁴⁺, a fluorescent material that has a composition containing at least one element selected from Sr and Ca, and Al, and contains silicon nitride that is activated by Eu²⁺, a fluorescent material that has a composition containing at least one element selected from the group consisting of alkaline earth metal elements and at least one element selected from the group consisting of alkali metal elements, and contains aluminum nitride that is activated by Eu²⁺, a fluorescent material containing a sulfide of Ca or Sr that is activated by Eu²⁺, and a fluorescent material that has a composition containing at least one element or ion selected from the group consisting of alkali metal elements, and an ammonium ion (NH₄⁺), and at least one element selected from the group consisting of Group 4 elements and Group 14 elements, and contains a fluoride that is activated by Mn⁴⁺.
8. The light emitting device according to claim 1, wherein the fluorescent material contains: a fluorogermanate fluorescent material that is activated by Mn⁴⁺, and a fluorescent material that has a composition containing at least one element selected from Sr and Ca, and Al, and contains silicon nitride that is activated by Eu²⁺, wherein the compounding ratio between the fluorogermanate fluorescent material and the fluorescent material containing silicon nitride (fluorogermanate fluorescent material:fluorescent material containing silicon nitride) is in a range of 50:50 or more and 99:1 or less.
9. The light emitting device according to claim 1, the light emitting device being used in plant cultivation.
10. A plant cultivation method comprising irradiating plants with light emitted from the light emitting device according to claim 1.
11. A plant cultivation method comprising irradiating plants with light emitted from the light emitting device according to claim 2.

79
tests/data/groundtruth/docling_v2/ipa20200022300.itxt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
item-0 at level 0: unspecified: group _root_
item-1 at level 1: title: SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING THE OPERATION OF AN ACTUATOR MOUNTED ON A SEED PLANTING IMPLEMENT
item-2 at level 2: section_header: ABSTRACT
item-3 at level 3: paragraph: In one aspect, a system for controlling an operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement may include an actuator configured to adjust a position of a row unit of the seed planting implement relative to a toolbar of the seed planting implement. The system may also include a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to a fluid chamber of the actuator, with the flow restrictor being configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the fluid chamber in a manner that provides damping to the row unit. Furthermore, the system may include a valve fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor in a parallel relationship such that the valve is configured to permit the fluid exiting the fluid chamber to flow through the flow restrictor and the fluid entering the fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.
item-4 at level 2: section_header: FIELD
item-5 at level 3: paragraph: The present disclosure generally relates to seed planting implements and, more particularly, to systems for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement in a manner that provides damping to one or more components of the seed planting implement.
item-6 at level 2: section_header: BACKGROUND
item-7 at level 3: paragraph: Modern farming practices strive to increase yields of agricultural fields. In this respect, seed planting implements are towed behind a tractor or other work vehicle to deposit seeds in a field. For example, seed planting implements typically include one or more ground engaging tools or openers that form a furrow or trench in the soil. One or more dispensing devices of the seed planting implement may, in turn, deposit seeds into the furrow(s). After deposition of the seeds, a packer wheel may pack the soil on top of the deposited seeds.
item-8 at level 3: paragraph: In certain instances, the packer wheel may also control the penetration depth of the furrow. In this regard, the position of the packer wheel may be moved vertically relative to the associated opener(s) to adjust the depth of the furrow. Additionally, the seed planting implement includes an actuator configured to exert a downward force on the opener(s) to ensure that the opener(s) is able to penetrate the soil to the depth set by the packer wheel. However, the seed planting implement may bounce or chatter when traveling at high speeds and/or when the opener(s) encounters hard or compacted soil. As such, operators generally operate the seed planting implement with the actuator exerting more downward force on the opener(s) than is necessary in order to prevent such bouncing or chatter. Operation of the seed planting implement with excessive down pressure applied to the opener(s), however, reduces the overall stability of the seed planting implement.
item-9 at level 3: paragraph: Accordingly, an improved system for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on s seed planting implement to enhance the overall operation of the implement would be welcomed in the technology.
item-10 at level 2: section_header: BRIEF DESCRIPTION
item-11 at level 3: paragraph: Aspects and advantages of the technology will be set forth in part in the following description, or may be obvious from the description, or may be learned through practice of the technology.
item-12 at level 3: paragraph: In one aspect, the present subject matter is directed to a system for controlling an operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement. The system may include a toolbar and a row unit adjustably mounted on the toolbar. The system may also include a fluid-driven actuator configured to adjust a position of the row unit relative to the toolbar, with the fluid-driven actuator defining first and second fluid chambers. Furthermore, the system may include a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber, with the flow restrictor being configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the first fluid chamber in a manner that provides viscous damping to the row unit. Additionally, the system may include a valve fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber. The valve may further be fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor in a parallel relationship such that the valve is configured to permit the fluid exiting the first fluid chamber to flow through the flow restrictor and the fluid entering the first fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.
item-13 at level 3: paragraph: In another aspect, the present subject matter is directed to a seed planting implement including a toolbar and a plurality of row units adjustably coupled to the toolbar. Each row unit may include a ground engaging tool configured to form a furrow in the soil. The seed planting implement may also include plurality of fluid-driven actuators, with each fluid-driven actuator being coupled between the toolbar and a corresponding row unit of the plurality of row units. As such, each fluid-driven actuator may be configured to adjust a position of the corresponding row unit relative to the toolbar. Moreover, each fluid-driven actuator may define first and second fluid chambers. Furthermore, the seed planting implement may include a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber of a first fluid-driven actuator of the plurality of fluid-driven actuators. The flow restrictor may be configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the first fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator in a manner that provides viscous damping to the corresponding row unit. Additionally, the seed planting implement may include a valve fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator. The valve further may be fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor in a parallel relationship such that the valve is configured to permit the fluid exiting the first fluid chamber to flow through the flow restrictor and the fluid entering the first fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.
item-14 at level 3: paragraph: In a further aspect, the present subject matter is directed to a system for providing damping to a row unit of a seed planting implement. The system may include a toolbar, a row unit adjustably mounted on the toolbar, and a fluid-driven actuator configured to adjust a position of the row unit relative to the toolbar. As such, the fluid-driven actuator may define a fluid chamber. The system may also include a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to the fluid chamber. The flow restrictor may define an adjustable throat configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the fluid chamber. In this regard, the throat may be adjustable between a first size configured to provide a first damping rate to the row unit and a second size configured to provide a second damping rate to the row unit, with the first and second damping rates being different.
item-15 at level 3: paragraph: These and other features, aspects and advantages of the present technology will become better understood with reference to the following description and appended claims. The accompanying drawings, which are incorporated in and constitute a part of this specification, illustrate embodiments of the technology and, together with the description, serve to explain the principles of the technology.
item-16 at level 2: section_header: BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
item-17 at level 3: paragraph: A full and enabling disclosure of the present technology, including the best mode thereof, directed to one of ordinary skill in the art, is set forth in the specification, which makes reference to the appended figures, in which:
item-18 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 1 illustrates a perspective view of one embodiment of a seed planting implement in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;
item-19 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 2 illustrates a side view of one embodiment of a row unit suitable for use with a seed planting implement in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;
item-20 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 3 illustrates a schematic view of one embodiment of a system for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;
item-21 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 4 illustrates a cross-sectional view of one embodiment of a flow restrictor suitable for use in the system shown in FIG. 3, particularly illustrating the flow restrictor defining a throat having a fixed size in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;
item-22 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 5 illustrates a cross-sectional view of another embodiment of a flow restrictor suitable for use in the system shown in FIG. 3, particularly illustrating the flow restrictor defining a throat having an adjustable size in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;
item-23 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 6 illustrates a simplified cross-sectional view of the flow restrictor shown in FIG. 5, particularly illustrating the throat having a first size configured to provide a first damping rate in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;
item-24 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 7 illustrates a simplified cross-sectional view of the flow restrictor shown in FIG. 5, particularly illustrating the throat having a second size configured to provide a second damping rate in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;
item-25 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 8 illustrates a cross-sectional view of another embodiment of a system for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter, particularly illustrating the system including a fluidly actuated check valve; and
item-26 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 9 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a further embodiment of a system for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter, particularly illustrating the system including an electrically actuated check valve.
item-27 at level 3: paragraph: Repeat use of reference characters in the present specification and drawings is intended to represent the same or analogous features or elements of the present technology.
item-28 at level 2: section_header: DETAILED DESCRIPTION
item-29 at level 3: paragraph: Reference now will be made in detail to embodiments of the invention, one or more examples of which are illustrated in the drawings. Each example is provided by way of explanation of the invention, not limitation of the invention. In fact, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that various modifications and variations can be made in the present invention without departing from the scope or spirit of the invention. For instance, features illustrated or described as part of one embodiment can be used with another embodiment to yield a still further embodiment. Thus, it is intended that the present invention covers such modifications and variations as come within the scope of the appended claims and their equivalents.
item-30 at level 3: paragraph: In general, the present subject matter is directed to systems for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement. Specifically, the disclosed systems may be configured to control the operation of the actuator in a manner that provides damping to one or more components of the seed planting implement. For example, in several embodiments, the seed planting implement may include a toolbar and one or more row units adjustably coupled to the toolbar. One or more fluid-driven actuators of the seed planting implement may be configured to control and/or adjust the position of the row unit(s) relative to the toolbar. Furthermore, a flow restrictor may be fluidly coupled to a fluid chamber of the actuator and configured to reduce the rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the fluid chamber so as to provide viscous damping to the row unit(s). In this regard, when the row unit(s) moves relative to the toolbar (e.g., when the row unit contacts a rock or other impediment in the soil), the flow restrictor may be configured to reduce the relative speed and/or displacement of such movement, thereby damping the movement of the row unit(s) relative to the toolbar.
item-31 at level 3: paragraph: In one embodiment, the flow restrictor may be configured to provide a variable damping rate to the component(s) of the seed planting implement. Specifically, in such embodiment, the flow restrictor may be configured as an adjustable valve having one or more components that may be adjusted to change the size of a fluid passage or throat defined by the valve. In this regard, changing the throat size of the valve varies the rate at which the fluid may exit the fluid chamber of the actuator, thereby adjusting the damping rate provided by the disclosed system. For example, adjusting the valve so as to increase the size of the throat may allow the fluid to exit the fluid chamber more quickly, thereby reducing the damping rate of the system. Conversely, adjusting the valve so as to decrease the size of the throat may allow the fluid to exit the fluid chamber more slowly, thereby increasing the damping rate of the system.
item-32 at level 3: paragraph: In accordance with aspects of the present subject matter, the system may further include a check valve fluidly coupled to the fluid chamber of the actuator. Specifically, in several embodiments, the check valve may also be fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor in a parallel relationship. As such, the check valve may be configured to direct the fluid exiting the fluid chamber of the actuator (e.g., when one of the row units hits a rock) to flow through the flow restrictor, thereby reducing the relative speed and/or displacement between the row unit(s) in the toolbar. Furthermore, the check valve may be configured to permit the fluid entering the fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor. For example, the fluid may return to the fluid chamber as the row unit(s) returns to its initial position following contact with the rock. In this regard, allowing the returning fluid to bypass the flow restrictor may increase the rate at which the fluid flows back into the fluid chamber, thereby further increasing the damping provided by the disclosed system.
item-33 at level 3: paragraph: Referring now to FIG. 1, a perspective view of one embodiment of a seed planting implement 10 is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. As shown in FIG. 1, the implement 10 may include a laterally extending toolbar or frame assembly 12 connected at its middle to a forwardly extending tow bar 14 to allow the implement 10 to be towed by a work vehicle (not shown), such as an agricultural tractor, in a direction of travel (e.g., as indicated by arrow 16). The toolbar 12 may generally be configured to support a plurality of tool frames 18. Each tool frame 18 may, in turn, be configured to support a plurality of row units 20. As will be described below, each row unit 20 may include one or more ground engaging tools configured to excavate a furrow or trench in the soil.
item-34 at level 3: paragraph: It should be appreciated that, for purposes of illustration, only a portion of the row units 20 of the implement 10 have been shown in FIG. 1. In general, the implement 10 may include any number of row units 20, such as six, eight, twelve, sixteen, twenty-four, thirty-two, or thirty-six row units. In addition, it should be appreciated that the lateral spacing between row units 20 may be selected based on the type of crop being planted. For example, the row units 20 may be spaced approximately thirty inches from one another for planting corn, and approximately fifteen inches from one another for planting soybeans.
item-35 at level 3: paragraph: It should also be appreciated that the configuration of the implement 10 described above and shown in FIG. 1 is provided only to place the present subject matter in an exemplary field of use. Thus, it should be appreciated that the present subject matter may be readily adaptable to any manner of implement configuration.
item-36 at level 3: paragraph: Referring now to FIG. 2, a side view of one embodiment of a row unit 20 is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. As shown, the row unit 20 is configured as a hoe opener row unit. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the row unit 20 may be configured as a disc opener row unit or any other suitable type of seed planting unit. Furthermore, it should be appreciated that, although the row unit 20 will generally be described in the context of the implement 10 shown in FIG. 1, the row unit 20 may generally be configured to be installed on any suitable seed planting implement having any suitable implement configuration.
item-37 at level 3: paragraph: As shown, the row unit 20 may be adjustably coupled to one of the tool frames 18 of the implement 10 by a suitable linkage assembly 22. For example, in one embodiment, the linkage assembly 22 may include a mounting bracket 24 coupled to the tool frame 18. Furthermore, the linkage assembly 22 may include first and second linkage members 26, 28. One end of each linkage member 26, 28 may be pivotably coupled to the mounting bracket 24, while an opposed end of each linkage member 26, 28 may be pivotally coupled to a support member 30 of the row unit 20. In this regard, the linkage assembly 22 may form a four bar linkage with the support member 30 that permits relative pivotable movement between the row unit 20 and the associated tool frame 18. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the row unit 20 may be adjustably coupled to the tool frame 18 or the toolbar 12 via any other suitable linkage assembly. Furthermore, it should be appreciated that, in further embodiments the linkage assembly 22 may couple the row unit 20 directly to the toolbar 12.
item-38 at level 3: paragraph: Furthermore, the support member 30 may be configured to support one or more components of the row unit 20. For example, in several embodiments, a ground engaging shank 32 may be mounted or otherwise supported on support member 22. As shown, the shank 32 may include an opener 34 configured to excavate a furrow or trench in the soil as the implement 10 moves in the direction of travel 12 to facilitate deposition of a flowable granular or particulate-type agricultural product, such as seed, fertilizer, and/or the like. Moreover, the row unit 20 may include a packer wheel 36 configured to roll along the soil and close the furrow after deposition of the agricultural product. In one embodiment, the packer wheel 36 may be coupled to the support member 30 by an arm 38. It should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, any other suitable component(s) may be supported on or otherwise coupled to the support member 30. For example, the row unit 20 may include a ground engaging disc opener (not shown) in lieu of the ground engaging shank 32.
item-39 at level 3: paragraph: Additionally, in several embodiments, a fluid-driven actuator 102 of the implement 10 may be configured to adjust the position of one or more components of the row unit 20 relative to the tool frame 18. For example, in one embodiment, a rod 104 of the actuator 102 may be coupled to the shank 32 (e.g., the end of the shank 32 opposed from the opener 34), while a cylinder 106 of the actuator 102 may be coupled to the mounting bracket 24. As such, the rod 104 may be configured to extend and/or retract relative to the cylinder 106 to adjust the position of the shank 32 relative to the tool frame 18, which, in turn, adjusts the force being applied to the shank 32. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the rod 104 may be coupled to the mounting bracket 24, while the cylinder 106 may be coupled to the shank 32. Furthermore, it should be appreciated that, in further embodiments, the actuator 102 may be coupled to any other suitable component of the row unit 20 and/or directly to the toolbar 12.
item-40 at level 3: paragraph: Moreover, it should be appreciated that the configuration of the row unit 20 described above and shown in FIG. 2 is provided only to place the present subject matter in an exemplary field of use. Thus, it should be appreciated that the present subject matter may be readily adaptable to any manner of seed planting unit configuration.
item-41 at level 3: paragraph: Referring now to FIG. 3, a schematic view of one embodiment of a system 100 for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. In general, the system 100 will be described herein with reference to the seed planting implement 10 and the row unit 20 described above with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. However, it should be appreciated by those of ordinary skill in the art that the disclosed system 100 may generally be utilized with seed planting implements having any other suitable implement configuration and/or seed planting units having any other suitable unit configuration.
item-42 at level 3: paragraph: As shown in FIG. 3, the system 100 may include a fluid-driven actuator, such as the actuator 102 of the row unit 20 described above with reference to FIG. 2. As shown, the actuator 102 may correspond to a hydraulic actuator. Thus, in several embodiments, the actuator 102 may include a piston 108 housed within the cylinder 106. One end of the rod 104 may be coupled to the piston 108, while an opposed end of the rod 104 may extend outwardly from the cylinder 106. Additionally, the actuator 102 may include a cap-side chamber 110 and a rod-side chamber 112 defined within the cylinder 106. As is generally understood, by regulating the pressure of the fluid supplied to one or both of the cylinder chambers 110, 112, the actuation of the rod 104 may be controlled. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the actuator 102 may be configured as any other suitable type of actuator, such as a pneumatic actuator. Furthermore, it should be appreciated that, in further embodiments, the system 100 may include any other suitable number of fluid-driven actuators, such as additional actuators 102 mounted on the implement 10.
item-43 at level 3: paragraph: Furthermore, the system 100 may include various components configured to provide fluid (e.g., hydraulic oil) to the cylinder chambers 110, 112 of the actuator 102. For example, in several embodiments, the system 100 may include a fluid reservoir 114 and first and second fluid conduits 116, 118. As shown, a first fluid conduit 116 may extend between and fluidly couple the reservoir 114 and the rod-side chamber 112 of the actuator 102. Similarly, a second fluid conduit 118 may extend between and fluidly couple the reservoir 114 and the cap-side chamber 110 of the actuator 102. Additionally, a pump 115 and a remote switch 117 or other valve(s) may be configured to control the flow of the fluid between the reservoir 114 and the cylinder chambers 110, 112 of the actuator 102. In one embodiment, the reservoir 114, the pump 115, and the remote switch 117 may be mounted on the work vehicle (not shown) configured to tow the implement 10. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the reservoir 114, the pump 115, and/or the remote switch 117 may be mounted on the implement 10. Furthermore, it should be appreciated that the system 100 may include any other suit component(s) configured to control the flow of fluid between the reservoir and the actuator 102.
item-44 at level 3: paragraph: In several embodiments, the system 100 may also include a flow restrictor 120 that is fluidly coupled to the cap-side chamber 110. As such, the flow restrictor 120 may be provided in series with the second fluid conduit 118. As will be described below, the flow restrictor 120 may be configured to reduce the flow rate of the fluid exiting the cap-side chamber 110 in a manner that provides damping to one or more components of the implement 10. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the flow restrictor 120 may be fluidly coupled to the rod-side chamber 120 such that the flow restrictor 120 is provided in series with the first fluid conduit 116.
item-45 at level 3: paragraph: Additionally, in several embodiments, the system 100 may include a check valve 122 that is fluidly coupled to the cap-side chamber 110 and provided in series with the second fluid conduit 118. As shown, the check valve 122 may be fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor 120 in parallel. In this regard, the check valve 122 may be provided in series with a first branch 124 of the second fluid conduit 118, while the flow restrictor 120 may be provided in series with a second branch 126 of the second fluid conduit 118. As such, the check valve 122 may be configured to allow the fluid to flow through the first branch 124 of the second fluid conduit 118 from the reservoir 114 to the cap-side chamber 110. However, the check valve 122 may be configured to occlude or prevent the fluid from flowing through the first branch 124 of the second fluid conduit 118 from the cap-side chamber 110 to the reservoir 114. In this regard, the check valve 122 directs all of the fluid exiting the cap-side chamber 110 into the flow restrictor 120. Conversely, the check valve 122 permits the fluid flowing to the cap-side chamber 110 to bypass the flow restrictor 120. As will be described below, such configuration facilitates damping of one or more components of the implement 10. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the check valve 122 may be fluidly coupled to the rod-side chamber 112 in combination with the flow restrictor 120 such that the check valve 122 is provided in series with the first fluid conduit 116.
item-46 at level 3: paragraph: As indicated above, the system 100 may generally be configured to provide viscous damping to one or more components of the implement 10. For example, when a ground engaging tool of the implement 10, such as the shank 32, contacts a rock or other impediment in the soil, the corresponding row unit 20 may pivot relative to the corresponding tool frame 18 and/or the toolbar 12 against the down pressure load applied to the row unit 20 by the corresponding actuator 102. In several embodiments, such movement may cause the rod 104 of the actuator 102 to retract into the cylinder 106, thereby moving the piston 108 in a manner that decreases the volume of the cap-side chamber 110. In such instances, some of the fluid present within the cap-side chamber 110 may exit and flow into the second fluid conduit 118 toward the reservoir 114. The check valve 122 may prevent the fluid exiting the cap-side chamber 110 from flowing through the first branch 124 of the second fluid conduit 118. As such, all fluid exiting the cap-side chamber 110 may be directed into the second branch 126 and through the flow restrictor 120. As indicated above, the flow restrictor 120 reduces or limits the rate at which the fluid may flow through the second fluid conduit 118 so as to reduce the rate at which the fluid may exit the cap-side chamber 110. In this regard, the speed at which and/or the amount that the rod 104 retracts into the cylinder 106 when the shank 32 contacts a soil impediment may be reduced (e.g., because of the reduced rate at which the fluid is discharged from the cap-side chamber 110), thereby damping the movement of the row unit 20 relative to the corresponding tool frame 18 and/or the toolbar 12. Furthermore, after the initial retraction of the rod 104 into the cylinder 106, the piston 108 may then move in a manner that increases the volume of the cap-side chamber 110, thereby extending the rod 104 from the cylinder 106. In such instances, fluid present within the reservoir 114 and the second fluid conduit 118 may be drawn back into the cap-side chamber 110. As indicated above, the check valve 122 may permit the fluid within the second fluid conduit 118 to bypass the flow restrictor 120 and flow unobstructed through the first branch 124, thereby maximizing the rate at which the fluid returns to the cap-side chamber 110. Increasing the rate at which the fluid returns to the cap-side chamber 110 may decrease the time that the row unit 20 is displaced relative to the tool frame 18, thereby further damping of the row unit 20 relative to the corresponding tool frame 18 and/or the toolbar 12.
item-47 at level 3: paragraph: Referring now to FIG. 4, a cross-sectional view of one embodiment of the flow restrictor 120 is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. For example, in the illustrated embodiment, the flow restrictor 120 may include a restrictor body 128 coupled to the second branch 126 of the second fluid conduit 118, with the restrictor body 128, in turn, defining a fluid passage 130 extending therethrough. Furthermore, the flow restrictor 120 may include an orifice plate 132 extending inward from the restrictor body 128 into the fluid passage 130. As shown, the orifice plate 132 may define a central aperture or throat 134 extending therethrough. In general, the size (e.g., the area, diameter, etc.) of the throat 134 may be smaller than the size of the fluid passage 130 so as to reduce the flow rate of the fluid through the flow restrictor 120. It should be appreciated that, in the illustrated embodiment, the throat 134 has a fixed size such that the throat 134 provides a fixed or constant backpressure for a given fluid flow rate. In this regard, in such embodiment, a fixed or constant damping rate is provided by the system 100. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the flow restrictor 120 may have any other suitable configuration that reduces the flow rate of the fluid flowing therethrough.
item-48 at level 3: paragraph: Referring now to FIG. 5, a cross-sectional view of another embodiment of the flow restrictor 120 is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. As shown, the flow restrictor 120 may generally be configured the same as or similar to that described above with reference to FIG. 4. For instance, the flow restrictor 120 may define the throat 134, which is configured to reduce the flow rate of the fluid through the flow restrictor 120. However, as shown in FIG. 5, unlike the above-describe embodiment, the size (e.g., the area, diameter, etc.) of the throat 134 is adjustable. For example, in such embodiment, the flow restrictor 120 may be configured as an adjustable valve 136. As shown, the valve 136 may include a valve body 138 coupled to the second branch 126 of the second fluid conduit 118, a shaft 140 rotatably coupled to the valve body 138, a disc 142 coupled to the shaft 140, and an actuator 144 (e.g., a suitable electric motor) coupled to the shaft 140. As such, the actuator 144 may be configured to rotate the shaft 140 and the disc 142 relative to the valve body 138 (e.g., as indicated by arrow 146 in FIG. 5) to change the size of the throat 134 defined between the disc 142 and the valve body 138. Although the valve 136 is configured as a butterfly valve in FIG. 5, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the valve 136 may be configured as any other suitable type of valve or adjustable flow restrictor. For example, in one embodiment, the valve 136 may be configured as a suitable ball valve.
item-49 at level 3: paragraph: In accordance with aspects of the present disclosure, by adjusting the size of the throat 134, the system 100 may be able to provide variable damping rates. In general, the size of the throat 134 may be indicative of the amount of damping provided by the system 100. For example, in several embodiments, the disc 142 may be adjustable between a first position shown in FIG. 6 and a second position shown in FIG. 7. More specifically, when the disc 142 is at the first position, the throat 134 defines a first size (e.g., as indicated by arrow 148 in FIG. 6), thereby providing a first damping rate. Conversely, when the disc 142 is at the second position, the throat 134 defines a second size (e.g., as indicated by arrow 150 in FIG. 7), thereby providing a second damping rate. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the first distance 148 is larger than the second distance 150. In such instance, the system 100 provides greater damping when the throat 134 is adjusted to the first size than when the throat 134 is adjusted to the second size. It should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the disc 142 may be adjustable between any other suitable positions that provide any other suitable damping rates. For example, the disc 142 may be adjustable to a plurality of different positions defined between the fully opened and fully closed positions of the valve, thereby providing for a corresponding number of different damping rates. Furthermore, it should be appreciated that the disc 142 may be continuously adjustable or adjustable between various discrete positions.
item-50 at level 3: paragraph: Referring back to FIG. 5, a controller 152 of the system 100 may be configured to electronically control the operation of one or more components of the valve 138, such as the actuator 144. In general, the controller 152 may comprise any suitable processor-based device known in the art, such as a computing device or any suitable combination of computing devices. Thus, in several embodiments, the controller 152 may include one or more processor(s) 154 and associated memory device(s) 156 configured to perform a variety of computer-implemented functions. As used herein, the term “processor” refers not only to integrated circuits referred to in the art as being included in a computer, but also refers to a controller, a microcontroller, a microcomputer, a programmable logic controller (PLC), an application specific integrated circuit, and other programmable circuits. Additionally, the memory device(s) 156 of the controller 152 may generally comprise memory element(s) including, but not limited to, a computer readable medium (e.g., random access memory (RAM)), a computer readable non-volatile medium (e.g., a flash memory), a floppy disk, a compact disc-read only memory (CD-ROM), a magneto-optical disk (MOD), a digital versatile disc (DVD) and/or other suitable memory elements. Such memory device(s) 156 may generally be configured to store suitable computer-readable instructions that, when implemented by the processor(s) 154, configure the controller 152 to perform various computer-implemented functions. In addition, the controller 152 may also include various other suitable components, such as a communications circuit or module, one or more input/output channels, a data/control bus and/or the like.
item-51 at level 3: paragraph: It should be appreciated that the controller 152 may correspond to an existing controller of the implement 10 or associated work vehicle (not shown) or the controller 152 may correspond to a separate processing device. For instance, in one embodiment, the controller 152 may form all or part of a separate plug-in module that may be installed within the implement 10 or associated work vehicle to allow for the disclosed system and method to be implemented without requiring additional software to be uploaded onto existing control devices of the implement 10 or associated work vehicle.
item-52 at level 3: paragraph: Furthermore, in one embodiment, a user interface 158 of the system 100 may be communicatively coupled to the controller 152 via a wired or wireless connection to allow feedback signals (e.g., as indicated by dashed line 160 in FIG. 5) to be transmitted from the controller 152 to the user interface 158. More specifically, the user interface 158 may be configured to receive an input from an operator of the implement 10 or the associated work vehicle, such as an input associated with a desired damping characteristic(s) to be provided by the system 100. As such, the user interface 158 may include one or more input devices (not shown), such as touchscreens, keypads, touchpads, knobs, buttons, sliders, switches, mice, microphones, and/or the like. In addition, some embodiments of the user interface 158 may include one or more one or more feedback devices (not shown), such as display screens, speakers, warning lights, and/or the like, which are configured to communicate such feedback from the controller 152 to the operator of the implement 10. However, in alternative embodiments, the user interface 158 may have any suitable configuration.
item-53 at level 3: paragraph: Moreover, in one embodiment, one or more sensors 162 of the system 100 may be communicatively coupled to the controller 152 via a wired or wireless connection to allow sensor data (e.g., as indicated by dashed line 164 in FIG. 5) to be transmitted from the sensor(s) 162 to the controller 152. For example, in one embodiment, the sensor(s) 162 may include a location sensor, such as a GNSS-based sensor, that is configured to detect a parameter associated with the location of the implement 10 or associated work vehicle within the field. In another embodiment, the sensor(s) 162 may include a speed sensor, such as a Hall Effect sensor, that is configured to detect a parameter associated with the speed at which the implement 10 is moved across the field. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the sensor(s) 162 may include any suitable sensing device(s) configured to detect any suitable operating parameter of the implement 10 and/or the associated work vehicle.
item-54 at level 3: paragraph: In several embodiments, the controller 152 may be configured to control the operation of the valve 136 based on the feedback signals 160 received from the user interface 158 and/or the sensor data 164 received from the sensor(s) 162. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the controller 152 may be communicatively coupled to the actuator 144 of the valve 136 via a wired or wireless connection to allow control signals (e.g., indicated by dashed lines 166 in FIG. 5) to be transmitted from the controller 152 to the actuator 144. Such control signals 166 may be configured to regulate the operation of the actuator 144 to adjust the position of the disc 142 relative to the valve body 138, such as by moving the disc 142 along the direction 146 between the first position (FIG. 6) and the second position (FIG. 7). For example, the feedback signals 116 received by the controller 152 may be indicative that the operator desires to adjust the damping provided by the system 100. Furthermore, upon receipt of the sensor data 164 (e.g., data indicative of the location and/or speed of the implement 10), the controller 152 may be configured to determine that the damping rate of the system 100 should be adjusted. In either instance, the controller 152 may be configured to transmit the control signals 166 to the actuator 144, with such control signals 166 being configured to control the operation of the actuator 144 to adjust the position of the disc 142 to provide the desired damping rate. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the controller 152 may be configured to control the operation of the valve 136 based on any other suitable input(s) and/or parameter(s).
item-55 at level 3: paragraph: Referring now to FIG. 8, a schematic view of another embodiment of the system 100 is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. As shown, the system 100 may generally be configured the same as or similar to that described above with reference to FIG. 3. For instance, the system 100 may include the flow restrictor 120 and the check valve 122 fluidly coupled to the cap-side chamber 110 of the actuator 102 via the second fluid conduit 118. Furthermore, the flow restrictor 120 and the check valve 122 may be fluidly coupled together in parallel. However, as shown in FIG. 8, unlike the above-describe embodiment, the check valve 122 may be configured as a pilot-operated or fluid actuated three-way valve that is fluidly coupled to the first fluid conduit 116 by a pilot conduit 168.
item-56 at level 3: paragraph: In general, when the row unit 20 is lifted from an operational position relative to the ground to a raised position relative to the ground, it may be desirable for fluid to exit the cap-side chamber 110 without its flow rate being limited by the flow restrictor 120. For example, permitting such fluid to bypass the flow restrictor 120 may reduce the time required to lift the row unit 20 from the operational position to the raised position. More specifically, when lifting the row unit 20 from the operational position to the raised position, a pump (not shown) may pump fluid through the first fluid conduit 116 from the reservoir 114 to the rod-side chamber 112 of the actuator 102, thereby retracting the rod 104 into the cylinder 106. This may, in turn, discharge fluid from the cap-side chamber 110 into the second fluid conduit 118. As described above, the check valve 122 may generally be configured to direct all fluid exiting the cap-side chamber 110 into the flow restrictor 120. However, in the configuration of the system 100 shown in FIG. 8, when lifting the row unit 20 to the raised position, the pilot conduit 168 supplies fluid flowing through the first fluid conduit 116 to the check valve 122. The fluid received from the pilot conduit 168 may, in turn, actuate suitable component(s) of the check valve 122 (e.g., a diaphragm(s), a spring(s), and/or the like) in a manner that causes the check valve 122 to open, thereby permitting the fluid exiting the cap-side chamber 110 to bypass the flow restrictor 120 and flow unobstructed through the check valve 122 toward the reservoir 114. Conversely, when the row unit 20 is at the operational position, the check valve 122 may be closed, thereby directing all fluid exiting the cap-side chamber 110 into the flow restrictor 120.
item-57 at level 3: paragraph: Referring now to FIG. 9, a schematic view of a further embodiment of the system 100 is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. As shown, the system 100 may generally be configured the same as or similar to that described above with reference to FIGS. 3 and 8. For instance, the system 100 may include the flow restrictor 120 and the check valve 122 fluidly coupled to the cap-side chamber 110 of the actuator 102 via the second fluid conduit 118. Furthermore, the flow restrictor 120 and the check valve 122 may be fluidly coupled together in parallel. However, as shown in FIG. 9, unlike the above-describe embodiments, the check valve 122 may be configured as an electrically actuated valve. Specifically, as shown, the controller 152 may be communicatively coupled to the check valve 122 via a wired or wireless connection to allow control signals (e.g., indicated by dashed lines 170 in FIG. 9) to be transmitted from the controller 152 to the check valve 122. In this regard, when the row unit 20 is lifted from the operational position to the raised position, the control signals 170 may be configured to instruct the check valve 122 to open in a manner that permits the fluid exiting the cap-side chamber 110 to bypass the flow restrictor 120 and flow unobstructed through the check valve 122 toward the reservoir 114. Conversely, when the row unit 20 is at the operational position, the control signals 170 may be configured to instruct the check valve 122 to close, thereby directing all fluid exiting the cap-side chamber 110 into the flow restrictor 120.
item-58 at level 3: paragraph: This written description uses examples to disclose the technology, including the best mode, and also to enable any person skilled in the art to practice the technology, including making and using any devices or systems and performing any incorporated methods. The patentable scope of the technology is defined by the claims, and may include other examples that occur to those skilled in the art. Such other examples are intended to be within the scope of the claims if they include structural elements that do not differ from the literal language of the claims, or if they include equivalent structural elements with insubstantial differences from the literal language of the claims.
item-59 at level 2: section_header: CLAIMS
item-60 at level 3: paragraph: 1. A system for controlling an operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement, the system comprising: a toolbar; a row unit adjustably mounted on the toolbar; a fluid-driven actuator configured to adjust a position of the row unit relative to the toolbar, the fluid-driven actuator defining first and second fluid chambers; a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber, the flow restrictor being configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the first fluid chamber in a manner that provides damping to the row unit; and a valve fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber, the valve further being fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor in a parallel relationship such that the valve is configured to permit the fluid exiting the first fluid chamber to flow through the flow restrictor and the fluid entering the first fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.
item-61 at level 3: paragraph: 2. The system of claim 1, wherein, when fluid is supplied to the second fluid chamber, the valve is configured to permit fluid exiting the first fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.
item-62 at level 3: paragraph: 3. The system of claim 1, wherein the valve is fluidly actuated.
item-63 at level 3: paragraph: 4. The system of claim 3, further comprising: a fluid line configured to supply the fluid to the second fluid chamber, the fluid line being fluidly coupled to the valve such that, when the fluid flows through the fluid line to the second fluid chamber, the valve opens in a manner that permits the fluid exiting first fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.
item-64 at level 3: paragraph: 5. The system of claim 1, wherein the valve is electrically actuated.
item-65 at level 3: paragraph: 6. The system of claim 1, wherein the flow restrictor defines a throat having a fixed size.
item-66 at level 3: paragraph: 7. The system of claim 1, wherein the flow restrictor defines a throat having an adjustable size.
item-67 at level 3: paragraph: 8. A seed planting implement, comprising: a toolbar; a plurality of row units adjustably coupled to the toolbar, each row unit including a ground engaging tool configured to form a furrow in the soil; a plurality of fluid-driven actuators, each fluid-driven actuator being coupled between the toolbar and a corresponding row unit of the plurality of row units, each fluid-driven actuator being configured to adjust a position of the corresponding row unit relative to the toolbar, each fluid-driven actuator defining first and second fluid chambers; a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber of a first fluid-driven actuator of the plurality of fluid-driven actuators, the flow restrictor being configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the first fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator in a manner that provides damping to the corresponding row unit; and a valve fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator, the valve further being fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor in a parallel relationship such that the valve is configured to permit the fluid exiting the first fluid chamber to flow through the flow restrictor and the fluid entering the first fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.
item-68 at level 3: paragraph: 9. The seed planting implement of claim 8, wherein, when fluid is supplied to the second fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator, the valve is configured to permit fluid exiting the first fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator to bypass the flow restrictor.
item-69 at level 3: paragraph: 10. The seed planting implement of claim 8, wherein the valve is fluidly actuated.
item-70 at level 3: paragraph: 11. The seed planting implement of claim 10, further comprising: a fluid line configured to supply fluid to the second fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator, the fluid line being fluidly coupled to the valve such that, when fluid flows through the fluid line to the second fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator, the valve opens in a manner that permits the fluid exiting first fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator to bypass the flow restrictor.
item-71 at level 3: paragraph: 12. The seed planting implement of claim 8, wherein the valve is electrically actuated.
item-72 at level 3: paragraph: 13. The seed planting implement of claim 8, wherein the flow restrictor defines a throat having a fixed size.
item-73 at level 3: paragraph: 14. The seed planting implement of claim 8, wherein the flow restrictor defines a throat having an adjustable size.
item-74 at level 3: paragraph: 15. A system for providing damping to a row unit of a seed planting implement, the system comprising: a toolbar; a row unit adjustably mounted on the toolbar; a fluid-driven actuator configured to adjust a position of the row unit relative to the toolbar, the fluid-driven actuator defining a fluid chamber; and a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to the fluid chamber, the flow restrictor defining an adjustable throat configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the fluid chamber, the throat being adjustable between a first size configured to provide a first damping rate to the row unit and a second size configured to provide a second damping rate to the row unit, the first and second damping rates being different.
item-75 at level 3: paragraph: 16. The system of claim 15, wherein the throat is adjustable between the first and second damping rates based on an operator input.
item-76 at level 3: paragraph: 17. The system of claim 15, wherein the throat is adjustable between the first and second damping rates based on data received from one or more sensors on the seed planting implement.
item-77 at level 3: paragraph: 18. The system of claim 15, further comprising: a valve fluidly coupled to the fluid chamber, the valve being configured to selectively occlude the flow of fluid such that fluid exiting the fluid chamber flows through the flow restrictor and fluid entering the fluid chamber bypasses the flow restrictor.
item-78 at level 3: paragraph: 19. The system of claim 18, wherein the flow restrictor and the valve are fluidly coupled in a parallel relationship.

1137
tests/data/groundtruth/docling_v2/ipa20200022300.json Normal file
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

155
tests/data/groundtruth/docling_v2/ipa20200022300.md Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
# SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING THE OPERATION OF AN ACTUATOR MOUNTED ON A SEED PLANTING IMPLEMENT
## ABSTRACT
In one aspect, a system for controlling an operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement may include an actuator configured to adjust a position of a row unit of the seed planting implement relative to a toolbar of the seed planting implement. The system may also include a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to a fluid chamber of the actuator, with the flow restrictor being configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the fluid chamber in a manner that provides damping to the row unit. Furthermore, the system may include a valve fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor in a parallel relationship such that the valve is configured to permit the fluid exiting the fluid chamber to flow through the flow restrictor and the fluid entering the fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.
## FIELD
The present disclosure generally relates to seed planting implements and, more particularly, to systems for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement in a manner that provides damping to one or more components of the seed planting implement.
## BACKGROUND
Modern farming practices strive to increase yields of agricultural fields. In this respect, seed planting implements are towed behind a tractor or other work vehicle to deposit seeds in a field. For example, seed planting implements typically include one or more ground engaging tools or openers that form a furrow or trench in the soil. One or more dispensing devices of the seed planting implement may, in turn, deposit seeds into the furrow(s). After deposition of the seeds, a packer wheel may pack the soil on top of the deposited seeds.
In certain instances, the packer wheel may also control the penetration depth of the furrow. In this regard, the position of the packer wheel may be moved vertically relative to the associated opener(s) to adjust the depth of the furrow. Additionally, the seed planting implement includes an actuator configured to exert a downward force on the opener(s) to ensure that the opener(s) is able to penetrate the soil to the depth set by the packer wheel. However, the seed planting implement may bounce or chatter when traveling at high speeds and/or when the opener(s) encounters hard or compacted soil. As such, operators generally operate the seed planting implement with the actuator exerting more downward force on the opener(s) than is necessary in order to prevent such bouncing or chatter. Operation of the seed planting implement with excessive down pressure applied to the opener(s), however, reduces the overall stability of the seed planting implement.
Accordingly, an improved system for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on s seed planting implement to enhance the overall operation of the implement would be welcomed in the technology.
## BRIEF DESCRIPTION
Aspects and advantages of the technology will be set forth in part in the following description, or may be obvious from the description, or may be learned through practice of the technology.
In one aspect, the present subject matter is directed to a system for controlling an operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement. The system may include a toolbar and a row unit adjustably mounted on the toolbar. The system may also include a fluid-driven actuator configured to adjust a position of the row unit relative to the toolbar, with the fluid-driven actuator defining first and second fluid chambers. Furthermore, the system may include a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber, with the flow restrictor being configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the first fluid chamber in a manner that provides viscous damping to the row unit. Additionally, the system may include a valve fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber. The valve may further be fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor in a parallel relationship such that the valve is configured to permit the fluid exiting the first fluid chamber to flow through the flow restrictor and the fluid entering the first fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.
In another aspect, the present subject matter is directed to a seed planting implement including a toolbar and a plurality of row units adjustably coupled to the toolbar. Each row unit may include a ground engaging tool configured to form a furrow in the soil. The seed planting implement may also include plurality of fluid-driven actuators, with each fluid-driven actuator being coupled between the toolbar and a corresponding row unit of the plurality of row units. As such, each fluid-driven actuator may be configured to adjust a position of the corresponding row unit relative to the toolbar. Moreover, each fluid-driven actuator may define first and second fluid chambers. Furthermore, the seed planting implement may include a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber of a first fluid-driven actuator of the plurality of fluid-driven actuators. The flow restrictor may be configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the first fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator in a manner that provides viscous damping to the corresponding row unit. Additionally, the seed planting implement may include a valve fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator. The valve further may be fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor in a parallel relationship such that the valve is configured to permit the fluid exiting the first fluid chamber to flow through the flow restrictor and the fluid entering the first fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.
In a further aspect, the present subject matter is directed to a system for providing damping to a row unit of a seed planting implement. The system may include a toolbar, a row unit adjustably mounted on the toolbar, and a fluid-driven actuator configured to adjust a position of the row unit relative to the toolbar. As such, the fluid-driven actuator may define a fluid chamber. The system may also include a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to the fluid chamber. The flow restrictor may define an adjustable throat configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the fluid chamber. In this regard, the throat may be adjustable between a first size configured to provide a first damping rate to the row unit and a second size configured to provide a second damping rate to the row unit, with the first and second damping rates being different.
These and other features, aspects and advantages of the present technology will become better understood with reference to the following description and appended claims. The accompanying drawings, which are incorporated in and constitute a part of this specification, illustrate embodiments of the technology and, together with the description, serve to explain the principles of the technology.
## BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
A full and enabling disclosure of the present technology, including the best mode thereof, directed to one of ordinary skill in the art, is set forth in the specification, which makes reference to the appended figures, in which:
FIG. 1 illustrates a perspective view of one embodiment of a seed planting implement in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;
FIG. 2 illustrates a side view of one embodiment of a row unit suitable for use with a seed planting implement in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;
FIG. 3 illustrates a schematic view of one embodiment of a system for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;
FIG. 4 illustrates a cross-sectional view of one embodiment of a flow restrictor suitable for use in the system shown in FIG. 3, particularly illustrating the flow restrictor defining a throat having a fixed size in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;
FIG. 5 illustrates a cross-sectional view of another embodiment of a flow restrictor suitable for use in the system shown in FIG. 3, particularly illustrating the flow restrictor defining a throat having an adjustable size in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;
FIG. 6 illustrates a simplified cross-sectional view of the flow restrictor shown in FIG. 5, particularly illustrating the throat having a first size configured to provide a first damping rate in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;
FIG. 7 illustrates a simplified cross-sectional view of the flow restrictor shown in FIG. 5, particularly illustrating the throat having a second size configured to provide a second damping rate in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;
FIG. 8 illustrates a cross-sectional view of another embodiment of a system for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter, particularly illustrating the system including a fluidly actuated check valve; and
FIG. 9 illustrates a cross-sectional view of a further embodiment of a system for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter, particularly illustrating the system including an electrically actuated check valve.
Repeat use of reference characters in the present specification and drawings is intended to represent the same or analogous features or elements of the present technology.
## DETAILED DESCRIPTION
Reference now will be made in detail to embodiments of the invention, one or more examples of which are illustrated in the drawings. Each example is provided by way of explanation of the invention, not limitation of the invention. In fact, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that various modifications and variations can be made in the present invention without departing from the scope or spirit of the invention. For instance, features illustrated or described as part of one embodiment can be used with another embodiment to yield a still further embodiment. Thus, it is intended that the present invention covers such modifications and variations as come within the scope of the appended claims and their equivalents.
In general, the present subject matter is directed to systems for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement. Specifically, the disclosed systems may be configured to control the operation of the actuator in a manner that provides damping to one or more components of the seed planting implement. For example, in several embodiments, the seed planting implement may include a toolbar and one or more row units adjustably coupled to the toolbar. One or more fluid-driven actuators of the seed planting implement may be configured to control and/or adjust the position of the row unit(s) relative to the toolbar. Furthermore, a flow restrictor may be fluidly coupled to a fluid chamber of the actuator and configured to reduce the rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the fluid chamber so as to provide viscous damping to the row unit(s). In this regard, when the row unit(s) moves relative to the toolbar (e.g., when the row unit contacts a rock or other impediment in the soil), the flow restrictor may be configured to reduce the relative speed and/or displacement of such movement, thereby damping the movement of the row unit(s) relative to the toolbar.
In one embodiment, the flow restrictor may be configured to provide a variable damping rate to the component(s) of the seed planting implement. Specifically, in such embodiment, the flow restrictor may be configured as an adjustable valve having one or more components that may be adjusted to change the size of a fluid passage or throat defined by the valve. In this regard, changing the throat size of the valve varies the rate at which the fluid may exit the fluid chamber of the actuator, thereby adjusting the damping rate provided by the disclosed system. For example, adjusting the valve so as to increase the size of the throat may allow the fluid to exit the fluid chamber more quickly, thereby reducing the damping rate of the system. Conversely, adjusting the valve so as to decrease the size of the throat may allow the fluid to exit the fluid chamber more slowly, thereby increasing the damping rate of the system.
In accordance with aspects of the present subject matter, the system may further include a check valve fluidly coupled to the fluid chamber of the actuator. Specifically, in several embodiments, the check valve may also be fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor in a parallel relationship. As such, the check valve may be configured to direct the fluid exiting the fluid chamber of the actuator (e.g., when one of the row units hits a rock) to flow through the flow restrictor, thereby reducing the relative speed and/or displacement between the row unit(s) in the toolbar. Furthermore, the check valve may be configured to permit the fluid entering the fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor. For example, the fluid may return to the fluid chamber as the row unit(s) returns to its initial position following contact with the rock. In this regard, allowing the returning fluid to bypass the flow restrictor may increase the rate at which the fluid flows back into the fluid chamber, thereby further increasing the damping provided by the disclosed system.
Referring now to FIG. 1, a perspective view of one embodiment of a seed planting implement 10 is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. As shown in FIG. 1, the implement 10 may include a laterally extending toolbar or frame assembly 12 connected at its middle to a forwardly extending tow bar 14 to allow the implement 10 to be towed by a work vehicle (not shown), such as an agricultural tractor, in a direction of travel (e.g., as indicated by arrow 16). The toolbar 12 may generally be configured to support a plurality of tool frames 18. Each tool frame 18 may, in turn, be configured to support a plurality of row units 20. As will be described below, each row unit 20 may include one or more ground engaging tools configured to excavate a furrow or trench in the soil.
It should be appreciated that, for purposes of illustration, only a portion of the row units 20 of the implement 10 have been shown in FIG. 1. In general, the implement 10 may include any number of row units 20, such as six, eight, twelve, sixteen, twenty-four, thirty-two, or thirty-six row units. In addition, it should be appreciated that the lateral spacing between row units 20 may be selected based on the type of crop being planted. For example, the row units 20 may be spaced approximately thirty inches from one another for planting corn, and approximately fifteen inches from one another for planting soybeans.
It should also be appreciated that the configuration of the implement 10 described above and shown in FIG. 1 is provided only to place the present subject matter in an exemplary field of use. Thus, it should be appreciated that the present subject matter may be readily adaptable to any manner of implement configuration.
Referring now to FIG. 2, a side view of one embodiment of a row unit 20 is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. As shown, the row unit 20 is configured as a hoe opener row unit. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the row unit 20 may be configured as a disc opener row unit or any other suitable type of seed planting unit. Furthermore, it should be appreciated that, although the row unit 20 will generally be described in the context of the implement 10 shown in FIG. 1, the row unit 20 may generally be configured to be installed on any suitable seed planting implement having any suitable implement configuration.
As shown, the row unit 20 may be adjustably coupled to one of the tool frames 18 of the implement 10 by a suitable linkage assembly 22. For example, in one embodiment, the linkage assembly 22 may include a mounting bracket 24 coupled to the tool frame 18. Furthermore, the linkage assembly 22 may include first and second linkage members 26, 28. One end of each linkage member 26, 28 may be pivotably coupled to the mounting bracket 24, while an opposed end of each linkage member 26, 28 may be pivotally coupled to a support member 30 of the row unit 20. In this regard, the linkage assembly 22 may form a four bar linkage with the support member 30 that permits relative pivotable movement between the row unit 20 and the associated tool frame 18. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the row unit 20 may be adjustably coupled to the tool frame 18 or the toolbar 12 via any other suitable linkage assembly. Furthermore, it should be appreciated that, in further embodiments the linkage assembly 22 may couple the row unit 20 directly to the toolbar 12.
Furthermore, the support member 30 may be configured to support one or more components of the row unit 20. For example, in several embodiments, a ground engaging shank 32 may be mounted or otherwise supported on support member 22. As shown, the shank 32 may include an opener 34 configured to excavate a furrow or trench in the soil as the implement 10 moves in the direction of travel 12 to facilitate deposition of a flowable granular or particulate-type agricultural product, such as seed, fertilizer, and/or the like. Moreover, the row unit 20 may include a packer wheel 36 configured to roll along the soil and close the furrow after deposition of the agricultural product. In one embodiment, the packer wheel 36 may be coupled to the support member 30 by an arm 38. It should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, any other suitable component(s) may be supported on or otherwise coupled to the support member 30. For example, the row unit 20 may include a ground engaging disc opener (not shown) in lieu of the ground engaging shank 32.
Additionally, in several embodiments, a fluid-driven actuator 102 of the implement 10 may be configured to adjust the position of one or more components of the row unit 20 relative to the tool frame 18. For example, in one embodiment, a rod 104 of the actuator 102 may be coupled to the shank 32 (e.g., the end of the shank 32 opposed from the opener 34), while a cylinder 106 of the actuator 102 may be coupled to the mounting bracket 24. As such, the rod 104 may be configured to extend and/or retract relative to the cylinder 106 to adjust the position of the shank 32 relative to the tool frame 18, which, in turn, adjusts the force being applied to the shank 32. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the rod 104 may be coupled to the mounting bracket 24, while the cylinder 106 may be coupled to the shank 32. Furthermore, it should be appreciated that, in further embodiments, the actuator 102 may be coupled to any other suitable component of the row unit 20 and/or directly to the toolbar 12.
Moreover, it should be appreciated that the configuration of the row unit 20 described above and shown in FIG. 2 is provided only to place the present subject matter in an exemplary field of use. Thus, it should be appreciated that the present subject matter may be readily adaptable to any manner of seed planting unit configuration.
Referring now to FIG. 3, a schematic view of one embodiment of a system 100 for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. In general, the system 100 will be described herein with reference to the seed planting implement 10 and the row unit 20 described above with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. However, it should be appreciated by those of ordinary skill in the art that the disclosed system 100 may generally be utilized with seed planting implements having any other suitable implement configuration and/or seed planting units having any other suitable unit configuration.
As shown in FIG. 3, the system 100 may include a fluid-driven actuator, such as the actuator 102 of the row unit 20 described above with reference to FIG. 2. As shown, the actuator 102 may correspond to a hydraulic actuator. Thus, in several embodiments, the actuator 102 may include a piston 108 housed within the cylinder 106. One end of the rod 104 may be coupled to the piston 108, while an opposed end of the rod 104 may extend outwardly from the cylinder 106. Additionally, the actuator 102 may include a cap-side chamber 110 and a rod-side chamber 112 defined within the cylinder 106. As is generally understood, by regulating the pressure of the fluid supplied to one or both of the cylinder chambers 110, 112, the actuation of the rod 104 may be controlled. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the actuator 102 may be configured as any other suitable type of actuator, such as a pneumatic actuator. Furthermore, it should be appreciated that, in further embodiments, the system 100 may include any other suitable number of fluid-driven actuators, such as additional actuators 102 mounted on the implement 10.
Furthermore, the system 100 may include various components configured to provide fluid (e.g., hydraulic oil) to the cylinder chambers 110, 112 of the actuator 102. For example, in several embodiments, the system 100 may include a fluid reservoir 114 and first and second fluid conduits 116, 118. As shown, a first fluid conduit 116 may extend between and fluidly couple the reservoir 114 and the rod-side chamber 112 of the actuator 102. Similarly, a second fluid conduit 118 may extend between and fluidly couple the reservoir 114 and the cap-side chamber 110 of the actuator 102. Additionally, a pump 115 and a remote switch 117 or other valve(s) may be configured to control the flow of the fluid between the reservoir 114 and the cylinder chambers 110, 112 of the actuator 102. In one embodiment, the reservoir 114, the pump 115, and the remote switch 117 may be mounted on the work vehicle (not shown) configured to tow the implement 10. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the reservoir 114, the pump 115, and/or the remote switch 117 may be mounted on the implement 10. Furthermore, it should be appreciated that the system 100 may include any other suit component(s) configured to control the flow of fluid between the reservoir and the actuator 102.
In several embodiments, the system 100 may also include a flow restrictor 120 that is fluidly coupled to the cap-side chamber 110. As such, the flow restrictor 120 may be provided in series with the second fluid conduit 118. As will be described below, the flow restrictor 120 may be configured to reduce the flow rate of the fluid exiting the cap-side chamber 110 in a manner that provides damping to one or more components of the implement 10. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the flow restrictor 120 may be fluidly coupled to the rod-side chamber 120 such that the flow restrictor 120 is provided in series with the first fluid conduit 116.
Additionally, in several embodiments, the system 100 may include a check valve 122 that is fluidly coupled to the cap-side chamber 110 and provided in series with the second fluid conduit 118. As shown, the check valve 122 may be fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor 120 in parallel. In this regard, the check valve 122 may be provided in series with a first branch 124 of the second fluid conduit 118, while the flow restrictor 120 may be provided in series with a second branch 126 of the second fluid conduit 118. As such, the check valve 122 may be configured to allow the fluid to flow through the first branch 124 of the second fluid conduit 118 from the reservoir 114 to the cap-side chamber 110. However, the check valve 122 may be configured to occlude or prevent the fluid from flowing through the first branch 124 of the second fluid conduit 118 from the cap-side chamber 110 to the reservoir 114. In this regard, the check valve 122 directs all of the fluid exiting the cap-side chamber 110 into the flow restrictor 120. Conversely, the check valve 122 permits the fluid flowing to the cap-side chamber 110 to bypass the flow restrictor 120. As will be described below, such configuration facilitates damping of one or more components of the implement 10. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the check valve 122 may be fluidly coupled to the rod-side chamber 112 in combination with the flow restrictor 120 such that the check valve 122 is provided in series with the first fluid conduit 116.
As indicated above, the system 100 may generally be configured to provide viscous damping to one or more components of the implement 10. For example, when a ground engaging tool of the implement 10, such as the shank 32, contacts a rock or other impediment in the soil, the corresponding row unit 20 may pivot relative to the corresponding tool frame 18 and/or the toolbar 12 against the down pressure load applied to the row unit 20 by the corresponding actuator 102. In several embodiments, such movement may cause the rod 104 of the actuator 102 to retract into the cylinder 106, thereby moving the piston 108 in a manner that decreases the volume of the cap-side chamber 110. In such instances, some of the fluid present within the cap-side chamber 110 may exit and flow into the second fluid conduit 118 toward the reservoir 114. The check valve 122 may prevent the fluid exiting the cap-side chamber 110 from flowing through the first branch 124 of the second fluid conduit 118. As such, all fluid exiting the cap-side chamber 110 may be directed into the second branch 126 and through the flow restrictor 120. As indicated above, the flow restrictor 120 reduces or limits the rate at which the fluid may flow through the second fluid conduit 118 so as to reduce the rate at which the fluid may exit the cap-side chamber 110. In this regard, the speed at which and/or the amount that the rod 104 retracts into the cylinder 106 when the shank 32 contacts a soil impediment may be reduced (e.g., because of the reduced rate at which the fluid is discharged from the cap-side chamber 110), thereby damping the movement of the row unit 20 relative to the corresponding tool frame 18 and/or the toolbar 12. Furthermore, after the initial retraction of the rod 104 into the cylinder 106, the piston 108 may then move in a manner that increases the volume of the cap-side chamber 110, thereby extending the rod 104 from the cylinder 106. In such instances, fluid present within the reservoir 114 and the second fluid conduit 118 may be drawn back into the cap-side chamber 110. As indicated above, the check valve 122 may permit the fluid within the second fluid conduit 118 to bypass the flow restrictor 120 and flow unobstructed through the first branch 124, thereby maximizing the rate at which the fluid returns to the cap-side chamber 110. Increasing the rate at which the fluid returns to the cap-side chamber 110 may decrease the time that the row unit 20 is displaced relative to the tool frame 18, thereby further damping of the row unit 20 relative to the corresponding tool frame 18 and/or the toolbar 12.
Referring now to FIG. 4, a cross-sectional view of one embodiment of the flow restrictor 120 is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. For example, in the illustrated embodiment, the flow restrictor 120 may include a restrictor body 128 coupled to the second branch 126 of the second fluid conduit 118, with the restrictor body 128, in turn, defining a fluid passage 130 extending therethrough. Furthermore, the flow restrictor 120 may include an orifice plate 132 extending inward from the restrictor body 128 into the fluid passage 130. As shown, the orifice plate 132 may define a central aperture or throat 134 extending therethrough. In general, the size (e.g., the area, diameter, etc.) of the throat 134 may be smaller than the size of the fluid passage 130 so as to reduce the flow rate of the fluid through the flow restrictor 120. It should be appreciated that, in the illustrated embodiment, the throat 134 has a fixed size such that the throat 134 provides a fixed or constant backpressure for a given fluid flow rate. In this regard, in such embodiment, a fixed or constant damping rate is provided by the system 100. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the flow restrictor 120 may have any other suitable configuration that reduces the flow rate of the fluid flowing therethrough.
Referring now to FIG. 5, a cross-sectional view of another embodiment of the flow restrictor 120 is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. As shown, the flow restrictor 120 may generally be configured the same as or similar to that described above with reference to FIG. 4. For instance, the flow restrictor 120 may define the throat 134, which is configured to reduce the flow rate of the fluid through the flow restrictor 120. However, as shown in FIG. 5, unlike the above-describe embodiment, the size (e.g., the area, diameter, etc.) of the throat 134 is adjustable. For example, in such embodiment, the flow restrictor 120 may be configured as an adjustable valve 136. As shown, the valve 136 may include a valve body 138 coupled to the second branch 126 of the second fluid conduit 118, a shaft 140 rotatably coupled to the valve body 138, a disc 142 coupled to the shaft 140, and an actuator 144 (e.g., a suitable electric motor) coupled to the shaft 140. As such, the actuator 144 may be configured to rotate the shaft 140 and the disc 142 relative to the valve body 138 (e.g., as indicated by arrow 146 in FIG. 5) to change the size of the throat 134 defined between the disc 142 and the valve body 138. Although the valve 136 is configured as a butterfly valve in FIG. 5, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the valve 136 may be configured as any other suitable type of valve or adjustable flow restrictor. For example, in one embodiment, the valve 136 may be configured as a suitable ball valve.
In accordance with aspects of the present disclosure, by adjusting the size of the throat 134, the system 100 may be able to provide variable damping rates. In general, the size of the throat 134 may be indicative of the amount of damping provided by the system 100. For example, in several embodiments, the disc 142 may be adjustable between a first position shown in FIG. 6 and a second position shown in FIG. 7. More specifically, when the disc 142 is at the first position, the throat 134 defines a first size (e.g., as indicated by arrow 148 in FIG. 6), thereby providing a first damping rate. Conversely, when the disc 142 is at the second position, the throat 134 defines a second size (e.g., as indicated by arrow 150 in FIG. 7), thereby providing a second damping rate. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the first distance 148 is larger than the second distance 150. In such instance, the system 100 provides greater damping when the throat 134 is adjusted to the first size than when the throat 134 is adjusted to the second size. It should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the disc 142 may be adjustable between any other suitable positions that provide any other suitable damping rates. For example, the disc 142 may be adjustable to a plurality of different positions defined between the fully opened and fully closed positions of the valve, thereby providing for a corresponding number of different damping rates. Furthermore, it should be appreciated that the disc 142 may be continuously adjustable or adjustable between various discrete positions.
Referring back to FIG. 5, a controller 152 of the system 100 may be configured to electronically control the operation of one or more components of the valve 138, such as the actuator 144. In general, the controller 152 may comprise any suitable processor-based device known in the art, such as a computing device or any suitable combination of computing devices. Thus, in several embodiments, the controller 152 may include one or more processor(s) 154 and associated memory device(s) 156 configured to perform a variety of computer-implemented functions. As used herein, the term “processor” refers not only to integrated circuits referred to in the art as being included in a computer, but also refers to a controller, a microcontroller, a microcomputer, a programmable logic controller (PLC), an application specific integrated circuit, and other programmable circuits. Additionally, the memory device(s) 156 of the controller 152 may generally comprise memory element(s) including, but not limited to, a computer readable medium (e.g., random access memory (RAM)), a computer readable non-volatile medium (e.g., a flash memory), a floppy disk, a compact disc-read only memory (CD-ROM), a magneto-optical disk (MOD), a digital versatile disc (DVD) and/or other suitable memory elements. Such memory device(s) 156 may generally be configured to store suitable computer-readable instructions that, when implemented by the processor(s) 154, configure the controller 152 to perform various computer-implemented functions. In addition, the controller 152 may also include various other suitable components, such as a communications circuit or module, one or more input/output channels, a data/control bus and/or the like.
It should be appreciated that the controller 152 may correspond to an existing controller of the implement 10 or associated work vehicle (not shown) or the controller 152 may correspond to a separate processing device. For instance, in one embodiment, the controller 152 may form all or part of a separate plug-in module that may be installed within the implement 10 or associated work vehicle to allow for the disclosed system and method to be implemented without requiring additional software to be uploaded onto existing control devices of the implement 10 or associated work vehicle.
Furthermore, in one embodiment, a user interface 158 of the system 100 may be communicatively coupled to the controller 152 via a wired or wireless connection to allow feedback signals (e.g., as indicated by dashed line 160 in FIG. 5) to be transmitted from the controller 152 to the user interface 158. More specifically, the user interface 158 may be configured to receive an input from an operator of the implement 10 or the associated work vehicle, such as an input associated with a desired damping characteristic(s) to be provided by the system 100. As such, the user interface 158 may include one or more input devices (not shown), such as touchscreens, keypads, touchpads, knobs, buttons, sliders, switches, mice, microphones, and/or the like. In addition, some embodiments of the user interface 158 may include one or more one or more feedback devices (not shown), such as display screens, speakers, warning lights, and/or the like, which are configured to communicate such feedback from the controller 152 to the operator of the implement 10. However, in alternative embodiments, the user interface 158 may have any suitable configuration.
Moreover, in one embodiment, one or more sensors 162 of the system 100 may be communicatively coupled to the controller 152 via a wired or wireless connection to allow sensor data (e.g., as indicated by dashed line 164 in FIG. 5) to be transmitted from the sensor(s) 162 to the controller 152. For example, in one embodiment, the sensor(s) 162 may include a location sensor, such as a GNSS-based sensor, that is configured to detect a parameter associated with the location of the implement 10 or associated work vehicle within the field. In another embodiment, the sensor(s) 162 may include a speed sensor, such as a Hall Effect sensor, that is configured to detect a parameter associated with the speed at which the implement 10 is moved across the field. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the sensor(s) 162 may include any suitable sensing device(s) configured to detect any suitable operating parameter of the implement 10 and/or the associated work vehicle.
In several embodiments, the controller 152 may be configured to control the operation of the valve 136 based on the feedback signals 160 received from the user interface 158 and/or the sensor data 164 received from the sensor(s) 162. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the controller 152 may be communicatively coupled to the actuator 144 of the valve 136 via a wired or wireless connection to allow control signals (e.g., indicated by dashed lines 166 in FIG. 5) to be transmitted from the controller 152 to the actuator 144. Such control signals 166 may be configured to regulate the operation of the actuator 144 to adjust the position of the disc 142 relative to the valve body 138, such as by moving the disc 142 along the direction 146 between the first position (FIG. 6) and the second position (FIG. 7). For example, the feedback signals 116 received by the controller 152 may be indicative that the operator desires to adjust the damping provided by the system 100. Furthermore, upon receipt of the sensor data 164 (e.g., data indicative of the location and/or speed of the implement 10), the controller 152 may be configured to determine that the damping rate of the system 100 should be adjusted. In either instance, the controller 152 may be configured to transmit the control signals 166 to the actuator 144, with such control signals 166 being configured to control the operation of the actuator 144 to adjust the position of the disc 142 to provide the desired damping rate. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the controller 152 may be configured to control the operation of the valve 136 based on any other suitable input(s) and/or parameter(s).
Referring now to FIG. 8, a schematic view of another embodiment of the system 100 is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. As shown, the system 100 may generally be configured the same as or similar to that described above with reference to FIG. 3. For instance, the system 100 may include the flow restrictor 120 and the check valve 122 fluidly coupled to the cap-side chamber 110 of the actuator 102 via the second fluid conduit 118. Furthermore, the flow restrictor 120 and the check valve 122 may be fluidly coupled together in parallel. However, as shown in FIG. 8, unlike the above-describe embodiment, the check valve 122 may be configured as a pilot-operated or fluid actuated three-way valve that is fluidly coupled to the first fluid conduit 116 by a pilot conduit 168.
In general, when the row unit 20 is lifted from an operational position relative to the ground to a raised position relative to the ground, it may be desirable for fluid to exit the cap-side chamber 110 without its flow rate being limited by the flow restrictor 120. For example, permitting such fluid to bypass the flow restrictor 120 may reduce the time required to lift the row unit 20 from the operational position to the raised position. More specifically, when lifting the row unit 20 from the operational position to the raised position, a pump (not shown) may pump fluid through the first fluid conduit 116 from the reservoir 114 to the rod-side chamber 112 of the actuator 102, thereby retracting the rod 104 into the cylinder 106. This may, in turn, discharge fluid from the cap-side chamber 110 into the second fluid conduit 118. As described above, the check valve 122 may generally be configured to direct all fluid exiting the cap-side chamber 110 into the flow restrictor 120. However, in the configuration of the system 100 shown in FIG. 8, when lifting the row unit 20 to the raised position, the pilot conduit 168 supplies fluid flowing through the first fluid conduit 116 to the check valve 122. The fluid received from the pilot conduit 168 may, in turn, actuate suitable component(s) of the check valve 122 (e.g., a diaphragm(s), a spring(s), and/or the like) in a manner that causes the check valve 122 to open, thereby permitting the fluid exiting the cap-side chamber 110 to bypass the flow restrictor 120 and flow unobstructed through the check valve 122 toward the reservoir 114. Conversely, when the row unit 20 is at the operational position, the check valve 122 may be closed, thereby directing all fluid exiting the cap-side chamber 110 into the flow restrictor 120.
Referring now to FIG. 9, a schematic view of a further embodiment of the system 100 is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. As shown, the system 100 may generally be configured the same as or similar to that described above with reference to FIGS. 3 and 8. For instance, the system 100 may include the flow restrictor 120 and the check valve 122 fluidly coupled to the cap-side chamber 110 of the actuator 102 via the second fluid conduit 118. Furthermore, the flow restrictor 120 and the check valve 122 may be fluidly coupled together in parallel. However, as shown in FIG. 9, unlike the above-describe embodiments, the check valve 122 may be configured as an electrically actuated valve. Specifically, as shown, the controller 152 may be communicatively coupled to the check valve 122 via a wired or wireless connection to allow control signals (e.g., indicated by dashed lines 170 in FIG. 9) to be transmitted from the controller 152 to the check valve 122. In this regard, when the row unit 20 is lifted from the operational position to the raised position, the control signals 170 may be configured to instruct the check valve 122 to open in a manner that permits the fluid exiting the cap-side chamber 110 to bypass the flow restrictor 120 and flow unobstructed through the check valve 122 toward the reservoir 114. Conversely, when the row unit 20 is at the operational position, the control signals 170 may be configured to instruct the check valve 122 to close, thereby directing all fluid exiting the cap-side chamber 110 into the flow restrictor 120.
This written description uses examples to disclose the technology, including the best mode, and also to enable any person skilled in the art to practice the technology, including making and using any devices or systems and performing any incorporated methods. The patentable scope of the technology is defined by the claims, and may include other examples that occur to those skilled in the art. Such other examples are intended to be within the scope of the claims if they include structural elements that do not differ from the literal language of the claims, or if they include equivalent structural elements with insubstantial differences from the literal language of the claims.
## CLAIMS
1. A system for controlling an operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement, the system comprising: a toolbar; a row unit adjustably mounted on the toolbar; a fluid-driven actuator configured to adjust a position of the row unit relative to the toolbar, the fluid-driven actuator defining first and second fluid chambers; a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber, the flow restrictor being configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the first fluid chamber in a manner that provides damping to the row unit; and a valve fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber, the valve further being fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor in a parallel relationship such that the valve is configured to permit the fluid exiting the first fluid chamber to flow through the flow restrictor and the fluid entering the first fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.
2. The system of claim 1, wherein, when fluid is supplied to the second fluid chamber, the valve is configured to permit fluid exiting the first fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.
3. The system of claim 1, wherein the valve is fluidly actuated.
4. The system of claim 3, further comprising: a fluid line configured to supply the fluid to the second fluid chamber, the fluid line being fluidly coupled to the valve such that, when the fluid flows through the fluid line to the second fluid chamber, the valve opens in a manner that permits the fluid exiting first fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.
5. The system of claim 1, wherein the valve is electrically actuated.
6. The system of claim 1, wherein the flow restrictor defines a throat having a fixed size.
7. The system of claim 1, wherein the flow restrictor defines a throat having an adjustable size.
8. A seed planting implement, comprising: a toolbar; a plurality of row units adjustably coupled to the toolbar, each row unit including a ground engaging tool configured to form a furrow in the soil; a plurality of fluid-driven actuators, each fluid-driven actuator being coupled between the toolbar and a corresponding row unit of the plurality of row units, each fluid-driven actuator being configured to adjust a position of the corresponding row unit relative to the toolbar, each fluid-driven actuator defining first and second fluid chambers; a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber of a first fluid-driven actuator of the plurality of fluid-driven actuators, the flow restrictor being configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the first fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator in a manner that provides damping to the corresponding row unit; and a valve fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator, the valve further being fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor in a parallel relationship such that the valve is configured to permit the fluid exiting the first fluid chamber to flow through the flow restrictor and the fluid entering the first fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.
9. The seed planting implement of claim 8, wherein, when fluid is supplied to the second fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator, the valve is configured to permit fluid exiting the first fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator to bypass the flow restrictor.
10. The seed planting implement of claim 8, wherein the valve is fluidly actuated.
11. The seed planting implement of claim 10, further comprising: a fluid line configured to supply fluid to the second fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator, the fluid line being fluidly coupled to the valve such that, when fluid flows through the fluid line to the second fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator, the valve opens in a manner that permits the fluid exiting first fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator to bypass the flow restrictor.
12. The seed planting implement of claim 8, wherein the valve is electrically actuated.
13. The seed planting implement of claim 8, wherein the flow restrictor defines a throat having a fixed size.
14. The seed planting implement of claim 8, wherein the flow restrictor defines a throat having an adjustable size.
15. A system for providing damping to a row unit of a seed planting implement, the system comprising: a toolbar; a row unit adjustably mounted on the toolbar; a fluid-driven actuator configured to adjust a position of the row unit relative to the toolbar, the fluid-driven actuator defining a fluid chamber; and a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to the fluid chamber, the flow restrictor defining an adjustable throat configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the fluid chamber, the throat being adjustable between a first size configured to provide a first damping rate to the row unit and a second size configured to provide a second damping rate to the row unit, the first and second damping rates being different.
16. The system of claim 15, wherein the throat is adjustable between the first and second damping rates based on an operator input.
17. The system of claim 15, wherein the throat is adjustable between the first and second damping rates based on data received from one or more sensors on the seed planting implement.
18. The system of claim 15, further comprising: a valve fluidly coupled to the fluid chamber, the valve being configured to selectively occlude the flow of fluid such that fluid exiting the fluid chamber flows through the flow restrictor and fluid entering the fluid chamber bypasses the flow restrictor.
19. The system of claim 18, wherein the flow restrictor and the valve are fluidly coupled in a parallel relationship.

105
tests/data/groundtruth/docling_v2/pa20010031492.itxt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
item-0 at level 0: unspecified: group _root_
item-1 at level 1: title: Assay reagent
item-2 at level 2: section_header: ABSTRACT
item-3 at level 3: paragraph: A cell-derived assay reagent prepared from cells which have been killed by treatment with an antibiotic selected from the bleomycin-phleomycin family of antibiotics but which retain a signal-generating metabolic activity such as bioluminescence.
item-4 at level 2: paragraph: This application is a continuation of PCT/GB99/01730, filed Jun. 1, 1999 designating the United States (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference) and claiming priority from British application serial no. 9811845.8, filed Jun. 2, 1998.
item-5 at level 2: paragraph: The invention relates to a cell-derived assay reagent, in particular to an assay reagent prepared from cells which have been killed but which retain a signal-generating metabolic activity such as bioluminescence and also to assay methods using the cell-derived reagent such as, for example, toxicity testing methods.
item-6 at level 2: paragraph: The use of bacteria with a signal-generating metabolic activity as indicators of toxicity is well established. UK patent number GB 2005018 describes a method of assaying a liquid sample for toxic substances which involves contacting a suspension of bioluminescent microorganisms with a sample suspected of containing a toxic substance and observing the change in the light output of the bioluminescent organisms as a result of contact with the suspected toxic substance. Furthermore, a toxicity monitoring system embodying the same assay principle, which is manufactured and sold under the Trade Mark Microtox®, is in routine use in both environmental laboratories and for a variety of industrial applications. An improved toxicity assay method using bioluminescent bacteria, which can be used in a wider range of test conditions than the method of GB 2005018, is described in International patent application number WO 95/10767.
item-7 at level 2: paragraph: The assay methods known in the prior art may utilize naturally occurring bioluminescent organisms, including Photobacterium phosphoreum and Vibrio fischeri. However, recent interest has focused on the use of genetically modified microorganisms which have been engineered to express bioluminescence. These genetically modified bioluminescent microorganisms usually express lux genes, encoding the enzyme luciferase, which have been cloned from a naturally occurring bioluminescent microorganism (E. A. Meighen (1994) Genetics of Bacterial Bioluminescence. Ann. Rev. Genet. 28: 117-139; Stewart, G. S. A. B. Jassin, S. A. A. and Denyer, S. P. (1993), Engineering Microbial bioluminescence and biosensor applications. In Molecular Diagnosis. Eds R. Rapley and M. R. Walker Blackwell Scientific Pubs/Oxford). A process for producing genetically modified bioluminescent microorganisms expressing lux genes cloned from Vibrio harveyi is described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,581,335.
item-8 at level 2: paragraph: The use of genetically modified bioluminescent microorganisms in toxicity testing applications has several advantages over the use of naturally occurring microorganisms. For example, it is possible to engineer microorganisms with different sensitivities to a range of different toxic substances or to a single toxic substance. However, genetically modified microorganisms are subject to marketing restrictions as a result of government legislation and there is major concern relating to the deliberate release of genetically modified microorganisms into the environment as components of commercial products. This is particularly relevant with regard to toxicity testing which is often performed in the field rather than within the laboratory. The potential risk from release of potentially pathogenic genetically modified microorganisms into the environment where they may continue to grow in an uncontrollable manner has led to the introduction of legal restrictions on the use of genetically modified organisms in the field in many countries.
item-9 at level 2: paragraph: It has been suggested, to avoid the problems discussed above, to use genetically modified bioluminescent microorganisms which have been treated so that they retain the metabolic function of bioluminescence but an no longer reproduce. The use of radiation (gamma-radiation), X-rays or an electron beam) to kill bioluminescent cells whilst retaining the metabolic function of bioluminescence is demonstrated in International patent application number WO 95/07346. It is an object of the present invention to provide an alternative method of killing bioluminescent cells whilst retaining the metabolic function of bioluminescence which does not require the use of radiation and, as such, can be easily carried out without the need for specialized radiation equipment and containment facilities and without the risk to laboratory personnel associated with the use of radiation.
item-10 at level 2: paragraph: Accordingly, in a first aspect the invention provides a method of making a non-viable preparation of prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells, which preparation has a signal-generating metabolic activity, which method comprises contacting a viable culture of cells with signal-generating metabolic activity with a member of the bleomycin/phleomycin family of antibiotics.
item-11 at level 2: paragraph: Bleomycin and phleomycin are closely related glycopeptide antibiotics that are isolated in the form of copper chelates from cultures of Streptomyces verticillus. They represent a group of proteins with molecular weights ranging from 1000 to 1000 kda that are potent antibiotics and anti-tumour agents. So far more than 200 members of the bleomycin/phleomycin family have been isolated and characterised as complex basic glycopeptides. Family members resemble each other with respect to their physicochemical properties and their structure, indicating that functionally they all behave in the same manner. Furthermore, the chemical structure of the active moiety is conserved between family members and consists of 5 amino acids, L-glucose, 3-O-carbamoyl-D-mannose and a terminal cation. The various different bleomycin/phleomycin family members differ from each other in the nature of the terminal cation moiety, which is usually an amine. A preferred bleomycin/phleomycin antibiotic for use in the method of the invention is phleomycin D1, sold under the trade name Zeocin™.
item-12 at level 2: paragraph: Bleomycin and phleomycin are strong, selective inhibitors of DNA synthesis in intact bacteria and in mammalian cells. Bleomycin can be observed to attack purified DNA in vitro when incubated under appropriate conditions and analysis of the bleomycin damaged DNA shows that both single-stranded and double-stranded cleavages occur, the latter being the result of staggered single strand breaks formed approximately two base pairs apart in the complementary strands.
item-13 at level 2: paragraph: In in vivo systems, after being taken up by the cell, bleomycin enters the cell nucleus, binds to DNA (by virtue of the interaction between its positively charged terminal amine moiety and a negatively charged phosphate group of the DNA backbone) and causes strand scission. Bleomycin causes strand scission of DNA in viruses, bacteria and eukaryotic cell systems.
item-14 at level 2: paragraph: The present inventors have surprisingly found that treatment of a culture of cells with signal-generating metabolic activity with a bleomycin/phleomycin antibiotic renders the culture non-viable whilst retaining a level of signal-generating metabolic activity suitable for use in toxicity testing applications. In the context of this application the term non-viable is taken to mean that the cells are unable to reproduce. The process of rendering cells non-viable whilst retaining signal-generating metabolic activity may hereinafter be referred to as ‘inactivation’ and cells which have been rendered non-viable according to the method of the invention may be referred to as ‘inactivated’.
item-15 at level 2: paragraph: Because of the broad spectrum of action of the bleomycin/phleomycin family of antibiotics the method of the invention is equally applicable to bacterial cells and to eukaryotic cells with signal generating metabolic activity. Preferably the signal-generating metabolic activity is bioluminescence but other signal-generating metabolic activities which are reporters of toxic damage could be used with equivalent effect.
item-16 at level 2: paragraph: The method of the invention is preferred for use with bacteria or eukaryotic cells that have been genetically modified to express a signal-generating metabolic activity. The examples given below relate to E. coil which have been engineered to express bioluminescence by transformation with a plasmid carrying lux genes. The eukaryotic equivalent would be cells transfected with a vector containing nucleic acid encoding a eukaryotic luciferase enzyme (abbreviated luc) such as, for example, luciferase from the firefly Photinus pyralis. A suitable plasmid vector containing cDNA encoding firefly luciferase under the control of an SV40 viral promoter is available from Promega Corporation, Madison Wis., USA. However, in connection with the present invention it is advantageous to use recombinant cells containing the entire eukaryotic luc operon so as to avoid the need to add an exogenous substrate ( e.g. luciferin) in order to generate light output.
item-17 at level 2: paragraph: The optimum concentration of bleomycin/phleomycin antibiotic and contact time required to render a culture of cells non-viable whilst retaining a useful level of signal-generating metabolic activity may vary according to the cell type but can be readily determined by routine experiment. In general, the lower the concentration of antibiotic used the longer the contact time required for cell inactivation. In connection with the production of assay reagents for use in toxicity testing applications, it is generally advantageous to keep the concentration of antibiotic low (e.g. around 1-1.5 mg/ml) and increase the contact time for inactivation. As will be shown in Example 1, treatment with Zeocin™ at a concentration of 1.5 mg/ml for 3 to 5 hours is sufficient to completely inactivate a culture of recombinant E. coli.
item-18 at level 2: paragraph: In the case of bacteria, the contact time required to inactivate a culture of bacterial cells is found to vary according to the stage of growth of the bacterial culture at the time the antibiotic is administered. Although the method of the invention can be used on bacteria at all stages of growth it is generally preferable to perform the method on bacterial cells in an exponential growth phase because the optimum antibiotic contact time has been observed to be shortest when the antibiotic is administered to bacterial cells in an exponential growth phase.
item-19 at level 2: paragraph: Following treatment with bleomycin/phleomycin antibiotic the non-viable preparation of cells is preferably stabilised for ease of storage or shipment. The cells can be stabilised using known techniques such as, for example, freeze drying (lyophilization) or other cell preservation techniques known in the art. Stabilization by freeze drying has the added advantage that the freeze drying procedure itself can render cells non-viable. Thus, any cells in the preparation which remain viable after treatment of the culture with bleomycin/phleomycin antibiotic will be rendered non-viable by freeze drying. It is thought that freeze drying inactivates any remaining viable cells by enhancing the effect of antibiotic, such that sub-lethally injured cells in the culture are more sensitive to the stresses applied during freeze drying.
item-20 at level 2: paragraph: Prior to use the stabilised cell preparation is reconstituted using a reconstitution buffer to form an assay reagent. This reconstituted assay reagent may then be used directly in assays for analytes, for example in toxicity testing applications. It is preferable that the stabilised (i.e. freeze dried) assay reagent be reconstituted immediately prior to use, but after reconstitution it is generally necessary to allow sufficient time prior to use for the reconstituted reagent to reach a stable, high level of signal-generating activity. Suitable reconstitution buffers preferably contain an osmotically potent non-salt compound such as sucrose, dextran or polyethylene glycol, although salt based stabilisers may also be used.
item-21 at level 2: paragraph: Whilst the assay reagent of the invention is particularly suitable for use in toxicity testing applications it is to be understood that the invention is not limited to assay reagents for use in toxicity testing. The cell inactivation method of the invention can be used to inactivate any recombinant cells (prokaryotic or eukaryotic) with a signal generating metabolic activity that is not dependent upon cell viability.
item-22 at level 2: paragraph: In a further aspect the invention provides a method of assaying a potentially toxic analyte comprising the steps of,
item-23 at level 2: paragraph: (a) contacting a sample to be assayed for the analyte with a sample of assay reagent comprising a non-viable preparation of cells with a signal-generating metabolic activity;
item-24 at level 2: paragraph: (b) measuring the level of signal generated; and
item-25 at level 2: paragraph: (c) using the measurement obtained as an indicator of the toxicity of the analyte.
item-26 at level 2: paragraph: In a still further aspect, the invention provides a kit for performing the above-stated assay comprising an assay reagent with signal generating metabolic activity and means for contacting the assay reagent with a sample to be assayed for an analyte.
item-27 at level 2: paragraph: The analytes tested using the assay of the invention are usually toxic substances, but it is to be understood that the precise nature of the analyte to be tested is not material to the invention.
item-28 at level 2: paragraph: Toxicity is a general term used to describe an adverse effect on biological system and the term ‘toxic substances’ includes both toxicants (synthetic chemicals that are toxic) and toxins (natural poisons). Toxicity is usually expressed as an effective concentration (EC) or inhibitory concentration (IC) value. The EC/IC value is usually denoted as a percentage response e.g. EC₅₀, EC₁₀ which denotes the concentration (dose) of a particular substance which affects the designated criteria for assessing toxicity (i.e. a behavioural trait or death) in the indicated proportion of the population tested. For example, an EC₅₀ of 10 ppm indicates that 50% of the population will be affected by a concentration of 10 ppm. In the case of a toxicity assay based on the use of a bioluminescent assay reagent, the EC₅₀ value is usually the concentration of sample substance causing a 50% change in light output.
item-29 at level 2: paragraph: The present invention will be further understood by way of the following Examples with reference to the accompanying Figures in which:
item-30 at level 2: paragraph: FIG. 1 is a graph to show the effect of Zeocin™ treatment on viable count and light output of recombinant bioluminescent E. coil cells.
item-31 at level 2: paragraph: FIG. 2 is a graph to show the light output from five separate vials of reconstituted assay reagent. The assay reagent was prepared from recombinant bioluminescent E. coil exposed to 1.5 mg/ml Zeocin™ for 300 minutes. Five vials were used to reduce discrepancies resulting from vial to vial variation.
item-32 at level 2: paragraph: FIGS. 3 to 8 are graphs to show the effect of Zeocin™ treatment on the sensitivity of bioluminescent assay reagent to toxicant (ZnSO₄):
item-33 at level 2: paragraph: FIG. 3: Control cells, lag phase.
item-34 at level 2: paragraph: FIG. 4: Zeocin™ treated cells, lag phase.
item-35 at level 2: paragraph: FIG. 5: Control cells, mid-exponential growth.
item-36 at level 2: paragraph: FIG. 6: Zeocin™ treated cells, mid-exponential growth.
item-37 at level 2: paragraph: FIG. 7: Control cells, stationary phase.
item-38 at level 2: paragraph: FIG. 8: Zeocin™ treated cells, stationary phase.
item-39 at level 2: section_header: EXAMPLE 1
item-40 at level 2: section_header: (A) Inactivation of Bioluminescent E. coil Method
item-41 at level 3: paragraph: 1. Bioluminescent genetically modified E. coil strain HB101 (E. coli HB101 made bioluminescent by transformation with a plasmid carrying the lux operon of Vibrio fischeri constructed by the method of Shaw and Kado, as described in Biotechnology 4: 560-564) were grown from a frozen stock in 5 ml of low salt medium (LB (5 g/ml NaCl)+glycerol+MgSO₄) for 24 hours.
item-42 at level 3: paragraph: 2. 1 ml of the 5 ml culture was then used to inoculate 200 ml of low salt medium in a shaker flask and the resultant culture grown to an OD₆₃₀ of 0.407 (exponential growth phase).
item-43 at level 3: paragraph: 3. 50 ml of this culture was removed to a fresh sterile shaker flask (control cells).
item-44 at level 3: paragraph: 4. Zeocin™ was added to the 150 ml of culture in the original shaker flash, to a final concentration of 1.5 mg/ml. At the same time, an equivalent volume of water was added to the 50 ml culture removed from the original flask (control cells).
item-45 at level 3: paragraph: 5. The time course of cell inactivation was monitored by removing samples from the culture at 5, 60, 120, 180, 240 and 300 minutes after the addition of Zeocin™ and taking measurements of both light output (measured using a Deltatox luminometer) and viable count (per ml, determined using the method given in Example 3 below) for each of the samples. Samples of the control cells were removed at 5 and 300 minutes after the addition of water and measurements of light output and viable count taken as for the Zeocin™ treated cells.
item-46 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 1 shows the effect of Zeocin™ treatment on the light output and viable count (per ml) of recombinant bioluminescent E. coil. Zeocin™ was added to a final concentration of 1.5 mg/ml at time zero. The number of viable cells in the culture was observed to decrease with increasing contact cells with Zeocin™, the culture being completely inactivated after 3 hours. The light output from the culture was observed to decrease gradually with increasing Zeocin™ contact time.
item-47 at level 2: section_header: (B) Production of Assay Reagent
item-48 at level 3: paragraph: Five hours after the addition of Zeocin™ or water the remaining bacterial cells in the Zeocin™ treated and control cultures were harvested by the centrifugation, washed (to remove traces of Zeocin™ from the Zeocin™ treated culture), re-centrifuged and resuspended in cryoprotectant to an OD₆₃₀ of 0.25. 200 μl aliquots of the cells in cryoprotectant were dispensed into single shot vials, and freeze dried. Freeze dried samples of the Zeocin™ treated cells and control cells were reconstituted in 0.2M sucrose to form assay reagents and the light output of the assay reagents measured at various times after reconstitution.
item-49 at level 3: paragraph: The light output from assay reagent prepared from cells exposed to 1.5 mg/ml Zeocin™ for 5 hours was not significantly different to the light output from assay reagent prepared from control (Zeocin™ untreated) cells, indicating that Zeocin™ treatment does not affect the light output of the reconstituted freeze dried assay reagent. Both Zeocin™ treated and Zeocin™ untreated assay reagents produced stable light output 15 minutes after reconstitution.
item-50 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 2 shows the light output from five separate vials of reconstituted Zeocin™ treated assay reagent inactivated according to the method of Example 1(A) and processed into assay reagent as described in Example 1(B). Reconstitution solution was added at time zero and thereafter light output was observed to increase steadily before stabilising out at around 15 minutes after reconstitution. All five vials were observed to give similar light profiles after reconstitution.
item-51 at level 2: section_header: EXAMPLE 2
item-52 at level 2: section_header: Sensitivity of Zeocin™ Treated Assay Reagent to Toxicant Method
item-53 at level 3: paragraph: 1. Bioluminescent genetically modified E. coil strain HB101 (E. coli HB101 made bioluminescent by transformation with a plasmid carrying the lux operon of vibrio fischeri constructed by the method of Shaw and Kado, as described in Biotechnology 4: 560-564) was grown in fermenter as a batch culture in low salt medium (LB(5 g/ml NaCl)+glycerol+MgSO₄).
item-54 at level 3: paragraph: 2. Two aliquots of the culture were removed from the fermenter into separate sterile shaker flasks at each of three different stages of growth i.e. at OD₆₃₀ values of 0.038 (lag phase growth), 1.31 (mid-exponential phase growth) and 2.468 (stationary phase growth).
item-55 at level 3: paragraph: 3. One aliquot of culture for each of the three growth stages was inactivated by contact with Zeocin™ (1 mg Zeocin™ added per 2.5×10⁶ cells, i.e. the concentration of Zeocin™ per cell is kept constant) for 300 minutes and then processed into assay reagent by freeze drying and reconstitution, as described in part (B) of Example 1.
item-56 at level 3: paragraph: 4. An equal volume of water was added to the second aliquot of culture for each of the three growth stages and the cultures processed into assay reagent as described above.
item-57 at level 3: paragraph: 5. Samples of each of the three Zeocin™ treated and three control assay reagents were then evaluated for sensitivity to toxicant (ZnSO₄) according to the following assay protocol:
item-58 at level 3: paragraph: ZnSO₄ Sensitivity Assay
item-59 at level 3: paragraph: 1. ZnSO₄ solutions were prepared in pure water at 30, 10, 3, 1, 0.3 and 0.1 ppm. Pure water was also used as a control.
item-60 at level 3: paragraph: 2. Seven vials of each of the three Zeocin™ treated and each of the three control assay reagents (i.e. one for each of the six ZnSO₄ solutions and one for the pure water control) were reconstituted using 0.5 ml of reconstitution solution (eg 0.2M sucrose) and then left to stand at room temperature for 15 minutes to allow the light output to stabilize. Base line (time zero) readings of light output were then measured for each of the reconstituted reagents.
item-61 at level 3: paragraph: 3. 0.5 ml aliquots of each of the six ZnSO₄ solutions and the pure water control were added to separate vials of reconstituted assay reagent. This was repeated for each of the different Zeocin™ treated and control assay reagents.
item-62 at level 3: paragraph: 4. The vials were incubated at room temperature and light output readings were taken 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30 minutes after addition of ZnSO₄ solution.
item-63 at level 3: paragraph: 5. The % toxic effect for each sample was calculated as follows:
item-64 at level 3: paragraph: where: Cₒ=light in control at time zero
item-65 at level 3: paragraph: Ct=light in control at reading time
item-66 at level 3: paragraph: Sₒ=light in sample at time zero
item-67 at level 3: paragraph: St=light in sample at reading time
item-68 at level 3: paragraph: The results of toxicity assays for sensitivity to ZnSO₄ for all the Zeocin™ treated and control assay reagents are shown in FIGS. 3 to 8:
item-69 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 3: Control cells, lag phase.
item-70 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 4: Zeocin™ treated cells, lag phase.
item-71 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 5: Control cells, mid-exponential growth.
item-72 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 6: Zeocin™ treated cells, mid-exponential growth.
item-73 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 7: Control cells, stationary phase.
item-74 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 8: Zeocin™ treated cells, stationary phase.
item-75 at level 3: table with [6x3]
item-76 at level 3: paragraph: In each case, separate graphs of % toxic effect against log₁₀ concentration of ZnSO₄ were plotted on the same axes for each value of time (minutes) after addition of Zeocin™ or water. The sensitivities of the various reagents, expressed as an EC₅₀ value for 15 minutes exposed to ZnSO₄, are summarised in Table 1 below.
item-77 at level 3: paragraph: Table 1: Sensitivity of the different assay reagents to ZnSo₄ expressed as EC₅₀ values for 15 minutes exposure to ZNSO₄.
item-78 at level 3: paragraph: The results of the toxicity assays indicate that Zeocin™ treatment does not significantly affect the sensitivity of a recombinant bioluminescent E. coli derived assay reagent to ZnSO₄. Similar results could be expected with other toxic substances which have an effect on signal-generating metabolic activities.
item-79 at level 2: section_header: EXAMPLE 3
item-80 at level 2: section_header: Method to Determine Viable Count
item-81 at level 3: paragraph: 1. Samples of bacterial culture to be assayed for viable count were centrifuged at 10,000 rpm for 5 minutes to pellet the bacterial cells.
item-82 at level 3: paragraph: 2. Bacterial cells were washed by resuspending in 1 ml of M9 medium, re-centrifuged at 10,000 rpm for 5 minutes and finally re-suspended in 1 ml of M9 medium.
item-83 at level 3: paragraph: 3. Serial dilutions of the bacterial cell suspension from 10⁻¹ to 10⁻⁷ were prepared in M9 medium.
item-84 at level 3: paragraph: 4. Three separate 10 μl aliquots of each of the serial dilutions were plated out on standard agar plates and the plates incubated at 37° C.
item-85 at level 3: paragraph: 5. The number of bacterial colonies present for each of the three aliquots at each of the serial dilutions were counted and the values averaged. Viable count was calculated per ml of bacterial culture.
item-86 at level 2: section_header: CLAIMS
item-87 at level 3: paragraph: 1. A method of making a non-viable preparation of prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells, which preparation has a signal-generating metabolic activity, which method comprises contacting a viable culture of said cells having signal-generating metabolic activity with an antibiotic selected from the bleomycin/phleomycin family of antibiotics.
item-88 at level 3: paragraph: 2. The method as claimed in claim 1 wherein following contact with antibiotic, said cells are subjected to a stabilization step.
item-89 at level 3: paragraph: 3. The method as claimed in claim 2 wherein said stabilization step comprises freeze drying.
item-90 at level 3: paragraph: 4. The method as claimed in claim 1 wherein said antibiotic is phleomycin D1.
item-91 at level 3: paragraph: 5. The method as claimed in claim 5 wherein said signal-generating metabolic activity is bioluminescence.
item-92 at level 3: paragraph: 6. The method as claimed in claim 5 wherein said cells are bacteria.
item-93 at level 3: paragraph: 7. The method as claimed in claim 6 wherein said bacteria are in an exponential growth phase when contacted with said antibiotic.
item-94 at level 3: paragraph: 8. The method as claimed in claim 6 wherein said bacteria are genetically modified.
item-95 at level 3: paragraph: 9. The method as claimed in claim 8 wherein said genetically modified bacteria contain nucleic acid encoding luciferase.
item-96 at level 3: paragraph: 10. The method as claimed in claim 9 wherein said bacteria are E. coli.
item-97 at level 3: paragraph: 11. The method as claimed in claim 5 wherein said cells are eukaryotic cells.
item-98 at level 3: paragraph: 12. The method as claimed in claim 11 wherein said eukaryotic cells are genetically modified.
item-99 at level 3: paragraph: 13. The method as claimed in claim 12 wherein said genetically modified eukaryotic cells contain nucleic acid encoding luciferase.
item-100 at level 3: paragraph: 14. A method of making a non-viable preparation of prokaryotic cells, which preparation has a signal-generating metabolic activity, which method comprises contacting a viable culture of a genetically modified E. coli strain made bioluminescent by transformation with a plasmid carrying the lux operon of Vibrio fischeri with an antibiotic selected from the bleomycin/phleomycin family of antibiotics.
item-101 at level 3: paragraph: 15. The method as claimed in claim 14 wherein said cells are contacted with phleomycin D1 at a concentration of at least about 1.5 mg/ml.
item-102 at level 3: paragraph: 16. The method as claimed in claim 15 wherein said contact is maintained for at least about 3 hours.
item-103 at level 3: paragraph: 17. The method as claimed in claim 16 wherein said antibiotic-treated cells are harvested, washed and freeze-dried.
item-104 at level 1: section_header: Drawings

2029
tests/data/groundtruth/docling_v2/pa20010031492.json Normal file
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

213
tests/data/groundtruth/docling_v2/pa20010031492.md Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,213 @@
# Assay reagent
## ABSTRACT
A cell-derived assay reagent prepared from cells which have been killed by treatment with an antibiotic selected from the bleomycin-phleomycin family of antibiotics but which retain a signal-generating metabolic activity such as bioluminescence.
This application is a continuation of PCT/GB99/01730, filed Jun. 1, 1999 designating the United States (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference) and claiming priority from British application serial no. 9811845.8, filed Jun. 2, 1998.
The invention relates to a cell-derived assay reagent, in particular to an assay reagent prepared from cells which have been killed but which retain a signal-generating metabolic activity such as bioluminescence and also to assay methods using the cell-derived reagent such as, for example, toxicity testing methods.
The use of bacteria with a signal-generating metabolic activity as indicators of toxicity is well established. UK patent number GB 2005018 describes a method of assaying a liquid sample for toxic substances which involves contacting a suspension of bioluminescent microorganisms with a sample suspected of containing a toxic substance and observing the change in the light output of the bioluminescent organisms as a result of contact with the suspected toxic substance. Furthermore, a toxicity monitoring system embodying the same assay principle, which is manufactured and sold under the Trade Mark Microtox®, is in routine use in both environmental laboratories and for a variety of industrial applications. An improved toxicity assay method using bioluminescent bacteria, which can be used in a wider range of test conditions than the method of GB 2005018, is described in International patent application number WO 95/10767.
The assay methods known in the prior art may utilize naturally occurring bioluminescent organisms, including Photobacterium phosphoreum and Vibrio fischeri. However, recent interest has focused on the use of genetically modified microorganisms which have been engineered to express bioluminescence. These genetically modified bioluminescent microorganisms usually express lux genes, encoding the enzyme luciferase, which have been cloned from a naturally occurring bioluminescent microorganism (E. A. Meighen (1994) Genetics of Bacterial Bioluminescence. Ann. Rev. Genet. 28: 117-139; Stewart, G. S. A. B. Jassin, S. A. A. and Denyer, S. P. (1993), Engineering Microbial bioluminescence and biosensor applications. In Molecular Diagnosis. Eds R. Rapley and M. R. Walker Blackwell Scientific Pubs/Oxford). A process for producing genetically modified bioluminescent microorganisms expressing lux genes cloned from Vibrio harveyi is described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,581,335.
The use of genetically modified bioluminescent microorganisms in toxicity testing applications has several advantages over the use of naturally occurring microorganisms. For example, it is possible to engineer microorganisms with different sensitivities to a range of different toxic substances or to a single toxic substance. However, genetically modified microorganisms are subject to marketing restrictions as a result of government legislation and there is major concern relating to the deliberate release of genetically modified microorganisms into the environment as components of commercial products. This is particularly relevant with regard to toxicity testing which is often performed in the field rather than within the laboratory. The potential risk from release of potentially pathogenic genetically modified microorganisms into the environment where they may continue to grow in an uncontrollable manner has led to the introduction of legal restrictions on the use of genetically modified organisms in the field in many countries.
It has been suggested, to avoid the problems discussed above, to use genetically modified bioluminescent microorganisms which have been treated so that they retain the metabolic function of bioluminescence but an no longer reproduce. The use of radiation (gamma-radiation), X-rays or an electron beam) to kill bioluminescent cells whilst retaining the metabolic function of bioluminescence is demonstrated in International patent application number WO 95/07346. It is an object of the present invention to provide an alternative method of killing bioluminescent cells whilst retaining the metabolic function of bioluminescence which does not require the use of radiation and, as such, can be easily carried out without the need for specialized radiation equipment and containment facilities and without the risk to laboratory personnel associated with the use of radiation.
Accordingly, in a first aspect the invention provides a method of making a non-viable preparation of prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells, which preparation has a signal-generating metabolic activity, which method comprises contacting a viable culture of cells with signal-generating metabolic activity with a member of the bleomycin/phleomycin family of antibiotics.
Bleomycin and phleomycin are closely related glycopeptide antibiotics that are isolated in the form of copper chelates from cultures of Streptomyces verticillus. They represent a group of proteins with molecular weights ranging from 1000 to 1000 kda that are potent antibiotics and anti-tumour agents. So far more than 200 members of the bleomycin/phleomycin family have been isolated and characterised as complex basic glycopeptides. Family members resemble each other with respect to their physicochemical properties and their structure, indicating that functionally they all behave in the same manner. Furthermore, the chemical structure of the active moiety is conserved between family members and consists of 5 amino acids, L-glucose, 3-O-carbamoyl-D-mannose and a terminal cation. The various different bleomycin/phleomycin family members differ from each other in the nature of the terminal cation moiety, which is usually an amine. A preferred bleomycin/phleomycin antibiotic for use in the method of the invention is phleomycin D1, sold under the trade name Zeocin™.
Bleomycin and phleomycin are strong, selective inhibitors of DNA synthesis in intact bacteria and in mammalian cells. Bleomycin can be observed to attack purified DNA in vitro when incubated under appropriate conditions and analysis of the bleomycin damaged DNA shows that both single-stranded and double-stranded cleavages occur, the latter being the result of staggered single strand breaks formed approximately two base pairs apart in the complementary strands.
In in vivo systems, after being taken up by the cell, bleomycin enters the cell nucleus, binds to DNA (by virtue of the interaction between its positively charged terminal amine moiety and a negatively charged phosphate group of the DNA backbone) and causes strand scission. Bleomycin causes strand scission of DNA in viruses, bacteria and eukaryotic cell systems.
The present inventors have surprisingly found that treatment of a culture of cells with signal-generating metabolic activity with a bleomycin/phleomycin antibiotic renders the culture non-viable whilst retaining a level of signal-generating metabolic activity suitable for use in toxicity testing applications. In the context of this application the term non-viable is taken to mean that the cells are unable to reproduce. The process of rendering cells non-viable whilst retaining signal-generating metabolic activity may hereinafter be referred to as ‘inactivation’ and cells which have been rendered non-viable according to the method of the invention may be referred to as ‘inactivated’.
Because of the broad spectrum of action of the bleomycin/phleomycin family of antibiotics the method of the invention is equally applicable to bacterial cells and to eukaryotic cells with signal generating metabolic activity. Preferably the signal-generating metabolic activity is bioluminescence but other signal-generating metabolic activities which are reporters of toxic damage could be used with equivalent effect.
The method of the invention is preferred for use with bacteria or eukaryotic cells that have been genetically modified to express a signal-generating metabolic activity. The examples given below relate to E. coil which have been engineered to express bioluminescence by transformation with a plasmid carrying lux genes. The eukaryotic equivalent would be cells transfected with a vector containing nucleic acid encoding a eukaryotic luciferase enzyme (abbreviated luc) such as, for example, luciferase from the firefly Photinus pyralis. A suitable plasmid vector containing cDNA encoding firefly luciferase under the control of an SV40 viral promoter is available from Promega Corporation, Madison Wis., USA. However, in connection with the present invention it is advantageous to use recombinant cells containing the entire eukaryotic luc operon so as to avoid the need to add an exogenous substrate ( e.g. luciferin) in order to generate light output.
The optimum concentration of bleomycin/phleomycin antibiotic and contact time required to render a culture of cells non-viable whilst retaining a useful level of signal-generating metabolic activity may vary according to the cell type but can be readily determined by routine experiment. In general, the lower the concentration of antibiotic used the longer the contact time required for cell inactivation. In connection with the production of assay reagents for use in toxicity testing applications, it is generally advantageous to keep the concentration of antibiotic low (e.g. around 1-1.5 mg/ml) and increase the contact time for inactivation. As will be shown in Example 1, treatment with Zeocin™ at a concentration of 1.5 mg/ml for 3 to 5 hours is sufficient to completely inactivate a culture of recombinant E. coli.
In the case of bacteria, the contact time required to inactivate a culture of bacterial cells is found to vary according to the stage of growth of the bacterial culture at the time the antibiotic is administered. Although the method of the invention can be used on bacteria at all stages of growth it is generally preferable to perform the method on bacterial cells in an exponential growth phase because the optimum antibiotic contact time has been observed to be shortest when the antibiotic is administered to bacterial cells in an exponential growth phase.
Following treatment with bleomycin/phleomycin antibiotic the non-viable preparation of cells is preferably stabilised for ease of storage or shipment. The cells can be stabilised using known techniques such as, for example, freeze drying (lyophilization) or other cell preservation techniques known in the art. Stabilization by freeze drying has the added advantage that the freeze drying procedure itself can render cells non-viable. Thus, any cells in the preparation which remain viable after treatment of the culture with bleomycin/phleomycin antibiotic will be rendered non-viable by freeze drying. It is thought that freeze drying inactivates any remaining viable cells by enhancing the effect of antibiotic, such that sub-lethally injured cells in the culture are more sensitive to the stresses applied during freeze drying.
Prior to use the stabilised cell preparation is reconstituted using a reconstitution buffer to form an assay reagent. This reconstituted assay reagent may then be used directly in assays for analytes, for example in toxicity testing applications. It is preferable that the stabilised (i.e. freeze dried) assay reagent be reconstituted immediately prior to use, but after reconstitution it is generally necessary to allow sufficient time prior to use for the reconstituted reagent to reach a stable, high level of signal-generating activity. Suitable reconstitution buffers preferably contain an osmotically potent non-salt compound such as sucrose, dextran or polyethylene glycol, although salt based stabilisers may also be used.
Whilst the assay reagent of the invention is particularly suitable for use in toxicity testing applications it is to be understood that the invention is not limited to assay reagents for use in toxicity testing. The cell inactivation method of the invention can be used to inactivate any recombinant cells (prokaryotic or eukaryotic) with a signal generating metabolic activity that is not dependent upon cell viability.
In a further aspect the invention provides a method of assaying a potentially toxic analyte comprising the steps of,
(a) contacting a sample to be assayed for the analyte with a sample of assay reagent comprising a non-viable preparation of cells with a signal-generating metabolic activity;
(b) measuring the level of signal generated; and
(c) using the measurement obtained as an indicator of the toxicity of the analyte.
In a still further aspect, the invention provides a kit for performing the above-stated assay comprising an assay reagent with signal generating metabolic activity and means for contacting the assay reagent with a sample to be assayed for an analyte.
The analytes tested using the assay of the invention are usually toxic substances, but it is to be understood that the precise nature of the analyte to be tested is not material to the invention.
Toxicity is a general term used to describe an adverse effect on biological system and the term ‘toxic substances’ includes both toxicants (synthetic chemicals that are toxic) and toxins (natural poisons). Toxicity is usually expressed as an effective concentration (EC) or inhibitory concentration (IC) value. The EC/IC value is usually denoted as a percentage response e.g. EC₅₀, EC₁₀ which denotes the concentration (dose) of a particular substance which affects the designated criteria for assessing toxicity (i.e. a behavioural trait or death) in the indicated proportion of the population tested. For example, an EC₅₀ of 10 ppm indicates that 50% of the population will be affected by a concentration of 10 ppm. In the case of a toxicity assay based on the use of a bioluminescent assay reagent, the EC₅₀ value is usually the concentration of sample substance causing a 50% change in light output.
The present invention will be further understood by way of the following Examples with reference to the accompanying Figures in which:
FIG. 1 is a graph to show the effect of Zeocin™ treatment on viable count and light output of recombinant bioluminescent E. coil cells.
FIG. 2 is a graph to show the light output from five separate vials of reconstituted assay reagent. The assay reagent was prepared from recombinant bioluminescent E. coil exposed to 1.5 mg/ml Zeocin™ for 300 minutes. Five vials were used to reduce discrepancies resulting from vial to vial variation.
FIGS. 3 to 8 are graphs to show the effect of Zeocin™ treatment on the sensitivity of bioluminescent assay reagent to toxicant (ZnSO₄):
FIG. 3: Control cells, lag phase.
FIG. 4: Zeocin™ treated cells, lag phase.
FIG. 5: Control cells, mid-exponential growth.
FIG. 6: Zeocin™ treated cells, mid-exponential growth.
FIG. 7: Control cells, stationary phase.
FIG. 8: Zeocin™ treated cells, stationary phase.
## EXAMPLE 1
## (A) Inactivation of Bioluminescent E. coil Method
1. Bioluminescent genetically modified E. coil strain HB101 (E. coli HB101 made bioluminescent by transformation with a plasmid carrying the lux operon of Vibrio fischeri constructed by the method of Shaw and Kado, as described in Biotechnology 4: 560-564) were grown from a frozen stock in 5 ml of low salt medium (LB (5 g/ml NaCl)+glycerol+MgSO₄) for 24 hours.
2. 1 ml of the 5 ml culture was then used to inoculate 200 ml of low salt medium in a shaker flask and the resultant culture grown to an OD₆₃₀ of 0.407 (exponential growth phase).
3. 50 ml of this culture was removed to a fresh sterile shaker flask (control cells).
4. Zeocin™ was added to the 150 ml of culture in the original shaker flash, to a final concentration of 1.5 mg/ml. At the same time, an equivalent volume of water was added to the 50 ml culture removed from the original flask (control cells).
5. The time course of cell inactivation was monitored by removing samples from the culture at 5, 60, 120, 180, 240 and 300 minutes after the addition of Zeocin™ and taking measurements of both light output (measured using a Deltatox luminometer) and viable count (per ml, determined using the method given in Example 3 below) for each of the samples. Samples of the control cells were removed at 5 and 300 minutes after the addition of water and measurements of light output and viable count taken as for the Zeocin™ treated cells.
FIG. 1 shows the effect of Zeocin™ treatment on the light output and viable count (per ml) of recombinant bioluminescent E. coil. Zeocin™ was added to a final concentration of 1.5 mg/ml at time zero. The number of viable cells in the culture was observed to decrease with increasing contact cells with Zeocin™, the culture being completely inactivated after 3 hours. The light output from the culture was observed to decrease gradually with increasing Zeocin™ contact time.
## (B) Production of Assay Reagent
Five hours after the addition of Zeocin™ or water the remaining bacterial cells in the Zeocin™ treated and control cultures were harvested by the centrifugation, washed (to remove traces of Zeocin™ from the Zeocin™ treated culture), re-centrifuged and resuspended in cryoprotectant to an OD₆₃₀ of 0.25. 200 μl aliquots of the cells in cryoprotectant were dispensed into single shot vials, and freeze dried. Freeze dried samples of the Zeocin™ treated cells and control cells were reconstituted in 0.2M sucrose to form assay reagents and the light output of the assay reagents measured at various times after reconstitution.
The light output from assay reagent prepared from cells exposed to 1.5 mg/ml Zeocin™ for 5 hours was not significantly different to the light output from assay reagent prepared from control (Zeocin™ untreated) cells, indicating that Zeocin™ treatment does not affect the light output of the reconstituted freeze dried assay reagent. Both Zeocin™ treated and Zeocin™ untreated assay reagents produced stable light output 15 minutes after reconstitution.
FIG. 2 shows the light output from five separate vials of reconstituted Zeocin™ treated assay reagent inactivated according to the method of Example 1(A) and processed into assay reagent as described in Example 1(B). Reconstitution solution was added at time zero and thereafter light output was observed to increase steadily before stabilising out at around 15 minutes after reconstitution. All five vials were observed to give similar light profiles after reconstitution.
## EXAMPLE 2
## Sensitivity of Zeocin™ Treated Assay Reagent to Toxicant Method
1. Bioluminescent genetically modified E. coil strain HB101 (E. coli HB101 made bioluminescent by transformation with a plasmid carrying the lux operon of vibrio fischeri constructed by the method of Shaw and Kado, as described in Biotechnology 4: 560-564) was grown in fermenter as a batch culture in low salt medium (LB(5 g/ml NaCl)+glycerol+MgSO₄).
2. Two aliquots of the culture were removed from the fermenter into separate sterile shaker flasks at each of three different stages of growth i.e. at OD₆₃₀ values of 0.038 (lag phase growth), 1.31 (mid-exponential phase growth) and 2.468 (stationary phase growth).
3. One aliquot of culture for each of the three growth stages was inactivated by contact with Zeocin™ (1 mg Zeocin™ added per 2.5×10⁶ cells, i.e. the concentration of Zeocin™ per cell is kept constant) for 300 minutes and then processed into assay reagent by freeze drying and reconstitution, as described in part (B) of Example 1.
4. An equal volume of water was added to the second aliquot of culture for each of the three growth stages and the cultures processed into assay reagent as described above.
5. Samples of each of the three Zeocin™ treated and three control assay reagents were then evaluated for sensitivity to toxicant (ZnSO₄) according to the following assay protocol:
ZnSO₄ Sensitivity Assay
1. ZnSO₄ solutions were prepared in pure water at 30, 10, 3, 1, 0.3 and 0.1 ppm. Pure water was also used as a control.
2. Seven vials of each of the three Zeocin™ treated and each of the three control assay reagents (i.e. one for each of the six ZnSO₄ solutions and one for the pure water control) were reconstituted using 0.5 ml of reconstitution solution (eg 0.2M sucrose) and then left to stand at room temperature for 15 minutes to allow the light output to stabilize. Base line (time zero) readings of light output were then measured for each of the reconstituted reagents.
3. 0.5 ml aliquots of each of the six ZnSO₄ solutions and the pure water control were added to separate vials of reconstituted assay reagent. This was repeated for each of the different Zeocin™ treated and control assay reagents.
4. The vials were incubated at room temperature and light output readings were taken 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30 minutes after addition of ZnSO₄ solution.
5. The % toxic effect for each sample was calculated as follows:
where: Cₒ=light in control at time zero
Ct=light in control at reading time
Sₒ=light in sample at time zero
St=light in sample at reading time
The results of toxicity assays for sensitivity to ZnSO₄ for all the Zeocin™ treated and control assay reagents are shown in FIGS. 3 to 8:
FIG. 3: Control cells, lag phase.
FIG. 4: Zeocin™ treated cells, lag phase.
FIG. 5: Control cells, mid-exponential growth.
FIG. 6: Zeocin™ treated cells, mid-exponential growth.
FIG. 7: Control cells, stationary phase.
FIG. 8: Zeocin™ treated cells, stationary phase.
| | SENSITIVITY-EC50 VALUES | SENSITIVITY-EC50 VALUES |
|-------------------|---------------------------|---------------------------|
| GROWTH STAGE OF | ZEOCIN | CONTROL |
| ASSAY REAGENT | TREATED | CELLS |
| Lag Phase | 1.445 ppm ZnSO4 | 1.580 ppm ZnSO4 |
| Expotential phase | 0.446 ppm ZnSO4 | 0.446 ZnSO4 |
| Stationary phase | 0.426 ppm ZnSO4 | 0.457 ppm ZnSO4 |
In each case, separate graphs of % toxic effect against log₁₀ concentration of ZnSO₄ were plotted on the same axes for each value of time (minutes) after addition of Zeocin™ or water. The sensitivities of the various reagents, expressed as an EC₅₀ value for 15 minutes exposed to ZnSO₄, are summarised in Table 1 below.
Table 1: Sensitivity of the different assay reagents to ZnSo₄ expressed as EC₅₀ values for 15 minutes exposure to ZNSO₄.
The results of the toxicity assays indicate that Zeocin™ treatment does not significantly affect the sensitivity of a recombinant bioluminescent E. coli derived assay reagent to ZnSO₄. Similar results could be expected with other toxic substances which have an effect on signal-generating metabolic activities.
## EXAMPLE 3
## Method to Determine Viable Count
1. Samples of bacterial culture to be assayed for viable count were centrifuged at 10,000 rpm for 5 minutes to pellet the bacterial cells.
2. Bacterial cells were washed by resuspending in 1 ml of M9 medium, re-centrifuged at 10,000 rpm for 5 minutes and finally re-suspended in 1 ml of M9 medium.
3. Serial dilutions of the bacterial cell suspension from 10⁻¹ to 10⁻⁷ were prepared in M9 medium.
4. Three separate 10 μl aliquots of each of the serial dilutions were plated out on standard agar plates and the plates incubated at 37° C.
5. The number of bacterial colonies present for each of the three aliquots at each of the serial dilutions were counted and the values averaged. Viable count was calculated per ml of bacterial culture.
## CLAIMS
1. A method of making a non-viable preparation of prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells, which preparation has a signal-generating metabolic activity, which method comprises contacting a viable culture of said cells having signal-generating metabolic activity with an antibiotic selected from the bleomycin/phleomycin family of antibiotics.
2. The method as claimed in claim 1 wherein following contact with antibiotic, said cells are subjected to a stabilization step.
3. The method as claimed in claim 2 wherein said stabilization step comprises freeze drying.
4. The method as claimed in claim 1 wherein said antibiotic is phleomycin D1.
5. The method as claimed in claim 5 wherein said signal-generating metabolic activity is bioluminescence.
6. The method as claimed in claim 5 wherein said cells are bacteria.
7. The method as claimed in claim 6 wherein said bacteria are in an exponential growth phase when contacted with said antibiotic.
8. The method as claimed in claim 6 wherein said bacteria are genetically modified.
9. The method as claimed in claim 8 wherein said genetically modified bacteria contain nucleic acid encoding luciferase.
10. The method as claimed in claim 9 wherein said bacteria are E. coli.
11. The method as claimed in claim 5 wherein said cells are eukaryotic cells.
12. The method as claimed in claim 11 wherein said eukaryotic cells are genetically modified.
13. The method as claimed in claim 12 wherein said genetically modified eukaryotic cells contain nucleic acid encoding luciferase.
14. A method of making a non-viable preparation of prokaryotic cells, which preparation has a signal-generating metabolic activity, which method comprises contacting a viable culture of a genetically modified E. coli strain made bioluminescent by transformation with a plasmid carrying the lux operon of Vibrio fischeri with an antibiotic selected from the bleomycin/phleomycin family of antibiotics.
15. The method as claimed in claim 14 wherein said cells are contacted with phleomycin D1 at a concentration of at least about 1.5 mg/ml.
16. The method as claimed in claim 15 wherein said contact is maintained for at least about 3 hours.
17. The method as claimed in claim 16 wherein said antibiotic-treated cells are harvested, washed and freeze-dried.
## Drawings

76
tests/data/groundtruth/docling_v2/pftaps057006474.itxt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
item-0 at level 0: unspecified: group _root_
item-1 at level 1: title: Carbocation containing cyanine-type dye
item-2 at level 2: section_header: ABSTRACT
item-3 at level 3: paragraph: To provide a reagent with excellent stability under storage, which can detect a subject compound to be measured with higher specificity and sensitibity. Complexes of a compound represented by the general formula (IV):
item-4 at level 2: section_header: BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
item-5 at level 3: paragraph: 1. Field of the Invention
item-6 at level 3: paragraph: The present invention relates to a labeled complex for microassay using near-infrared radiation. More specifically, the present invention relates to a labeled complex capable of specifically detecting a certain particular component in a complex mixture with a higher sensitivity.
item-7 at level 3: paragraph: 2. Related Background Art
item-8 at level 3: paragraph: On irradiating a laser beam on a trace substance labeled with dyes and the like, information due to the substance is generated such as scattered light, absorption light, fluorescent light and furthermore light acoustics. It is widely known in the field of analysis using lasers, to detect such information so as to practice microassays rapidly with a higher precision.
item-9 at level 3: paragraph: A gas laser represented by an argon laser and a helium laser has conventionally been used exclusively as a laser source. In recent years, however, a semi-conductor laser has been developed, and based on the characteristic features thereof such as inexpensive cost, small scale and easy output control, it is now desired to use the semiconductor laser as a light source.
item-10 at level 3: paragraph: If diagnostically useful substances from living organisms are assayed by means of the wave-length in ultraviolet and visible regions as has conventionally been used, the background (blank) via the intrinsic fluorescence of naturally occurring products, such as flavin, pyridine coenzyme and serum proteins, which are generally contained in samples, is likely to increase. Only if a light source in a near-infrared region can be used, such background from naturally occurring products can be eliminated so that the sensitivity to substances to be measured might be enhanced, consequently.
item-11 at level 3: paragraph: However, the oscillation wavelength of a semiconductor laser is generally in red and near-infrared regions (670 to 830 nm), where not too many dyes generate fluorescence via absorption or excitation. A representative example of such dyes is polymethine-type dye having a longer conjugated chain. Examples of labeling substances from living organisms with a polymethine-type dye and using the labeled substances for microanalysis are reported by K. Sauda, T. Imasaka, et al. in the report in Anal. Chem., 58, 2649-2653 (1986), such that plasma protein is labeled with a cyanine dye having a sulfonate group (for example, Indocyanine Green) for the analysis by high-performance liquid chromatography.
item-12 at level 3: paragraph: Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2-191674 discloses that various cyanine dyes having sulfonic acid groups or sulfonate groups are used for labeling substances from living organisms and for detecting the fluorescence.
item-13 at level 3: paragraph: However, these known cyanine dyes emitting fluorescence via absorption or excitation in the near-infrared region are generally not particularly stable under light or heat.
item-14 at level 3: paragraph: If the dyes are used as labeling agents and bonded to substances from living organisms such as antibodies for preparing complexes, the complexes are likely to be oxidized easily by environmental factors such as light, heat, moisture, atmospheric oxygen and the like or to be subjected to modification such as generating cross-links. Particularly in water, a modification such as hydrolysis is further accelerated, disadvantageously. Therefore, the practical use of these complexes as detecting reagents in carrying out the microassay of the components of living organisms has encountered difficulties because of their poor stability under storage.
item-15 at level 2: section_header: SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
item-16 at level 3: paragraph: The present inventors have made various investigations so as to solve the above problems, and have found that a dye of a particular structure, more specifically a particular polymethine dye, and among others, a dye having an azulene skelton, are extremely stable even after the immobilization thereof as a labeling agent onto substances from living organisms. Thus, the inventors have achieved the present invention. It is an object of the present invention to provide a labeled complex with excellent storage stability which can overcome the above problems.
item-17 at level 3: paragraph: According to an aspect of the present invention, there is provided a labeled complex for detecting a subject compound to be analyzed by means of optical means using near-infrared radiation which complex comprises a substance from a living organism and a labeling agent fixed onto the substance and is bonded to the subject compound to be analyzed, wherein the labeling agent comprises a compound represented by the general formula (I), (II) or (III): wherein R.sub.1 through R.sub.7 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atom, halogen atom, alkyl group, aryl group, aralkyl group, sulfonate group, amino group, styryl group, nitro group, hydroxyl group, carboxyl group, cyano group, or arylazo group; R.sub.1 through R.sub.7 may be bonded to each other to form a substituted or an unsubstituted condensed ring; R.sub.1 represents a divalent organic residue; and X.sub.1.sup..crclbar. represents an anion; wherein R.sub.8 through R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atom, halogen atom, alkyl group, aryl group, aralkyl group, sulfonate group, amino group, styryl group, nitro group, hydroxyl group, carboxyl group, cyano group, or arylazo group; R.sub.8 through R14 may be bonded to each other to form a substituted or an unsubstituted condensed ring; and R.sub.A represents a divalent organic residue; wherein R.sub.15 through R.sub.21 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atom, halogen atom, alkyl group, aryl group, a substituted or an unsubstituted aralkyl group, a substituted or an unsubstituted amino group, a substituted or an unsubstituted styryl group, nitro group, sulfonate group, hydroxyl group, carboxyl group, cyano group, or arylazo group; R.sub.15 through R.sub.21 may or may not be bonded to each other to form a substituted or an unsubstituted condensed ring; R.sub.B represents a divalent organic residue; and X.sub.1.sup..crclbar. represents an anion.
item-18 at level 3: paragraph: According to another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a labeled complex for detecting a subject compound to be analyzed by means of optical means using near-infrared radiation which complex comprises a substance from a living organism and a labeling agent fixed onto the substance and is bonded to the subject compound to be analyzed, wherein the labeling agent comprises a compound represented by the general formula (IV): wherein A, B, D and E are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atom, a substituted or an unsubstituted alkyl group having two or more carbon atoms, alkenyl group, aralkyl group, aryl group, styryl group and heterocyclic group; r.sub.1 ' and r.sub.2 ' are individually selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atom, a substituted or an unsubstituted alkyl group, cyclic alkyl group, alkenyl group, aralkyl group and aryl group; k is 0 or 1; 1 is 0, 1 or 2; and X.sub.2.sup..crclbar. represents an anion.
item-19 at level 3: paragraph: According to another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a method of detecting a subject compound to be analyzed by means of optical means which method comprises using a labeled complex comprised of a substance from a living organism and a labeling agent fixed onto the substance and bonding the complex to the subject compound to be analyzed, wherein the labeling agent comprises a compound represented by the general formula (I), (II) or (III).
item-20 at level 3: paragraph: According to still another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a method of detecting a subject compound to be analyzed by means of optical means which method comprises using a labeled complex comprised of a substance from a living organism and a labeling agent fixed onto the substance and bonding the complex to the subject compound to be analyzed, wherein the labeling agent comprises a compound represented by the general formula (iv).
item-21 at level 2: section_header: BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
item-22 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 1 depicts one example of fluorescence emitting wave form of a labeling agent.
item-23 at level 2: section_header: DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
item-24 at level 3: paragraph: The present invention will now be explained in detail hereinbelow.
item-25 at level 3: paragraph: In accordance with the present invention, the compound of the general formula (I), (II) or (III) is employed as a labeling agent, wherein R.sub.1 to R.sub.21 individually represent hydrogen atom, halogen atom (chlorine atom, bromine atom, and iodine atom) or a monovalent organic residue, and other such functional groups described above. The monovalent organic residue can be selected from a wide variety of such residues.
item-26 at level 3: paragraph: The alkyl group is preferably in straight chain or branched chain, having a carbon number of 1 to 12, such as for example methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, iso-propyl group, n-butyl group, sec-butyl group, iso-butyl group, t-butyl group, n-amyl group, t-amyl group, n-hexyl group, n-octyl group, t-octyl group and the like.
item-27 at level 3: paragraph: The aryl group preferably has a carbon number of 6 to 20, such as for example phenyl group, naphthyl group, methoxyphenyl group, diethylaminophenyl group, dimethylaminophenyl group and the like.
item-28 at level 3: paragraph: The substituted aralkyl group preferably has a carbon number of 7 to 19, such as for example carboxybenzyl group, sulfobenzyl group, hydroxybenzyl group and the like.
item-29 at level 3: paragraph: The unsubstituted aralkyl group preferably has a carbon number of 7 to 19, such as for example benzyl group, phenethyl group, .alpha.-naphthylmethyl group, .beta.-naphthylmethyl group and the like.
item-30 at level 3: paragraph: The substituted or unsubstituted amino group preferably has a carbon number of 10 or less, such as for example amino group, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, dipropylamino group, acetylamino group, benzoylamino group and the like.
item-31 at level 3: paragraph: The substituted or unsubstituted styryl group preferably has a carbon number of 8 to 14, such as for example styryl group, dimethylaminostyryl group, diethylaminostyryl group, dipropylaminostyryl group, methoxystyryl group, ethoxystyryl group, methylstyryl group and the like.
item-32 at level 3: paragraph: The aryl azo group preferably has a carbon number of 6 to 14, such as for example phenylazo group, .alpha.-naphthylazo group, .beta.-naphthylazo group, dimethylaminophenylazo group, chlorophenylazo group, nitrophenylazo group, methoxyphenylazo group and the like.
item-33 at level 3: paragraph: Of the combinations of R.sub.1 and R.sub.2, R.sub.2 and R.sub.3, R.sub.3 and R.sub.4, R.sub.4 and R.sub.5, R.sub.5 and R.sub.6, and R.sub.6 and R.sub.7 of the general formula (I), at least one combination may form a substituted or an unsubstituted condensed ring. The condensed ring may be five, six or seven membered, including aromatic ring (benzene, naphthalene, chlorobenzene, bromobenzene, methyl benzene, ethyl benzene, methoxybenzene, ethoxybenzene and the like); heterocyclic ring (furan ring, benzofuran ring, pyrrole ring, thiophene ring, pyridine ring, quinoline ring, thiazole ring and the like); and aliphatic ring (dimethylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene and the like). This is the case with the general formulas (II) and (III).
item-34 at level 3: paragraph: For the general formula (II), at least one combination among the combinations of R.sub.8 and R.sub.9, R.sub.9 and R.sub.10, R.sub.10 and R.sub.11, R.sub.11 and R.sub.12, R.sub.12 and R.sub.13, and R.sub.13 and R.sub.14, may form a substituted or an unsubstituted condensed ring.
item-35 at level 3: paragraph: Also for the general formula (III), at least one combination of the combinations of R.sub.15 and R.sub.16, R.sub.16 and R.sub.17, R.sub.17 and R.sub.18, R.sub.18 and R.sub.19, R.sub.19 and R.sub.20, and R.sub.20 and R.sub.21, may form a substituted or an unsubstituted condensed ring.
item-36 at level 3: paragraph: In the general formulas (I) to (IV) described above, the general formula (I) is specifically preferable; preference is also given individually to hydrogen atom, alkyl group and sulfonate group in the case of R.sub.1 to R.sub.7 ; hydrogen atom, alkyl group and sulfonate group in the case of R.sub.8 to R.sub.14 ; hydrogen atom, alkyl group and sulfonate group in the case of R.sub.15 to R.sub.21 ; alkyl group and aryl group in the case of A, B, D and E; hydrogen atom and alkyl group in the case Of r.sub.1 ' to r.sub.2 '.
item-37 at level 3: paragraph: In the general formula (I), R represents a divalent organic residue bonded via a double bond. Specific examples of a compound containing such R to be used in the present invention, include those represented by the following general formulas (1) to (12), wherein Q.sup..sym. represents the following azulenium salt nucleus and the right side excluding Q.sup..sym. represents R. wherein the relation between the azulenium salt nucleus represented by Q.sup..crclbar. and the azulene salt nucleus on the right side in the formula (3) may be symmetric or asymmetric. In the above formulas (1) to (12) as in the case of R.sub.1 to R.sub.7, R.sub.1 ' to R.sub.7 ' and R.sub.1 " to R.sub.7 " independently represent hydrogen atom, halogen atom, alkyl group, aryl group, aralkyl group, amino group, styryl group, nitro group, hydroxyl group, carboxyl group, cyano group or aryl azo group, while R.sub.1 ' to R.sub.7 ' and R.sub.1 " to R.sub.7 " independently may form a substituted or an unsubstituted condensed ring; n is 0, 1 or 2; r is an integer of 1 to 8; S represents 0 or 1; and t represents 1 or 2.
item-38 at level 3: paragraph: M.sub.2 represents a non-metallic atom group required for the completion of a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring.
item-39 at level 3: paragraph: Specific examples of M.sub.2 are atom groups required for the completion of a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring, including pyridine, thiazole, benzothiazole, naphthothiazole, oxazole, benzoxazole, naphthoxazole, imidazole, benzimidazole, naphthoimidazole, 2-quinoline, 4-quinoline, isoquinoline or indole, and may be substituted by halogen atom (chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom and the like), alkyl group (methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl and the like), aryl group (phenyl, tolyl, xylyl and the like), and aralkyl (benzene, p-trimethyl, and the like).
item-40 at level 3: paragraph: R.sub.22 represents hydrogen atom, nitro group, sulfonate group, cyano group, alkyl group (methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl and the like), or aryl group (phenyl, tolyl, xylyl and the like). R.sub.23 represents alkyl group (methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl and the like), a substituted alkyl group (2-hydroxyethyl, 2-methoxyethyl, 2-ethoxyethyl, 3-hydroxypropyl, 3-methoxypropyl, 3-ethoxypropyl, 3-chloropropyl, 3-bromopropyl, 3-carboxylpropyl and the like ), a cyclic alkyl group (cyclohexyl, cyclopropyl), aryl aralkyl group (benzene, 2-phenylethyl, 3-phenylpropyl, 3-phenylbutyl, 4-phenylbutyl, .alpha.-naphthylmethyl, .beta.-naphthylmethyl), a substituted aralkyl group (methylbenzyl, ethylbenzyl, dimethylbenzyl, trimethylbenzyl, chlorobenzyl, bromobenzyl and the like), aryl group (phenyl, tolyl, xylyl, .alpha.-naphtyl, .beta.-naphthyl) or a substituted aryl group (chlorophenyl, dichlorophenyl, trichlorophenyl, ethylphenyl, methoxydiphenyl, dimethoxyphenyl, aminophenyl, sulfonate phenyl, nitrophenyl, hydroxyphenyl and the like).
item-41 at level 3: paragraph: R.sub.24 represents a substituted or an unsubstituted aryl group or the cation group thereof, specifically including a substituted or an unsubstituted aryl group (phenyl, tolyl, xylyl, biphenyl, aminophenyl, .alpha.-naphthyl, .beta.-napthyl, anthranyl, pyrenyl, methoxyphenyl, dimethoxyphenyl, trimethoxyphenyl, ethoxyphenyl, diethoxyphenyl, chlorophenyl, dichlorophenyl, trichlorophenyl, bromophenyl, dibromophenyl, tribromophenyl, ethylphenyl, diethylphenyl, nitrophenyl, aminophenyl, dimethylaminophenyl, diethylaminophenyl, dibenzylaminophenyl, dipropylaminophenyl, morpholinophenyl, piperidinylphenyl, piperidinophenyl, diphenylaminophenyl, acetylaminophenyl, benzoylaminophenyl, acetylphenyl, benzoylphenyl, cyanophenyl, sulfonate phenyl, carboxylate phenyl and the like).
item-42 at level 3: paragraph: R.sub.25 represents a heterocyclic ring or the cation group thereof, specifically including a monovalent heterocyclic ring derived from cyclic rings, such as furan, thiophene, benzofuran, thionaphthene, dibenzofuran, carbazole, phenothiazine phenoxazine, pyridine and the like.
item-43 at level 3: paragraph: R.sub.26 represents hydrogen atom, alkyl group (methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl and the like), or a substituted or an unsubstituted aryl group (phenyl, tolyl, xylyl, biphenyl, ethylphenyl, chlorophenyl, methoxyphenyl, ethoxyphenyl, nitrophenyl, aminophenyl, dimethylaminophenyl, diethylaminophenyl, acetylaminophenyl, .alpha.-naphthyl, .beta.-naphthyl, anthraryl, pyrenyl, sulfonate phenyl, carboxylate phenyl and the like. In the formula, Z.sub.7 represents an atom group required for the completion of pyran, thiapyran, selenapyran, telluropyran, benzopyran, benzothiapyran, benzoselenapyran, benzotelluropyran, naphthopyran, naphthothiapyran, or naphthoselenapyran, or naphthotelluropyran.
item-44 at level 3: paragraph: L.sub.7 represents sulfur atom, oxygen atom or selenium atom or tellurium atom.
item-45 at level 3: paragraph: R.sub.27 and R.sub.28 individually represent hydrogen atom, alkoxy group, a substituted or an unsubstituted aryl group, alkenyl group and a heterocyclic group,
item-46 at level 3: paragraph: More specifically, R.sub.27 and R.sub.28 individually represent hydrogen atom, alkyl group (methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl and the like), alkyl sulfonate group, alkoxyl group (methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, ethoxyethyl, methoxyethyl and the like), aryl group (phenyl, tolyl, xylyl, sulfonate phenyl, chlorophenyl, biphenyl, methoxyphenyl and the like), a substituted or an unsubstituted styryl group (styryl, p-methylstyryl, o-chlorostyryl, p-methoxystyryl and the like), a substituted or an unsubstituted 4-phenyl, 1,3-butadienyl group (r-phenyl, 1,3-butadienyl, 4-(p-methylphenyl), 1,3-butadienyl and the like), or a substituted or an unsubstituted heterocyclic group (quinolyl, pyridyl, carbazoyl, furyl and the like).
item-47 at level 3: paragraph: As in the case of R, the same is true with R.sub.A and R.sub.B of the general formulas (II) and (III), respectively.
item-48 at level 3: paragraph: Then, in R, the symbols R.sub.8 ' to R.sub.14 ' individually correspond to R.sub.1 ' to R.sub.7 '; R.sub.8 " to R.sub.14 " individually correspond to R.sub.1 " to R.sub.7 "; in R.sub.B, R.sub.14 ' to R.sub.21 " individually correspond to R.sub.1 ' to R.sub.7 '; R.sub.14 " to R.sub.21 " individually correspond to R.sub.1 " to R.sub.7 ".
item-49 at level 3: paragraph: In the azulenium nucleus of the (1) to (12), described above, those represented by the formulas (3), (9) and (10) are more preferably used; and particularly, the formula (3) is preferable.
item-50 at level 3: paragraph: R.sub.1 to R.sub.28, R.sub.1 ' to R.sub.21 ' and R.sub.1 " to R.sub.21 " preferably contain one or more well-known polar groups in order to impart water solubility to a compound (labeling agent) represented by the general formula (I), (II) or (III). The polar groups include, for example, hydroxyl group, alkylhydroxyl group, sulfonate group, alkylsulfonate group, carboxylate group, alkylcarboxylate group, tetra-ammonium base and the like. R.sub.1 to R.sub.28, R.sub.1 ' to R.sub.21 ', and R.sub.1 " to R.sub.21 " preferably contain one or more well-known reactive groups in order that the compound of the general formula (I) can form a covalent bond with a substance from a living organism.
item-51 at level 3: paragraph: The reactive groups include the reactive sites of isocyanate, isothiocyanate, succinimide ester, sulfosuccinimide ester, imide ester, hydrazine, nitroaryl halide, piperidine disulfide, maleimide, thiophthalimide, acid halide, sulfonyl halide, aziridine, azide nitrophenyl, azide amino, 3-(2-pyridyldithio) propionamide and the like. In these reactive sites, the following spacer groups (n=0, 1 to 6) may be interposed in order to prevent steric hindrance during on the bonding of a labeling agent and a substance from a living organism.
item-52 at level 3: paragraph: Preferable such reactive groups include isothiocyanate, sulfosuccinimide ester, succinimide ester maleimide and the like X.sub.1.sup..sym. represents an anion, including chloride ion, bromide ion, iodide ion, perchlorate ion, benzenesulfonate ion, p-toluene sulfonate ion, methylsulfate ion, ethylsulfate ion, propylsulfate ion, tetrafluoroborate ion, tetraphenylborate ion, hexafluorophosphate ion, benzenesulfinic acid salt ion, acetate ion, trifluoroacetate ion, propionate ion, benzoate ion, oxalate ion, succinate ion, malonate ion, oleate ion, stearate ion, citrate ion, monohydrogen diphosphate ion, dihydrogen monophosphate ion, pentachlorostannate ion, chlorosulfonate ion, fluorosulfonate ion, trifluoromethane sulfonate ion, hexafluoroantimonate ion, molybdate ion, tungstate ion, titanate ion, zirconate ion and the like.
item-53 at level 3: paragraph: Specific examples of these labeling agents are illustrated in Tables 1, 2 and 3, but are not limited thereto.
item-54 at level 3: paragraph: The synthetic method of these azulene dyes is described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,738,908.
item-55 at level 2: section_header: CLAIMS
item-56 at level 3: paragraph: 1. A labeled complex for detecting a subject compound to be analyzed by means of optical means using near-infrared radiation which complex comprises a substance from a living organism and a labeling agent fixed onto the substance, the substance capable of specifically binding to the subject compound, wherein the labeling agent comprises a compound represented by the general formula (IV): wherein A, B, D and E are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atom, a substituted or an unsubstituted alkyl group having two or more carbon atoms, alkenyl group, aralkyl group, aryl group, styryl group and heterocyclic group, and at least one of A and B is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, and at least one of D and E is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group; r.sub.1 ' and r.sub.2 ' are individually selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atom, a substituted or an unsubstituted alkyl group, cyclic alkyl group, alkenyl group, aralkyl group and aryl group; k is 0 or 1; is 0, 1 or 2; and X.sub.2.sup..crclbar. represents an anion.
item-57 at level 3: paragraph: 2. The labeled complex according to claim 1, wherein the substance from a living organism is an antibody or an antigen.
item-58 at level 3: paragraph: 3. The labeled complex according to claim 1, wherein the substance from a living organism is a nucleic acid.
item-59 at level 3: paragraph: 4. The labeled complex according to claim 1, wherein the substituted aryl group constituting at least one of A and B is phenyl group substituted by dialkylamino group.
item-60 at level 3: paragraph: 5. The labeled complex according to claim 1, wherein the substituted aryl group constituting at least one of D and E is phenyl group substituted by dialkylamino group.
item-61 at level 3: paragraph: 6. The labeled complex according to claim 4 or 5, wherein the dialkylamino group is a diethylamino group.
item-62 at level 3: paragraph: 7. The labeled complex according to claim 1, wherein each of A, B and D is dimethylaminophenyl group, E is aminophenyl group, k is 0 and l is 1.
item-63 at level 3: paragraph: 8. The labeled complex according to claim 1, wherein each of A, B and D is diethylaminophenyl group, E is phenyl group substituted by carboxyl group, k is 0 and l is 1.
item-64 at level 3: paragraph: 9. The labeled complex according to claim 1, wherein each of A, B, D and E is diethylaminophenyl group, k is 1 and l is 0.
item-65 at level 3: paragraph: 10. The labeled complex according to claim 1, wherein each of A, B, and D is diethylaminophenyl group, E is aminophenyl group, K is 0 and l is 1.
item-66 at level 3: paragraph: 11. The labeled complex according to claim 1, wherein A is dimethylaminophenyl group, each of B and E is ethoxyphenyl group, k is 0, 1 is l and D is represented by the following formula:
item-67 at level 3: paragraph: 12. A method of detecting a subject compound to be analyzed in a sample comprising the steps of: providing a labeled complex comprising a substance from a living organisms and a labeling agent fixed onto the substance, the substance being capable of specifically binding to the subject compound; binding the labeled complex to the subject compound; and detecting the labeled complex to which the subject compound is bonded by means of optical means, wherein the labeling agent comprises a compound represented by the general formula (IV): wherein A, B, D and E are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atom, a substituted or an unsubstituted alkyl group having two or more carbon atoms, alkenyl group, aralkyl group, aryl group, styryl group and heterocyclic group, and at least one of A and B is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, and at least one of D and E is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group; r.sub.1 ' and r.sub.2 ' are individually selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atom, a substituted or an unsubstituted alkyl group, cyclic alkyl group, alkenyl group, aralkyl group and aryl group; k is 0 or 1; is 0, 1 or 2; and X.sub.2.sup..crclbar. represents an anion.
item-68 at level 3: paragraph: 13. The method according to claim 12, wherein the substance from a living organism is an antibody or an antigen.
item-69 at level 3: paragraph: 14. The method according to claim 12, wherein the substance from a living organism is a nucleic acid.
item-70 at level 3: paragraph: 15. The analyzing method according to any one of claims 12, 13 and 14, wherein the optical means is an optical means using near-infrared ray.
item-71 at level 3: paragraph: 16. The method according to claim 12, wherein each of A, B and D is dimethylaminophenyl group, E is aminophenyl group, k is 0 and l is 1.
item-72 at level 3: paragraph: 17. The method according to claim 12, wherein each of A, B and D is diethylaminophenyl group, E is phenyl group substituted by carboxyl group, k is 0 and l is 1.
item-73 at level 3: paragraph: 18. The method according to claim 12, wherein each of A, B, D and E is diethylaminophenyl group, k is 1 and l is 0.
item-74 at level 3: paragraph: 19. The method according to claim 12, wherein each of A, B and D is diethylaminophenyl group, E is aminophenyl group, k is 0 and l is 1.
item-75 at level 3: paragraph: 20. The method according to claim 12, wherein A is dimethylaminophenyl group, each of B and E is ethoxyphenyl group, k is 0, l is 1 and D is represented by the following formula: ##STR102##

1093
tests/data/groundtruth/docling_v2/pftaps057006474.json Normal file
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

149
tests/data/groundtruth/docling_v2/pftaps057006474.md Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
# Carbocation containing cyanine-type dye
## ABSTRACT
To provide a reagent with excellent stability under storage, which can detect a subject compound to be measured with higher specificity and sensitibity. Complexes of a compound represented by the general formula (IV):
## BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
1. Field of the Invention
The present invention relates to a labeled complex for microassay using near-infrared radiation. More specifically, the present invention relates to a labeled complex capable of specifically detecting a certain particular component in a complex mixture with a higher sensitivity.
2. Related Background Art
On irradiating a laser beam on a trace substance labeled with dyes and the like, information due to the substance is generated such as scattered light, absorption light, fluorescent light and furthermore light acoustics. It is widely known in the field of analysis using lasers, to detect such information so as to practice microassays rapidly with a higher precision.
A gas laser represented by an argon laser and a helium laser has conventionally been used exclusively as a laser source. In recent years, however, a semi-conductor laser has been developed, and based on the characteristic features thereof such as inexpensive cost, small scale and easy output control, it is now desired to use the semiconductor laser as a light source.
If diagnostically useful substances from living organisms are assayed by means of the wave-length in ultraviolet and visible regions as has conventionally been used, the background (blank) via the intrinsic fluorescence of naturally occurring products, such as flavin, pyridine coenzyme and serum proteins, which are generally contained in samples, is likely to increase. Only if a light source in a near-infrared region can be used, such background from naturally occurring products can be eliminated so that the sensitivity to substances to be measured might be enhanced, consequently.
However, the oscillation wavelength of a semiconductor laser is generally in red and near-infrared regions (670 to 830 nm), where not too many dyes generate fluorescence via absorption or excitation. A representative example of such dyes is polymethine-type dye having a longer conjugated chain. Examples of labeling substances from living organisms with a polymethine-type dye and using the labeled substances for microanalysis are reported by K. Sauda, T. Imasaka, et al. in the report in Anal. Chem., 58, 2649-2653 (1986), such that plasma protein is labeled with a cyanine dye having a sulfonate group (for example, Indocyanine Green) for the analysis by high-performance liquid chromatography.
Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2-191674 discloses that various cyanine dyes having sulfonic acid groups or sulfonate groups are used for labeling substances from living organisms and for detecting the fluorescence.
However, these known cyanine dyes emitting fluorescence via absorption or excitation in the near-infrared region are generally not particularly stable under light or heat.
If the dyes are used as labeling agents and bonded to substances from living organisms such as antibodies for preparing complexes, the complexes are likely to be oxidized easily by environmental factors such as light, heat, moisture, atmospheric oxygen and the like or to be subjected to modification such as generating cross-links. Particularly in water, a modification such as hydrolysis is further accelerated, disadvantageously. Therefore, the practical use of these complexes as detecting reagents in carrying out the microassay of the components of living organisms has encountered difficulties because of their poor stability under storage.
## SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present inventors have made various investigations so as to solve the above problems, and have found that a dye of a particular structure, more specifically a particular polymethine dye, and among others, a dye having an azulene skelton, are extremely stable even after the immobilization thereof as a labeling agent onto substances from living organisms. Thus, the inventors have achieved the present invention. It is an object of the present invention to provide a labeled complex with excellent storage stability which can overcome the above problems.
According to an aspect of the present invention, there is provided a labeled complex for detecting a subject compound to be analyzed by means of optical means using near-infrared radiation which complex comprises a substance from a living organism and a labeling agent fixed onto the substance and is bonded to the subject compound to be analyzed, wherein the labeling agent comprises a compound represented by the general formula (I), (II) or (III): wherein R.sub.1 through R.sub.7 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atom, halogen atom, alkyl group, aryl group, aralkyl group, sulfonate group, amino group, styryl group, nitro group, hydroxyl group, carboxyl group, cyano group, or arylazo group; R.sub.1 through R.sub.7 may be bonded to each other to form a substituted or an unsubstituted condensed ring; R.sub.1 represents a divalent organic residue; and X.sub.1.sup..crclbar. represents an anion; wherein R.sub.8 through R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atom, halogen atom, alkyl group, aryl group, aralkyl group, sulfonate group, amino group, styryl group, nitro group, hydroxyl group, carboxyl group, cyano group, or arylazo group; R.sub.8 through R14 may be bonded to each other to form a substituted or an unsubstituted condensed ring; and R.sub.A represents a divalent organic residue; wherein R.sub.15 through R.sub.21 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atom, halogen atom, alkyl group, aryl group, a substituted or an unsubstituted aralkyl group, a substituted or an unsubstituted amino group, a substituted or an unsubstituted styryl group, nitro group, sulfonate group, hydroxyl group, carboxyl group, cyano group, or arylazo group; R.sub.15 through R.sub.21 may or may not be bonded to each other to form a substituted or an unsubstituted condensed ring; R.sub.B represents a divalent organic residue; and X.sub.1.sup..crclbar. represents an anion.
According to another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a labeled complex for detecting a subject compound to be analyzed by means of optical means using near-infrared radiation which complex comprises a substance from a living organism and a labeling agent fixed onto the substance and is bonded to the subject compound to be analyzed, wherein the labeling agent comprises a compound represented by the general formula (IV): wherein A, B, D and E are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atom, a substituted or an unsubstituted alkyl group having two or more carbon atoms, alkenyl group, aralkyl group, aryl group, styryl group and heterocyclic group; r.sub.1 ' and r.sub.2 ' are individually selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atom, a substituted or an unsubstituted alkyl group, cyclic alkyl group, alkenyl group, aralkyl group and aryl group; k is 0 or 1; 1 is 0, 1 or 2; and X.sub.2.sup..crclbar. represents an anion.
According to another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a method of detecting a subject compound to be analyzed by means of optical means which method comprises using a labeled complex comprised of a substance from a living organism and a labeling agent fixed onto the substance and bonding the complex to the subject compound to be analyzed, wherein the labeling agent comprises a compound represented by the general formula (I), (II) or (III).
According to still another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a method of detecting a subject compound to be analyzed by means of optical means which method comprises using a labeled complex comprised of a substance from a living organism and a labeling agent fixed onto the substance and bonding the complex to the subject compound to be analyzed, wherein the labeling agent comprises a compound represented by the general formula (iv).
## BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
FIG. 1 depicts one example of fluorescence emitting wave form of a labeling agent.
## DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
The present invention will now be explained in detail hereinbelow.
In accordance with the present invention, the compound of the general formula (I), (II) or (III) is employed as a labeling agent, wherein R.sub.1 to R.sub.21 individually represent hydrogen atom, halogen atom (chlorine atom, bromine atom, and iodine atom) or a monovalent organic residue, and other such functional groups described above. The monovalent organic residue can be selected from a wide variety of such residues.
The alkyl group is preferably in straight chain or branched chain, having a carbon number of 1 to 12, such as for example methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, iso-propyl group, n-butyl group, sec-butyl group, iso-butyl group, t-butyl group, n-amyl group, t-amyl group, n-hexyl group, n-octyl group, t-octyl group and the like.
The aryl group preferably has a carbon number of 6 to 20, such as for example phenyl group, naphthyl group, methoxyphenyl group, diethylaminophenyl group, dimethylaminophenyl group and the like.
The substituted aralkyl group preferably has a carbon number of 7 to 19, such as for example carboxybenzyl group, sulfobenzyl group, hydroxybenzyl group and the like.
The unsubstituted aralkyl group preferably has a carbon number of 7 to 19, such as for example benzyl group, phenethyl group, .alpha.-naphthylmethyl group, .beta.-naphthylmethyl group and the like.
The substituted or unsubstituted amino group preferably has a carbon number of 10 or less, such as for example amino group, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, dipropylamino group, acetylamino group, benzoylamino group and the like.
The substituted or unsubstituted styryl group preferably has a carbon number of 8 to 14, such as for example styryl group, dimethylaminostyryl group, diethylaminostyryl group, dipropylaminostyryl group, methoxystyryl group, ethoxystyryl group, methylstyryl group and the like.
The aryl azo group preferably has a carbon number of 6 to 14, such as for example phenylazo group, .alpha.-naphthylazo group, .beta.-naphthylazo group, dimethylaminophenylazo group, chlorophenylazo group, nitrophenylazo group, methoxyphenylazo group and the like.
Of the combinations of R.sub.1 and R.sub.2, R.sub.2 and R.sub.3, R.sub.3 and R.sub.4, R.sub.4 and R.sub.5, R.sub.5 and R.sub.6, and R.sub.6 and R.sub.7 of the general formula (I), at least one combination may form a substituted or an unsubstituted condensed ring. The condensed ring may be five, six or seven membered, including aromatic ring (benzene, naphthalene, chlorobenzene, bromobenzene, methyl benzene, ethyl benzene, methoxybenzene, ethoxybenzene and the like); heterocyclic ring (furan ring, benzofuran ring, pyrrole ring, thiophene ring, pyridine ring, quinoline ring, thiazole ring and the like); and aliphatic ring (dimethylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene and the like). This is the case with the general formulas (II) and (III).
For the general formula (II), at least one combination among the combinations of R.sub.8 and R.sub.9, R.sub.9 and R.sub.10, R.sub.10 and R.sub.11, R.sub.11 and R.sub.12, R.sub.12 and R.sub.13, and R.sub.13 and R.sub.14, may form a substituted or an unsubstituted condensed ring.
Also for the general formula (III), at least one combination of the combinations of R.sub.15 and R.sub.16, R.sub.16 and R.sub.17, R.sub.17 and R.sub.18, R.sub.18 and R.sub.19, R.sub.19 and R.sub.20, and R.sub.20 and R.sub.21, may form a substituted or an unsubstituted condensed ring.
In the general formulas (I) to (IV) described above, the general formula (I) is specifically preferable; preference is also given individually to hydrogen atom, alkyl group and sulfonate group in the case of R.sub.1 to R.sub.7 ; hydrogen atom, alkyl group and sulfonate group in the case of R.sub.8 to R.sub.14 ; hydrogen atom, alkyl group and sulfonate group in the case of R.sub.15 to R.sub.21 ; alkyl group and aryl group in the case of A, B, D and E; hydrogen atom and alkyl group in the case Of r.sub.1 ' to r.sub.2 '.
In the general formula (I), R represents a divalent organic residue bonded via a double bond. Specific examples of a compound containing such R to be used in the present invention, include those represented by the following general formulas (1) to (12), wherein Q.sup..sym. represents the following azulenium salt nucleus and the right side excluding Q.sup..sym. represents R. wherein the relation between the azulenium salt nucleus represented by Q.sup..crclbar. and the azulene salt nucleus on the right side in the formula (3) may be symmetric or asymmetric. In the above formulas (1) to (12) as in the case of R.sub.1 to R.sub.7, R.sub.1 ' to R.sub.7 ' and R.sub.1 " to R.sub.7 " independently represent hydrogen atom, halogen atom, alkyl group, aryl group, aralkyl group, amino group, styryl group, nitro group, hydroxyl group, carboxyl group, cyano group or aryl azo group, while R.sub.1 ' to R.sub.7 ' and R.sub.1 " to R.sub.7 " independently may form a substituted or an unsubstituted condensed ring; n is 0, 1 or 2; r is an integer of 1 to 8; S represents 0 or 1; and t represents 1 or 2.
M.sub.2 represents a non-metallic atom group required for the completion of a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring.
Specific examples of M.sub.2 are atom groups required for the completion of a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring, including pyridine, thiazole, benzothiazole, naphthothiazole, oxazole, benzoxazole, naphthoxazole, imidazole, benzimidazole, naphthoimidazole, 2-quinoline, 4-quinoline, isoquinoline or indole, and may be substituted by halogen atom (chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom and the like), alkyl group (methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl and the like), aryl group (phenyl, tolyl, xylyl and the like), and aralkyl (benzene, p-trimethyl, and the like).
R.sub.22 represents hydrogen atom, nitro group, sulfonate group, cyano group, alkyl group (methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl and the like), or aryl group (phenyl, tolyl, xylyl and the like). R.sub.23 represents alkyl group (methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl and the like), a substituted alkyl group (2-hydroxyethyl, 2-methoxyethyl, 2-ethoxyethyl, 3-hydroxypropyl, 3-methoxypropyl, 3-ethoxypropyl, 3-chloropropyl, 3-bromopropyl, 3-carboxylpropyl and the like ), a cyclic alkyl group (cyclohexyl, cyclopropyl), aryl aralkyl group (benzene, 2-phenylethyl, 3-phenylpropyl, 3-phenylbutyl, 4-phenylbutyl, .alpha.-naphthylmethyl, .beta.-naphthylmethyl), a substituted aralkyl group (methylbenzyl, ethylbenzyl, dimethylbenzyl, trimethylbenzyl, chlorobenzyl, bromobenzyl and the like), aryl group (phenyl, tolyl, xylyl, .alpha.-naphtyl, .beta.-naphthyl) or a substituted aryl group (chlorophenyl, dichlorophenyl, trichlorophenyl, ethylphenyl, methoxydiphenyl, dimethoxyphenyl, aminophenyl, sulfonate phenyl, nitrophenyl, hydroxyphenyl and the like).
R.sub.24 represents a substituted or an unsubstituted aryl group or the cation group thereof, specifically including a substituted or an unsubstituted aryl group (phenyl, tolyl, xylyl, biphenyl, aminophenyl, .alpha.-naphthyl, .beta.-napthyl, anthranyl, pyrenyl, methoxyphenyl, dimethoxyphenyl, trimethoxyphenyl, ethoxyphenyl, diethoxyphenyl, chlorophenyl, dichlorophenyl, trichlorophenyl, bromophenyl, dibromophenyl, tribromophenyl, ethylphenyl, diethylphenyl, nitrophenyl, aminophenyl, dimethylaminophenyl, diethylaminophenyl, dibenzylaminophenyl, dipropylaminophenyl, morpholinophenyl, piperidinylphenyl, piperidinophenyl, diphenylaminophenyl, acetylaminophenyl, benzoylaminophenyl, acetylphenyl, benzoylphenyl, cyanophenyl, sulfonate phenyl, carboxylate phenyl and the like).
R.sub.25 represents a heterocyclic ring or the cation group thereof, specifically including a monovalent heterocyclic ring derived from cyclic rings, such as furan, thiophene, benzofuran, thionaphthene, dibenzofuran, carbazole, phenothiazine phenoxazine, pyridine and the like.
R.sub.26 represents hydrogen atom, alkyl group (methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl and the like), or a substituted or an unsubstituted aryl group (phenyl, tolyl, xylyl, biphenyl, ethylphenyl, chlorophenyl, methoxyphenyl, ethoxyphenyl, nitrophenyl, aminophenyl, dimethylaminophenyl, diethylaminophenyl, acetylaminophenyl, .alpha.-naphthyl, .beta.-naphthyl, anthraryl, pyrenyl, sulfonate phenyl, carboxylate phenyl and the like. In the formula, Z.sub.7 represents an atom group required for the completion of pyran, thiapyran, selenapyran, telluropyran, benzopyran, benzothiapyran, benzoselenapyran, benzotelluropyran, naphthopyran, naphthothiapyran, or naphthoselenapyran, or naphthotelluropyran.
L.sub.7 represents sulfur atom, oxygen atom or selenium atom or tellurium atom.
R.sub.27 and R.sub.28 individually represent hydrogen atom, alkoxy group, a substituted or an unsubstituted aryl group, alkenyl group and a heterocyclic group,
More specifically, R.sub.27 and R.sub.28 individually represent hydrogen atom, alkyl group (methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl and the like), alkyl sulfonate group, alkoxyl group (methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, ethoxyethyl, methoxyethyl and the like), aryl group (phenyl, tolyl, xylyl, sulfonate phenyl, chlorophenyl, biphenyl, methoxyphenyl and the like), a substituted or an unsubstituted styryl group (styryl, p-methylstyryl, o-chlorostyryl, p-methoxystyryl and the like), a substituted or an unsubstituted 4-phenyl, 1,3-butadienyl group (r-phenyl, 1,3-butadienyl, 4-(p-methylphenyl), 1,3-butadienyl and the like), or a substituted or an unsubstituted heterocyclic group (quinolyl, pyridyl, carbazoyl, furyl and the like).
As in the case of R, the same is true with R.sub.A and R.sub.B of the general formulas (II) and (III), respectively.
Then, in R, the symbols R.sub.8 ' to R.sub.14 ' individually correspond to R.sub.1 ' to R.sub.7 '; R.sub.8 " to R.sub.14 " individually correspond to R.sub.1 " to R.sub.7 "; in R.sub.B, R.sub.14 ' to R.sub.21 " individually correspond to R.sub.1 ' to R.sub.7 '; R.sub.14 " to R.sub.21 " individually correspond to R.sub.1 " to R.sub.7 ".
In the azulenium nucleus of the (1) to (12), described above, those represented by the formulas (3), (9) and (10) are more preferably used; and particularly, the formula (3) is preferable.
R.sub.1 to R.sub.28, R.sub.1 ' to R.sub.21 ' and R.sub.1 " to R.sub.21 " preferably contain one or more well-known polar groups in order to impart water solubility to a compound (labeling agent) represented by the general formula (I), (II) or (III). The polar groups include, for example, hydroxyl group, alkylhydroxyl group, sulfonate group, alkylsulfonate group, carboxylate group, alkylcarboxylate group, tetra-ammonium base and the like. R.sub.1 to R.sub.28, R.sub.1 ' to R.sub.21 ', and R.sub.1 " to R.sub.21 " preferably contain one or more well-known reactive groups in order that the compound of the general formula (I) can form a covalent bond with a substance from a living organism.
The reactive groups include the reactive sites of isocyanate, isothiocyanate, succinimide ester, sulfosuccinimide ester, imide ester, hydrazine, nitroaryl halide, piperidine disulfide, maleimide, thiophthalimide, acid halide, sulfonyl halide, aziridine, azide nitrophenyl, azide amino, 3-(2-pyridyldithio) propionamide and the like. In these reactive sites, the following spacer groups (n=0, 1 to 6) may be interposed in order to prevent steric hindrance during on the bonding of a labeling agent and a substance from a living organism.
Preferable such reactive groups include isothiocyanate, sulfosuccinimide ester, succinimide ester maleimide and the like X.sub.1.sup..sym. represents an anion, including chloride ion, bromide ion, iodide ion, perchlorate ion, benzenesulfonate ion, p-toluene sulfonate ion, methylsulfate ion, ethylsulfate ion, propylsulfate ion, tetrafluoroborate ion, tetraphenylborate ion, hexafluorophosphate ion, benzenesulfinic acid salt ion, acetate ion, trifluoroacetate ion, propionate ion, benzoate ion, oxalate ion, succinate ion, malonate ion, oleate ion, stearate ion, citrate ion, monohydrogen diphosphate ion, dihydrogen monophosphate ion, pentachlorostannate ion, chlorosulfonate ion, fluorosulfonate ion, trifluoromethane sulfonate ion, hexafluoroantimonate ion, molybdate ion, tungstate ion, titanate ion, zirconate ion and the like.
Specific examples of these labeling agents are illustrated in Tables 1, 2 and 3, but are not limited thereto.
The synthetic method of these azulene dyes is described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,738,908.
## CLAIMS
1. A labeled complex for detecting a subject compound to be analyzed by means of optical means using near-infrared radiation which complex comprises a substance from a living organism and a labeling agent fixed onto the substance, the substance capable of specifically binding to the subject compound, wherein the labeling agent comprises a compound represented by the general formula (IV): wherein A, B, D and E are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atom, a substituted or an unsubstituted alkyl group having two or more carbon atoms, alkenyl group, aralkyl group, aryl group, styryl group and heterocyclic group, and at least one of A and B is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, and at least one of D and E is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group; r.sub.1 ' and r.sub.2 ' are individually selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atom, a substituted or an unsubstituted alkyl group, cyclic alkyl group, alkenyl group, aralkyl group and aryl group; k is 0 or 1; is 0, 1 or 2; and X.sub.2.sup..crclbar. represents an anion.
2. The labeled complex according to claim 1, wherein the substance from a living organism is an antibody or an antigen.
3. The labeled complex according to claim 1, wherein the substance from a living organism is a nucleic acid.
4. The labeled complex according to claim 1, wherein the substituted aryl group constituting at least one of A and B is phenyl group substituted by dialkylamino group.
5. The labeled complex according to claim 1, wherein the substituted aryl group constituting at least one of D and E is phenyl group substituted by dialkylamino group.
6. The labeled complex according to claim 4 or 5, wherein the dialkylamino group is a diethylamino group.
7. The labeled complex according to claim 1, wherein each of A, B and D is dimethylaminophenyl group, E is aminophenyl group, k is 0 and l is 1.
8. The labeled complex according to claim 1, wherein each of A, B and D is diethylaminophenyl group, E is phenyl group substituted by carboxyl group, k is 0 and l is 1.
9. The labeled complex according to claim 1, wherein each of A, B, D and E is diethylaminophenyl group, k is 1 and l is 0.
10. The labeled complex according to claim 1, wherein each of A, B, and D is diethylaminophenyl group, E is aminophenyl group, K is 0 and l is 1.
11. The labeled complex according to claim 1, wherein A is dimethylaminophenyl group, each of B and E is ethoxyphenyl group, k is 0, 1 is l and D is represented by the following formula:
12. A method of detecting a subject compound to be analyzed in a sample comprising the steps of: providing a labeled complex comprising a substance from a living organisms and a labeling agent fixed onto the substance, the substance being capable of specifically binding to the subject compound; binding the labeled complex to the subject compound; and detecting the labeled complex to which the subject compound is bonded by means of optical means, wherein the labeling agent comprises a compound represented by the general formula (IV): wherein A, B, D and E are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atom, a substituted or an unsubstituted alkyl group having two or more carbon atoms, alkenyl group, aralkyl group, aryl group, styryl group and heterocyclic group, and at least one of A and B is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, and at least one of D and E is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group; r.sub.1 ' and r.sub.2 ' are individually selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atom, a substituted or an unsubstituted alkyl group, cyclic alkyl group, alkenyl group, aralkyl group and aryl group; k is 0 or 1; is 0, 1 or 2; and X.sub.2.sup..crclbar. represents an anion.
13. The method according to claim 12, wherein the substance from a living organism is an antibody or an antigen.
14. The method according to claim 12, wherein the substance from a living organism is a nucleic acid.
15. The analyzing method according to any one of claims 12, 13 and 14, wherein the optical means is an optical means using near-infrared ray.
16. The method according to claim 12, wherein each of A, B and D is dimethylaminophenyl group, E is aminophenyl group, k is 0 and l is 1.
17. The method according to claim 12, wherein each of A, B and D is diethylaminophenyl group, E is phenyl group substituted by carboxyl group, k is 0 and l is 1.
18. The method according to claim 12, wherein each of A, B, D and E is diethylaminophenyl group, k is 1 and l is 0.
19. The method according to claim 12, wherein each of A, B and D is diethylaminophenyl group, E is aminophenyl group, k is 0 and l is 1.
20. The method according to claim 12, wherein A is dimethylaminophenyl group, each of B and E is ethoxyphenyl group, k is 0, l is 1 and D is represented by the following formula: ##STR102##

109
tests/data/groundtruth/docling_v2/pg06442728.itxt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
item-0 at level 0: unspecified: group _root_
item-1 at level 1: title: Methods and apparatus for turbo code
item-2 at level 2: section_header: ABSTRACT
item-3 at level 3: paragraph: An interleaver receives incoming data frames of size N. The interleaver indexes the elements of the frame with an N₁×N₂ index array. The interleaver then effectively rearranges (permutes) the data by permuting the rows of the index array. The interleaver employs the equation I(j,k)=I(j,αjk+βj)modP) to permute the columns (indexed by k) of each row (indexed by j). P is at least equal to N₂, βj is a constant which may be different for each row, and each αj is a relative prime number relative to P. After permuting, the interleaver outputs the data in a different order than received (e.g., receives sequentially row by row, outputs sequentially each column by column).
item-4 at level 2: section_header: CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
item-5 at level 3: paragraph: This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/115,394 filed Jan. 11, 1999.
item-6 at level 2: section_header: FIELD OF THE INVENTION
item-7 at level 3: paragraph: This invention relates generally to communication systems and, more particularly, to interleavers for performing code modulation.
item-8 at level 2: section_header: BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
item-9 at level 3: paragraph: Techniques for encoding communication channels, known as coded modulation, have been found to improve the bit error rate (BER) of electronic communication systems such as modem and wireless communication systems. Turbo coded modulation has proven to be a practical, power-efficient, and bandwidth-efficient modulation method for “random-error” channels characterized by additive white Gaussian noise (AWGN) or fading. These random-error channels can be found, for example, in the code division multiple access (CDMA) environment. Since the capacity of a CDMA environment is dependent upon the operating signal to noise ratio, improved performance translates into higher capacity.
item-10 at level 3: paragraph: An aspect of turbo coders which makes them so effective is an interleaver which permutes the original received or transmitted data frame before it is input to a second encoder. The permuting is accomplished by randomizing portions of the signal based upon one or more randomizing algorithms. Combining the permuted data frames with the original data frames has been shown to achieve low BERs in AWGN and fading channels. The interleaving process increases the diversity in the data such that if the modulated symbol is distorted in transmission the error may be recoverable with the use of error correcting algorithms in the decoder.
item-11 at level 3: paragraph: A conventional interleaver collects, or frames, the signal points to be transmitted into an array, where the array is sequentially filled up row by row. After a predefined number of signal points have been framed, the interleaver is emptied by sequentially reading out the columns of the array for transmission. As a result, signal points in the same row of the array that were near each other in the original signal point flow are separated by a number of signal points equal to the number of rows in the array. Ideally, the number of columns and rows would be picked such that interdependent signal points, after transmission, would be separated by more than the expected length of an error burst for the channel.
item-12 at level 3: paragraph: Non-uniform interleaving achieves “maximum scattering” of data and “maximum disorder” of the output sequence. Thus the redundancy introduced by the two convolutional encoders is more equally spread in the output sequence of the turbo encoder. The minimum distance is increased to much higher values than for uniform interleaving. A persistent problem for non-uniform interleaving is how to practically implement the interleaving while achieving sufficient “non-uniformity,” and minimizing delay compensations which limit the use for applications with real-time requirements.
item-13 at level 3: paragraph: Finding an effective interleaver is a current topic in the third generation CDMA standard activities. It has been determined and generally agreed that, as the frame size approaches infinity, the most effective interleaver is the random interleaver. However, for finite frame sizes, the decision as to the most effective interleaver is still open for discussion.
item-14 at level 3: paragraph: Accordingly there exists a need for systems and methods of interleaving codes that improve non-uniformity for finite frame sizes.
item-15 at level 3: paragraph: There also exists a need for such systems and methods of interleaving codes which are relatively simple to implement.
item-16 at level 3: paragraph: It is thus an object of the present invention to provide systems and methods of interleaving codes that improve non-uniformity for finite frame sizes.
item-17 at level 3: paragraph: It is also an object of the present invention to provide systems and methods of interleaving codes which are relatively simple to implement.
item-18 at level 3: paragraph: These and other objects of the invention will become apparent to those skilled in the art from the following description thereof.
item-19 at level 2: section_header: SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
item-20 at level 3: paragraph: The foregoing objects, and others, may be accomplished by the present invention, which interleaves a data frame, where the data frame has a predetermined size and is made up of portions. An embodiment of the invention includes an interleaver for interleaving these data frames. The interleaver includes an input memory configured to store a received data frame as an array organized into rows and columns, a processor connected to the input memory and configured to permute the received data frame in accordance with the equation D(j,k)=D (j, (αjk+βj)modP), and a working memory in electrical communication with the processor and configured to store a permuted version of the data frame. The elements of the equation are as follows: D is the data frame, j and k are indexes to the rows and columns, respectively, in the data frame, α and β are sets of constants selected according to the current row, and P and each αj are relative prime numbers. (“Relative prime numbers” connotes a set of numbers that have no common divisor other than 1. Members of a set of relative prime numbers, considered by themselves, need not be prime numbers.)
item-21 at level 3: paragraph: Another embodiment of the invention includes a method of storing a data frame and indexing it by an N₁×N₂ index array I, where the product of N₁ and N₂ is at least equal to N. The elements of the index array indicate positions of the elements of the data frame. The data frame elements may be stored in any convenient manner and need not be organized as an array. The method further includes permuting the index array according to I(j,k)=I(j,(αjk+βj)modP), wherein I is the index array, and as above j and k are indexes to the rows and columns, respectively, in the index array, α and β are sets of constants selected according to the current row, and P and each αj are relative prime numbers. The data frame, as indexed by the permuted index array I, is effectively permuted.
item-22 at level 3: paragraph: Still another embodiment of the invention includes an interleaver which includes a storage device for storing a data frame and for storing an N₁×N₂ index array I, where the product of N₁ and N₂ is at least equal to N. The elements of the index array indicate positions of the elements of the data frame. The data frame elements may be stored in any convenient manner and need not be organized as an array. The interleaver further includes a permuting device for permuting the index array according to I(j,k)=I(j,(αjk+βj)modP), wherein I is the index array, and as above j and k are indexes to the rows and columns, respectively, in the index array, α and β are sets of constants selected according to the current row, and P and each αj are relative prime numbers. The data frame, as indexed by the permuted index array I, is effectively permuted.
item-23 at level 3: paragraph: The invention will next be described in connection with certain illustrated embodiments and practices. However, it will be clear to those skilled in the art that various modifications, additions and subtractions can be made without departing from the spirit or scope of the claims.
item-24 at level 2: section_header: BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
item-25 at level 3: paragraph: The invention will be more clearly understood by reference to the following detailed description of an exemplary embodiment in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, in which:
item-26 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 1 depicts a diagram of a conventional turbo encoder.
item-27 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 2 depicts a block diagram of the interleaver illustrated in FIG. 1;
item-28 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 3 depicts an array containing a data frame, and permutation of that array;
item-29 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 4 depicts a data frame stored in consecutive storage locations;
item-30 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 5 depicts an index array for indexing the data frame shown in FIG. 4, and permutation of the index array.
item-31 at level 2: section_header: DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
item-32 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 1 illustrates a conventional turbo encoder. As illustrated, conventional turbo encoders include two encoders 20 and an interleaver 100. An interleaver 100 in accordance with the present invention receives incoming data frames 110 of size N, where N is the number of bits, number of bytes, or the number of some other portion the frame may be separated into, which are regarded as frame elements. The interleaver 100 separates the N frame elements into sets of data, such as rows. The interleaver then rearranges (permutes) the data in each set (row) in a pseudo-random fashion. The interleaver 100 may employ different methods for rearranging the data of the different sets. However, those skilled in the art will recognize that one or more of the methods could be reused on one or more of the sets without departing from the scope of the invention. After permuting the data in each of the sets, the interleaver outputs the data in a different order than received.
item-33 at level 3: paragraph: The interleaver 100 may store the data frame 110 in an array of size N₁×N₂ such that N₁*N₂=N. An example depicted in FIG. 3 shows an array 350 having 3 rows (N₁=3) of 6 columns (N₂=6)for storing a data frame 110 having 18 elements, denoted Frame Element 00 (FE00) through FE17 (N=18). While this is the preferred method, the array may also be designed such that N₁*N₂ is a fraction of N such that one or more of the smaller arrays is/are operated on in accordance with the present invention and the results from each of the smaller arrays are later combined.
item-34 at level 3: paragraph: To permute array 350 according to the present invention, each row j of array 350 is individually operated on, to permute the columns k of each row according to the equation:
item-35 at level 3: paragraph: D₁(j,k)=D(j,(αk+β)modP)
item-36 at level 3: paragraph: where:
item-37 at level 3: paragraph: j and k are row and column indices, respectively, in array 350;
item-38 at level 3: paragraph: P is a number greater than or equal to N₂;
item-39 at level 3: paragraph: αj and P arc relative prime numbers (one or both can be non-prime numbers, but the only divisor that they have in common is 1);
item-40 at level 3: paragraph: βj is a constant, one value associated with each row.
item-41 at level 3: paragraph: Once the data for all of the rows are permuted, the new array is read out column by column. Also, once the rows have been permuted, it is possible (but not required) to permute the data grouped by column before outputting the data. In the event that both the rows and columns are permuted, the rows, the columns or both may be permuted in accordance with the present invention. It is also possible to transpose rows of array, for example by transposing bits in the binary representation of the row index j. (In a four-row array, for example, the second and third rows would be transposed under this scheme.) It is also possible that either the rows or the columns, but not both may be permuted in accordance with a different method of permuting. Those skilled in the art will recognize that the system could be rearranged to store the data column by column, permute each set of data in a column and read out the results row by row without departing from the scope of the invention.
item-42 at level 3: paragraph: These methods of interleaving are based on number theory and may be implemented in software and/or hardware (i.e. application specific integrated circuits (ASIC), programmable logic arrays (PLA), or any other suitable logic devices). Further, a single pseudo random sequence generator (i.e. m-sequence, M-sequence, Gold sequence, Kasami sequence . . . ) can be employed as the interleaver.
item-43 at level 3: paragraph: In the example depicted in FIG. 3, the value selected for P is 6, the values of α are 5 for all three rows, and the values of β are 1, 2, and 3 respectively for the three rows. (These are merely exemplary. Other numbers may be chosen to achieve different permutation results.) The values of α (5) are each relative prime numbers relative to the value of P (6), as stipulated above.
item-44 at level 3: paragraph: Calculating the specified equation with the specified values for permuting row 0 of array D 350 into row 0 of array D₁ 360 proceeds as:
item-45 at level 3: paragraph: and the permuted data frame is contained in array D₁ 360 shown in FIG. 3. Outputting the array column by column outputs the frame elements in the order:
item-46 at level 3: paragraph: 1,8,15,0,7,14,5,6,13,4,11,12,3,10,17,2,9,16.
item-47 at level 3: paragraph: In an alternative practice of the invention, data frame 110 is stored in consecutive storage locations, not as an array or matrix, and a separate index array is stored to index the elements of the data frame, the index array is permuted according to the equations of the present invention, and the data frame is output as indexed by the permuted index array.
item-48 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 4 depicts a block 400 of storage 32 elements in length (thus having offsets of 0 through 31 from a starting storage location). A data frame 110, taken in this example to be 22 elements long and thus to consist of elements FE00 through FE21, occupies offset locations 00 through 21 within block 400. Offset locations 22 through 31 of block 400 contain unknown contents. A frame length of 22 elements is merely exemplary, and other lengths could be chosen. Also, storage of the frame elements in consecutive locations is exemplary, and non-consecutive locations could be employed.
item-49 at level 3: paragraph: FIG. 5 depicts index array I 550 for indexing storage block 400. It is organized as 4 rows of 8 columns each (N₁=4, N₂=8, N=N₁*N₂=32). Initial contents are filled in to array I 550 as shown in FIG. 5 sequentially. This sequential initialization yields the same effect as a row-by-row read-in of data frame 110.
item-50 at level 3: paragraph: The index array is permuted according to
item-51 at level 3: paragraph: I₁(j,k)=I(j,(αj*k+βj)modP)
item-52 at level 3: paragraph: where
item-53 at level 3: paragraph: α=1, 3, 5, 7
item-54 at level 3: paragraph: β=0, 0, 0, 0
item-55 at level 3: paragraph: P=8
item-56 at level 3: paragraph: These numbers are exemplary and other numbers could be chosen, as long as the stipulations are observed that P is at least equal to N₂ and that each value of α is a relative prime number relative to the chosen value of P.
item-57 at level 3: paragraph: If the equation is applied to the columns of row 2, for example, it yields:
item-58 at level 3: paragraph: Applying the equation comparably to rows 0, 1, and 3 produces the permuted index array I₁ 560 shown in FIG. 5.
item-59 at level 3: paragraph: The data frame 110 is read out of storage block 400 and output in the order specified in the permuted index array I₁ 560 taken column by column. This would output storage locations in offset order:
item-60 at level 3: paragraph: 0,8,16,24,1,11,21,31,2,14,18,30,3,9,23,29,4,12,20,28,5,15,17,27,6,10,22,26,7,13,19,25.
item-61 at level 3: paragraph: However, the example assumed a frame length of 22 elements, with offset locations 22-31 in block 400 not being part of the data frame. Accordingly, when outputting the data frame it would be punctured or pruned to a length of 22; i.e., offset locations greater than 21 are ignored. The data frame is thus output with an element order of 0,8,16,1,11,21,2,14,18,3,9,4,12,20,5,15,17,6,10,7,13,19.
item-62 at level 3: paragraph: In one aspect of the invention, rows of the array may be transposed prior to outputting, for example by reversing the bits in the binary representations of row index j.
item-63 at level 3: paragraph: There are a number of different ways to implement the interleavers 100 of the present invention. FIG. 2 illustrates an embodiment of the invention wherein the interleaver 100 includes an input memory 300 for receiving and storing the data frame 110. This memory 300 may include shift registers, RAM or the like. The interleaver 100 may also include a working memory 310 which may also include RAM, shift registers or the like. The interleaver includes a processor 320 (e.g., a microprocessor, ASIC, etc.) which may be configured to process I(j,k) in real time according to the above-identified equation or to access a table which includes the results of I(j,k) already stored therein. Those skilled in the art will recognize that memory 300 and memory 310 may be the same memory or they may be separate memories.
item-64 at level 3: paragraph: For real-time determinations of I(j,k), the first row of the index array is permuted and the bytes corresponding to the permuted index are stored in the working memory. Then the next row is permuted and stored, etc. until all rows have been permuted and stored. The permutation of rows may be done sequentially or in parallel.
item-65 at level 3: paragraph: Whether the permuted I(j,k) is determined in real time or by lookup, the data may be stored in the working memory in a number of different ways. It can be stored by selecting the data from the input memory in the same order as the I(j,k)s in the permuted index array (i.e., indexing the input memory with the permuting function) and placing them in the working memory in sequential available memory locations. It may also be stored by selecting the bytes in the sequence they were stored in the input memory (i.e., FIFO) and storing them in the working memory directly into the location determined by the permuted I(j,k)s (i.e., indexing the working memory with the permuting function). Once this is done, the data may be read out of the working memory column by column based upon the permuted index array. As stated above, the data could be subjected to another round of permuting after it is stored in the working memory based upon columns rather than on rows to achieve different results.
item-66 at level 3: paragraph: If the system is sufficiently fast, one of the memories could be eliminated and as a data element is received it could be placed into the working memory, in real time or by table lookup, in the order corresponding to the permuted index array.
item-67 at level 3: paragraph: The disclosed interleavers are compatible with existing turbo code structures. These interleavers offer superior performance without increasing system complexity.
item-68 at level 3: paragraph: In addition, those skilled in the art will realize that de-interleavers can be used to decode the interleaved data frames. The construction of de-interleavers used in decoding turbo codes is well known in the art. As such they are not further discussed herein. However, a de-interleaver corresponding to the embodiments can be constructed using the permuted sequences discussed above.
item-69 at level 3: paragraph: Although the embodiment described above is a turbo encoder such as is found in a CDMA system, those skilled in the art realize that the practice of the invention is not limited thereto and that the invention may be practiced for any type of interleaving and de-interleaving in any communication system.
item-70 at level 3: paragraph: It will thus be seen that the invention efficiently attains the objects set forth above, among those made apparent from the preceding description. In particular, the invention provides improved apparatus and methods of interleaving codes of finite length while minimizing the complexity of the implementation.
item-71 at level 3: paragraph: It will be understood that changes may be made in the above construction and in the foregoing sequences of operation without departing from the scope of the invention. It is accordingly intended that all matter contained in the above description or shown in the accompanying drawings be interpreted as illustrative rather than in a limiting sense.
item-72 at level 3: paragraph: It is also to be understood that the following claims are intended to cover all of the generic and specific features of the invention as described herein, and all statements of the scope of the invention which, as a matter of language, might be said to fall therebetween.
item-73 at level 2: section_header: CLAIMS
item-74 at level 3: paragraph: 1. A method of interleaving elements of frames of signal data communication channel, the method comprising; storing a frame of signal data comprising a plurality of elements as an array D having N₁ rows enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₁−1; and N₂ columns enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₂−1, wherein N₁ and N₂ are positive integers greater than 1; and permuting array D into array D₁ according to D₁(𝑗,𝑘)=D(𝑗,(αj𝑘+βj)𝑚𝑜𝑑𝑃) wherein j is an index through the rows of arrays D and D₁; k is an index through the columns of arrays D and D₁; αj and βj are integers predetermined for each row j; P is an integer at least equal to N₂; and each αj is a relative prime number relative to P.
item-75 at level 3: paragraph: 2. The method according to claim 1 wherein said elements of array D are stored in accordance with a first order and wherein said elements of array D₁ are output in accordance with a second order.
item-76 at level 3: paragraph: 3. The method according to claim 2 wherein elements of array D are stored row by row and elements of array D₁ are output column by column.
item-77 at level 3: paragraph: 4. The method according to claim 1 further including outputting of array D₁ and wherein the product of N₁ and N₂ is greater than the number of elements in the frame and the frame is punctured during outputting to the number of elements in the frame.
item-78 at level 3: paragraph: 5. A method of interleaving elements of frames of signal data communication channel, the method comprising; creating and storing an index array I having N₁ rows enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₁−1; and N₂ columns enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₂−1, wherein N₁ and N₂ are positive integers greater than 1, storing elements of a frame of signal data in each of a plurality of storage locations; storing in row-by-row sequential positions in array I values indicative of corresponding locations of frame elements; and permuting array I into array I₁ according to I₁(𝑗,𝑘)=I(𝑗,(αj𝑘+βj)𝑚𝑜𝑑𝑃) wherein j is an index through the rows of arrays I and I₁; k is an index through the columns of arrays I and I₁; αj and βj are integers predetermined for each row j; P is an integer at least equal to N₂; and each αj is a relative prime number relative to P, whereby the frame of signal data as indexed by array I₁ is effectively permuted.
item-79 at level 3: paragraph: 6. The method according to claim 5 further including permuting said stored elements according to said permuted index array I₁.
item-80 at level 3: paragraph: 7. The method according to claim 5 wherein said elements of the frame of data are output as indexed by entries of array I₁ taken other than row by row.
item-81 at level 3: paragraph: 8. The method according to claim 7 wherein elements of the frame of data are output as indexed by entries of array I₁ taken column by column.
item-82 at level 3: paragraph: 9. The method according to claim 5 including the step of transposing rows of array I prior to the step of permuting array I.
item-83 at level 3: paragraph: 10. The method according to claim 5 wherein N₁ is equal to 4, N₂ is equal to 8, P is equal to 8, and the values of αj are different for each row and are chosen from a group consisting of 1, 3, 5, and 7.
item-84 at level 3: paragraph: 11. The method according to claim 10 wherein the values of αj are 1, 3, 5, and 7 for j=0, 1, 2, and 3 respectively.
item-85 at level 3: paragraph: 12. The method according to claim 11 wherein all values of β are zero.
item-86 at level 3: paragraph: 13. The method according to claim 10 wherein the values of αj are 1, 5, 3, and 7 for j=0, 1, 2, and 3 respectively.
item-87 at level 3: paragraph: 14. The method according to claim 13 wherein all values of β are zero.
item-88 at level 3: paragraph: 15. The method according to claim 5 wherein all values of β are zero.
item-89 at level 3: paragraph: 16. The method according to claim 5 wherein at least two values of β are the same.
item-90 at level 3: paragraph: 17. The method according to claim 5 further including outputting of the frame of data and wherein the product of N₁ and N₂ is greater than the number of elements in the frame of data and the frame of data is punctured during outputting to the number of elements in the frame of data.
item-91 at level 3: paragraph: 18. An interleaver for interleaving elements of frames of data, the interleaver comprising; storage means for storing a frame of data comprising a plurality of elements as an array D having N₁ rows enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₂−1; and N₂ columns enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₂−1, wherein N₁ and N₂ are positive integers greater than 1, and permuting means for permuting array D into array D₁ according to D₁(𝑗,𝑘)=D(𝑗,(αj𝑘+βj)𝑚𝑜𝑑𝑃) wherein j is an index through the rows of arrays D and D₁; k is an index through the columns of arrays D and D₁; αj and βj are integers predetermined for each row j; P is an integer at least equal to N₂; and each αj is a relative prime number relative to P.
item-92 at level 3: paragraph: 19. The interleaver according to claim 18 including means for storing said elements of array D in accordance with a first order and means for outputting said elements of array D₁ in accordance with a second order.
item-93 at level 3: paragraph: 20. The interleaver according to claim 19 wherein said means for storing said elements of array D stores row by row and said means for outputting elements of array D₁ outputs column by column.
item-94 at level 3: paragraph: 21. The interleaver according to claim 18 including means for outputting said array D₁ and for puncturing said array D₁ to the number of elements in the frame when the product of N₁ and N₂ is greater than the number of elements in the frame.
item-95 at level 3: paragraph: 22. An interleaver for interleaving elements of frames of data, the interleaver comprising; means for storing an index array I having N₁ rows enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₁−1; and N₂ columns enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₂−1, wherein N₁ and N₂ are positive integers greater than 1, and means for receiving a frame of data and storing elements of the frame of data in each of a plurality of storage locations; means for storing in row-by-row sequential positions in array I values indicative of corresponding locations of frame elements; and means for permuting array I into array I₁ according to: I₁(𝑗,𝑘)=I(𝑗,(αj𝑘+βj)𝑚𝑜𝑑𝑃) wherein j is an index through the rows of arrays I and I₁; k is an index through the columns of arrays I and I₁; αj and βj are integers predetermined for each row j; P is an integer at least equal to N₂; and each αj is a relative prime number relative to P, whereby the frame of data as indexed by array I₁ is effectively permuted.
item-96 at level 3: paragraph: 23. The interleaver according to claim 22 further including means for permuting said stored elements according to said permuted index array I₁.
item-97 at level 3: paragraph: 24. The interleaver according to claim 22 including means for outputting frame elements as indexed by entries of array I₁ taken other than row by row.
item-98 at level 3: paragraph: 25. The interleaver according to claim 24 including means for outputting frame elements as indexed by entries of array I₁ taken column by column.
item-99 at level 3: paragraph: 26. The interleaver according to claim 22 wherein the product of N₁ and N₂ is greater than the number of elements in the frame and the frame is punctured by the means for outputting to the number of elements in the frame.
item-100 at level 3: paragraph: 27. An interleaver for interleaving elements of frames of data, the interleaver comprising; an input memory for storing a received frame of data comprising a plurality of elements as an array D having N₁ rows enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₁−1; and N₂ columns enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₂−1, wherein N₁ and N₂ are positive integers greater than 1; a processor coupled to said input memory for permuting array D into array D₁ according to D₁(𝑗,𝑘)=D(𝑗,(αj𝑘+βj)𝑚𝑜𝑑𝑃) wherein j is an index through the rows of arrays D and D₁; k is an index through the columns of arrays D and D₁; αj and βj are integers predetermined for each row j; P is an integer at least equal to N₂; and each αj is a relative prime number relative to P, and a working memory coupled to said processor and configured to store the permuted array D₁.
item-101 at level 3: paragraph: 28. The interlcavcr according to claim 27 wherein said input memory stores said elements of array D in accordance with a first order and said working memory outputs said elements of array D₁ in accordance with a second order.
item-102 at level 3: paragraph: 29. The interleaver according to claim 28 wherein said input memory stores elements of array D row by row and said working memory outputs elements of array D₁ column by column.
item-103 at level 3: paragraph: 30. The interleaver according to claim 27 said working memory punctures said array D₁ to the number of elements in the frame when the product of N₁ and N₂ is greater than the number of elements in the frame.
item-104 at level 3: paragraph: 31. An interleaver for interleaving elements of frames of data, the interleaver comprising; a memory for storing an index array I having N₁ rows enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₁−1; and N₂ columns enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₂−1, wherein N₁ and N₂ are positive integers greater than 1, and said memory also for storing elements of a received frame of data in each of a plurality of storage locations; a processor coupled to said memory for storing in row-by-row sequential positions in array I values indicative of corresponding locations of frame elements; and said processor also for permuting array I into array I₁ stored in said memory according to: I₁(𝑗,𝑘)=I(𝑗,(αj𝑘+βj)𝑚𝑜𝑑𝑃) wherein j is an index through the rows of arrays I and I₁; k is an index through the columns of arrays I and I₁; αj and βj are integers predetermined for each row j; P is an integer at least equal to N₂; and each αj is a relative prime number relative to P, and whereby the frame of data as indexed by array I₁ is effectively permuted.
item-105 at level 3: paragraph: 32. The interleaver according to claim 31 wherein said processor permutes said stored elements according to said permuted index array I₁.
item-106 at level 3: paragraph: 33. The interleaver according to claim 31 wherein said memory outputs frame elements as indexed by entries of array I₁ taken other than row by row.
item-107 at level 3: paragraph: 34. The interleaver according to claim 33 wherein said memory outputs frame elements as indexed by entries of array I₁ taken column by column.
item-108 at level 3: paragraph: 35. The interleaver according to claim 31 wherein said memory punctures the frame of data to the number of elements in the frame of data when the product of N₁ and N₂ is greater than the number of elements in the frame of data.

1559
tests/data/groundtruth/docling_v2/pg06442728.json Normal file
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

215
tests/data/groundtruth/docling_v2/pg06442728.md Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,215 @@
# Methods and apparatus for turbo code
## ABSTRACT
An interleaver receives incoming data frames of size N. The interleaver indexes the elements of the frame with an N₁×N₂ index array. The interleaver then effectively rearranges (permutes) the data by permuting the rows of the index array. The interleaver employs the equation I(j,k)=I(j,αjk+βj)modP) to permute the columns (indexed by k) of each row (indexed by j). P is at least equal to N₂, βj is a constant which may be different for each row, and each αj is a relative prime number relative to P. After permuting, the interleaver outputs the data in a different order than received (e.g., receives sequentially row by row, outputs sequentially each column by column).
## CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/115,394 filed Jan. 11, 1999.
## FIELD OF THE INVENTION
This invention relates generally to communication systems and, more particularly, to interleavers for performing code modulation.
## BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Techniques for encoding communication channels, known as coded modulation, have been found to improve the bit error rate (BER) of electronic communication systems such as modem and wireless communication systems. Turbo coded modulation has proven to be a practical, power-efficient, and bandwidth-efficient modulation method for “random-error” channels characterized by additive white Gaussian noise (AWGN) or fading. These random-error channels can be found, for example, in the code division multiple access (CDMA) environment. Since the capacity of a CDMA environment is dependent upon the operating signal to noise ratio, improved performance translates into higher capacity.
An aspect of turbo coders which makes them so effective is an interleaver which permutes the original received or transmitted data frame before it is input to a second encoder. The permuting is accomplished by randomizing portions of the signal based upon one or more randomizing algorithms. Combining the permuted data frames with the original data frames has been shown to achieve low BERs in AWGN and fading channels. The interleaving process increases the diversity in the data such that if the modulated symbol is distorted in transmission the error may be recoverable with the use of error correcting algorithms in the decoder.
A conventional interleaver collects, or frames, the signal points to be transmitted into an array, where the array is sequentially filled up row by row. After a predefined number of signal points have been framed, the interleaver is emptied by sequentially reading out the columns of the array for transmission. As a result, signal points in the same row of the array that were near each other in the original signal point flow are separated by a number of signal points equal to the number of rows in the array. Ideally, the number of columns and rows would be picked such that interdependent signal points, after transmission, would be separated by more than the expected length of an error burst for the channel.
Non-uniform interleaving achieves “maximum scattering” of data and “maximum disorder” of the output sequence. Thus the redundancy introduced by the two convolutional encoders is more equally spread in the output sequence of the turbo encoder. The minimum distance is increased to much higher values than for uniform interleaving. A persistent problem for non-uniform interleaving is how to practically implement the interleaving while achieving sufficient “non-uniformity,” and minimizing delay compensations which limit the use for applications with real-time requirements.
Finding an effective interleaver is a current topic in the third generation CDMA standard activities. It has been determined and generally agreed that, as the frame size approaches infinity, the most effective interleaver is the random interleaver. However, for finite frame sizes, the decision as to the most effective interleaver is still open for discussion.
Accordingly there exists a need for systems and methods of interleaving codes that improve non-uniformity for finite frame sizes.
There also exists a need for such systems and methods of interleaving codes which are relatively simple to implement.
It is thus an object of the present invention to provide systems and methods of interleaving codes that improve non-uniformity for finite frame sizes.
It is also an object of the present invention to provide systems and methods of interleaving codes which are relatively simple to implement.
These and other objects of the invention will become apparent to those skilled in the art from the following description thereof.
## SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The foregoing objects, and others, may be accomplished by the present invention, which interleaves a data frame, where the data frame has a predetermined size and is made up of portions. An embodiment of the invention includes an interleaver for interleaving these data frames. The interleaver includes an input memory configured to store a received data frame as an array organized into rows and columns, a processor connected to the input memory and configured to permute the received data frame in accordance with the equation D(j,k)=D (j, (αjk+βj)modP), and a working memory in electrical communication with the processor and configured to store a permuted version of the data frame. The elements of the equation are as follows: D is the data frame, j and k are indexes to the rows and columns, respectively, in the data frame, α and β are sets of constants selected according to the current row, and P and each αj are relative prime numbers. (“Relative prime numbers” connotes a set of numbers that have no common divisor other than 1. Members of a set of relative prime numbers, considered by themselves, need not be prime numbers.)
Another embodiment of the invention includes a method of storing a data frame and indexing it by an N₁×N₂ index array I, where the product of N₁ and N₂ is at least equal to N. The elements of the index array indicate positions of the elements of the data frame. The data frame elements may be stored in any convenient manner and need not be organized as an array. The method further includes permuting the index array according to I(j,k)=I(j,(αjk+βj)modP), wherein I is the index array, and as above j and k are indexes to the rows and columns, respectively, in the index array, α and β are sets of constants selected according to the current row, and P and each αj are relative prime numbers. The data frame, as indexed by the permuted index array I, is effectively permuted.
Still another embodiment of the invention includes an interleaver which includes a storage device for storing a data frame and for storing an N₁×N₂ index array I, where the product of N₁ and N₂ is at least equal to N. The elements of the index array indicate positions of the elements of the data frame. The data frame elements may be stored in any convenient manner and need not be organized as an array. The interleaver further includes a permuting device for permuting the index array according to I(j,k)=I(j,(αjk+βj)modP), wherein I is the index array, and as above j and k are indexes to the rows and columns, respectively, in the index array, α and β are sets of constants selected according to the current row, and P and each αj are relative prime numbers. The data frame, as indexed by the permuted index array I, is effectively permuted.
The invention will next be described in connection with certain illustrated embodiments and practices. However, it will be clear to those skilled in the art that various modifications, additions and subtractions can be made without departing from the spirit or scope of the claims.
## BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
The invention will be more clearly understood by reference to the following detailed description of an exemplary embodiment in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, in which:
FIG. 1 depicts a diagram of a conventional turbo encoder.
FIG. 2 depicts a block diagram of the interleaver illustrated in FIG. 1;
FIG. 3 depicts an array containing a data frame, and permutation of that array;
FIG. 4 depicts a data frame stored in consecutive storage locations;
FIG. 5 depicts an index array for indexing the data frame shown in FIG. 4, and permutation of the index array.
## DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
FIG. 1 illustrates a conventional turbo encoder. As illustrated, conventional turbo encoders include two encoders 20 and an interleaver 100. An interleaver 100 in accordance with the present invention receives incoming data frames 110 of size N, where N is the number of bits, number of bytes, or the number of some other portion the frame may be separated into, which are regarded as frame elements. The interleaver 100 separates the N frame elements into sets of data, such as rows. The interleaver then rearranges (permutes) the data in each set (row) in a pseudo-random fashion. The interleaver 100 may employ different methods for rearranging the data of the different sets. However, those skilled in the art will recognize that one or more of the methods could be reused on one or more of the sets without departing from the scope of the invention. After permuting the data in each of the sets, the interleaver outputs the data in a different order than received.
The interleaver 100 may store the data frame 110 in an array of size N₁×N₂ such that N₁*N₂=N. An example depicted in FIG. 3 shows an array 350 having 3 rows (N₁=3) of 6 columns (N₂=6)for storing a data frame 110 having 18 elements, denoted Frame Element 00 (FE00) through FE17 (N=18). While this is the preferred method, the array may also be designed such that N₁*N₂ is a fraction of N such that one or more of the smaller arrays is/are operated on in accordance with the present invention and the results from each of the smaller arrays are later combined.
To permute array 350 according to the present invention, each row j of array 350 is individually operated on, to permute the columns k of each row according to the equation:
D₁(j,k)=D(j,(αk+β)modP)
where:
j and k are row and column indices, respectively, in array 350;
P is a number greater than or equal to N₂;
αj and P arc relative prime numbers (one or both can be non-prime numbers, but the only divisor that they have in common is 1);
βj is a constant, one value associated with each row.
Once the data for all of the rows are permuted, the new array is read out column by column. Also, once the rows have been permuted, it is possible (but not required) to permute the data grouped by column before outputting the data. In the event that both the rows and columns are permuted, the rows, the columns or both may be permuted in accordance with the present invention. It is also possible to transpose rows of array, for example by transposing bits in the binary representation of the row index j. (In a four-row array, for example, the second and third rows would be transposed under this scheme.) It is also possible that either the rows or the columns, but not both may be permuted in accordance with a different method of permuting. Those skilled in the art will recognize that the system could be rearranged to store the data column by column, permute each set of data in a column and read out the results row by row without departing from the scope of the invention.
These methods of interleaving are based on number theory and may be implemented in software and/or hardware (i.e. application specific integrated circuits (ASIC), programmable logic arrays (PLA), or any other suitable logic devices). Further, a single pseudo random sequence generator (i.e. m-sequence, M-sequence, Gold sequence, Kasami sequence . . . ) can be employed as the interleaver.
In the example depicted in FIG. 3, the value selected for P is 6, the values of α are 5 for all three rows, and the values of β are 1, 2, and 3 respectively for the three rows. (These are merely exemplary. Other numbers may be chosen to achieve different permutation results.) The values of α (5) are each relative prime numbers relative to the value of P (6), as stipulated above.
Calculating the specified equation with the specified values for permuting row 0 of array D 350 into row 0 of array D₁ 360 proceeds as:
and the permuted data frame is contained in array D₁ 360 shown in FIG. 3. Outputting the array column by column outputs the frame elements in the order:
1,8,15,0,7,14,5,6,13,4,11,12,3,10,17,2,9,16.
In an alternative practice of the invention, data frame 110 is stored in consecutive storage locations, not as an array or matrix, and a separate index array is stored to index the elements of the data frame, the index array is permuted according to the equations of the present invention, and the data frame is output as indexed by the permuted index array.
FIG. 4 depicts a block 400 of storage 32 elements in length (thus having offsets of 0 through 31 from a starting storage location). A data frame 110, taken in this example to be 22 elements long and thus to consist of elements FE00 through FE21, occupies offset locations 00 through 21 within block 400. Offset locations 22 through 31 of block 400 contain unknown contents. A frame length of 22 elements is merely exemplary, and other lengths could be chosen. Also, storage of the frame elements in consecutive locations is exemplary, and non-consecutive locations could be employed.
FIG. 5 depicts index array I 550 for indexing storage block 400. It is organized as 4 rows of 8 columns each (N₁=4, N₂=8, N=N₁*N₂=32). Initial contents are filled in to array I 550 as shown in FIG. 5 sequentially. This sequential initialization yields the same effect as a row-by-row read-in of data frame 110.
The index array is permuted according to
I₁(j,k)=I(j,(αj*k+βj)modP)
where
α=1, 3, 5, 7
β=0, 0, 0, 0
P=8
These numbers are exemplary and other numbers could be chosen, as long as the stipulations are observed that P is at least equal to N₂ and that each value of α is a relative prime number relative to the chosen value of P.
If the equation is applied to the columns of row 2, for example, it yields:
Applying the equation comparably to rows 0, 1, and 3 produces the permuted index array I₁ 560 shown in FIG. 5.
The data frame 110 is read out of storage block 400 and output in the order specified in the permuted index array I₁ 560 taken column by column. This would output storage locations in offset order:
0,8,16,24,1,11,21,31,2,14,18,30,3,9,23,29,4,12,20,28,5,15,17,27,6,10,22,26,7,13,19,25.
However, the example assumed a frame length of 22 elements, with offset locations 22-31 in block 400 not being part of the data frame. Accordingly, when outputting the data frame it would be punctured or pruned to a length of 22; i.e., offset locations greater than 21 are ignored. The data frame is thus output with an element order of 0,8,16,1,11,21,2,14,18,3,9,4,12,20,5,15,17,6,10,7,13,19.
In one aspect of the invention, rows of the array may be transposed prior to outputting, for example by reversing the bits in the binary representations of row index j.
There are a number of different ways to implement the interleavers 100 of the present invention. FIG. 2 illustrates an embodiment of the invention wherein the interleaver 100 includes an input memory 300 for receiving and storing the data frame 110. This memory 300 may include shift registers, RAM or the like. The interleaver 100 may also include a working memory 310 which may also include RAM, shift registers or the like. The interleaver includes a processor 320 (e.g., a microprocessor, ASIC, etc.) which may be configured to process I(j,k) in real time according to the above-identified equation or to access a table which includes the results of I(j,k) already stored therein. Those skilled in the art will recognize that memory 300 and memory 310 may be the same memory or they may be separate memories.
For real-time determinations of I(j,k), the first row of the index array is permuted and the bytes corresponding to the permuted index are stored in the working memory. Then the next row is permuted and stored, etc. until all rows have been permuted and stored. The permutation of rows may be done sequentially or in parallel.
Whether the permuted I(j,k) is determined in real time or by lookup, the data may be stored in the working memory in a number of different ways. It can be stored by selecting the data from the input memory in the same order as the I(j,k)s in the permuted index array (i.e., indexing the input memory with the permuting function) and placing them in the working memory in sequential available memory locations. It may also be stored by selecting the bytes in the sequence they were stored in the input memory (i.e., FIFO) and storing them in the working memory directly into the location determined by the permuted I(j,k)s (i.e., indexing the working memory with the permuting function). Once this is done, the data may be read out of the working memory column by column based upon the permuted index array. As stated above, the data could be subjected to another round of permuting after it is stored in the working memory based upon columns rather than on rows to achieve different results.
If the system is sufficiently fast, one of the memories could be eliminated and as a data element is received it could be placed into the working memory, in real time or by table lookup, in the order corresponding to the permuted index array.
The disclosed interleavers are compatible with existing turbo code structures. These interleavers offer superior performance without increasing system complexity.
In addition, those skilled in the art will realize that de-interleavers can be used to decode the interleaved data frames. The construction of de-interleavers used in decoding turbo codes is well known in the art. As such they are not further discussed herein. However, a de-interleaver corresponding to the embodiments can be constructed using the permuted sequences discussed above.
Although the embodiment described above is a turbo encoder such as is found in a CDMA system, those skilled in the art realize that the practice of the invention is not limited thereto and that the invention may be practiced for any type of interleaving and de-interleaving in any communication system.
It will thus be seen that the invention efficiently attains the objects set forth above, among those made apparent from the preceding description. In particular, the invention provides improved apparatus and methods of interleaving codes of finite length while minimizing the complexity of the implementation.
It will be understood that changes may be made in the above construction and in the foregoing sequences of operation without departing from the scope of the invention. It is accordingly intended that all matter contained in the above description or shown in the accompanying drawings be interpreted as illustrative rather than in a limiting sense.
It is also to be understood that the following claims are intended to cover all of the generic and specific features of the invention as described herein, and all statements of the scope of the invention which, as a matter of language, might be said to fall therebetween.
## CLAIMS
1. A method of interleaving elements of frames of signal data communication channel, the method comprising; storing a frame of signal data comprising a plurality of elements as an array D having N₁ rows enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₁−1; and N₂ columns enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₂−1, wherein N₁ and N₂ are positive integers greater than 1; and permuting array D into array D₁ according to D₁(𝑗,𝑘)=D(𝑗,(αj𝑘+βj)𝑚𝑜𝑑𝑃) wherein j is an index through the rows of arrays D and D₁; k is an index through the columns of arrays D and D₁; αj and βj are integers predetermined for each row j; P is an integer at least equal to N₂; and each αj is a relative prime number relative to P.
2. The method according to claim 1 wherein said elements of array D are stored in accordance with a first order and wherein said elements of array D₁ are output in accordance with a second order.
3. The method according to claim 2 wherein elements of array D are stored row by row and elements of array D₁ are output column by column.
4. The method according to claim 1 further including outputting of array D₁ and wherein the product of N₁ and N₂ is greater than the number of elements in the frame and the frame is punctured during outputting to the number of elements in the frame.
5. A method of interleaving elements of frames of signal data communication channel, the method comprising; creating and storing an index array I having N₁ rows enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₁−1; and N₂ columns enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₂−1, wherein N₁ and N₂ are positive integers greater than 1, storing elements of a frame of signal data in each of a plurality of storage locations; storing in row-by-row sequential positions in array I values indicative of corresponding locations of frame elements; and permuting array I into array I₁ according to I₁(𝑗,𝑘)=I(𝑗,(αj𝑘+βj)𝑚𝑜𝑑𝑃) wherein j is an index through the rows of arrays I and I₁; k is an index through the columns of arrays I and I₁; αj and βj are integers predetermined for each row j; P is an integer at least equal to N₂; and each αj is a relative prime number relative to P, whereby the frame of signal data as indexed by array I₁ is effectively permuted.
6. The method according to claim 5 further including permuting said stored elements according to said permuted index array I₁.
7. The method according to claim 5 wherein said elements of the frame of data are output as indexed by entries of array I₁ taken other than row by row.
8. The method according to claim 7 wherein elements of the frame of data are output as indexed by entries of array I₁ taken column by column.
9. The method according to claim 5 including the step of transposing rows of array I prior to the step of permuting array I.
10. The method according to claim 5 wherein N₁ is equal to 4, N₂ is equal to 8, P is equal to 8, and the values of αj are different for each row and are chosen from a group consisting of 1, 3, 5, and 7.
11. The method according to claim 10 wherein the values of αj are 1, 3, 5, and 7 for j=0, 1, 2, and 3 respectively.
12. The method according to claim 11 wherein all values of β are zero.
13. The method according to claim 10 wherein the values of αj are 1, 5, 3, and 7 for j=0, 1, 2, and 3 respectively.
14. The method according to claim 13 wherein all values of β are zero.
15. The method according to claim 5 wherein all values of β are zero.
16. The method according to claim 5 wherein at least two values of β are the same.
17. The method according to claim 5 further including outputting of the frame of data and wherein the product of N₁ and N₂ is greater than the number of elements in the frame of data and the frame of data is punctured during outputting to the number of elements in the frame of data.
18. An interleaver for interleaving elements of frames of data, the interleaver comprising; storage means for storing a frame of data comprising a plurality of elements as an array D having N₁ rows enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₂−1; and N₂ columns enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₂−1, wherein N₁ and N₂ are positive integers greater than 1, and permuting means for permuting array D into array D₁ according to D₁(𝑗,𝑘)=D(𝑗,(αj𝑘+βj)𝑚𝑜𝑑𝑃) wherein j is an index through the rows of arrays D and D₁; k is an index through the columns of arrays D and D₁; αj and βj are integers predetermined for each row j; P is an integer at least equal to N₂; and each αj is a relative prime number relative to P.
19. The interleaver according to claim 18 including means for storing said elements of array D in accordance with a first order and means for outputting said elements of array D₁ in accordance with a second order.
20. The interleaver according to claim 19 wherein said means for storing said elements of array D stores row by row and said means for outputting elements of array D₁ outputs column by column.
21. The interleaver according to claim 18 including means for outputting said array D₁ and for puncturing said array D₁ to the number of elements in the frame when the product of N₁ and N₂ is greater than the number of elements in the frame.
22. An interleaver for interleaving elements of frames of data, the interleaver comprising; means for storing an index array I having N₁ rows enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₁−1; and N₂ columns enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₂−1, wherein N₁ and N₂ are positive integers greater than 1, and means for receiving a frame of data and storing elements of the frame of data in each of a plurality of storage locations; means for storing in row-by-row sequential positions in array I values indicative of corresponding locations of frame elements; and means for permuting array I into array I₁ according to: I₁(𝑗,𝑘)=I(𝑗,(αj𝑘+βj)𝑚𝑜𝑑𝑃) wherein j is an index through the rows of arrays I and I₁; k is an index through the columns of arrays I and I₁; αj and βj are integers predetermined for each row j; P is an integer at least equal to N₂; and each αj is a relative prime number relative to P, whereby the frame of data as indexed by array I₁ is effectively permuted.
23. The interleaver according to claim 22 further including means for permuting said stored elements according to said permuted index array I₁.
24. The interleaver according to claim 22 including means for outputting frame elements as indexed by entries of array I₁ taken other than row by row.
25. The interleaver according to claim 24 including means for outputting frame elements as indexed by entries of array I₁ taken column by column.
26. The interleaver according to claim 22 wherein the product of N₁ and N₂ is greater than the number of elements in the frame and the frame is punctured by the means for outputting to the number of elements in the frame.
27. An interleaver for interleaving elements of frames of data, the interleaver comprising; an input memory for storing a received frame of data comprising a plurality of elements as an array D having N₁ rows enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₁−1; and N₂ columns enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₂−1, wherein N₁ and N₂ are positive integers greater than 1; a processor coupled to said input memory for permuting array D into array D₁ according to D₁(𝑗,𝑘)=D(𝑗,(αj𝑘+βj)𝑚𝑜𝑑𝑃) wherein j is an index through the rows of arrays D and D₁; k is an index through the columns of arrays D and D₁; αj and βj are integers predetermined for each row j; P is an integer at least equal to N₂; and each αj is a relative prime number relative to P, and a working memory coupled to said processor and configured to store the permuted array D₁.
28. The interlcavcr according to claim 27 wherein said input memory stores said elements of array D in accordance with a first order and said working memory outputs said elements of array D₁ in accordance with a second order.
29. The interleaver according to claim 28 wherein said input memory stores elements of array D row by row and said working memory outputs elements of array D₁ column by column.
30. The interleaver according to claim 27 said working memory punctures said array D₁ to the number of elements in the frame when the product of N₁ and N₂ is greater than the number of elements in the frame.
31. An interleaver for interleaving elements of frames of data, the interleaver comprising; a memory for storing an index array I having N₁ rows enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₁−1; and N₂ columns enumerated as 0, 1, . . . N₂−1, wherein N₁ and N₂ are positive integers greater than 1, and said memory also for storing elements of a received frame of data in each of a plurality of storage locations; a processor coupled to said memory for storing in row-by-row sequential positions in array I values indicative of corresponding locations of frame elements; and said processor also for permuting array I into array I₁ stored in said memory according to: I₁(𝑗,𝑘)=I(𝑗,(αj𝑘+βj)𝑚𝑜𝑑𝑃) wherein j is an index through the rows of arrays I and I₁; k is an index through the columns of arrays I and I₁; αj and βj are integers predetermined for each row j; P is an integer at least equal to N₂; and each αj is a relative prime number relative to P, and whereby the frame of data as indexed by array I₁ is effectively permuted.
32. The interleaver according to claim 31 wherein said processor permutes said stored elements according to said permuted index array I₁.
33. The interleaver according to claim 31 wherein said memory outputs frame elements as indexed by entries of array I₁ taken other than row by row.
34. The interleaver according to claim 33 wherein said memory outputs frame elements as indexed by entries of array I₁ taken column by column.
35. The interleaver according to claim 31 wherein said memory punctures the frame of data to the number of elements in the frame of data when the product of N₁ and N₂ is greater than the number of elements in the frame of data.

25908
tests/data/uspto/ipa20110039701.xml Normal file
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

723
tests/data/uspto/ipa20180000016.xml Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,723 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE us-patent-application SYSTEM "us-patent-application-v44-2014-04-03.dtd" [ ]>
<us-patent-application lang="EN" dtd-version="v4.4 2014-04-03" file="US20180000016A1-20180104.XML" status="PRODUCTION" id="us-patent-application" country="US" date-produced="20171219" date-publ="20180104">
<us-bibliographic-data-application lang="EN" country="US">
<publication-reference>
<document-id>
<country>US</country>
<doc-number>20180000016</doc-number>
<kind>A1</kind>
<date>20180104</date>
</document-id>
</publication-reference>
<application-reference appl-type="utility">
<document-id>
<country>US</country>
<doc-number>15634401</doc-number>
<date>20170627</date>
</document-id>
</application-reference>
<us-application-series-code>15</us-application-series-code>
<priority-claims>
<priority-claim sequence="01" kind="national">
<country>JP</country>
<doc-number>2016-128835</doc-number>
<date>20160629</date>
</priority-claim>
</priority-claims>
<classifications-ipcr>
<classification-ipcr>
<ipc-version-indicator><date>20060101</date></ipc-version-indicator>
<classification-level>A</classification-level>
<section>A</section>
<class>01</class>
<subclass>G</subclass>
<main-group>7</main-group>
<subgroup>04</subgroup>
<symbol-position>F</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20180104</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
</classification-ipcr>
<classification-ipcr>
<ipc-version-indicator><date>20060101</date></ipc-version-indicator>
<classification-level>A</classification-level>
<section>A</section>
<class>01</class>
<subclass>G</subclass>
<main-group>1</main-group>
<subgroup>00</subgroup>
<symbol-position>L</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20180104</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
</classification-ipcr>
<classification-ipcr>
<ipc-version-indicator><date>20060101</date></ipc-version-indicator>
<classification-level>A</classification-level>
<section>A</section>
<class>01</class>
<subclass>G</subclass>
<main-group>31</main-group>
<subgroup>00</subgroup>
<symbol-position>L</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20180104</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
</classification-ipcr>
<classification-ipcr>
<ipc-version-indicator><date>20100101</date></ipc-version-indicator>
<classification-level>A</classification-level>
<section>H</section>
<class>01</class>
<subclass>L</subclass>
<main-group>33</main-group>
<subgroup>50</subgroup>
<symbol-position>L</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20180104</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
</classification-ipcr>
</classifications-ipcr>
<classifications-cpc>
<main-cpc>
<classification-cpc>
<cpc-version-indicator><date>20130101</date></cpc-version-indicator>
<section>A</section>
<class>01</class>
<subclass>G</subclass>
<main-group>7</main-group>
<subgroup>045</subgroup>
<symbol-position>F</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20180104</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
<scheme-origination-code>C</scheme-origination-code>
</classification-cpc>
</main-cpc>
<further-cpc>
<classification-cpc>
<cpc-version-indicator><date>20130101</date></cpc-version-indicator>
<section>H</section>
<class>01</class>
<subclass>L</subclass>
<main-group>33</main-group>
<subgroup>504</subgroup>
<symbol-position>L</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20180104</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
<scheme-origination-code>C</scheme-origination-code>
</classification-cpc>
<classification-cpc>
<cpc-version-indicator><date>20130101</date></cpc-version-indicator>
<section>A</section>
<class>01</class>
<subclass>G</subclass>
<main-group>1</main-group>
<subgroup>001</subgroup>
<symbol-position>L</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20180104</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
<scheme-origination-code>C</scheme-origination-code>
</classification-cpc>
<classification-cpc>
<cpc-version-indicator><date>20130101</date></cpc-version-indicator>
<section>A</section>
<class>01</class>
<subclass>G</subclass>
<main-group>31</main-group>
<subgroup>00</subgroup>
<symbol-position>L</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20180104</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
<scheme-origination-code>C</scheme-origination-code>
</classification-cpc>
</further-cpc>
</classifications-cpc>
<invention-title id="d2e61">LIGHT EMITTING DEVICE AND PLANT CULTIVATION METHOD</invention-title>
<us-parties>
<us-applicants>
<us-applicant sequence="00" app-type="applicant" designation="us-only" applicant-authority-category="assignee">
<addressbook>
<orgname>NICHIA CORPORATION</orgname>
<address>
<city>Anan-shi</city>
<country>JP</country>
</address>
</addressbook>
<residence>
<country>JP</country>
</residence>
</us-applicant>
</us-applicants>
<inventors>
<inventor sequence="00" designation="us-only">
<addressbook>
<last-name>AMIYA</last-name>
<first-name>Mika</first-name>
<address>
<city>Naruto-shi</city>
<country>JP</country>
</address>
</addressbook>
</inventor>
<inventor sequence="01" designation="us-only">
<addressbook>
<last-name>FUJIO</last-name>
<first-name>Kazushige</first-name>
<address>
<city>Tokushima-shi</city>
<country>JP</country>
</address>
</addressbook>
</inventor>
<inventor sequence="02" designation="us-only">
<addressbook>
<last-name>SUZUKI</last-name>
<first-name>Tomokazu</first-name>
<address>
<city>Tokushima-shi</city>
<country>JP</country>
</address>
</addressbook>
</inventor>
</inventors>
</us-parties>
<assignees>
<assignee>
<addressbook>
<orgname>NICHIA CORPORATION</orgname>
<role>03</role>
<address>
<city>Anan-shi, Tokushima</city>
<country>JP</country>
</address>
</addressbook>
</assignee>
</assignees>
</us-bibliographic-data-application>
<abstract id="abstract">
<p id="p-0001" num="0000">Provided is a light emitting device that includes a light emitting element having a light emission peak wavelength ranging from 380 nm to 490 nm, and a fluorescent material excited by light from the light emitting element and emitting light having at a light emission peak wavelength ranging from 580 nm or more to less than 680 nm. The light emitting device emits light having a ratio R/B of a photon flux density R to a photon flux density B ranging from 2.0 to 4.0 and a ratio R/FR of the photon flux density R to a photon flux density FR ranging from 0.7 to 13.0, the photon flux density R being in a wavelength range of 620 nm or more and less than 700 nm, the photon flux density B being in a wavelength range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, and the photon flux density FR being in a wavelength range of 700 nm or more and 780 nm or less.</p>
</abstract>
<drawings id="DRAWINGS">
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00000" num="00000">
<img id="EMI-D00000" he="111.34mm" wi="122.51mm" file="US20180000016A1-20180104-D00000.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00001" num="00001">
<img id="EMI-D00001" he="127.85mm" wi="140.89mm" file="US20180000016A1-20180104-D00001.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00002" num="00002">
<img id="EMI-D00002" he="130.30mm" wi="161.29mm" file="US20180000016A1-20180104-D00002.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00003" num="00003">
<img id="EMI-D00003" he="104.22mm" wi="171.03mm" file="US20180000016A1-20180104-D00003.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00004" num="00004">
<img id="EMI-D00004" he="96.94mm" wi="168.66mm" file="US20180000016A1-20180104-D00004.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
</drawings>
<description id="description">
<?summary-of-invention description="Summary of Invention" end="lead"?>
<heading id="h-0001" level="1">CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION</heading>
<p id="p-0002" num="0001">The application claims benefit of Japanese Patent Application No. 2016-128835 filed on Jun. 29, 2016, the entire disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.</p>
<heading id="h-0002" level="1">BACKGROUND</heading>
<heading id="h-0003" level="1">Technical Field</heading>
<p id="p-0003" num="0002">The present disclosure relates to a light emitting device and a plant cultivation method.</p>
<heading id="h-0004" level="1">Description of Related Art</heading>
<p id="p-0004" num="0003">With environmental changes due to climate change and other artificial disruptions, plant factories are expected to increase production efficiency of vegetables and be capable of adjusting production in order to make it possible to stably supply vegetables. Plant factories that are capable of artificial management can stably supply clean and safe vegetables to markets, and therefore are expected to be the next-generation industries.</p>
<p id="p-0005" num="0004">Plant factories that are completely isolated from external environment make it possible to artificially control and collect various data such as growth method, growth rate data, yield data, depending on classification of plants. Based on those data, plant factories are able to plan production according to the balance between supply and demand in markets, and supply plants such as vegetables without depending on surrounding conditions such as climatic environment. Particularly, an increase in food production is indispensable with world population growth. If plants can be systematically produced without the influence by surrounding conditions such as climatic environment, vegetables produced in plant factories can be stably supplied within a country, and additionally can be exported abroad as viable products.</p>
<p id="p-0006" num="0005">In general, vegetables that are grown outdoors get sunlight, grow while conducting photosynthesis, and are gathered. On the other hand, vegetables that are grown in plant factories are required to be harvested in a short period of time, or are required to grow in larger than normal sizes even in an ordinary growth period.</p>
<p id="p-0007" num="0006">In plant factories, the light source used in place of sunlight affect a growth period, growth of plants. LED lighting is being used in place of conventional fluorescent lamps, from a standpoint of power consumption reduction.</p>
<p id="p-0008" num="0007">For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-125007 discloses a plant growth method. In this method, the plants is irradiated with light emitted from a first LED light emitting element and/or a second LED light emitting element at predetermined timings using a lighting apparatus including the first LED light emitting element emitting light having a wavelength region of 625 to 690 nm and the second LED light emitting element emitting light having a wavelength region of 420 to 490 nm in order to emit lights having sufficient intensities and different wavelengths from each other.</p>
<heading id="h-0005" level="1">SUMMARY</heading>
<p id="p-0009" num="0008">However, even though plants are merely irradiated with lights having different wavelengths as in the plant growth method disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-125007, the effect of promoting plant growth is not sufficient. Further improvement is required in promotion of plant growth.</p>
<p id="p-0010" num="0009">Accordingly, an object of the present disclosure is to provide a light emitting device capable of promoting growth of plants and a plant cultivation method.</p>
<p id="p-0011" num="0010">Means for solving the above problems are as follows, and the present disclosure includes the following embodiments.</p>
<p id="p-0012" num="0011">A first embodiment of the present disclosure is a light emitting device including a light emitting element having a light emission peak wavelength in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, and a fluorescent material that is excited by light from the light emitting element and emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm. The light emitting device emits light having a ratio R/B of a photon flux density R to a photon flux density B within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less, and a ratio R/FR of a photon flux density R to a photon flux density FR within a range of 0.7 or more and 13.0 or less, where the photon flux density R is the number of light quanta (&#x3bc;mol&#xb7;m<sup>&#x2212;2</sup>&#xb7;g<sup>&#x2212;1</sup>) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 620 nm or more and less than 700 nm, the photon flux density B is the number of light quanta (&#x3bc;mol&#xb7;m<sup>&#x2212;2</sup>&#xb7;g<sup>&#x2212;1</sup>) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, and the photon flux density FR is the number of light quanta (&#x3bc;mol&#xb7;m<sup>&#x2212;2</sup>&#xb7;g<sup>&#x2212;1</sup>) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 700 nm or more and 780 nm or less.</p>
<p id="p-0013" num="0012">A second embodiment of the present disclosure is a plant cultivation method including irradiating plants with light from the light emitting device.</p>
<p id="p-0014" num="0013">According to embodiments of the present disclosure, a light emitting device capable of promoting growth of plants and a plant cultivation method can be provided.</p>
<?summary-of-invention description="Summary of Invention" end="tail"?>
<?brief-description-of-drawings description="Brief Description of Drawings" end="lead"?>
<description-of-drawings>
<heading id="h-0006" level="1">BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS</heading>
<p id="p-0015" num="0014"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</figref> is a schematic cross sectional view of a light emitting device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.</p>
<p id="p-0016" num="0015"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2</figref> is a diagram showing spectra of wavelengths and relative photon flux densities of exemplary light emitting devices according to embodiments of the present disclosure and a comparative light emitting devices.</p>
<p id="p-0017" num="0016"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 3</figref> is a graph showing fresh weight (edible part) at the harvest time of each plant grown by irradiating the plant with light from exemplary light emitting devices according to embodiments of the present disclosure and a comparative light emitting device.</p>
<p id="p-0018" num="0017"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 4</figref> is a graph showing nitrate nitrogen content in each plant grown by irradiating the plant with light from exemplary light emitting devices according to embodiments of the present disclosure and a comparative light emitting device.</p>
</description-of-drawings>
<?brief-description-of-drawings description="Brief Description of Drawings" end="tail"?>
<?detailed-description description="Detailed Description" end="lead"?>
<heading id="h-0007" level="1">DETAILED DESCRIPTION</heading>
<p id="p-0019" num="0018">A light emitting device and a plant cultivation method according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment. However, the embodiment described below only exemplifies the technical concept of the present invention, and the present invention is not limited to the light emitting device and plant cultivation method described below. In the present specification, the relationship between the color name and the chromaticity coordinate, the relationship between the wavelength range of light and the color name of monochromatic light follows JIS Z8110.</p>
<heading id="h-0008" level="2">Light Emitting Device</heading>
<p id="p-0020" num="0019">An embodiment of the present disclosure is a light emitting device including a light emitting element having a light emission peak wavelength in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a &#x201c;region of from near ultraviolet to blue color&#x201d;), and a first fluorescent material emitting light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm by being excited by light from the light emitting element. The light emitting device emits light having a ratio R/B of a photon flux density R to a photon flux density B within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less, and a ratio R/FR of the photon flux density R to a photon flux density FR within a range of 0.7 or more and 13.0 or less, where the photon flux density R is the number of light quanta (&#x3bc;mol&#xb7;m<sup>&#x2212;2</sup>&#xb7;g<sup>&#x2212;1</sup>) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 620 nm or more and less than 700 nm, the photon flux density B is the number of light quanta (&#x3bc;mol&#xb7;m<sup>&#x2212;2</sup>&#xb7;g<sup>&#x2212;1</sup>) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, and the photon flux density FR is the number of light quanta (&#x3bc;mol&#xb7;m<sup>&#x2212;2</sup>&#xb7;g<sup>&#x2212;1</sup>) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 700 nm or more and 780 nm or less.</p>
<p id="p-0021" num="0020">An example of the light emitting device according to one embodiment of the present disclosure is described below based on the drawings. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</figref> is a schematic cross sectional view showing a light emitting device <b>100</b> according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.</p>
<p id="p-0022" num="0021">The light emitting device <b>100</b> includes a molded article <b>40</b>, a light emitting element <b>10</b> and a fluorescent member <b>50</b>, as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</figref>. The molded article <b>40</b> includes a first lead <b>20</b> and a second lead <b>30</b> that are integrally molded with a resin portion <b>42</b> containing a thermoplastic resin or a thermosetting resin. The molded article <b>40</b> forms a depression having a bottom and sides, and the light emitting element <b>10</b> is placed on the bottom of the depression. The light emitting element <b>10</b> has a pair of an anode and a cathode, and the anode and the cathode are electrically connected to the first lead <b>20</b> and the second lead <b>30</b> respectively through the respective wires <b>60</b>. The light emitting element <b>10</b> is covered with the fluorescent member <b>50</b>. The fluorescent member <b>50</b> includes, for example, a fluorescent material <b>70</b> performing wavelength conversion of light from the light emitting element <b>10</b>, and a resin. The fluorescent material <b>70</b> includes a first fluorescent material <b>71</b> and a second fluorescent material <b>72</b>. A part of the first lead <b>20</b> and the second lead <b>30</b> that are connected to a pair of the anode and the cathode of the light emitting element <b>10</b> is exposed toward outside a package constituting the light emitting element <b>100</b>. The light emitting device <b>100</b> can emit light by receiving electric power supply from the outside through the first lead <b>20</b> and the second lead <b>30</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0023" num="0022">The fluorescent member <b>50</b> not only performs wavelength conversion of light emitted from the light emitting element <b>10</b>, but functions as a member for protecting the light emitting element <b>10</b> from the external environment. In <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</figref>, the fluorescent material <b>70</b> is localized in the fluorescent member <b>50</b> in the state that the first fluorescent material <b>71</b> and the second fluorescent material <b>72</b> are mixed with each other, and is arranged adjacent to the light emitting element <b>10</b>. This constitution can efficiently perform the wavelength conversion of light from the light emitting element <b>10</b> in the fluorescent material <b>70</b>, and as a result, can provide a light emitting device having excellent light emission efficiency. The arrangement of the fluorescent member <b>50</b> containing the fluorescent material <b>70</b>, and the light emitting element <b>10</b> is not limited to the embodiment that the fluorescent material <b>70</b> is arranged adjacent to the light emitting element <b>10</b> as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</figref>, and considering the influence of heat generated from the light emitting element <b>10</b>, the fluorescent material <b>70</b> can be arranged separated from the light emitting element <b>10</b> in the fluorescent member <b>50</b>. Furthermore, light having suppressed color unevenness can be emitted from the light emitting device <b>100</b> by arranging the fluorescent material <b>70</b> almost evenly in the fluorescent member <b>50</b>. In <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</figref>, the fluorescent material <b>70</b> is arranged in the state that the first fluorescent material <b>71</b> and the second fluorescent material <b>72</b> are mixed with each other. However, for example, the first fluorescent material <b>71</b> may be arranged in a layer state and the second fluorescent material <b>72</b> may be arranged thereon in another layer state. Alternatively, the second fluorescent material <b>72</b> may be arranged in a layer state and the first fluorescent material <b>71</b> may be arranged thereon in another layer state.</p>
<p id="p-0024" num="0023">The light emitting device <b>100</b> includes the first fluorescent material <b>71</b> having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm by being excited by light from the light emitting element <b>10</b>, and preferably further includes the second fluorescent material <b>72</b> having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less by being excited by light from the light emitting element <b>10</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0025" num="0024">The first fluorescent material <b>71</b> and the second fluorescent material <b>72</b> are contained in, for example, the fluorescent member <b>50</b> covering the light emitting element <b>10</b>. The light emitting device <b>100</b> in which the light emitting element <b>10</b> has been covered with the fluorescent member <b>50</b> containing the first fluorescent material <b>71</b> and the second fluorescent material <b>72</b> emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm by a part of light emission of the light emitting element <b>10</b> that is absorbed in the first fluorescent material <b>71</b>. Furthermore, the light emitting device <b>100</b> emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less by a part of light emission of the light emitting element <b>10</b> that is absorbed in the second fluorescent material <b>72</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0026" num="0025">Plants grow when a pigment (chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b) present in chlorophyll thereof absorbs light and additionally takes carbon dioxide gas and water therein, and these are converted to carbohydrates (saccharides) by photosynthesis. Chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b used in growth promotion of plants particularly have absorption peaks in a red region of 625 nm or more and 675 nm or less and a blue region of 425 nm or more and 475 nm or less. The action of photosynthesis by chlorophylls of plants mainly occurs in a wavelength range of 400 nm or more and 700 nm or less, but chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b further have local absorption peaks in a region of 700 nm or more and 800 nm or less.</p>
<p id="p-0027" num="0026">For example, when plants are irradiated with light having longer wavelength than and absorption peak (in the vicinity of 680 nm) in a red region of chlorophyll a, a phenomenon called red drop, in which activity of photosynthesis rapidly decreases, occurs. However, it is known that when plants are irradiated with light containing near infrared region together with light of red region, photosynthesis is accelerated by a synergistic effect of those two kinds of lights. This phenomenon is called the Emerson effect.</p>
<p id="p-0028" num="0027">Intensity of light with which plants are irradiated is represented by photon flux density. The photon flux density (&#x3bc;mol&#xb7;m<sup>&#x2212;2</sup>&#xb7;s<sup>&#x2212;1</sup>) is the number of photons reaching a unit area per unit time. The amount of photosynthesis depends on the number of photons, and therefore does not depend on other optical characteristics if the photon flux density is the same. However, wavelength dependency activating photosynthesis differs depending on photosynthetic pigment. Intensity of light necessary for photosynthesis of plants is sometimes represented by Photosynthetic Photon Flux Density (PPFD).</p>
<p id="p-0029" num="0028">The light emitting device <b>100</b> emits light having a ratio R/B of a photon flux density R to a photon flux density B within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less, and a ratio R/FR of the photon flux density R to a photon flux density FR within a range of 0.7 or more and 13.0 or less, where the photon flux density R is the number of light quanta (&#x3bc;mol&#xb7;m<sup>&#x2212;2</sup>&#xb7;g<sup>&#x2212;1</sup>) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 620 nm or more and less than 700 nm, the photon flux density B is the number of light quanta (&#x3bc;mol&#xb7;m<sup>&#x2212;2</sup>&#xb7;g<sup>&#x2212;1</sup>) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, and the photon flux density FR is the number of light quanta (&#x3bc;mol&#xb7;m<sup>&#x2212;2</sup>&#xb7;g<sup>&#x2212;1</sup>) incident per unit time and unit area in a wavelength range of 700 nm or more and 780 nm or less.</p>
<p id="p-0030" num="0029">It is estimated that in plants, which are irradiated with light containing the photon flux density FR from the light emitting device <b>100</b>, photosynthesis is activated by Emerson effect, and as a result, growth of plants can be promoted. Furthermore, when plants are irradiated with light containing the photon flux density FR, growth of the plants can be promoted by a reversible reaction between red light irradiation, to which chlorophyll as chromoprotein contained in plants has participated, and far infrared light irradiation.</p>
<p id="p-0031" num="0030">Examples of nutrients necessary for growth of plants include nitrogen, phosphoric acid, and potassium. Of those nutrients, nitrogen is absorbed in plants as nitrate nitrogen (nitrate ion: NO<sub>3</sub><sup>&#x2212;</sup>). The nitrate nitrogen changes into nitrite ion (NO<sub>2</sub><sup>&#x2212;</sup>) by a reduction reaction, and when the nitrite ion is further reacted with fatty acid amine, nitrosoamine is formed. It is known that nitrite ion acts to hemoglobin in blood, and it is known that a nitroso compound sometimes affects health of a human body. Mechanism of converting nitrate nitrogen into nitrite ion in vivo is complicated, and the relationship between the amount of intake of nitrate nitrogen and the influence to health of a human body is not clarified. However, it is desired that the content of nitrate nitrogen having a possibility of affecting health of a human body is smaller.</p>
<p id="p-0032" num="0031">For the above reasons, nitrogen is one of nutrients necessary for growth of plants, but it is preferred that the content of nitrate nitrogen in food plants be reduced to a range that does not disturb the growth of plants.</p>
<p id="p-0033" num="0032">It is preferred that the light emitting device <b>100</b> further include the second fluorescent material <b>72</b> having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less by being excited by light from the light emitting element <b>10</b>, wherein the R/FR ratio is within a range of 0.7 or more and 5.0 or less. The R/FR ratio is more preferably within a range of 0.7 or more and 2.0 or less.</p>
<heading id="h-0009" level="2">Light Emitting Element</heading>
<p id="p-0034" num="0033">The light emitting element <b>10</b> is used as an excitation light source, and is a light emitting element emitting light having a light emission peak wavelength in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less. As a result, a stable light emitting device having high efficiency, high linearity of output to input and strong mechanical impacts can be obtained.</p>
<p id="p-0035" num="0034">The range of the light emission peak wavelength of the light emitting element <b>10</b> is preferably in a range of 390 nm or more and 480 nm or less, more preferably in a range of 420 nm or more and 470 nm or less, and still more preferably in a range of 440 nm or more and 460 nm or less, and particularly preferably in a range of 445 nm or more and 455 nm or less. A light emitting element including a nitride semiconductor (In<sub>x</sub>Al<sub>y</sub>Ga<sub>1-x-y</sub>N, 0&#x2266;X, 0&#x2266;Y and X+Y&#x2266;1) is preferably used as the light emitting element <b>10</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0036" num="0035">The half value width of emission spectrum of the light emitting element <b>10</b> can be, for example, 30 nm or less.</p>
<heading id="h-0010" level="2">Fluorescent Member</heading>
<p id="p-0037" num="0036">The fluorescent member <b>50</b> used in the light emitting device <b>100</b> preferably includes the first fluorescent material <b>71</b> and a sealing material, and more preferably further includes the second fluorescent material <b>72</b>. A thermoplastic resin and a thermosetting resin can be used as the sealing material. The fluorescent member <b>50</b> may contain other components such as a filler, a light stabilizer and a colorant, in addition to the fluorescent material and the sealing material. Examples of the filler include silica, barium titanate, titanium oxide and aluminum oxide.</p>
<p id="p-0038" num="0037">The content of other components other than the fluorescent material <b>70</b> and the sealing material in the fluorescent member <b>50</b> is preferably in a range of 0.01 parts by mass or more and 20 parts by mass or less, per 100 parts by mass of the sealing material.</p>
<p id="p-0039" num="0038">The total content of the fluorescent material <b>70</b> in the fluorescent member <b>50</b> can be, for example, 5 parts by mass or more and 300 parts by mass or less, per 100 parts by mass of the sealing material. The total content is preferably 10 parts by mass or more and 250 parts by mass or less, more preferably 15 parts by mass or more and 230 parts by mass or less, and still more preferably 15 parts by mass or more and 200 parts by mass or less. When the total content of the fluorescent material <b>70</b> in the fluorescent member <b>50</b> is within the above range, the light emitted from the light emitting element <b>10</b> can be efficiently subjected to wavelength conversion in the fluorescent material <b>70</b>.</p>
<heading id="h-0011" level="2">First Fluorescent Material</heading>
<p id="p-0040" num="0039">The first fluorescent material <b>71</b> is a fluorescent material that is excited by light from the light emitting element <b>10</b> and emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm. Examples of the first fluorescent material <b>71</b> include an Mn<sup>4+</sup>-activated fluorogermanate fluorescent material, an Eu<sup>2+</sup>-activated nitride fluorescent material, an Eu<sup>2+</sup>-activated alkaline earth sulfide fluorescent material and an Mn<sup>4+</sup>-activated halide fluorescent material. The first fluorescent material <b>71</b> may use one selected from those fluorescent materials and may use a combination of two or more thereof. The first fluorescent material preferably contains an Eu<sup>2+</sup>-activated nitride fluorescent material and an Mn<sup>4+</sup>-activated fluorogermanate fluorescent material.</p>
<p id="p-0041" num="0040">The Eu<sup>2+</sup>-activated nitride fluorescent material is preferably a fluorescent material that has a composition including at least one element selected from Sr and Ca, and Al and contains silicon nitride that is activated by Eu<sup>2+</sup>, or a fluorescent material that has a composition including at least one element selected from the group consisting of alkaline earth metal elements and at least one element selected from the group consisting of alkali metal elements and contains aluminum nitride that is activated by Eu<sup>2+</sup>.</p>
<p id="p-0042" num="0041">The halide fluorescent material that is activated by Mn<sup>4+</sup> is preferably a fluorescent material that has a composition including at least one element or ion selected from the group consisting of alkali metal elements and an ammonium ion (NH<sup>4+</sup>) and at least one element selected from the group consisting of Group 4 elements and Group 14 elements and contains a fluoride that is activated by Mn<sup>4+</sup>.</p>
<p id="p-0043" num="0042">Examples of the first fluorescent material <b>71</b> specifically include fluorescent materials having any one composition of the following formulae (I) to (VI).</p>
<p id="p-0044" num="0000">
<br/>
<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="lead"?>(<i>i&#x2212;j</i>)MgO.(<i>j/</i>2)Sc<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3</sub><i>.k</i>MgF<sub>2</sub><i>.m</i>CaF<sub>2</sub>.(1<i>&#x2212;n</i>)GeO<sub>2</sub>.(<i>n/</i>2)M<sup>t</sup><sub>2</sub>O<sub>3</sub><i>:z</i>Mn<sup>4+</sup>&#x2003;&#x2003;(I)<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="tail"?>
</p>
<p id="p-0045" num="0000">wherein M<sup>t </sup>is at least one selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, and In, and j, k, m, n, and z are numbers satisfying 2&#x2266;i&#x2266;4, 0&#x2266;j&#x3c;0.5, 0&#x3c;k&#x3c;1.5, 0&#x2266;m&#x3c;1.5, 0&#x3c;n&#x3c;0.5, and 0&#x3c;z&#x3c;0.05, respectively.</p>
<p id="p-0046" num="0000">
<br/>
<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="lead"?>(Ca<sub>1-p-q</sub>Sr<sub>p</sub>Eu<sub>q</sub>)AlSiN<sub>3</sub>&#x2003;&#x2003;(II)<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="tail"?>
</p>
<p id="p-0047" num="0000">wherein p and q are numbers satisfying 0&#x2266;p&#x2266;1.0, 0&#x3c;q&#x3c;1.0, and p+q&#x3c;1.0.</p>
<p id="p-0048" num="0000">
<br/>
<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="lead"?>M<sup>a</sup><sub>v</sub>M<sup>b</sup><sub>w</sub>M<sup>c</sup><sub>f</sub>Al<sub>3-g</sub>Si<sub>g</sub>N<sub>h</sub>&#x2003;&#x2003;(III)<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="tail"?>
</p>
<p id="p-0049" num="0000">wherein M<sup>a </sup>is at least one element selected from the group consisting of Ca, Sr, Ba, and Mg, M<sup>b </sup>is at least one element selected from the group consisting of Li, Na, and K, M<sup>c </sup>is at least one element selected from the group consisting of Eu, Ce, Tb, and Mn, v, w, f, g, and h are numbers satisfying 0.80&#x2266;v&#x2266;1.05, 0.80&#x2266;w&#x2266;1.05, 0.001&#x3c;f&#x2266;0.1, 0&#x2266;g&#x2266;0.5, and 3.0&#x2266;h&#x2266;5.0, respectively.</p>
<p id="p-0050" num="0000">
<br/>
<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="lead"?>(Ca<sub>1-r-s-t</sub>Sr<sub>r</sub>Ba<sub>s</sub>Eu<sub>t</sub>)<sub>2</sub>Si<sub>5</sub>N<sub>8</sub>&#x2003;&#x2003;(IV)<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="tail"?>
</p>
<p id="p-0051" num="0000">wherein r, s, and t are numbers satisfying 0&#x2266;r&#x2266;1.0, 0&#x2266;s&#x2266;1.0, 0&#x3c;t&#x3c;1.0, and r+s+t&#x2266;1.0.</p>
<p id="p-0052" num="0000">
<br/>
<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="lead"?>(Ca,Sr)S:Eu&#x2003;&#x2003;(V)<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="tail"?>
</p>
<p id="p-0053" num="0000">
<br/>
<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="lead"?>A<sub>2</sub>[M<sup>1</sup><sub>1-u</sub>Mn<sup>4+</sup><sub>u</sub>F<sub>6</sub>]&#x2003;&#x2003;(VI)<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="tail"?>
</p>
<p id="p-0054" num="0000">wherein A is at least one selected from the group consisting of K, Li, Na, Rb, Cs, and NH<sub>4</sub><sup>+</sup>, M<sup>1 </sup>is at least one element selected from the group consisting of Group 4 elements and Group 14 elements, and u is the number satisfying 0&#x3c;u&#x3c;0.2.</p>
<p id="p-0055" num="0043">The content of the first fluorescent material <b>71</b> in the fluorescent member <b>50</b> is not particularly limited as long as the R/B ratio is within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less. The content of the first fluorescent material <b>71</b> in the fluorescent member <b>50</b> is, for example, 1 part by mass or more, preferably 5 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 8 parts by mass or more, per 100 parts by mass of the sealing material, and is preferably 200 parts by mass or less, more preferably 150 parts by mass or less, and still more preferably 100 parts by mass or less, per 100 parts by mass of the sealing material. When the content of the first fluorescent material <b>71</b> in the fluorescent member <b>50</b> is within the aforementioned range, the light emitted from the light emitting element <b>10</b> can be efficiently subjected to wavelength conversion, and light capable of promoting growth of plant can be emitted from the light emitting device <b>100</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0056" num="0044">The first fluorescent material <b>71</b> preferably contains at least two fluorescent materials, and in the case of containing at least two fluorescent materials, the first fluorescent material preferably contains a fluorogermanate fluorescent material that is activated by Mn<sup>4+</sup> (hereinafter referred to as &#x201c;MGF fluorescent material&#x201d;), and a fluorescent material that has a composition including at least one element selected from Sr and Ca, and Al, and contains silicon nitride that is activated by Eu<sup>2+</sup> (hereinafter referred to as &#x201c;CASN fluorescent material&#x201d;).</p>
<p id="p-0057" num="0045">In the case where the first fluorescent material <b>71</b> contains at least two fluorescent materials and two fluorescent materials are a MGF fluorescent material and a CASN fluorescent material, where a compounding ratio thereof (MGF fluorescent material:CASN fluorescent material) is preferably in a range of 50:50 or more and 99:1 or less, more preferably in a range of 60:40 or more and 97:3 or less, and still more preferably in a range of 70:30 or more and 96:4 or less, in mass ratio. In the case where the first fluorescent material contains two fluorescent materials, when those fluorescent materials are a MGF fluorescent material and a CASN fluorescent material and the mass ratio thereof is within the aforementioned range, the light emitted from the light emitting element <b>10</b> can be efficiently subjected to wavelength conversion in the first fluorescent material <b>71</b>. In addition, the R/B ratio can be adjusted to within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less, and the R/FR ratio is easy to be adjusted to within a range of 0.7 or more and 13.0 or less.</p>
<heading id="h-0012" level="2">Second Fluorescent Material</heading>
<p id="p-0058" num="0046">The second fluorescent material <b>72</b> is a fluorescent material that is excited by the light from the light emitting element <b>10</b> and emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less.</p>
<p id="p-0059" num="0047">The second fluorescent material <b>72</b> used in the light emitting device according to one embodiment of the present disclosure is a fluorescent material that contains a first element Ln containing at least one element selected from the group consisting of rare earth elements excluding Ce, a second element M containing at least one element selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, In, Ce, and Cr, and has a composition of an aluminate fluorescent material. When a molar ratio of the second element M is taken as 5, it is preferred that a molar ratio of Ce be a product of a value of a parameter x and 3, and a molar ratio of Cr be a product of a value of a parameter y and 3, wherein the value of the parameter x is in a range of exceeding 0.0002 and less than 0.50, and the value of the parameter y is in a range of exceeding 0.0001 and less than 0.05.</p>
<p id="p-0060" num="0048">The second fluorescent material <b>72</b> is preferably a fluorescent material having the composition represented by the following formula (1):</p>
<p id="p-0061" num="0000">
<br/>
<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="lead"?>(Ln<sub>1-x-y</sub>Ce<sub>x</sub>Cr<sub>y</sub>)<sub>3</sub>M<sub>5</sub>O<sub>12</sub>&#x2003;&#x2003;(1)<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="tail"?>
</p>
<p id="p-0062" num="0000">wherein Ln is at least one rare earth element selected from the group consisting of rare earth elements excluding Ce, M is at least one element selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, and In, and x and y are numbers satisfying 0.0002&#x3c;x&#x3c;0.50 and 0.0001&#x3c;y&#x3c;0.05, respectively.</p>
<p id="p-0063" num="0049">In this case, the second fluorescent material <b>72</b> has a composition constituting a garnet structure, and therefore is tough against heat, light, and water, has an absorption peak wavelength of excited absorption spectrum in the vicinity of 420 nm or more and 470 nm or less, and sufficiently absorbs the light from the light emitting element <b>10</b>, thereby enhancing light emitting intensity of the second fluorescent material <b>72</b>, which is preferred. Furthermore, the second fluorescent material <b>72</b> is excited by light having light emission peak wavelength in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less and emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less.</p>
<p id="p-0064" num="0050">In the second fluorescent material <b>72</b>, from the standpoint of stability of a crystal structure, Ln is preferably at least one rare earth element selected from the group consisting of Y, Gd, Lu, La, Tb, and Pr, and M is preferably Al or Ga.</p>
<p id="p-0065" num="0051">In the second fluorescent material <b>72</b>, the value of the parameter x is more preferably in a range of 0.0005 or more and 0.400 or less (0.0005&#x2266;x&#x2266;0.400), and still more preferably in a range of 0.001 or more and 0.350 or less (0.001&#x2266;x&#x2266;0.350).</p>
<p id="p-0066" num="0052">In the second fluorescent material <b>72</b>, the value of the parameter y is preferably in a range of exceeding 0.0005 and less than 0.040 (0.0005&#x3c;y&#x3c;0.040), and more preferably in a range of 0.001 or more and 0.026 or less (0.001&#x2266;y&#x2266;0.026).</p>
<p id="p-0067" num="0053">The parameter x is an activation amount of Ce and the value of the parameter x is in a range of exceeding 0.0002 and less than 0.50 (0.0002&#x3c;x&#x3c;0.50), and the parameter y is an activation amount of Cr. When the value of the parameter y is in a range of exceeding 0.0001 and less than 0.05 (0.0001&#x3c;y&#x3c;0.05), the activation amount of Ce and the activation amount of Cr that are light emission centers contained in the crystal structure of the fluorescent material are within optimum ranges, the decrease of light emission intensity due to the decrease of light emission center can be suppressed, the decrease of light emission intensity due to concentration quenching caused by the increase of the activation amount can be suppressed, and light emission intensity can be enhanced.</p>
<heading id="h-0013" level="2">Production Method of Second Fluorescent Material</heading>
<p id="p-0068" num="0054">A method for producing the second fluorescent material <b>72</b> includes the following method.</p>
<p id="p-0069" num="0055">A compound containing at least one rare earth element Ln selected from the group consisting of rare earth elements excluding Ce, a compound containing at least one element M selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, and In, a compound containing Ce and a compound containing Cr are mixed such that, when the total molar composition ratio of the M is taken as 5 as the standard, in the case where the total molar composition ratio of Ln, Ce, and Nd is 3, the molar ratio of Ce is a product of 3 and a value of a parameter x, and the molar ratio of Cr is a product of 3 and a value of a parameter y, the value of the parameter x is in a range of exceeding 0.0002 and less than 0.50 and the value of the parameter y is in a range of exceeding 0.0001 and less than 0.05, thereby obtaining a raw material mixture, the raw material mixture is heat-treated, followed by classification and the like, thereby obtaining the second fluorescent material.</p>
<heading id="h-0014" level="2">Compound Containing Rare Earth Element Ln</heading>
<p id="p-0070" num="0056">Examples of the compound containing rare earth element Ln include oxides, hydroxides, nitrides, oxynitrides, fluorides, and chlorides, that contain at least one rare earth element Ln selected from the group consisting of rare earth elements excluding Ce. Those compounds may be hydrates. At least a part of the compounds containing rare earth element may use a metal simple substance or an alloy containing rare earth element. The compound containing rare earth element is preferably a compound containing at least one rare earth element Ln selected from the group consisting of Y, Gd, Lu, La, Tb, and Pr. The compound containing rare earth element may be used alone or may be used as a combination of at least two compounds containing rare earth element.</p>
<p id="p-0071" num="0057">The compound containing rare earth element is preferably an oxide that does not contain elements other than the target composition, as compared with other materials. Examples of the oxide specifically include Y<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3</sub>, Gd<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3</sub>, Lu<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3</sub>, La<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3</sub>, Tb<sub>4</sub>O<sub>7 </sub>and Pr<sub>6</sub>O<sub>11</sub>.</p>
<heading id="h-0015" level="2">Compound Containing M</heading>
<p id="p-0072" num="0058">Examples of the compound containing at least one element M selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, and In include oxides, hydroxides, nitrides, oxynitrides, fluorides, and chlorides, that contain Al, Ga, or In. Those compounds may be hydrates. Furthermore, Al metal simple substance, Ga metal simple substance, In metal simple substance, Al alloy, Ga alloy or In alloy may be used, and metal simple substance or an alloy may be used in place of at least a part of the compound. The compound containing Al, Ga, or In may be used alone or may be used as a combination of two or more thereof. The compound containing at least one element selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, and In is preferably an oxide. The reason for this is that an oxide that does not contain elements other than the target composition, as compared with other materials, and a fluorescent material having a target composition are easy to be obtained. When a compound containing elements other than the target composition has been used, residual impurity elements are sometimes present in the fluorescent material obtained. The residual impurity element becomes a killer factor in light emission, leading to the possibility of remarkable decrease of light emission intensity.</p>
<p id="p-0073" num="0059">Examples of the compound containing Al, Ga, or In specifically include Al<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3</sub>, Ga<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3</sub>, and In<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3</sub>.</p>
<heading id="h-0016" level="2">Compound Containing Ce and Compound Containing Cr</heading>
<p id="p-0074" num="0060">Examples of the compound containing Ce or the compound containing Cr include oxides, hydroxides, nitrides, fluorides, and chlorides, that contain cerium (Ce) or chromium (Cr). Those compounds may be hydrates. Ce metal simple substance, Ce alloy, Cr metal simple substance, or Cr alloy may be used, and a metal simple substance or an alloy may be used in place of a part of the compound. The compound containing Ce or the compound containing Cr may be used alone or may be used as a combination of two or more thereof. The compound containing Ce or the compound containing Cr is preferably an oxide. The reason for this is that an oxide that does not contain elements other than the target composition, as compared with other materials, and a fluorescent material having a target composition are easy to be obtained. When a compound containing elements other than the target composition has been used, residual impurity elements are sometimes present in the fluorescent material obtained. The residual impurity element becomes a killer factor in light emission, leading to the possibility of remarkable decrease of light emission intensity.</p>
<p id="p-0075" num="0061">Example of the compound containing Ce specifically includes CeO<sub>2</sub>, and example of the compound containing Cr specifically includes Cr<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3</sub>.</p>
<p id="p-0076" num="0062">The raw material mixture may contain a flux such as a halide, as necessary. When a flux is contained in the raw material mixture, reaction of raw materials with each other is accelerated, and a solid phase reaction is easy to proceed further uniformly. It is considered that a temperature for heat-treating the raw material mixture is almost the same as a formation temperature of a liquid phase of a halide used as a flux or is a temperature higher than the formation temperature, and, as a result, the reaction is accelerated.</p>
<p id="p-0077" num="0063">Examples of the halide include fluorides, chlorides of rare earth metals, alkali earth metals, and alkali metals. When a halide of rare earth metal is used as the flux, the flux can be added as a compound so as to achieve a target composition. Examples of the flux specifically include BaF<sub>2 </sub>and CaF<sub>2</sub>. Of those, BaF<sub>2 </sub>is preferably used. When barium fluoride is used as the flux, a garnet crystal structure is stabilized and a composition of a garnet crystal structure is easy to be formed.</p>
<p id="p-0078" num="0064">When the raw material mixture contains a flux, the content of the flux is preferably 20 mass % or less, and more preferably 10 mass % or less, and is preferably 0.1 mass % or more, on the basis of the raw material mixture (100 mass %). When the flux content is within the aforementioned range, the problem that it is difficult to form a garnet crystal structure due to the insufficiency of particle growth by small amount of the flux is prevented, and furthermore, the problem that it is difficult to form a garnet crystal structure due to too large amount of the flux is prevented.</p>
<p id="p-0079" num="0065">The raw material mixture is prepared, for example, as follows. Each of raw materials is weighed so as to be a compounding ratio. Thereafter, the raw materials are subjected to mixed grinding using a dry grinding machine such as ball mill, are subjected to mixed grinding using a mortar and a pestle, are subjected to mixing using a mixing machine such as a ribbon blender, for example, or are subjected to mixed grinding using both a dry grinding machine and a mixing machine. As necessary, the raw material mixture may be classified using a wet separator such as a setting tank generally used industrially, or a dry classifier such as a cyclone. The mixing may be conducted by dry mixing or may be conducted by wet mixing by adding a solvent. The mixing is preferably dry mixing. The reason for this is that dry mixing can shorten a processing time as compared with wet drying, and this leads to the improvement of productivity.</p>
<p id="p-0080" num="0066">The raw material mixture after mixing each raw material is dissolved in an acid, the resulting solution is co-precipitated in oxalic acid, a product formed by the co-precipitation is baked to obtain an oxide, and the oxide may be used as the raw material mixture.</p>
<p id="p-0081" num="0067">The raw material mixture can be heat-treated by placing it in a crucible, a boat made of a carbon material (such as graphite), boron nitride (BN), aluminum oxide (alumina), tungsten (W) or molybdenum (Mo).</p>
<p id="p-0082" num="0068">From the standpoint of stability of a crystal structure, the temperature for heat-treating the raw material mixture is preferably in a range of 1,000&#xb0; C. or higher and 2,100&#xb0; C. or lower, more preferably in a range of 1,100&#xb0; C. or higher and 2,000&#xb0; C. or lower, still more preferably in a range of 1,200&#xb0; C. or higher and 1,900&#xb0; C. or lower, and particularly preferably in a range of 1,300&#xb0; C. or higher and 1,800&#xb0; C. or lower. The heat treatment can use an electric furnace or a gas furnace.</p>
<p id="p-0083" num="0069">The heat treatment time varies depending on a temperature rising rate, a heat treatment atmosphere. The heat treatment time after reaching the heat treatment temperature is preferably 1 hour or more, more preferably 2 hours or more, and still more preferably 3 hours or more, and is preferably 20 hours or less, more preferably 18 hours or less and still more preferably 15 hours or less.</p>
<p id="p-0084" num="0070">The atmosphere for heat-treating the raw material mixture is an inert atmosphere such as argon or nitrogen, a reducing atmosphere containing hydrogen, or an oxidizing atmosphere such as the air. The raw material mixture may be subjected to a two-stage heat treatment of a first heat treatment of heat-treating in the air or a weakly reducing atmosphere from the standpoint of, for example, prevention of blackening, and a second heat treatment of heat-treating in a reducing atmosphere from the standpoint of enhancing absorption efficiency of light having a specific light emission peak wavelength. The fluorescent material constituting a garnet structure is that reactivity of the raw material mixture is improved in an atmosphere having high reducing power such as a reducing atmosphere. Therefore, the fluorescent material can be heat-treated under the atmospheric pressure without pressurizing. For example, the heat treatment can be conducted by the method disclosed in Japanese Patent Application No. 2014-260421.</p>
<p id="p-0085" num="0071">The fluorescent material obtained may be subjected to post-treatment steps such as a solid-liquid separation by a method such as cleaning or filtration, drying by a method such as vacuum drying, and classification by dry sieving. After those post-treatment steps, a fluorescent material having a desired average particle diameter is obtained.</p>
<heading id="h-0017" level="2">Other Fluorescent Materials</heading>
<p id="p-0086" num="0072">The light emitting device <b>100</b> may contain other kinds of fluorescent materials, in addition to the first fluorescent material <b>71</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0087" num="0073">Examples of other kinds of fluorescent materials include a green fluorescent material emitting green color by absorbing a part of the light emitted from the light emitting element <b>10</b>, a yellow fluorescent material emitting yellow color, and a fluorescent material having a light emission peak wavelength in a wavelength range exceeding 680 nm.</p>
<p id="p-0088" num="0074">Examples of the green fluorescent material specifically include fluorescent materials having any one of compositions represented by the following formulae (i) to (iii).</p>
<p id="p-0089" num="0000">
<br/>
<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="lead"?>M<sup>11</sup><sub>8</sub>MgSi<sub>4</sub>O<sub>16</sub>X<sup>11</sup>:Eu&#x2003;&#x2003;(i)<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="tail"?>
</p>
<p id="p-0090" num="0000">wherein M<sup>11 </sup>is at least one selected from the group consisting of Ca, Sr, Ba, and Zn, and X<sup>11 </sup>is at least one selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, and I.</p>
<p id="p-0091" num="0000">
<br/>
<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="lead"?>Si<sub>6-b</sub>Al<sub>b</sub>O<sub>b</sub>N<sub>8-b</sub>:Eu&#x2003;&#x2003;(ii)<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="tail"?>
</p>
<p id="p-0092" num="0000">wherein b satisfies 0&#x3c;b&#x3c;4.2.</p>
<p id="p-0093" num="0000">
<br/>
<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="lead"?>M<sup>13</sup>Ga<sub>2</sub>S<sub>4</sub>:Eu&#x2003;&#x2003;(iii)<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="tail"?>
</p>
<p id="p-0094" num="0000">wherein M<sup>13 </sup>is at least one selected from the group consisting of Mg, Ca, Sr, and</p>
<p id="p-0095" num="0075">Ba.</p>
<p id="p-0096" num="0076">Examples of the yellow fluorescent material specifically include fluorescent materials having any one of compositions represented by the following formulae (iv) to (v).</p>
<p id="p-0097" num="0000">
<br/>
<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="lead"?>M<sup>14</sup><sub>c/d</sub>Si<sub>12-(c+d)</sub>Al<sub>(c+d)</sub>O<sub>d</sub>N<sub>(16-d)</sub>:Eu&#x2003;&#x2003;(iv)<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="tail"?>
</p>
<p id="p-0098" num="0000">wherein M<sup>14 </sup>is at least one selected from the group consisting of Sr, Ca, Li, and Y. A value of a parameter c is in a range of 0.5 to 5, a value of a parameter d is in a range of 0 to 2.5, and the parameter d is an electrical charge of M<sup>14</sup>.</p>
<p id="p-0099" num="0000">
<br/>
<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="lead"?>M<sup>15</sup><sub>3</sub>Al<sub>5</sub>O<sub>12</sub>:Ce&#x2003;&#x2003;(v)<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="tail"?>
</p>
<p id="p-0100" num="0000">wherein M<sup>15 </sup>is at least one selected from the group consisting of Y and Lu.</p>
<p id="p-0101" num="0077">Examples of the fluorescent material having light emission peak wavelength in a wavelength range exceeding 680 nm specifically include fluorescent materials having any one of compositions represented by the following formulae (vi) to (x).</p>
<p id="p-0102" num="0000">
<br/>
<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="lead"?>Al<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3</sub>:Cr&#x2003;&#x2003;(vi)<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="tail"?>
</p>
<p id="p-0103" num="0000">
<br/>
<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="lead"?>CaYAlO<sub>4</sub>:Mn&#x2003;&#x2003;(vii)<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="tail"?>
</p>
<p id="p-0104" num="0000">
<br/>
<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="lead"?>LiAlO<sub>2</sub>:Fe&#x2003;&#x2003;(viii)<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="tail"?>
</p>
<p id="p-0105" num="0000">
<br/>
<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="lead"?>CdS:Ag&#x2003;&#x2003;(ix)<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="tail"?>
</p>
<p id="p-0106" num="0000">
<br/>
<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="lead"?>GdAlO<sub>3</sub>:Cr&#x2003;&#x2003;(x)<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="tail"?>
</p>
<p id="p-0107" num="0078">The light emitting device <b>100</b> can be utilized as a light emitting device for plant cultivation that can activate photosynthesis of plants and promote growth of plants so as to have favorable form and weight.</p>
<heading id="h-0018" level="2">Plant Cultivation Method</heading>
<p id="p-0108" num="0079">The plant cultivation method of one embodiment of the present disclosure is a method for cultivating plants, including irradiating plants with light emitted from the light emitting device <b>100</b>. In the plant cultivation method, plants can be irradiated with light from the light emitting device <b>100</b> in plant factories that are completely isolated from external environment and make it possible for artificial control. The kind of plants is not particularly limited. However, the light emitting device <b>100</b> of one embodiment of the present disclosure can activate photosynthesis of plants and promote growth of plants such that a stem, a leaf, a root, a fruit have favorable form and weight, and therefore is preferably applied to cultivation of vegetables, flowers that contain much chlorophyll performing photosynthesis. Examples of the vegetables include lettuces such as garden lettuce, curl lettuce, Lamb's lettuce, Romaine lettuce, endive, Lollo Rosso, Rucola lettuce, and frill lettuce; Asteraceae vegetables such as &#x201c;shungiku&#x201d; (<i>chrysanthemum coronarium</i>); morning glory vegetables such as spinach; Rosaceae vegetables such as strawberry; and flowers such as <i>chrysanthemum, gerbera</i>, rose, and tulip.</p>
<heading id="h-0019" level="1">EXAMPLES</heading>
<p id="p-0109" num="0080">The present invention is further specifically described below by Examples and Comparative Examples.</p>
<heading id="h-0020" level="1">Examples 1 to 5</heading>
<heading id="h-0021" level="2">First Fluorescent Material</heading>
<p id="p-0110" num="0081">Two fluorescent materials of fluorogarmanate fluorescent material that is activated by Mn<sup>4+</sup>, having a light emission peak at 660 nm and fluorescent material containing silicon nitride that are activated by Eu<sup>2+</sup>, having a light emission peak at 660 nm were used as the first fluorescent material <b>71</b>. In the first fluorescent material <b>71</b>, a mass ratio of a MGF fluorescent material to a CASN fluorescent material (MGF:CASN) was 95:5.</p>
<heading id="h-0022" level="2">Second Fluorescent Material</heading>
<p id="p-0111" num="0082">Fluorescent material that is obtained by the following production method was used as the second fluorescent material <b>72</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0112" num="0083">55.73 g of Y<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3 </sub>(Y<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3 </sub>content: 100 mass %), 0.78 g of CeO<sub>2 </sub>(CeO<sub>2 </sub>content: 100 mass %), 0.54 g of Cr<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3 </sub>(Cr<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3 </sub>content: 100 mass %,) and 42.95 g of Al<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3 </sub>(Al<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3 </sub>content: 100 mass %) were weighed as raw materials, and 5.00 g of BaF<sub>2 </sub>as a flux was added to the mixture. The resulting raw materials were dry mixed for 1 hour by a ball mill. Thus, a raw material mixture was obtained.</p>
<p id="p-0113" num="0084">The raw material mixture obtained was placed in an alumina crucible, and a lid was put on the alumina crucible. The raw material mixture was heat-treated at 1,500&#xb0; C. for 10 hours in a reducing atmosphere of H<sub>2</sub>: 3 vol % and N<sub>2</sub>: 97 vol %. Thus, a calcined product was obtained. The calcined product was passed through a dry sieve to obtain a second fluorescent material. The second fluorescent material obtained was subjected to composition analysis by ICP-AES emission spectrometry using an inductively coupled plasma emission analyzer (manufactured by Perkin Elmer). The composition of the second fluorescent material obtained was (Y<sub>0.977</sub>Ce<sub>0.009</sub>Cr<sub>0.014</sub>)<sub>3</sub>Al<sub>5</sub>O<sub>12 </sub>(hereinafter referred to as &#x201c;YAG: Ce, Cr&#x201d;).</p>
<heading id="h-0023" level="2">Light Emitting Device</heading>
<p id="p-0114" num="0085">Nitride semiconductor having a light emission peak wavelength of 450 nm was used as the light emitting element <b>10</b> in the light emitting device <b>100</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0115" num="0086">Silicone resin was used as a sealing material constituting the fluorescent member <b>50</b>, the first fluorescent material <b>71</b> and/or the second fluorescent material <b>72</b> was added to 100 parts by mass of the silicone resin in the compounding ratio (parts by mass) shown in Table 1, and 15 parts by mass of silica filler were further added thereto, followed by mixing and dispersing. The resulting mixture was degassed to obtain a resin composition constituting a fluorescent member. In each of resin compositions of Examples 1 to 5, the compounding ratio of the first fluorescent material <b>71</b> and the second fluorescent material <b>72</b> was adjusted as shown in Table 1, and those materials are compounded such that the R/B ratio is within a range of 2.0 or more and 2.4 or less, and the R/FR ratio is within a range of 1.4 or more and 6.0 or less.</p>
<p id="p-0116" num="0087">The resin composition was poured on the light emitting element <b>10</b> of a depressed portion of the molded article <b>40</b> to fill the depressed portion, and heated at 150&#xb0; C. for 4 hours to cure the resin composition, thereby forming the fluorescent member <b>50</b>. Thus, the light emitting device <b>100</b> as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</figref> was produced in each of Examples 1 to 5.</p>
<heading id="h-0024" level="1">Comparative Example 1</heading>
<p id="p-0117" num="0088">A light emitting device X including a semiconductor light emitting element having a light emission peak wavelength of 450 nm and a light emitting device Y including a semiconductor light emitting element having a light emission peak length of 660 nm were used, and the R/B ratio was adjusted to 2.5.</p>
<heading id="h-0025" level="2">Evaluation</heading>
<heading id="h-0026" level="2">Photon Flux Density</heading>
<p id="p-0118" num="0089">Photon flux densities of lights emitted from the light emitting device <b>100</b> used in Examples 1 to 5 and the light emitting devices X and Y used in Comparative Example 1 were measured using a photon measuring device (LI-250A, manufactured by Li-COR). The photon flux density B, the photon flux density R, and the photon flux density FR of lights emitted from the light emitting devices used in each of the Examples and Comparative Example; the R/B ratio; and the R/FR ratio are shown in Table 1. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2</figref> shows spectra showing the relationship between a wavelength and a relative photon flux density, in the light emitting devices used in each Example and Comparative Example.</p>
<heading id="h-0027" level="2">Plant Cultivation Test</heading>
<p id="p-0119" num="0090">The plant cultivation method includes a method of conducting by &#x201c;growth period by RGB light source (hereinafter referred to as a first growth period)&#x201d; and &#x201c;growth period by light source for plant growth (hereinafter referred to as a second growth period)&#x201d; using a light emitting device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure as a light source.</p>
<p id="p-0120" num="0091">The first growth period uses RGB light source, and RGB type LED generally known can be used as the RGB light source. The reason for irradiating plants with RGB type LED in the initial stage of the plant growth is that length of a stem and the number and size of true leaves in the initial stage of plant growth are made equal, thereby clarifying the influence by the difference of light quality in the second growth period.</p>
<p id="p-0121" num="0092">The first growth period is preferably about 2 weeks. In the case where the first growth period is shorter than 2 weeks, it is necessary to confirm that two true leaves develop and a root reaches length that can surely absorb water in the second growth period. In the case where the first growth period exceeds 2 weeks, variation in the second growth period tends to increase. The variation is easy to be controlled by RGB light source by which stem extension is inhibitory, rather than a fluorescent lamp by which stem extension is easy to occur.</p>
<p id="p-0122" num="0093">After completion of the first growth period, the second growth period immediately proceeds. It is preferred that plants are irradiated with light emitted from a light emitting device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. Photosynthesis of plants is activated by irradiating plants with light emitted from the light emitting device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, and the growth of plants can be promoted so as to have favorable form and weight.</p>
<p id="p-0123" num="0094">The total growth period of the first growth period and the second growth period is about 4 to 6 weeks, and it is preferred that shippable plants can be obtained within the period.</p>
<p id="p-0124" num="0095">The cultivation test was specifically conducted by the following method.</p>
<p id="p-0125" num="0096">Romaine lettuce (green romaine, produced by Nakahara Seed Co., Ltd.) was used as cultivation plant.</p>
<heading id="h-0028" level="2">First Growth Period</heading>
<p id="p-0126" num="0097">Urethane sponges (salad urethane, manufactured by M Hydroponic Research Co., Ltd.) having Romaine lettuce seeded therein were placed side by side on a plastic tray, and were irradiated with light from RGB-LED light source (manufactured by Shibasaki Inc.) to cultivate plants. The plants were cultivated for 16 days under the conditions of room temperature: 22 to 23&#xb0; C., humidity: 50 to 60%, photon flux density from light emitting device: 100 &#x3bc;mol&#xb7;m<sup>&#x2212;2</sup>&#xb7;s<sup>&#x2212;1 </sup>and daytime hour: 16 hours/day. Only water was given until germination, and after the germination (about 4 days later), a solution obtained by mixing Otsuka House #1 (manufactured by Otsuka Chemical Co., Ltd.) and Otsuka House #2 (manufactured by Otsuka Chemical Co., Ltd.) in a mass ratio of 3:2 and dissolving the mixture in water was used as a nutrient solution (Otsuka Formulation A). Conductivity of the nutrient was 1.5 ms&#xb7;cm<sup>&#x2212;1</sup>.</p>
<heading id="h-0029" level="2">Second Growth Period</heading>
<p id="p-0127" num="0098">After the first growth period, the plants were irradiated with light from the light emitting devices of Examples 1 to 5 and Comparative Example 1, and were subjected to hydroponics.</p>
<p id="p-0128" num="0099">The plants were cultivated for 19 days under the conditions of room temperature: 22 to 24&#xb0; C., humidity: 60 to 70%, CO<sub>2 </sub>concentration: 600 to 700 ppm, photon flux density from light emitting device: 125 &#x3bc;mol&#xb7;m<sup>&#x2212;2</sup>&#xb7;s<sup>&#x2212;1 </sup>and daytime hour: 16 hours/day. Otsuka Formulation A was used as the nutrient solution. Conductivity of the nutrient was 1.5 ms&#xb7;cm<sup>&#x2212;1</sup>. The values of the R/B and R/FR ratios of light for plant irradiation from each light emitting device in the second growth period are shown in Table 1.</p>
<heading id="h-0030" level="2">Measurement of Fresh Weight (Edible Part)</heading>
<p id="p-0129" num="0100">The plants after cultivation were harvested, and wet weights of a terrestrial part and a root were measured. The wet weight of a terrestrial part of each of 6 cultivated plants having been subjected to hydroponics by irradiating with light from the light emitting devices of Examples 1 to 5 and Comparative Example 1 was measured as a fresh weight (edible part) (g). The results obtained are shown in Table 1 and <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 3</figref>.</p>
<heading id="h-0031" level="2">Measurement of Nitrate Nitrogen Content</heading>
<p id="p-0130" num="0101">The edible part (about 20 g) of each of the cultivated plants, from which a foot about 5 cm had been removed, was frozen with liquid nitrogen and crushed with a juice mixer (laboratory mixer LM-PLUS, manufactured by Osaka Chemical Co., Ltd.) for 1 minute. The resulting liquid was filtered with Miracloth (manufactured by Milipore), and the filtrate was centrifuged at 4&#xb0; C. and 15,000 rpm for 5 minutes. The nitrate nitrogen content (mg/100 g) in the cultivated plant in the supernatant was measured using a portable reflection photometer system (product name: RQ flex system, manufactured by Merck) and a test paper (product name: Reflectoquant (registered trade mark), manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.). The results are shown in Table 1 and <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 4</figref>.</p>
<p id="p-0131" num="0000">
<tables id="TABLE-US-00001" num="00001">
<table frame="none" colsep="0" rowsep="0" pgwide="1">
<tgroup align="left" colsep="0" rowsep="0" cols="5">
<colspec colname="offset" colwidth="42pt" align="left"/>
<colspec colname="1" colwidth="133pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="2" colwidth="63pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="3" colwidth="42pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="4" colwidth="91pt" align="center"/>
<thead>
<row>
<entry/>
<entry namest="offset" nameend="4" rowsep="1">TABLE 1</entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody valign="top">
<row>
<entry/>
<entry namest="offset" nameend="4" align="center" rowsep="1"/>
</row>
<row>
<entry/>
<entry>Fluorescent material</entry>
<entry/>
<entry/>
<entry/>
</row>
<row>
<entry/>
<entry>(parts by mass)</entry>
<entry>Photon flux</entry>
<entry>Ratio of</entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
<tgroup align="left" colsep="0" rowsep="0" cols="7">
<colspec colname="offset" colwidth="42pt" align="left"/>
<colspec colname="1" colwidth="70pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="2" colwidth="63pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="3" colwidth="63pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="4" colwidth="42pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="5" colwidth="42pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="6" colwidth="49pt" align="center"/>
<tbody valign="top">
<row>
<entry/>
<entry>First fluorescent</entry>
<entry>Second fluorescent</entry>
<entry>density</entry>
<entry>photon</entry>
<entry>Fresh weight</entry>
<entry>Nitrate nitrogen</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry/>
<entry>material</entry>
<entry>material</entry>
<entry>(&#x3bc;mol &#xb7; m<sup>&#x2212;2 </sup>&#xb7; s<sup>&#x2212;1</sup>)</entry>
<entry>flux densities</entry>
<entry>(Edible part)</entry>
<entry>content</entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
<tgroup align="left" colsep="0" rowsep="0" cols="10">
<colspec colname="offset" colwidth="42pt" align="left"/>
<colspec colname="1" colwidth="70pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="2" colwidth="63pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="3" colwidth="21pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="4" colwidth="21pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="5" colwidth="21pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="6" colwidth="21pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="7" colwidth="21pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="8" colwidth="42pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="9" colwidth="49pt" align="center"/>
<tbody valign="top">
<row>
<entry/>
<entry>(MGF/CASN = 95:5)</entry>
<entry>(YAG: Ce, Cr)</entry>
<entry>B</entry>
<entry>R</entry>
<entry>FR</entry>
<entry>R/B</entry>
<entry>R/FR</entry>
<entry>(g)</entry>
<entry>(mg/100 g)</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry/>
<entry namest="offset" nameend="9" align="center" rowsep="1"/>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
<tgroup align="left" colsep="0" rowsep="0" cols="10">
<colspec colname="1" colwidth="42pt" align="left"/>
<colspec colname="2" colwidth="70pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="3" colwidth="63pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="4" colwidth="21pt" align="char" char="."/>
<colspec colname="5" colwidth="21pt" align="char" char="."/>
<colspec colname="6" colwidth="21pt" align="char" char="."/>
<colspec colname="7" colwidth="21pt" align="char" char="."/>
<colspec colname="8" colwidth="21pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="9" colwidth="42pt" align="char" char="."/>
<colspec colname="10" colwidth="49pt" align="char" char="."/>
<tbody valign="top">
<row>
<entry>Comparative</entry>
<entry>&#x2014;</entry>
<entry>&#x2014;</entry>
<entry>35.5</entry>
<entry>88.8</entry>
<entry>0.0</entry>
<entry>2.5</entry>
<entry>&#x2014;</entry>
<entry>26.2</entry>
<entry>361.2</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>Example 1</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>Example 1</entry>
<entry>60</entry>
<entry>&#x2014;</entry>
<entry>31.5</entry>
<entry>74.9</entry>
<entry>12.6</entry>
<entry>2.4</entry>
<entry>6.0</entry>
<entry>35.4</entry>
<entry>430.8</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>Example 2</entry>
<entry>50</entry>
<entry>10</entry>
<entry>28.5</entry>
<entry>67.1</entry>
<entry>21.7</entry>
<entry>2.4</entry>
<entry>3.1</entry>
<entry>34.0</entry>
<entry>450.0</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>Example 3</entry>
<entry>40</entry>
<entry>20</entry>
<entry>25.8</entry>
<entry>62.0</entry>
<entry>28.7</entry>
<entry>2.4</entry>
<entry>2.2</entry>
<entry>33.8</entry>
<entry>452.4</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>Example 4</entry>
<entry>30</entry>
<entry>30</entry>
<entry>26.8</entry>
<entry>54.7</entry>
<entry>33.5</entry>
<entry>2.0</entry>
<entry>1.6</entry>
<entry>33.8</entry>
<entry>345.0</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>Example 5</entry>
<entry>25</entry>
<entry>39</entry>
<entry>23.4</entry>
<entry>52.8</entry>
<entry>38.1</entry>
<entry>2.3</entry>
<entry>1.4</entry>
<entry>28.8</entry>
<entry>307.2</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry namest="1" nameend="10" align="center" rowsep="1"/>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</tables>
</p>
<p id="p-0132" num="0102">As shown in Table 1, for the light emitting devices in Examples 1 to 5, the R/B ratios are within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less and the R/FR ratios are within the range of 0.7 or more and 13.0 or less. For Romaine lettuce cultivated by irradiating with light from the light emitting device in Examples 1 to 5, the fresh weight (edible part) was increased as compared with Romaine lettuce cultivated by irradiating with light from the light emitting device used in Comparative Example 1. Therefore, cultivation of plants was promoted, as shown in Table 1 and <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 3</figref>.</p>
<p id="p-0133" num="0103">As shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2</figref>, the light emitting device <b>100</b> in Example 1 had at least one maximum value of the relative photon flux density in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less and in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm. The light emitting devices <b>100</b> in Examples 2 to 5 had at least one maximum value of relative photon flux density in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm and in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less, respectively. The maximum value of the relative photon flux density in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less is due to the light emission of the light emitting element having light emission peak wavelength in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, the maximum value of the relative photon flux density in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm is due to the first fluorescent material emitting the light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm, and the maximum value of the relative photon flux density in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less is due to the second fluorescent material emitting the light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less.</p>
<p id="p-0134" num="0104">As shown in Table 1, for the light emitting devices <b>100</b> in Examples 4 and 5, the R/B ratios are 2.0 and 2.3, respectively, and the R/FR ratios are 1.6 and 1.4, respectively. The R/B ratios are within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less, and the R/FR ratios are within a range of 0.7 or more and 2.0 or less. For Romaine lettuces cultivated by irradiating with lights from the light emitting devices <b>100</b>, the nitrate nitrogen content is decreased as compared with Comparative Example 1. Plants, in which the nitrate nitrogen content having the possibility of adversely affecting health of human body had been reduced to a range that does not inhibit the cultivation of plants, could be cultivated, as shown in Table 1 and <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 4</figref>.</p>
<p id="p-0135" num="0105">The light emitting device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure can be utilized as a light emitting device for plant cultivation that can activate photosynthesis and is capable of promoting growth of plants. Furthermore, the plant cultivation method, in which plants are irradiated with the light emitted from the light emitting device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, can cultivate plants that can be harvested in a relatively short period of time and can be used in a plant factory.</p>
<p id="p-0136" num="0106">Although the present disclosure has been described with reference to several exemplary embodiments, it shall be understood that the words that have been used are words of description and illustration, rather than words of limitation. Changes may be made within the purview of the appended claims, as presently stated and as amended, without departing from the scope and spirit of the disclosure in its aspects. Although the disclosure has been described with reference to particular examples, means, and embodiments, the disclosure may be not intended to be limited to the particulars disclosed; rather the disclosure extends to all functionally equivalent structures, methods, and uses such as are within the scope of the appended claims.</p>
<p id="p-0137" num="0107">One or more examples or embodiments of the disclosure may be referred to herein, individually and/or collectively, by the term &#x201c;disclosure&#x201d; merely for convenience and without intending to voluntarily limit the scope of this application to any particular disclosure or inventive concept. Moreover, although specific examples and embodiments have been illustrated and described herein, it should be appreciated that any subsequent arrangement designed to achieve the same or similar purpose may be substituted for the specific examples or embodiments shown. This disclosure may be intended to cover any and all subsequent adaptations or variations of various examples and embodiments. Combinations of the above examples and embodiments, and other examples and embodiments not specifically described herein, will be apparent to those of skill in the art upon reviewing the description.</p>
<p id="p-0138" num="0108">In addition, in the foregoing Detailed Description, various features may be grouped together or described in a single embodiment for the purpose of streamlining the disclosure. This disclosure may be not to be interpreted as reflecting an intention that the claimed embodiments require more features than are expressly recited in each claim. Rather, as the following claims reflect, inventive subject matter may be directed to less than all of the features of any of the disclosed embodiments. Thus, the following claims are incorporated into the Detailed Description, with each claim standing on its own as defining separately claimed subject matter.</p>
<p id="p-0139" num="0109">The above disclosed subject matter shall be considered illustrative, and not restrictive, and the appended claims are intended to cover all such modifications, enhancements, and other embodiments which fall within the true spirit and scope of the present disclosure. Thus, to the maximum extent allowed by law, the scope of the present disclosure may be determined by the broadest permissible interpretation of the following claims and their equivalents, and shall not be restricted or limited by the foregoing detailed description.</p>
<?detailed-description description="Detailed Description" end="tail"?>
</description>
<us-claim-statement>What is claimed is:</us-claim-statement>
<claims id="claims">
<claim id="CLM-00001" num="00001">
<claim-text><b>1</b>. A light emitting device comprising:
<claim-text>a light emitting element having a light emission peak wavelength in a range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less; and</claim-text>
<claim-text>a fluorescent material that is excited by light from the light emitting element and emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 580 nm or more and less than 680 nm, wherein
<claim-text>the light emitting device emits light having a ratio R/B of a photon flux density R to a photon flux density B within a range of 2.0 or more and 4.0 or less, and a ratio R/FR of the photon flux density R to a photon flux density FR within a range of 0.7 or more and 13.0 or less, wherein
<claim-text>the photon flux density R is in a wavelength range of 620 nm or more and less than 700 nm,</claim-text>
<claim-text>the photon flux density B is in a wavelength range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, and</claim-text>
<claim-text>the photon flux density FR is in a wavelength range of 700 nm or more and 780 nm or less.</claim-text>
</claim-text>
</claim-text>
</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00002" num="00002">
<claim-text><b>2</b>. The light emitting device according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, further comprising another fluorescent material that is excited by light from the light emitting element and emits light having at least one light emission peak wavelength in a range of 680 nm or more and 800 nm or less, wherein the ratio R/FR is within a range of 0.7 or more and 5.0 or less.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00003" num="00003">
<claim-text><b>3</b>. The light emitting device according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00002">claim 2</claim-ref>, wherein the ratio R/FR is within a range of 0.7 or more and 2.0 or less.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00004" num="00004">
<claim-text><b>4</b>. The light emitting device according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00002">claim 2</claim-ref>, wherein
<claim-text>the another fluorescent material contains a first element Ln containing at least one element selected from the group consisting of rare earth elements excluding Ce, a second element M containing at least one element selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga and In, Ce, and Cr, and has a composition of an aluminate fluorescent material, and</claim-text>
<claim-text>when a molar ratio of the second element M is taken as 5, a molar ratio of Ce is a product of a value of a parameter x and 3, and a molar ratio of Cr is a product of a value of a parameter y and 3, the value of the parameter x being in a range of exceeding 0.0002 and less than 0.50, and the value of the parameter y being in a range of exceeding 0.0001 and less than 0.05.</claim-text>
</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00005" num="00005">
<claim-text><b>5</b>. The light emitting device according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00002">claim 2</claim-ref>, wherein the another fluorescent material has the composition represented by the following formula (I):
<claim-text>
<br/>
<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="lead"?>(Ln<sub>1-x-y</sub>Ce<sub>x</sub>Cr<sub>y</sub>)<sub>3</sub>M<sub>5</sub>O<sub>12</sub>&#x2003;&#x2003;(I)<?in-line-formulae description="In-line Formulae" end="tail"?>
</claim-text>
<claim-text>wherein Ln is at least one rare earth element selected from the group consisting of rare earth elements excluding Ce,</claim-text>
<claim-text>M is at least one element selected from the group consisting of Al, Ga, and In, and</claim-text>
<claim-text>x and y are numbers satisfying 0.0002&#x3c;x&#x3c;0.50 and 0.0001&#x3c;y&#x3c;0.05.</claim-text>
</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00006" num="00006">
<claim-text><b>6</b>. The light emitting device according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00002">claim 2</claim-ref>, the light emitting device being used in plant cultivation.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00007" num="00007">
<claim-text><b>7</b>. The light emitting device according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, wherein the fluorescent material is at least one selected from the group consisting of:
<claim-text>a fluorogermanate fluorescent material that is activated by Mn<sup>4+</sup>,</claim-text>
<claim-text>a fluorescent material that has a composition containing at least one element selected from Sr and Ca, and Al, and contains silicon nitride that is activated by Eu<sup>2+</sup>,</claim-text>
<claim-text>a fluorescent material that has a composition containing at least one element selected from the group consisting of alkaline earth metal elements and at least one element selected from the group consisting of alkali metal elements, and contains aluminum nitride that is activated by Eu<sup>2+</sup>,</claim-text>
<claim-text>a fluorescent material containing a sulfide of Ca or Sr that is activated by Eu<sup>2+</sup>, and</claim-text>
<claim-text>a fluorescent material that has a composition containing at least one element or ion selected from the group consisting of alkali metal elements, and an ammonium ion (NH<sub>4</sub><sup>+</sup>), and at least one element selected from the group consisting of Group 4 elements and Group 14 elements, and contains a fluoride that is activated by Mn<sup>4+</sup>.</claim-text>
</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00008" num="00008">
<claim-text><b>8</b>. The light emitting device according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, wherein the fluorescent material contains:
<claim-text>a fluorogermanate fluorescent material that is activated by Mn<sup>4+</sup>, and</claim-text>
<claim-text>a fluorescent material that has a composition containing at least one element selected from Sr and Ca, and Al, and contains silicon nitride that is activated by Eu<sup>2+</sup>, wherein
<claim-text>the compounding ratio between the fluorogermanate fluorescent material and the fluorescent material containing silicon nitride (fluorogermanate fluorescent material:fluorescent material containing silicon nitride) is in a range of 50:50 or more and 99:1 or less.</claim-text>
</claim-text>
</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00009" num="00009">
<claim-text><b>9</b>. The light emitting device according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, the light emitting device being used in plant cultivation.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00010" num="00010">
<claim-text><b>10</b>. A plant cultivation method comprising irradiating plants with light emitted from the light emitting device according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00011" num="00011">
<claim-text><b>11</b>. A plant cultivation method comprising irradiating plants with light emitted from the light emitting device according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00002">claim 2</claim-ref>.</claim-text>
</claim>
</claims>
</us-patent-application>

456
tests/data/uspto/ipa20200022300.xml Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,456 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE us-patent-application SYSTEM "us-patent-application-v44-2014-04-03.dtd" [ ]>
<us-patent-application lang="EN" dtd-version="v4.4 2014-04-03" file="US20200022300A1-20200123.XML" status="PRODUCTION" id="us-patent-application" country="US" date-produced="20200108" date-publ="20200123">
<us-bibliographic-data-application lang="EN" country="US">
<publication-reference>
<document-id>
<country>US</country>
<doc-number>20200022300</doc-number>
<kind>A1</kind>
<date>20200123</date>
</document-id>
</publication-reference>
<application-reference appl-type="utility">
<document-id>
<country>US</country>
<doc-number>16039511</doc-number>
<date>20180719</date>
</document-id>
</application-reference>
<us-application-series-code>16</us-application-series-code>
<classifications-ipcr>
<classification-ipcr>
<ipc-version-indicator><date>20060101</date></ipc-version-indicator>
<classification-level>A</classification-level>
<section>A</section>
<class>01</class>
<subclass>B</subclass>
<main-group>63</main-group>
<subgroup>32</subgroup>
<symbol-position>F</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20200123</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
</classification-ipcr>
<classification-ipcr>
<ipc-version-indicator><date>20060101</date></ipc-version-indicator>
<classification-level>A</classification-level>
<section>A</section>
<class>01</class>
<subclass>C</subclass>
<main-group>5</main-group>
<subgroup>06</subgroup>
<symbol-position>L</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20200123</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
</classification-ipcr>
<classification-ipcr>
<ipc-version-indicator><date>20060101</date></ipc-version-indicator>
<classification-level>A</classification-level>
<section>A</section>
<class>01</class>
<subclass>B</subclass>
<main-group>63</main-group>
<subgroup>00</subgroup>
<symbol-position>L</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20200123</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
</classification-ipcr>
<classification-ipcr>
<ipc-version-indicator><date>20060101</date></ipc-version-indicator>
<classification-level>A</classification-level>
<section>F</section>
<class>15</class>
<subclass>B</subclass>
<main-group>21</main-group>
<subgroup>00</subgroup>
<symbol-position>L</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20200123</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
</classification-ipcr>
<classification-ipcr>
<ipc-version-indicator><date>20060101</date></ipc-version-indicator>
<classification-level>A</classification-level>
<section>F</section>
<class>15</class>
<subclass>B</subclass>
<main-group>11</main-group>
<subgroup>10</subgroup>
<symbol-position>L</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20200123</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
</classification-ipcr>
</classifications-ipcr>
<classifications-cpc>
<main-cpc>
<classification-cpc>
<cpc-version-indicator><date>20130101</date></cpc-version-indicator>
<section>A</section>
<class>01</class>
<subclass>B</subclass>
<main-group>63</main-group>
<subgroup>32</subgroup>
<symbol-position>F</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20200123</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
<scheme-origination-code>C</scheme-origination-code>
</classification-cpc>
</main-cpc>
<further-cpc>
<classification-cpc>
<cpc-version-indicator><date>20130101</date></cpc-version-indicator>
<section>A</section>
<class>01</class>
<subclass>C</subclass>
<main-group>5</main-group>
<subgroup>062</subgroup>
<symbol-position>L</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20200123</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
<scheme-origination-code>C</scheme-origination-code>
</classification-cpc>
<classification-cpc>
<cpc-version-indicator><date>20130101</date></cpc-version-indicator>
<section>A</section>
<class>01</class>
<subclass>C</subclass>
<main-group>5</main-group>
<subgroup>068</subgroup>
<symbol-position>L</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20200123</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
<scheme-origination-code>C</scheme-origination-code>
</classification-cpc>
<classification-cpc>
<cpc-version-indicator><date>20130101</date></cpc-version-indicator>
<section>A</section>
<class>01</class>
<subclass>B</subclass>
<main-group>63</main-group>
<subgroup>008</subgroup>
<symbol-position>L</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20200123</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
<scheme-origination-code>C</scheme-origination-code>
</classification-cpc>
<classification-cpc>
<cpc-version-indicator><date>20130101</date></cpc-version-indicator>
<section>F</section>
<class>15</class>
<subclass>B</subclass>
<main-group>2211</main-group>
<subgroup>8616</subgroup>
<symbol-position>L</symbol-position>
<classification-value>A</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20200123</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
<scheme-origination-code>C</scheme-origination-code>
</classification-cpc>
<classification-cpc>
<cpc-version-indicator><date>20130101</date></cpc-version-indicator>
<section>F</section>
<class>15</class>
<subclass>B</subclass>
<main-group>11</main-group>
<subgroup>10</subgroup>
<symbol-position>L</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20200123</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
<scheme-origination-code>C</scheme-origination-code>
</classification-cpc>
<classification-cpc>
<cpc-version-indicator><date>20130101</date></cpc-version-indicator>
<section>F</section>
<class>15</class>
<subclass>B</subclass>
<main-group>2211</main-group>
<subgroup>46</subgroup>
<symbol-position>L</symbol-position>
<classification-value>A</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20200123</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
<scheme-origination-code>C</scheme-origination-code>
</classification-cpc>
<classification-cpc>
<cpc-version-indicator><date>20130101</date></cpc-version-indicator>
<section>F</section>
<class>15</class>
<subclass>B</subclass>
<main-group>2211</main-group>
<subgroup>7053</subgroup>
<symbol-position>L</symbol-position>
<classification-value>A</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20200123</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
<scheme-origination-code>C</scheme-origination-code>
</classification-cpc>
<classification-cpc>
<cpc-version-indicator><date>20130101</date></cpc-version-indicator>
<section>F</section>
<class>15</class>
<subclass>B</subclass>
<main-group>21</main-group>
<subgroup>008</subgroup>
<symbol-position>L</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20200123</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
<scheme-origination-code>C</scheme-origination-code>
</classification-cpc>
</further-cpc>
</classifications-cpc>
<invention-title id="d2e43">SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING THE OPERATION OF AN ACTUATOR MOUNTED ON A SEED PLANTING IMPLEMENT</invention-title>
<us-parties>
<us-applicants>
<us-applicant sequence="00" app-type="applicant" designation="us-only" applicant-authority-category="assignee">
<addressbook>
<orgname>CNH Industrial Canada, Ltd.</orgname>
<address>
<city>Saskatoon</city>
<country>CA</country>
</address>
</addressbook>
<residence>
<country>CA</country>
</residence>
</us-applicant>
</us-applicants>
<inventors>
<inventor sequence="00" designation="us-only">
<addressbook>
<last-name>Gervais</last-name>
<first-name>Joel John Octave</first-name>
<address>
<city>Saskatoon</city>
<country>CA</country>
</address>
</addressbook>
</inventor>
<inventor sequence="01" designation="us-only">
<addressbook>
<last-name>Paulson</last-name>
<first-name>Ian William Patrick</first-name>
<address>
<city>Saskatoon</city>
<country>CA</country>
</address>
</addressbook>
</inventor>
</inventors>
</us-parties>
</us-bibliographic-data-application>
<abstract id="abstract">
<p id="p-0001" num="0000">In one aspect, a system for controlling an operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement may include an actuator configured to adjust a position of a row unit of the seed planting implement relative to a toolbar of the seed planting implement. The system may also include a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to a fluid chamber of the actuator, with the flow restrictor being configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the fluid chamber in a manner that provides damping to the row unit. Furthermore, the system may include a valve fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor in a parallel relationship such that the valve is configured to permit the fluid exiting the fluid chamber to flow through the flow restrictor and the fluid entering the fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.</p>
</abstract>
<drawings id="DRAWINGS">
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00000" num="00000">
<img id="EMI-D00000" he="102.45mm" wi="158.75mm" file="US20200022300A1-20200123-D00000.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00001" num="00001">
<img id="EMI-D00001" he="183.81mm" wi="155.79mm" orientation="landscape" file="US20200022300A1-20200123-D00001.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00002" num="00002">
<img id="EMI-D00002" he="245.53mm" wi="161.37mm" orientation="landscape" file="US20200022300A1-20200123-D00002.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00003" num="00003">
<img id="EMI-D00003" he="209.63mm" wi="148.25mm" orientation="landscape" file="US20200022300A1-20200123-D00003.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00004" num="00004">
<img id="EMI-D00004" he="198.04mm" wi="160.02mm" file="US20200022300A1-20200123-D00004.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00005" num="00005">
<img id="EMI-D00005" he="212.34mm" wi="124.54mm" file="US20200022300A1-20200123-D00005.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00006" num="00006">
<img id="EMI-D00006" he="209.72mm" wi="148.25mm" orientation="landscape" file="US20200022300A1-20200123-D00006.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00007" num="00007">
<img id="EMI-D00007" he="209.72mm" wi="153.59mm" orientation="landscape" file="US20200022300A1-20200123-D00007.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
</drawings>
<description id="description">
<?summary-of-invention description="Summary of Invention" end="lead"?>
<heading id="h-0001" level="1">FIELD</heading>
<p id="p-0002" num="0001">The present disclosure generally relates to seed planting implements and, more particularly, to systems for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement in a manner that provides damping to one or more components of the seed planting implement.</p>
<heading id="h-0002" level="1">BACKGROUND</heading>
<p id="p-0003" num="0002">Modern farming practices strive to increase yields of agricultural fields. In this respect, seed planting implements are towed behind a tractor or other work vehicle to deposit seeds in a field. For example, seed planting implements typically include one or more ground engaging tools or openers that form a furrow or trench in the soil. One or more dispensing devices of the seed planting implement may, in turn, deposit seeds into the furrow(s). After deposition of the seeds, a packer wheel may pack the soil on top of the deposited seeds.</p>
<p id="p-0004" num="0003">In certain instances, the packer wheel may also control the penetration depth of the furrow. In this regard, the position of the packer wheel may be moved vertically relative to the associated opener(s) to adjust the depth of the furrow. Additionally, the seed planting implement includes an actuator configured to exert a downward force on the opener(s) to ensure that the opener(s) is able to penetrate the soil to the depth set by the packer wheel. However, the seed planting implement may bounce or chatter when traveling at high speeds and/or when the opener(s) encounters hard or compacted soil. As such, operators generally operate the seed planting implement with the actuator exerting more downward force on the opener(s) than is necessary in order to prevent such bouncing or chatter. Operation of the seed planting implement with excessive down pressure applied to the opener(s), however, reduces the overall stability of the seed planting implement.</p>
<p id="p-0005" num="0004">Accordingly, an improved system for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on s seed planting implement to enhance the overall operation of the implement would be welcomed in the technology.</p>
<heading id="h-0003" level="1">BRIEF DESCRIPTION</heading>
<p id="p-0006" num="0005">Aspects and advantages of the technology will be set forth in part in the following description, or may be obvious from the description, or may be learned through practice of the technology.</p>
<p id="p-0007" num="0006">In one aspect, the present subject matter is directed to a system for controlling an operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement. The system may include a toolbar and a row unit adjustably mounted on the toolbar. The system may also include a fluid-driven actuator configured to adjust a position of the row unit relative to the toolbar, with the fluid-driven actuator defining first and second fluid chambers. Furthermore, the system may include a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber, with the flow restrictor being configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the first fluid chamber in a manner that provides viscous damping to the row unit. Additionally, the system may include a valve fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber. The valve may further be fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor in a parallel relationship such that the valve is configured to permit the fluid exiting the first fluid chamber to flow through the flow restrictor and the fluid entering the first fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.</p>
<p id="p-0008" num="0007">In another aspect, the present subject matter is directed to a seed planting implement including a toolbar and a plurality of row units adjustably coupled to the toolbar. Each row unit may include a ground engaging tool configured to form a furrow in the soil. The seed planting implement may also include plurality of fluid-driven actuators, with each fluid-driven actuator being coupled between the toolbar and a corresponding row unit of the plurality of row units. As such, each fluid-driven actuator may be configured to adjust a position of the corresponding row unit relative to the toolbar. Moreover, each fluid-driven actuator may define first and second fluid chambers. Furthermore, the seed planting implement may include a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber of a first fluid-driven actuator of the plurality of fluid-driven actuators. The flow restrictor may be configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the first fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator in a manner that provides viscous damping to the corresponding row unit. Additionally, the seed planting implement may include a valve fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator. The valve further may be fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor in a parallel relationship such that the valve is configured to permit the fluid exiting the first fluid chamber to flow through the flow restrictor and the fluid entering the first fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.</p>
<p id="p-0009" num="0008">In a further aspect, the present subject matter is directed to a system for providing damping to a row unit of a seed planting implement. The system may include a toolbar, a row unit adjustably mounted on the toolbar, and a fluid-driven actuator configured to adjust a position of the row unit relative to the toolbar. As such, the fluid-driven actuator may define a fluid chamber. The system may also include a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to the fluid chamber. The flow restrictor may define an adjustable throat configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the fluid chamber. In this regard, the throat may be adjustable between a first size configured to provide a first damping rate to the row unit and a second size configured to provide a second damping rate to the row unit, with the first and second damping rates being different.</p>
<p id="p-0010" num="0009">These and other features, aspects and advantages of the present technology will become better understood with reference to the following description and appended claims. The accompanying drawings, which are incorporated in and constitute a part of this specification, illustrate embodiments of the technology and, together with the description, serve to explain the principles of the technology.</p>
<?summary-of-invention description="Summary of Invention" end="tail"?>
<?brief-description-of-drawings description="Brief Description of Drawings" end="lead"?>
<description-of-drawings>
<heading id="h-0004" level="1">BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS</heading>
<p id="p-0011" num="0010">A full and enabling disclosure of the present technology, including the best mode thereof, directed to one of ordinary skill in the art, is set forth in the specification, which makes reference to the appended figures, in which:</p>
<p id="p-0012" num="0011"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</figref> illustrates a perspective view of one embodiment of a seed planting implement in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;</p>
<p id="p-0013" num="0012"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2</figref> illustrates a side view of one embodiment of a row unit suitable for use with a seed planting implement in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;</p>
<p id="p-0014" num="0013"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 3</figref> illustrates a schematic view of one embodiment of a system for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;</p>
<p id="p-0015" num="0014"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 4</figref> illustrates a cross-sectional view of one embodiment of a flow restrictor suitable for use in the system shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 3</figref>, particularly illustrating the flow restrictor defining a throat having a fixed size in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;</p>
<p id="p-0016" num="0015"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref> illustrates a cross-sectional view of another embodiment of a flow restrictor suitable for use in the system shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 3</figref>, particularly illustrating the flow restrictor defining a throat having an adjustable size in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;</p>
<p id="p-0017" num="0016"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 6</figref> illustrates a simplified cross-sectional view of the flow restrictor shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref>, particularly illustrating the throat having a first size configured to provide a first damping rate in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;</p>
<p id="p-0018" num="0017"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 7</figref> illustrates a simplified cross-sectional view of the flow restrictor shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref>, particularly illustrating the throat having a second size configured to provide a second damping rate in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;</p>
<p id="p-0019" num="0018"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 8</figref> illustrates a cross-sectional view of another embodiment of a system for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter, particularly illustrating the system including a fluidly actuated check valve; and</p>
<p id="p-0020" num="0019"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 9</figref> illustrates a cross-sectional view of a further embodiment of a system for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter, particularly illustrating the system including an electrically actuated check valve.</p>
</description-of-drawings>
<?brief-description-of-drawings description="Brief Description of Drawings" end="tail"?>
<?detailed-description description="Detailed Description" end="lead"?>
<p id="p-0021" num="0020">Repeat use of reference characters in the present specification and drawings is intended to represent the same or analogous features or elements of the present technology.</p>
<heading id="h-0005" level="1">DETAILED DESCRIPTION</heading>
<p id="p-0022" num="0021">Reference now will be made in detail to embodiments of the invention, one or more examples of which are illustrated in the drawings. Each example is provided by way of explanation of the invention, not limitation of the invention. In fact, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that various modifications and variations can be made in the present invention without departing from the scope or spirit of the invention. For instance, features illustrated or described as part of one embodiment can be used with another embodiment to yield a still further embodiment. Thus, it is intended that the present invention covers such modifications and variations as come within the scope of the appended claims and their equivalents.</p>
<p id="p-0023" num="0022">In general, the present subject matter is directed to systems for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement. Specifically, the disclosed systems may be configured to control the operation of the actuator in a manner that provides damping to one or more components of the seed planting implement. For example, in several embodiments, the seed planting implement may include a toolbar and one or more row units adjustably coupled to the toolbar. One or more fluid-driven actuators of the seed planting implement may be configured to control and/or adjust the position of the row unit(s) relative to the toolbar. Furthermore, a flow restrictor may be fluidly coupled to a fluid chamber of the actuator and configured to reduce the rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the fluid chamber so as to provide viscous damping to the row unit(s). In this regard, when the row unit(s) moves relative to the toolbar (e.g., when the row unit contacts a rock or other impediment in the soil), the flow restrictor may be configured to reduce the relative speed and/or displacement of such movement, thereby damping the movement of the row unit(s) relative to the toolbar.</p>
<p id="p-0024" num="0023">In one embodiment, the flow restrictor may be configured to provide a variable damping rate to the component(s) of the seed planting implement. Specifically, in such embodiment, the flow restrictor may be configured as an adjustable valve having one or more components that may be adjusted to change the size of a fluid passage or throat defined by the valve. In this regard, changing the throat size of the valve varies the rate at which the fluid may exit the fluid chamber of the actuator, thereby adjusting the damping rate provided by the disclosed system. For example, adjusting the valve so as to increase the size of the throat may allow the fluid to exit the fluid chamber more quickly, thereby reducing the damping rate of the system. Conversely, adjusting the valve so as to decrease the size of the throat may allow the fluid to exit the fluid chamber more slowly, thereby increasing the damping rate of the system.</p>
<p id="p-0025" num="0024">In accordance with aspects of the present subject matter, the system may further include a check valve fluidly coupled to the fluid chamber of the actuator. Specifically, in several embodiments, the check valve may also be fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor in a parallel relationship. As such, the check valve may be configured to direct the fluid exiting the fluid chamber of the actuator (e.g., when one of the row units hits a rock) to flow through the flow restrictor, thereby reducing the relative speed and/or displacement between the row unit(s) in the toolbar. Furthermore, the check valve may be configured to permit the fluid entering the fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor. For example, the fluid may return to the fluid chamber as the row unit(s) returns to its initial position following contact with the rock. In this regard, allowing the returning fluid to bypass the flow restrictor may increase the rate at which the fluid flows back into the fluid chamber, thereby further increasing the damping provided by the disclosed system.</p>
<p id="p-0026" num="0025">Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</figref>, a perspective view of one embodiment of a seed planting implement <b>10</b> is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. As shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</figref>, the implement <b>10</b> may include a laterally extending toolbar or frame assembly <b>12</b> connected at its middle to a forwardly extending tow bar <b>14</b> to allow the implement <b>10</b> to be towed by a work vehicle (not shown), such as an agricultural tractor, in a direction of travel (e.g., as indicated by arrow <b>16</b>). The toolbar <b>12</b> may generally be configured to support a plurality of tool frames <b>18</b>. Each tool frame <b>18</b> may, in turn, be configured to support a plurality of row units <b>20</b>. As will be described below, each row unit <b>20</b> may include one or more ground engaging tools configured to excavate a furrow or trench in the soil.</p>
<p id="p-0027" num="0026">It should be appreciated that, for purposes of illustration, only a portion of the row units <b>20</b> of the implement <b>10</b> have been shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</figref>. In general, the implement <b>10</b> may include any number of row units <b>20</b>, such as six, eight, twelve, sixteen, twenty-four, thirty-two, or thirty-six row units. In addition, it should be appreciated that the lateral spacing between row units <b>20</b> may be selected based on the type of crop being planted. For example, the row units <b>20</b> may be spaced approximately thirty inches from one another for planting corn, and approximately fifteen inches from one another for planting soybeans.</p>
<p id="p-0028" num="0027">It should also be appreciated that the configuration of the implement <b>10</b> described above and shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</figref> is provided only to place the present subject matter in an exemplary field of use. Thus, it should be appreciated that the present subject matter may be readily adaptable to any manner of implement configuration.</p>
<p id="p-0029" num="0028">Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2</figref>, a side view of one embodiment of a row unit <b>20</b> is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. As shown, the row unit <b>20</b> is configured as a hoe opener row unit. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the row unit <b>20</b> may be configured as a disc opener row unit or any other suitable type of seed planting unit. Furthermore, it should be appreciated that, although the row unit <b>20</b> will generally be described in the context of the implement <b>10</b> shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</figref>, the row unit <b>20</b> may generally be configured to be installed on any suitable seed planting implement having any suitable implement configuration.</p>
<p id="p-0030" num="0029">As shown, the row unit <b>20</b> may be adjustably coupled to one of the tool frames <b>18</b> of the implement <b>10</b> by a suitable linkage assembly <b>22</b>. For example, in one embodiment, the linkage assembly <b>22</b> may include a mounting bracket <b>24</b> coupled to the tool frame <b>18</b>. Furthermore, the linkage assembly <b>22</b> may include first and second linkage members <b>26</b>, <b>28</b>. One end of each linkage member <b>26</b>, <b>28</b> may be pivotably coupled to the mounting bracket <b>24</b>, while an opposed end of each linkage member <b>26</b>, <b>28</b> may be pivotally coupled to a support member <b>30</b> of the row unit <b>20</b>. In this regard, the linkage assembly <b>22</b> may form a four bar linkage with the support member <b>30</b> that permits relative pivotable movement between the row unit <b>20</b> and the associated tool frame <b>18</b>. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the row unit <b>20</b> may be adjustably coupled to the tool frame <b>18</b> or the toolbar <b>12</b> via any other suitable linkage assembly. Furthermore, it should be appreciated that, in further embodiments the linkage assembly <b>22</b> may couple the row unit <b>20</b> directly to the toolbar <b>12</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0031" num="0030">Furthermore, the support member <b>30</b> may be configured to support one or more components of the row unit <b>20</b>. For example, in several embodiments, a ground engaging shank <b>32</b> may be mounted or otherwise supported on support member <b>22</b>. As shown, the shank <b>32</b> may include an opener <b>34</b> configured to excavate a furrow or trench in the soil as the implement <b>10</b> moves in the direction of travel <b>12</b> to facilitate deposition of a flowable granular or particulate-type agricultural product, such as seed, fertilizer, and/or the like. Moreover, the row unit <b>20</b> may include a packer wheel <b>36</b> configured to roll along the soil and close the furrow after deposition of the agricultural product. In one embodiment, the packer wheel <b>36</b> may be coupled to the support member <b>30</b> by an arm <b>38</b>. It should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, any other suitable component(s) may be supported on or otherwise coupled to the support member <b>30</b>. For example, the row unit <b>20</b> may include a ground engaging disc opener (not shown) in lieu of the ground engaging shank <b>32</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0032" num="0031">Additionally, in several embodiments, a fluid-driven actuator <b>102</b> of the implement <b>10</b> may be configured to adjust the position of one or more components of the row unit <b>20</b> relative to the tool frame <b>18</b>. For example, in one embodiment, a rod <b>104</b> of the actuator <b>102</b> may be coupled to the shank <b>32</b> (e.g., the end of the shank <b>32</b> opposed from the opener <b>34</b>), while a cylinder <b>106</b> of the actuator <b>102</b> may be coupled to the mounting bracket <b>24</b>. As such, the rod <b>104</b> may be configured to extend and/or retract relative to the cylinder <b>106</b> to adjust the position of the shank <b>32</b> relative to the tool frame <b>18</b>, which, in turn, adjusts the force being applied to the shank <b>32</b>. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the rod <b>104</b> may be coupled to the mounting bracket <b>24</b>, while the cylinder <b>106</b> may be coupled to the shank <b>32</b>. Furthermore, it should be appreciated that, in further embodiments, the actuator <b>102</b> may be coupled to any other suitable component of the row unit <b>20</b> and/or directly to the toolbar <b>12</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0033" num="0032">Moreover, it should be appreciated that the configuration of the row unit <b>20</b> described above and shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2</figref> is provided only to place the present subject matter in an exemplary field of use. Thus, it should be appreciated that the present subject matter may be readily adaptable to any manner of seed planting unit configuration.</p>
<p id="p-0034" num="0033">Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 3</figref>, a schematic view of one embodiment of a system <b>100</b> for controlling the operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. In general, the system <b>100</b> will be described herein with reference to the seed planting implement <b>10</b> and the row unit <b>20</b> described above with reference to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 1 and 2</figref>. However, it should be appreciated by those of ordinary skill in the art that the disclosed system <b>100</b> may generally be utilized with seed planting implements having any other suitable implement configuration and/or seed planting units having any other suitable unit configuration.</p>
<p id="p-0035" num="0034">As shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 3</figref>, the system <b>100</b> may include a fluid-driven actuator, such as the actuator <b>102</b> of the row unit <b>20</b> described above with reference to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2</figref>. As shown, the actuator <b>102</b> may correspond to a hydraulic actuator. Thus, in several embodiments, the actuator <b>102</b> may include a piston <b>108</b> housed within the cylinder <b>106</b>. One end of the rod <b>104</b> may be coupled to the piston <b>108</b>, while an opposed end of the rod <b>104</b> may extend outwardly from the cylinder <b>106</b>. Additionally, the actuator <b>102</b> may include a cap-side chamber <b>110</b> and a rod-side chamber <b>112</b> defined within the cylinder <b>106</b>. As is generally understood, by regulating the pressure of the fluid supplied to one or both of the cylinder chambers <b>110</b>, <b>112</b>, the actuation of the rod <b>104</b> may be controlled. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the actuator <b>102</b> may be configured as any other suitable type of actuator, such as a pneumatic actuator. Furthermore, it should be appreciated that, in further embodiments, the system <b>100</b> may include any other suitable number of fluid-driven actuators, such as additional actuators <b>102</b> mounted on the implement <b>10</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0036" num="0035">Furthermore, the system <b>100</b> may include various components configured to provide fluid (e.g., hydraulic oil) to the cylinder chambers <b>110</b>, <b>112</b> of the actuator <b>102</b>. For example, in several embodiments, the system <b>100</b> may include a fluid reservoir <b>114</b> and first and second fluid conduits <b>116</b>, <b>118</b>. As shown, a first fluid conduit <b>116</b> may extend between and fluidly couple the reservoir <b>114</b> and the rod-side chamber <b>112</b> of the actuator <b>102</b>. Similarly, a second fluid conduit <b>118</b> may extend between and fluidly couple the reservoir <b>114</b> and the cap-side chamber <b>110</b> of the actuator <b>102</b>. Additionally, a pump <b>115</b> and a remote switch <b>117</b> or other valve(s) may be configured to control the flow of the fluid between the reservoir <b>114</b> and the cylinder chambers <b>110</b>, <b>112</b> of the actuator <b>102</b>. In one embodiment, the reservoir <b>114</b>, the pump <b>115</b>, and the remote switch <b>117</b> may be mounted on the work vehicle (not shown) configured to tow the implement <b>10</b>. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the reservoir <b>114</b>, the pump <b>115</b>, and/or the remote switch <b>117</b> may be mounted on the implement <b>10</b>. Furthermore, it should be appreciated that the system <b>100</b> may include any other suit component(s) configured to control the flow of fluid between the reservoir and the actuator <b>102</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0037" num="0036">In several embodiments, the system <b>100</b> may also include a flow restrictor <b>120</b> that is fluidly coupled to the cap-side chamber <b>110</b>. As such, the flow restrictor <b>120</b> may be provided in series with the second fluid conduit <b>118</b>. As will be described below, the flow restrictor <b>120</b> may be configured to reduce the flow rate of the fluid exiting the cap-side chamber <b>110</b> in a manner that provides damping to one or more components of the implement <b>10</b>. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the flow restrictor <b>120</b> may be fluidly coupled to the rod-side chamber <b>120</b> such that the flow restrictor <b>120</b> is provided in series with the first fluid conduit <b>116</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0038" num="0037">Additionally, in several embodiments, the system <b>100</b> may include a check valve <b>122</b> that is fluidly coupled to the cap-side chamber <b>110</b> and provided in series with the second fluid conduit <b>118</b>. As shown, the check valve <b>122</b> may be fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor <b>120</b> in parallel. In this regard, the check valve <b>122</b> may be provided in series with a first branch <b>124</b> of the second fluid conduit <b>118</b>, while the flow restrictor <b>120</b> may be provided in series with a second branch <b>126</b> of the second fluid conduit <b>118</b>. As such, the check valve <b>122</b> may be configured to allow the fluid to flow through the first branch <b>124</b> of the second fluid conduit <b>118</b> from the reservoir <b>114</b> to the cap-side chamber <b>110</b>. However, the check valve <b>122</b> may be configured to occlude or prevent the fluid from flowing through the first branch <b>124</b> of the second fluid conduit <b>118</b> from the cap-side chamber <b>110</b> to the reservoir <b>114</b>. In this regard, the check valve <b>122</b> directs all of the fluid exiting the cap-side chamber <b>110</b> into the flow restrictor <b>120</b>. Conversely, the check valve <b>122</b> permits the fluid flowing to the cap-side chamber <b>110</b> to bypass the flow restrictor <b>120</b>. As will be described below, such configuration facilitates damping of one or more components of the implement <b>10</b>. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the check valve <b>122</b> may be fluidly coupled to the rod-side chamber <b>112</b> in combination with the flow restrictor <b>120</b> such that the check valve <b>122</b> is provided in series with the first fluid conduit <b>116</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0039" num="0038">As indicated above, the system <b>100</b> may generally be configured to provide viscous damping to one or more components of the implement <b>10</b>. For example, when a ground engaging tool of the implement <b>10</b>, such as the shank <b>32</b>, contacts a rock or other impediment in the soil, the corresponding row unit <b>20</b> may pivot relative to the corresponding tool frame <b>18</b> and/or the toolbar <b>12</b> against the down pressure load applied to the row unit <b>20</b> by the corresponding actuator <b>102</b>. In several embodiments, such movement may cause the rod <b>104</b> of the actuator <b>102</b> to retract into the cylinder <b>106</b>, thereby moving the piston <b>108</b> in a manner that decreases the volume of the cap-side chamber <b>110</b>. In such instances, some of the fluid present within the cap-side chamber <b>110</b> may exit and flow into the second fluid conduit <b>118</b> toward the reservoir <b>114</b>. The check valve <b>122</b> may prevent the fluid exiting the cap-side chamber <b>110</b> from flowing through the first branch <b>124</b> of the second fluid conduit <b>118</b>. As such, all fluid exiting the cap-side chamber <b>110</b> may be directed into the second branch <b>126</b> and through the flow restrictor <b>120</b>. As indicated above, the flow restrictor <b>120</b> reduces or limits the rate at which the fluid may flow through the second fluid conduit <b>118</b> so as to reduce the rate at which the fluid may exit the cap-side chamber <b>110</b>. In this regard, the speed at which and/or the amount that the rod <b>104</b> retracts into the cylinder <b>106</b> when the shank <b>32</b> contacts a soil impediment may be reduced (e.g., because of the reduced rate at which the fluid is discharged from the cap-side chamber <b>110</b>), thereby damping the movement of the row unit <b>20</b> relative to the corresponding tool frame <b>18</b> and/or the toolbar <b>12</b>. Furthermore, after the initial retraction of the rod <b>104</b> into the cylinder <b>106</b>, the piston <b>108</b> may then move in a manner that increases the volume of the cap-side chamber <b>110</b>, thereby extending the rod <b>104</b> from the cylinder <b>106</b>. In such instances, fluid present within the reservoir <b>114</b> and the second fluid conduit <b>118</b> may be drawn back into the cap-side chamber <b>110</b>. As indicated above, the check valve <b>122</b> may permit the fluid within the second fluid conduit <b>118</b> to bypass the flow restrictor <b>120</b> and flow unobstructed through the first branch <b>124</b>, thereby maximizing the rate at which the fluid returns to the cap-side chamber <b>110</b>. Increasing the rate at which the fluid returns to the cap-side chamber <b>110</b> may decrease the time that the row unit <b>20</b> is displaced relative to the tool frame <b>18</b>, thereby further damping of the row unit <b>20</b> relative to the corresponding tool frame <b>18</b> and/or the toolbar <b>12</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0040" num="0039">Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 4</figref>, a cross-sectional view of one embodiment of the flow restrictor <b>120</b> is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. For example, in the illustrated embodiment, the flow restrictor <b>120</b> may include a restrictor body <b>128</b> coupled to the second branch <b>126</b> of the second fluid conduit <b>118</b>, with the restrictor body <b>128</b>, in turn, defining a fluid passage <b>130</b> extending therethrough. Furthermore, the flow restrictor <b>120</b> may include an orifice plate <b>132</b> extending inward from the restrictor body <b>128</b> into the fluid passage <b>130</b>. As shown, the orifice plate <b>132</b> may define a central aperture or throat <b>134</b> extending therethrough. In general, the size (e.g., the area, diameter, etc.) of the throat <b>134</b> may be smaller than the size of the fluid passage <b>130</b> so as to reduce the flow rate of the fluid through the flow restrictor <b>120</b>. It should be appreciated that, in the illustrated embodiment, the throat <b>134</b> has a fixed size such that the throat <b>134</b> provides a fixed or constant backpressure for a given fluid flow rate. In this regard, in such embodiment, a fixed or constant damping rate is provided by the system <b>100</b>. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the flow restrictor <b>120</b> may have any other suitable configuration that reduces the flow rate of the fluid flowing therethrough.</p>
<p id="p-0041" num="0040">Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref>, a cross-sectional view of another embodiment of the flow restrictor <b>120</b> is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. As shown, the flow restrictor <b>120</b> may generally be configured the same as or similar to that described above with reference to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 4</figref>. For instance, the flow restrictor <b>120</b> may define the throat <b>134</b>, which is configured to reduce the flow rate of the fluid through the flow restrictor <b>120</b>. However, as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref>, unlike the above-describe embodiment, the size (e.g., the area, diameter, etc.) of the throat <b>134</b> is adjustable. For example, in such embodiment, the flow restrictor <b>120</b> may be configured as an adjustable valve <b>136</b>. As shown, the valve <b>136</b> may include a valve body <b>138</b> coupled to the second branch <b>126</b> of the second fluid conduit <b>118</b>, a shaft <b>140</b> rotatably coupled to the valve body <b>138</b>, a disc <b>142</b> coupled to the shaft <b>140</b>, and an actuator <b>144</b> (e.g., a suitable electric motor) coupled to the shaft <b>140</b>. As such, the actuator <b>144</b> may be configured to rotate the shaft <b>140</b> and the disc <b>142</b> relative to the valve body <b>138</b> (e.g., as indicated by arrow <b>146</b> in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref>) to change the size of the throat <b>134</b> defined between the disc <b>142</b> and the valve body <b>138</b>. Although the valve <b>136</b> is configured as a butterfly valve in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref>, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the valve <b>136</b> may be configured as any other suitable type of valve or adjustable flow restrictor. For example, in one embodiment, the valve <b>136</b> may be configured as a suitable ball valve.</p>
<p id="p-0042" num="0041">In accordance with aspects of the present disclosure, by adjusting the size of the throat <b>134</b>, the system <b>100</b> may be able to provide variable damping rates. In general, the size of the throat <b>134</b> may be indicative of the amount of damping provided by the system <b>100</b>. For example, in several embodiments, the disc <b>142</b> may be adjustable between a first position shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 6</figref> and a second position shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 7</figref>. More specifically, when the disc <b>142</b> is at the first position, the throat <b>134</b> defines a first size (e.g., as indicated by arrow <b>148</b> in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 6</figref>), thereby providing a first damping rate. Conversely, when the disc <b>142</b> is at the second position, the throat <b>134</b> defines a second size (e.g., as indicated by arrow <b>150</b> in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 7</figref>), thereby providing a second damping rate. As shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 6 and 7</figref>, the first distance <b>148</b> is larger than the second distance <b>150</b>. In such instance, the system <b>100</b> provides greater damping when the throat <b>134</b> is adjusted to the first size than when the throat <b>134</b> is adjusted to the second size. It should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the disc <b>142</b> may be adjustable between any other suitable positions that provide any other suitable damping rates. For example, the disc <b>142</b> may be adjustable to a plurality of different positions defined between the fully opened and fully closed positions of the valve, thereby providing for a corresponding number of different damping rates. Furthermore, it should be appreciated that the disc <b>142</b> may be continuously adjustable or adjustable between various discrete positions.</p>
<p id="p-0043" num="0042">Referring back to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref>, a controller <b>152</b> of the system <b>100</b> may be configured to electronically control the operation of one or more components of the valve <b>138</b>, such as the actuator <b>144</b>. In general, the controller <b>152</b> may comprise any suitable processor-based device known in the art, such as a computing device or any suitable combination of computing devices. Thus, in several embodiments, the controller <b>152</b> may include one or more processor(s) <b>154</b> and associated memory device(s) <b>156</b> configured to perform a variety of computer-implemented functions. As used herein, the term &#x201c;processor&#x201d; refers not only to integrated circuits referred to in the art as being included in a computer, but also refers to a controller, a microcontroller, a microcomputer, a programmable logic controller (PLC), an application specific integrated circuit, and other programmable circuits. Additionally, the memory device(s) <b>156</b> of the controller <b>152</b> may generally comprise memory element(s) including, but not limited to, a computer readable medium (e.g., random access memory (RAM)), a computer readable non-volatile medium (e.g., a flash memory), a floppy disk, a compact disc-read only memory (CD-ROM), a magneto-optical disk (MOD), a digital versatile disc (DVD) and/or other suitable memory elements. Such memory device(s) <b>156</b> may generally be configured to store suitable computer-readable instructions that, when implemented by the processor(s) <b>154</b>, configure the controller <b>152</b> to perform various computer-implemented functions. In addition, the controller <b>152</b> may also include various other suitable components, such as a communications circuit or module, one or more input/output channels, a data/control bus and/or the like.</p>
<p id="p-0044" num="0043">It should be appreciated that the controller <b>152</b> may correspond to an existing controller of the implement <b>10</b> or associated work vehicle (not shown) or the controller <b>152</b> may correspond to a separate processing device. For instance, in one embodiment, the controller <b>152</b> may form all or part of a separate plug-in module that may be installed within the implement <b>10</b> or associated work vehicle to allow for the disclosed system and method to be implemented without requiring additional software to be uploaded onto existing control devices of the implement <b>10</b> or associated work vehicle.</p>
<p id="p-0045" num="0044">Furthermore, in one embodiment, a user interface <b>158</b> of the system <b>100</b> may be communicatively coupled to the controller <b>152</b> via a wired or wireless connection to allow feedback signals (e.g., as indicated by dashed line <b>160</b> in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref>) to be transmitted from the controller <b>152</b> to the user interface <b>158</b>. More specifically, the user interface <b>158</b> may be configured to receive an input from an operator of the implement <b>10</b> or the associated work vehicle, such as an input associated with a desired damping characteristic(s) to be provided by the system <b>100</b>. As such, the user interface <b>158</b> may include one or more input devices (not shown), such as touchscreens, keypads, touchpads, knobs, buttons, sliders, switches, mice, microphones, and/or the like. In addition, some embodiments of the user interface <b>158</b> may include one or more one or more feedback devices (not shown), such as display screens, speakers, warning lights, and/or the like, which are configured to communicate such feedback from the controller <b>152</b> to the operator of the implement <b>10</b>. However, in alternative embodiments, the user interface <b>158</b> may have any suitable configuration.</p>
<p id="p-0046" num="0045">Moreover, in one embodiment, one or more sensors <b>162</b> of the system <b>100</b> may be communicatively coupled to the controller <b>152</b> via a wired or wireless connection to allow sensor data (e.g., as indicated by dashed line <b>164</b> in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref>) to be transmitted from the sensor(s) <b>162</b> to the controller <b>152</b>. For example, in one embodiment, the sensor(s) <b>162</b> may include a location sensor, such as a GNSS-based sensor, that is configured to detect a parameter associated with the location of the implement <b>10</b> or associated work vehicle within the field. In another embodiment, the sensor(s) <b>162</b> may include a speed sensor, such as a Hall Effect sensor, that is configured to detect a parameter associated with the speed at which the implement <b>10</b> is moved across the field. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the sensor(s) <b>162</b> may include any suitable sensing device(s) configured to detect any suitable operating parameter of the implement <b>10</b> and/or the associated work vehicle.</p>
<p id="p-0047" num="0046">In several embodiments, the controller <b>152</b> may be configured to control the operation of the valve <b>136</b> based on the feedback signals <b>160</b> received from the user interface <b>158</b> and/or the sensor data <b>164</b> received from the sensor(s) <b>162</b>. Specifically, as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref>, the controller <b>152</b> may be communicatively coupled to the actuator <b>144</b> of the valve <b>136</b> via a wired or wireless connection to allow control signals (e.g., indicated by dashed lines <b>166</b> in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref>) to be transmitted from the controller <b>152</b> to the actuator <b>144</b>. Such control signals <b>166</b> may be configured to regulate the operation of the actuator <b>144</b> to adjust the position of the disc <b>142</b> relative to the valve body <b>138</b>, such as by moving the disc <b>142</b> along the direction <b>146</b> between the first position (<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 6</figref>) and the second position (<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 7</figref>). For example, the feedback signals <b>116</b> received by the controller <b>152</b> may be indicative that the operator desires to adjust the damping provided by the system <b>100</b>. Furthermore, upon receipt of the sensor data <b>164</b> (e.g., data indicative of the location and/or speed of the implement <b>10</b>), the controller <b>152</b> may be configured to determine that the damping rate of the system <b>100</b> should be adjusted. In either instance, the controller <b>152</b> may be configured to transmit the control signals <b>166</b> to the actuator <b>144</b>, with such control signals <b>166</b> being configured to control the operation of the actuator <b>144</b> to adjust the position of the disc <b>142</b> to provide the desired damping rate. However, it should be appreciated that, in alternative embodiments, the controller <b>152</b> may be configured to control the operation of the valve <b>136</b> based on any other suitable input(s) and/or parameter(s).</p>
<p id="p-0048" num="0047">Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 8</figref>, a schematic view of another embodiment of the system <b>100</b> is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. As shown, the system <b>100</b> may generally be configured the same as or similar to that described above with reference to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 3</figref>. For instance, the system <b>100</b> may include the flow restrictor <b>120</b> and the check valve <b>122</b> fluidly coupled to the cap-side chamber <b>110</b> of the actuator <b>102</b> via the second fluid conduit <b>118</b>. Furthermore, the flow restrictor <b>120</b> and the check valve <b>122</b> may be fluidly coupled together in parallel. However, as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 8</figref>, unlike the above-describe embodiment, the check valve <b>122</b> may be configured as a pilot-operated or fluid actuated three-way valve that is fluidly coupled to the first fluid conduit <b>116</b> by a pilot conduit <b>168</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0049" num="0048">In general, when the row unit <b>20</b> is lifted from an operational position relative to the ground to a raised position relative to the ground, it may be desirable for fluid to exit the cap-side chamber <b>110</b> without its flow rate being limited by the flow restrictor <b>120</b>. For example, permitting such fluid to bypass the flow restrictor <b>120</b> may reduce the time required to lift the row unit <b>20</b> from the operational position to the raised position. More specifically, when lifting the row unit <b>20</b> from the operational position to the raised position, a pump (not shown) may pump fluid through the first fluid conduit <b>116</b> from the reservoir <b>114</b> to the rod-side chamber <b>112</b> of the actuator <b>102</b>, thereby retracting the rod <b>104</b> into the cylinder <b>106</b>. This may, in turn, discharge fluid from the cap-side chamber <b>110</b> into the second fluid conduit <b>118</b>. As described above, the check valve <b>122</b> may generally be configured to direct all fluid exiting the cap-side chamber <b>110</b> into the flow restrictor <b>120</b>. However, in the configuration of the system <b>100</b> shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 8</figref>, when lifting the row unit <b>20</b> to the raised position, the pilot conduit <b>168</b> supplies fluid flowing through the first fluid conduit <b>116</b> to the check valve <b>122</b>. The fluid received from the pilot conduit <b>168</b> may, in turn, actuate suitable component(s) of the check valve <b>122</b> (e.g., a diaphragm(s), a spring(s), and/or the like) in a manner that causes the check valve <b>122</b> to open, thereby permitting the fluid exiting the cap-side chamber <b>110</b> to bypass the flow restrictor <b>120</b> and flow unobstructed through the check valve <b>122</b> toward the reservoir <b>114</b>. Conversely, when the row unit <b>20</b> is at the operational position, the check valve <b>122</b> may be closed, thereby directing all fluid exiting the cap-side chamber <b>110</b> into the flow restrictor <b>120</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0050" num="0049">Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 9</figref>, a schematic view of a further embodiment of the system <b>100</b> is illustrated in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter. As shown, the system <b>100</b> may generally be configured the same as or similar to that described above with reference to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 3 and 8</figref>. For instance, the system <b>100</b> may include the flow restrictor <b>120</b> and the check valve <b>122</b> fluidly coupled to the cap-side chamber <b>110</b> of the actuator <b>102</b> via the second fluid conduit <b>118</b>. Furthermore, the flow restrictor <b>120</b> and the check valve <b>122</b> may be fluidly coupled together in parallel. However, as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 9</figref>, unlike the above-describe embodiments, the check valve <b>122</b> may be configured as an electrically actuated valve. Specifically, as shown, the controller <b>152</b> may be communicatively coupled to the check valve <b>122</b> via a wired or wireless connection to allow control signals (e.g., indicated by dashed lines <b>170</b> in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 9</figref>) to be transmitted from the controller <b>152</b> to the check valve <b>122</b>. In this regard, when the row unit <b>20</b> is lifted from the operational position to the raised position, the control signals <b>170</b> may be configured to instruct the check valve <b>122</b> to open in a manner that permits the fluid exiting the cap-side chamber <b>110</b> to bypass the flow restrictor <b>120</b> and flow unobstructed through the check valve <b>122</b> toward the reservoir <b>114</b>. Conversely, when the row unit <b>20</b> is at the operational position, the control signals <b>170</b> may be configured to instruct the check valve <b>122</b> to close, thereby directing all fluid exiting the cap-side chamber <b>110</b> into the flow restrictor <b>120</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0051" num="0050">This written description uses examples to disclose the technology, including the best mode, and also to enable any person skilled in the art to practice the technology, including making and using any devices or systems and performing any incorporated methods. The patentable scope of the technology is defined by the claims, and may include other examples that occur to those skilled in the art. Such other examples are intended to be within the scope of the claims if they include structural elements that do not differ from the literal language of the claims, or if they include equivalent structural elements with insubstantial differences from the literal language of the claims.</p>
<?detailed-description description="Detailed Description" end="tail"?>
</description>
<us-claim-statement>What is claimed is:</us-claim-statement>
<claims id="claims">
<claim id="CLM-00001" num="00001">
<claim-text><b>1</b>. A system for controlling an operation of an actuator mounted on a seed planting implement, the system comprising:
<claim-text>a toolbar;</claim-text>
<claim-text>a row unit adjustably mounted on the toolbar;</claim-text>
<claim-text>a fluid-driven actuator configured to adjust a position of the row unit relative to the toolbar, the fluid-driven actuator defining first and second fluid chambers;</claim-text>
<claim-text>a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber, the flow restrictor being configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the first fluid chamber in a manner that provides damping to the row unit; and</claim-text>
<claim-text>a valve fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber, the valve further being fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor in a parallel relationship such that the valve is configured to permit the fluid exiting the first fluid chamber to flow through the flow restrictor and the fluid entering the first fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.</claim-text>
</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00002" num="00002">
<claim-text><b>2</b>. The system of <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, wherein, when fluid is supplied to the second fluid chamber, the valve is configured to permit fluid exiting the first fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00003" num="00003">
<claim-text><b>3</b>. The system of <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, wherein the valve is fluidly actuated.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00004" num="00004">
<claim-text><b>4</b>. The system of <claim-ref idref="CLM-00003">claim 3</claim-ref>, further comprising:
<claim-text>a fluid line configured to supply the fluid to the second fluid chamber, the fluid line being fluidly coupled to the valve such that, when the fluid flows through the fluid line to the second fluid chamber, the valve opens in a manner that permits the fluid exiting first fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.</claim-text>
</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00005" num="00005">
<claim-text><b>5</b>. The system of <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, wherein the valve is electrically actuated.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00006" num="00006">
<claim-text><b>6</b>. The system of <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, wherein the flow restrictor defines a throat having a fixed size.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00007" num="00007">
<claim-text><b>7</b>. The system of <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, wherein the flow restrictor defines a throat having an adjustable size.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00008" num="00008">
<claim-text><b>8</b>. A seed planting implement, comprising:
<claim-text>a toolbar;</claim-text>
<claim-text>a plurality of row units adjustably coupled to the toolbar, each row unit including a ground engaging tool configured to form a furrow in the soil;</claim-text>
<claim-text>a plurality of fluid-driven actuators, each fluid-driven actuator being coupled between the toolbar and a corresponding row unit of the plurality of row units, each fluid-driven actuator being configured to adjust a position of the corresponding row unit relative to the toolbar, each fluid-driven actuator defining first and second fluid chambers;</claim-text>
<claim-text>a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber of a first fluid-driven actuator of the plurality of fluid-driven actuators, the flow restrictor being configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the first fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator in a manner that provides damping to the corresponding row unit; and</claim-text>
<claim-text>a valve fluidly coupled to the first fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator, the valve further being fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor in a parallel relationship such that the valve is configured to permit the fluid exiting the first fluid chamber to flow through the flow restrictor and the fluid entering the first fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor.</claim-text>
</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00009" num="00009">
<claim-text><b>9</b>. The seed planting implement of <claim-ref idref="CLM-00008">claim 8</claim-ref>, wherein, when fluid is supplied to the second fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator, the valve is configured to permit fluid exiting the first fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator to bypass the flow restrictor.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00010" num="00010">
<claim-text><b>10</b>. The seed planting implement of <claim-ref idref="CLM-00008">claim 8</claim-ref>, wherein the valve is fluidly actuated.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00011" num="00011">
<claim-text><b>11</b>. The seed planting implement of <claim-ref idref="CLM-00010">claim 10</claim-ref>, further comprising:
<claim-text>a fluid line configured to supply fluid to the second fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator, the fluid line being fluidly coupled to the valve such that, when fluid flows through the fluid line to the second fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator, the valve opens in a manner that permits the fluid exiting first fluid chamber of the first fluid-driven actuator to bypass the flow restrictor.</claim-text>
</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00012" num="00012">
<claim-text><b>12</b>. The seed planting implement of <claim-ref idref="CLM-00008">claim 8</claim-ref>, wherein the valve is electrically actuated.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00013" num="00013">
<claim-text><b>13</b>. The seed planting implement of <claim-ref idref="CLM-00008">claim 8</claim-ref>, wherein the flow restrictor defines a throat having a fixed size.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00014" num="00014">
<claim-text><b>14</b>. The seed planting implement of <claim-ref idref="CLM-00008">claim 8</claim-ref>, wherein the flow restrictor defines a throat having an adjustable size.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00015" num="00015">
<claim-text><b>15</b>. A system for providing damping to a row unit of a seed planting implement, the system comprising:
<claim-text>a toolbar;</claim-text>
<claim-text>a row unit adjustably mounted on the toolbar;</claim-text>
<claim-text>a fluid-driven actuator configured to adjust a position of the row unit relative to the toolbar, the fluid-driven actuator defining a fluid chamber; and</claim-text>
<claim-text>a flow restrictor fluidly coupled to the fluid chamber, the flow restrictor defining an adjustable throat configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the fluid chamber, the throat being adjustable between a first size configured to provide a first damping rate to the row unit and a second size configured to provide a second damping rate to the row unit, the first and second damping rates being different.</claim-text>
</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00016" num="00016">
<claim-text><b>16</b>. The system of <claim-ref idref="CLM-00015">claim 15</claim-ref>, wherein the throat is adjustable between the first and second damping rates based on an operator input.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00017" num="00017">
<claim-text><b>17</b>. The system of <claim-ref idref="CLM-00015">claim 15</claim-ref>, wherein the throat is adjustable between the first and second damping rates based on data received from one or more sensors on the seed planting implement.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00018" num="00018">
<claim-text><b>18</b>. The system of <claim-ref idref="CLM-00015">claim 15</claim-ref>, further comprising:
<claim-text>a valve fluidly coupled to the fluid chamber, the valve being configured to selectively occlude the flow of fluid such that fluid exiting the fluid chamber flows through the flow restrictor and fluid entering the fluid chamber bypasses the flow restrictor.</claim-text>
</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00019" num="00019">
<claim-text><b>19</b>. The system of <claim-ref idref="CLM-00018">claim 18</claim-ref>, wherein the flow restrictor and the valve are fluidly coupled in a parallel relationship.</claim-text>
</claim>
</claims>
</us-patent-application>

4468
tests/data/uspto/ipg07997973.xml Normal file
View File

File diff suppressed because one or more lines are too long

783
tests/data/uspto/ipg08672134.xml Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,783 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE us-patent-grant SYSTEM "us-patent-grant-v44-2013-05-16.dtd" [ ]>
<us-patent-grant lang="EN" dtd-version="v4.4 2013-05-16" file="US08672134-20140318.XML" status="PRODUCTION" id="us-patent-grant" country="US" date-produced="20140304" date-publ="20140318">
<us-bibliographic-data-grant>
<publication-reference>
<document-id>
<country>US</country>
<doc-number>08672134</doc-number>
<kind>B2</kind>
<date>20140318</date>
</document-id>
</publication-reference>
<application-reference appl-type="utility">
<document-id>
<country>US</country>
<doc-number>12936568</doc-number>
<date>20090331</date>
</document-id>
</application-reference>
<us-application-series-code>12</us-application-series-code>
<priority-claims>
<priority-claim sequence="01" kind="regional">
<country>EP</country>
<doc-number>08007030</doc-number>
<date>20080409</date>
</priority-claim>
</priority-claims>
<us-term-of-grant>
<us-term-extension>476</us-term-extension>
</us-term-of-grant>
<classifications-ipcr>
<classification-ipcr>
<ipc-version-indicator><date>20060101</date></ipc-version-indicator>
<classification-level>A</classification-level>
<section>B</section>
<class>65</class>
<subclass>D</subclass>
<main-group>83</main-group>
<subgroup>04</subgroup>
<symbol-position>F</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20140318</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
</classification-ipcr>
<classification-ipcr>
<ipc-version-indicator><date>20060101</date></ipc-version-indicator>
<classification-level>A</classification-level>
<section>B</section>
<class>65</class>
<subclass>D</subclass>
<main-group>85</main-group>
<subgroup>42</subgroup>
<symbol-position>L</symbol-position>
<classification-value>I</classification-value>
<action-date><date>20140318</date></action-date>
<generating-office><country>US</country></generating-office>
<classification-status>B</classification-status>
<classification-data-source>H</classification-data-source>
</classification-ipcr>
</classifications-ipcr>
<classification-national>
<country>US</country>
<main-classification>206531</main-classification>
<further-classification>206 15</further-classification>
<further-classification>220 2391</further-classification>
</classification-national>
<invention-title id="d2e71">Child-resistant medication container</invention-title>
<us-references-cited>
<us-citation>
<patcit num="00001">
<document-id>
<country>US</country>
<doc-number>6460693</doc-number>
<kind>B1</kind>
<name>Harrold</name>
<date>20021000</date>
</document-id>
</patcit>
<category>cited by applicant</category>
</us-citation>
<us-citation>
<patcit num="00002">
<document-id>
<country>US</country>
<doc-number>6848577</doc-number>
<kind>B2</kind>
<name>Kawamura et al.</name>
<date>20050200</date>
</document-id>
</patcit>
<category>cited by examiner</category>
<classification-national><country>US</country><main-classification>206449</main-classification></classification-national>
</us-citation>
<us-citation>
<patcit num="00003">
<document-id>
<country>US</country>
<doc-number>7549541</doc-number>
<kind>B2</kind>
<name>Brozell et al.</name>
<date>20090600</date>
</document-id>
</patcit>
<category>cited by examiner</category>
<classification-national><country>US</country><main-classification>206531</main-classification></classification-national>
</us-citation>
<us-citation>
<patcit num="00004">
<document-id>
<country>US</country>
<doc-number>2004/0045858</doc-number>
<kind>A1</kind>
<name>Harrold</name>
<date>20040300</date>
</document-id>
</patcit>
<category>cited by applicant</category>
</us-citation>
<us-citation>
<patcit num="00005">
<document-id>
<country>US</country>
<doc-number>2004/0256277</doc-number>
<kind>A1</kind>
<name>Gedanke</name>
<date>20041200</date>
</document-id>
</patcit>
<category>cited by examiner</category>
<classification-national><country>US</country><main-classification>206538</main-classification></classification-national>
</us-citation>
<us-citation>
<patcit num="00006">
<document-id>
<country>US</country>
<doc-number>2007/0045150</doc-number>
<kind>A1</kind>
<name>Huffer et al.</name>
<date>20070300</date>
</document-id>
</patcit>
<category>cited by examiner</category>
<classification-national><country>US</country><main-classification>206538</main-classification></classification-national>
</us-citation>
<us-citation>
<patcit num="00007">
<document-id>
<country>US</country>
<doc-number>2007/0284277</doc-number>
<kind>A1</kind>
<name>Gnepper</name>
<date>20071200</date>
</document-id>
</patcit>
<category>cited by applicant</category>
</us-citation>
<us-citation>
<patcit num="00008">
<document-id>
<country>US</country>
<doc-number>2008/0023475</doc-number>
<kind>A1</kind>
<name>Escobar et al.</name>
<date>20080100</date>
</document-id>
</patcit>
<category>cited by examiner</category>
<classification-national><country>US</country><main-classification>220 2391</main-classification></classification-national>
</us-citation>
<us-citation>
<patcit num="00009">
<document-id>
<country>US</country>
<doc-number>2009/0178948</doc-number>
<kind>A1</kind>
<name>Reilley et al.</name>
<date>20090700</date>
</document-id>
</patcit>
<category>cited by examiner</category>
<classification-national><country>US</country><main-classification>206531</main-classification></classification-national>
</us-citation>
<us-citation>
<patcit num="00010">
<document-id>
<country>US</country>
<doc-number>2009/0184022</doc-number>
<kind>A1</kind>
<name>Coe et al.</name>
<date>20090700</date>
</document-id>
</patcit>
<category>cited by examiner</category>
<classification-national><country>US</country><main-classification>206531</main-classification></classification-national>
</us-citation>
<us-citation>
<patcit num="00011">
<document-id>
<country>US</country>
<doc-number>2009/0255842</doc-number>
<kind>A1</kind>
<name>Brozell et al.</name>
<date>20091000</date>
</document-id>
</patcit>
<category>cited by examiner</category>
<classification-national><country>US</country><main-classification>206531</main-classification></classification-national>
</us-citation>
<us-citation>
<patcit num="00012">
<document-id>
<country>CA</country>
<doc-number>2428862</doc-number>
<kind>A1</kind>
<date>20041100</date>
</document-id>
</patcit>
<category>cited by applicant</category>
</us-citation>
<us-citation>
<patcit num="00013">
<document-id>
<country>WO</country>
<doc-number>2004037657</doc-number>
<kind>A2</kind>
<date>20040500</date>
</document-id>
</patcit>
<category>cited by applicant</category>
</us-citation>
<us-citation>
<patcit num="00014">
<document-id>
<country>WO</country>
<doc-number>2005030606</doc-number>
<kind>A1</kind>
<date>20050400</date>
</document-id>
</patcit>
<category>cited by applicant</category>
</us-citation>
<us-citation>
<patcit num="00015">
<document-id>
<country>WO</country>
<doc-number>2007030067</doc-number>
<kind>A1</kind>
<date>20070300</date>
</document-id>
</patcit>
<category>cited by applicant</category>
</us-citation>
<us-citation>
<nplcit num="00016">
<othercit>International Search Report, dated May 28, 2009, from corresponding PCT application.</othercit>
</nplcit>
<category>cited by applicant</category>
</us-citation>
</us-references-cited>
<number-of-claims>43</number-of-claims>
<us-exemplary-claim>1</us-exemplary-claim>
<us-field-of-classification-search>
<classification-national>
<country>US</country>
<main-classification>206531</main-classification>
</classification-national>
<classification-national>
<country>US</country>
<main-classification>206 15</main-classification>
</classification-national>
<classification-national>
<country>US</country>
<main-classification>206223</main-classification>
</classification-national>
<classification-national>
<country>US</country>
<main-classification>206539</main-classification>
</classification-national>
<classification-national>
<country>US</country>
<main-classification>206538</main-classification>
</classification-national>
<classification-national>
<country>US</country>
<main-classification> 53492</main-classification>
</classification-national>
<classification-national>
<country>US</country>
<main-classification> 53169</main-classification>
</classification-national>
<classification-national>
<country>US</country>
<main-classification>220 2391</main-classification>
</classification-national>
</us-field-of-classification-search>
<figures>
<number-of-drawing-sheets>9</number-of-drawing-sheets>
<number-of-figures>19</number-of-figures>
</figures>
<us-related-documents>
<related-publication>
<document-id>
<country>US</country>
<doc-number>20110067363</doc-number>
<kind>A1</kind>
<date>20110324</date>
</document-id>
</related-publication>
</us-related-documents>
<us-parties>
<us-applicants>
<us-applicant sequence="001" app-type="applicant" designation="us-only">
<addressbook>
<last-name>Sprada</last-name>
<first-name>Peter John</first-name>
<address>
<city>London</city>
<country>GB</country>
</address>
</addressbook>
<residence>
<country>GB</country>
</residence>
</us-applicant>
<us-applicant sequence="002" app-type="applicant" designation="us-only">
<addressbook>
<last-name>Prasser</last-name>
<first-name>Robert</first-name>
<address>
<city>Guttaring</city>
<country>AT</country>
</address>
</addressbook>
<residence>
<country>AT</country>
</residence>
</us-applicant>
</us-applicants>
<inventors>
<inventor sequence="001" designation="us-only">
<addressbook>
<last-name>Sprada</last-name>
<first-name>Peter John</first-name>
<address>
<city>London</city>
<country>GB</country>
</address>
</addressbook>
</inventor>
<inventor sequence="002" designation="us-only">
<addressbook>
<last-name>Prasser</last-name>
<first-name>Robert</first-name>
<address>
<city>Guttaring</city>
<country>AT</country>
</address>
</addressbook>
</inventor>
</inventors>
<agents>
<agent sequence="01" rep-type="attorney">
<addressbook>
<orgname>Young &#x26; Thompson</orgname>
<address>
<country>unknown</country>
</address>
</addressbook>
</agent>
</agents>
</us-parties>
<assignees>
<assignee>
<addressbook>
<orgname>Merck Serono SA</orgname>
<role>03</role>
<address>
<city>Coinsins</city>
<country>CH</country>
</address>
</addressbook>
</assignee>
</assignees>
<examiners>
<primary-examiner>
<last-name>Yu</last-name>
<first-name>Mickey</first-name>
<department>3728</department>
</primary-examiner>
<assistant-examiner>
<last-name>Ortiz</last-name>
<first-name>Rafael</first-name>
</assistant-examiner>
</examiners>
<pct-or-regional-filing-data>
<document-id>
<country>WO</country>
<doc-number>PCT/IB2009/005131</doc-number>
<kind>00</kind>
<date>20090331</date>
</document-id>
<us-371c124-date>
<date>20101203</date>
</us-371c124-date>
</pct-or-regional-filing-data>
<pct-or-regional-publishing-data>
<document-id>
<country>WO</country>
<doc-number>WO2009/125267</doc-number>
<kind>A </kind>
<date>20091015</date>
</document-id>
</pct-or-regional-publishing-data>
</us-bibliographic-data-grant>
<abstract id="abstract">
<p id="p-0001" num="0000">The child-resistant medication container includes:
<ul id="ul0001" list-style="none">
<li id="ul0001-0001" num="0000">
<ul id="ul0002" list-style="none">
<li id="ul0002-0001" num="0000">a housing having an open end,</li>
<li id="ul0002-0002" num="0000">a support slidably mounted in the housing for supporting medication,</li>
<li id="ul0002-0003" num="0000">first locking element for locking the support in the housing and for unlocking the support so that the support may be slid to the outside of the housing through the open end, the first locking element including a first locking member coupled to the housing and a second locking member coupled to the support, the first and second locking members being engageable with each other, and</li>
<li id="ul0002-0004" num="0000">at least one button operable to act on the first locking element, the at least one button including a first button operable to disengage the first and second locking members,</li>
<li id="ul0002-0005" num="0000">second locking element for maintaining engagement between the first and second locking members, and</li>
<li id="ul0002-0006" num="0000">a second button operable to act on the second locking element to permit disengaging the first and second locking members by operating the first button.</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</p>
</abstract>
<drawings id="DRAWINGS">
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00000" num="00000">
<img id="EMI-D00000" he="99.31mm" wi="137.75mm" file="US08672134-20140318-D00000.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00001" num="00001">
<img id="EMI-D00001" he="226.14mm" wi="164.42mm" file="US08672134-20140318-D00001.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00002" num="00002">
<img id="EMI-D00002" he="210.23mm" wi="146.13mm" file="US08672134-20140318-D00002.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00003" num="00003">
<img id="EMI-D00003" he="207.43mm" wi="139.78mm" file="US08672134-20140318-D00003.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00004" num="00004">
<img id="EMI-D00004" he="206.08mm" wi="135.72mm" file="US08672134-20140318-D00004.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00005" num="00005">
<img id="EMI-D00005" he="212.26mm" wi="154.94mm" file="US08672134-20140318-D00005.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00006" num="00006">
<img id="EMI-D00006" he="211.41mm" wi="132.93mm" file="US08672134-20140318-D00006.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00007" num="00007">
<img id="EMI-D00007" he="216.49mm" wi="130.81mm" file="US08672134-20140318-D00007.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00008" num="00008">
<img id="EMI-D00008" he="210.23mm" wi="146.73mm" file="US08672134-20140318-D00008.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
<figure id="Fig-EMI-D00009" num="00009">
<img id="EMI-D00009" he="206.16mm" wi="131.66mm" file="US08672134-20140318-D00009.TIF" alt="embedded image" img-content="drawing" img-format="tif"/>
</figure>
</drawings>
<description id="description">
<?BRFSUM description="Brief Summary" end="lead"?>
<p id="p-0002" num="0001">The present invention pertains to a container for the delivery of medication, more particularly to a child-resistant medication container.</p>
<p id="p-0003" num="0002">Solid medications, in the form of tablets, pills, capsules or the like, are often stored in a blister card, which consists of a sheet, generally of plastic material, defining chambers (blisters) and on the back side of which a sealant film such as an aluminium or a paper foil is fixed. A medication dose contained in a blister may be released by pressing on the blister to collapse the latter and puncture the sealant foil.</p>
<p id="p-0004" num="0003">To protect children and others from unsupervised access to medication, child-resistant medication containers have been proposed which comprise a housing containing medication and which require, for their being opened, a sequence of operations which a child normally cannot perform or would not think to perform.</p>
<p id="p-0005" num="0004">In particular, the International patent applications WO 2004/037657 and WO 2005/030606 describe child-resistant medication containers comprising a housing and a blister card slidably mounted in the housing but locked therein. The blister card may be unlocked and slid out of the housing through an open end thereof by pressing one button provided at a top wall of the housing and by pulling the blister card while the button is pressed.</p>
<p id="p-0006" num="0005">The American patent application US 2007/0284277 describes a child-resistant medication container comprising a housing and a tray slidably mounted in the housing but locked therein. The tray contains tablets. The tray may be unlocked and slid out of the housing through an open end thereof by simultaneously pressing and then sliding two lateral slide buttons.</p>
<p id="p-0007" num="0006">The American patent application US 2004/0045858 describes a child-resistant medication container comprising a housing and a blister card slidably mounted in the housing but locked therein. The blister card may be unlocked and slid out of the housing through an open end thereof by simultaneously pressing two lateral push buttons and then actuating an optional lever to push the blister card or holding the housing downward to allow the blister card to drop out.</p>
<p id="p-0008" num="0007">The containers described in the above-mentioned patent applications do not have a very high child resistance because only two successive actions are required to open the container.</p>
<p id="p-0009" num="0008">The American patent application US 2004/0256277 describes a child-resistant medication container comprising a housing and a blister card slidably mounted in the housing but locked therein. The blister card may be unlocked and slid out of the housing through an open end thereof by pressing two lateral push buttons and then pulling the blister card while the lateral push buttons are pressed. To enable its being pulled, the blister card defines a tab which projects out of the housing through the open end and which may be seized by the user. This container does not have a very high child resistance because simultaneously pressing two lateral buttons is rather intuitive and only two successive actions are required to open it. Moreover, in this container, the blister card is permanently exposed, leaving the possibility for an unauthorised person to open the blisters with a tool such as a knife and access the medication.</p>
<p id="p-0010" num="0009">The International patent application WO 2007/030067 describes a child-resistant medication container comprising a housing and a blister card. The housing is open in its top portion so as to permanently expose the blister card and has a bottom wall with holes. The blister card is slidably mounted in the housing between a locked position in which the blisters are offset relative to the holes and an unlocked position in which the blisters are aligned with the holes to enable the release of the medication through the holes. An operating member having two finger receiving regions locks the blister card when in a first position and unlocks the blister card when in a second position. The passage from the first position to the second position of the operating member is achieved by successively pushing the two finger receiving regions in two different directions. The operating member, irrespective of its position, retains the blister card in the housing. Since the blister card is permanently exposed, access to the medication using a tool is possible and the security of this container is therefore not very high.</p>
<p id="p-0011" num="0010">The U.S. Pat. No. 6,460,693 describes a child-resistant medication container comprising a housing and a tray slidably mounted in the housing but locked therein. The tray contains a blister card. The tray may be unlocked by being pushed inward into the housing and then by pressing one button provided at the top wall of the housing. A drawback of this container is that it requires a bulky locking/unlocking mechanism at its rear part. This mechanism notably takes up a substantial portion of the length of the container.</p>
<p id="p-0012" num="0011">The present invention aims at providing a medication container which may have a high child resistance without increasing to a large extent the size of the container.</p>
<p id="p-0013" num="0012">To this end, the present invention proposes a container for the delivery of medication, comprising:
<ul id="ul0003" list-style="none">
<li id="ul0003-0001" num="0000">
<ul id="ul0004" list-style="none">
<li id="ul0004-0001" num="0013">a housing having an open end,</li>
<li id="ul0004-0002" num="0014">a support for supporting medication, said support being slidably mounted in the housing,</li>
<li id="ul0004-0003" num="0015">first locking means for locking the support in the housing and for unlocking the support so that the support may be slid to the outside of the housing through the open end, said first locking means comprising a first locking member coupled to the housing and a second locking member coupled to the support, said first and second locking members being engageable with each other, and</li>
<li id="ul0004-0004" num="0016">at least one button operable to act on the first locking means, said at least one button comprising a first button operable to disengage the first and second locking members,</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</p>
<p id="p-0014" num="0017">characterised by further comprising:
<ul id="ul0005" list-style="none">
<li id="ul0005-0001" num="0000">
<ul id="ul0006" list-style="none">
<li id="ul0006-0001" num="0018">second locking means for maintaining engagement between the first and second locking members, and</li>
<li id="ul0006-0002" num="0019">a second button operable to act on the second locking means to permit disengaging the first and second locking members by operating the first button.</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</p>
<p id="p-0015" num="0020">Typically, the first button is operable to act on the first locking member to disengage the first and second locking members.</p>
<p id="p-0016" num="0021">The second locking means may be arranged to block the first locking member when an attempt is made to operate the first button while the second button is in a rest position.</p>
<p id="p-0017" num="0022">Advantageously, the first and second buttons are operable in respective non-parallel directions.</p>
<p id="p-0018" num="0023">The first and second buttons are preferably operable independently of the support, i.e. without causing a movement of the support.</p>
<p id="p-0019" num="0024">The first and second buttons are preferably part of respective distinct pieces that are movable relative to each other.</p>
<p id="p-0020" num="0025">Typically, the first button is a push button and the second button is a slide button.</p>
<p id="p-0021" num="0026">In an embodiment, the second locking means comprise a surface coupled to the second button and a stop projection coupled to the first locking member, said surface is arranged to block said stop projection when an attempt is made to operate the first button while the second button is in a rest position, and said surface comprises a hole into which the stop projection enters when the second button is in an operated position and the first button is moved to its operated position.</p>
<p id="p-0022" num="0027">Said surface may further comprise a stop projection which is blocked by the stop projection coupled to the first locking member when the first button is in an intermediate position where the stop projection coupled to the first locking member is blocked by said surface, to prevent the second button from being operated.</p>
<p id="p-0023" num="0028">In another embodiment, the second locking means comprise first teeth coupled to the second button and second teeth coupled to the first button, the second teeth are out of engagement with the first teeth when the first and second buttons are in a rest position but engage the first teeth when an attempt is made to operate the first button while the second button is in a rest position, to block the first button in an intermediate position where the first locking member still engages the second locking member while locking the second button, and the first teeth are not on the path of the second teeth when the second button is in an operated position thus permitting the first button to be moved from its rest position to an operated position where the first locking member is disengaged from the second locking member.</p>
<p id="p-0024" num="0029">Advantageously, the first button is provided at a side wall of the housing, said at least one button further comprises a third button provided at another, opposite side wall of the housing, the first locking means further comprise a third locking member coupled to the housing and a fourth locking member coupled to the support, said third and fourth locking members being engageable with each other, and the third button is operable to disengage the third and fourth locking members.</p>
<p id="p-0025" num="0030">The third button may be operable to act on the third locking member to disengage the third and fourth locking members.</p>
<p id="p-0026" num="0031">Preferably, the first and third buttons are arranged to unlock the support only when simultaneously in an operated position.</p>
<p id="p-0027" num="0032">The container may further comprise third locking means for maintaining engagement between the third and fourth locking members and a fourth button operable to act on the third locking means to permit disengaging the third and fourth locking members by operating the third button.</p>
<p id="p-0028" num="0033">The third button may be operable to act on the third locking member to disengage the third and fourth locking members and the third locking means may be arranged to block the third locking member when an attempt is made to operate the third button while the fourth button is in a rest position.</p>
<p id="p-0029" num="0034">Typically, the first and third buttons are push buttons and the second and fourth buttons are slide buttons.</p>
<p id="p-0030" num="0035">The second and fourth buttons may be provided at a top wall of the housing.</p>
<p id="p-0031" num="0036">In an embodiment, the second locking means comprise a first surface coupled to the second button and a first stop projection coupled to the first locking member, the first surface is arranged to block the first stop projection when an attempt is made to operate the first button while the second button is in a rest position, the first surface comprises a hole into which the first stop projection enters when the second button is in an operated position and the first button is moved to its operated position, the third locking means comprise a second surface coupled to the fourth button and a second stop projection coupled to the third locking member, the second surface is arranged to block the second stop projection when an attempt is made to operate the third button while the fourth button is in a rest position, and the second surface comprises a hole into which the second stop projection enters when the fourth button is in an operated position and the third button is moved to its operated position.</p>
<p id="p-0032" num="0037">The first surface may further comprise a third stop projection which is blocked by the first stop projection when the first button is in an intermediate position where the first stop projection is blocked by the first surface, to prevent the second button from being operated, and the second surface may further comprise a fourth stop projection which is blocked by the second stop projection when the third button is in an intermediate position where the second stop projection is blocked by the second surface, to prevent the fourth button from being operated.</p>
<p id="p-0033" num="0038">In another embodiment, the second locking means comprise first teeth coupled to the second button and second teeth coupled to the first button, the second teeth are out of engagement with the first teeth when the first and second buttons are in a rest position but engage the first teeth when an attempt is made to operate the first button while the second button is in a rest position, to block the first button in an intermediate position where the first locking member still engages the second locking member while locking the second button, the first teeth are not on the path of the second teeth when the second button is in an operated position thus permitting the first button to be moved from its rest position to an operated position where the first locking member is disengaged from the second locking member, the third locking means comprise third teeth coupled to the fourth button and fourth teeth coupled to the third button, the fourth teeth are out of engagement with the third teeth when the third and fourth buttons are in a rest position but engage the third teeth when an attempt is made to operate the third button while the fourth button is in a rest position, to block the third button in an intermediate position where the third locking member still engages the fourth locking member while locking the fourth button, and the third teeth are not on the path of the fourth teeth when the fourth button is in an operated position thus permitting the third button to be moved from its rest position to an operated position where the third locking member is disengaged from the fourth locking member.</p>
<p id="p-0034" num="0039">In another embodiment, the second and fourth buttons are one and a same button.</p>
<p id="p-0035" num="0040">According to still another embodiment, the container comprises, besides the first and second locking means and the first and second buttons as defined in the beginning, third locking means for locking the second locking means and a third button operable to act on the third locking means to unlock the second locking means and permit acting on the second locking means by operating the second button.</p>
<p id="p-0036" num="0041">The third locking means may comprise a third locking member coupled to the second locking means and a fourth locking member coupled to the third button, these third and fourth locking members being engaged with each other when the second and third buttons are in a rest position and being disengageable from each other by operating the third button.</p>
<p id="p-0037" num="0042">Typically, the third and fourth locking members each comprise teeth.</p>
<p id="p-0038" num="0043">The first and third buttons may be provided at side walls of the housing and the second button may be provided at a top wall of the housing.</p>
<p id="p-0039" num="0044">The first and third buttons may be push buttons and the second button may be a slide button.</p>
<p id="p-0040" num="0045">The first locking means may further comprise a fifth locking member coupled to the housing and a sixth locking member coupled to the support and the third button may be arranged to also disengage the fifth and sixth locking members when operated.</p>
<p id="p-0041" num="0046">The third button may be arranged to act on the fifth locking member when operated, to disengage the fifth and sixth locking members.</p>
<p id="p-0042" num="0047">In all embodiments above, the various buttons may each be subject to the action of elastic return means. Moreover, said buttons may each be operable independently of the support and may be part of respective distinct pieces that are movable relative to each other.</p>
<p id="p-0043" num="0048">The container may further comprise a cap coupled to the support and which closes the open end of the housing when the support is in its locked position.</p>
<p id="p-0044" num="0049">Typically, the support supports at least one blister card containing the medication, for example several separate blister cards containing the medication and placed side-by-side. The blisters of said at least one blister card are preferably fully encased in the housing when the support is in its locked position.</p>
<p id="p-0045" num="0050">The medication may be in the form of capsules or tablets.</p>
<p id="p-0046" num="0051">Advantageously, the container contains an even number of tablets.</p>
<p id="p-0047" num="0052">The container may contain 2 to 14 tablets, preferably 6 to 10 tablets, most preferably 10 tablets.</p>
<p id="p-0048" num="0053">The container according to the invention is particularly suitable for containing drug for the treatment of cancer, drug having an immediate toxic effect or drug having an effect on the immune system.</p>
<p id="p-0049" num="0054">According to a particular embodiment, the medication comprises Cladribine or derivatives thereof.</p>
<p id="p-0050" num="0055">The container according to the invention typically has a wallet size, preferably a length between 119 and 222 mm, a width between 52 and 98 mm and a thickness between 10 and 21 mm.</p>
<p id="p-0051" num="0056">The present invention further provides a kit comprising separately a container as defined above and medication. Preferably, the kit comprises a description, for example on a separate sheet, containing information on how to handle the container and on the administration and dosing of the medication.</p>
<p id="p-0052" num="0057">The present invention further provides a method of opening a container as defined above comprising first and third buttons and a second button for blocking/unblocking the first and third buttons, the method being characterised by comprising the following steps:
<ul id="ul0007" list-style="none">
<li id="ul0007-0001" num="0000">
<ul id="ul0008" list-style="none">
<li id="ul0008-0001" num="0058">holding the housing,</li>
<li id="ul0008-0002" num="0059">operating the second button,</li>
<li id="ul0008-0003" num="0060">operating the first and third buttons while the second button is in its operated position, and</li>
<li id="ul0008-0004" num="0061">pulling the support while the first and third buttons are in their operated position.</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</p>
<p id="p-0053" num="0062">The present invention further provides a method of opening a container as defined above comprising a first button, a second button for blocking/unblocking the first button and a third button for blocking/unblocking the second button, the method being characterised by comprising the following steps:
<ul id="ul0009" list-style="none">
<li id="ul0009-0001" num="0000">
<ul id="ul0010" list-style="none">
<li id="ul0010-0001" num="0063">holding the housing,</li>
<li id="ul0010-0002" num="0064">operating successively the third button, the second button and the first button, and</li>
<li id="ul0010-0003" num="0065">pulling the support while the first and third buttons are in their operated position.</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</p>
<?BRFSUM description="Brief Summary" end="tail"?>
<?brief-description-of-drawings description="Brief Description of Drawings" end="lead"?>
<description-of-drawings>
<p id="p-0054" num="0066">Other features and advantages of the present invention will be apparent upon reading the following detailed description of preferred embodiments made with reference to the appended drawings in which:</p>
<p id="p-0055" num="0067"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</figref> is a perspective view of a child-resistant medication container according to a first embodiment of the invention, in an open position;</p>
<p id="p-0056" num="0068"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2</figref> is a top view of the child-resistant medication container according to the first embodiment of the invention, in a closed position;</p>
<p id="p-0057" num="0069"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 3 and 4</figref> show in top view a sequence of operations required to open the child-resistant medication container according to the first embodiment of the invention;</p>
<p id="p-0058" num="0070"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref> is a diagrammatic top view of the internal mechanism for opening/closing the child-resistant medication container according to the first embodiment of the invention;</p>
<p id="p-0059" num="0071"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 6 to 8</figref> diagrammatically show in top view the successive configurations of the internal mechanism of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref> during the said sequence of operations;</p>
<p id="p-0060" num="0072"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 9</figref> is a bottom view of a child-resistant medication container according to a second embodiment of the invention, in a closed position;</p>
<p id="p-0061" num="0073"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 10</figref> is a partial sectional view showing in an enlarged manner a detail of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 9</figref>, namely a locking member located on a housing of the container and engaged with a locking notch located on a tray of the container;</p>
<p id="p-0062" num="0074"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 11</figref> is a partial sectional view showing the locking member and locking notch of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 10</figref> in a position where they are disengaged from one another;</p>
<p id="p-0063" num="0075"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 12</figref> is a bottom view of the internal mechanism for opening/closing the child-resistant medication container according to the second embodiment of the invention, said mechanism being shown in a rest position;</p>
<p id="p-0064" num="0076"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 13</figref> is a bottom view of the internal mechanism for opening/closing the child-resistant medication container according to the second embodiment of the invention, said mechanism being shown in a position corresponding to a wrong opening action by the user;</p>
<p id="p-0065" num="0077"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 14 and 15</figref> are bottom views of the internal mechanism for opening/closing the child-resistant medication container according to the second embodiment of the invention, said mechanism being shown respectively during right successive actions performed by the user to open the container;</p>
<p id="p-0066" num="0078"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 16</figref> is a top view of a child-resistant medication container according to a variant of the first and second embodiments;</p>
<p id="p-0067" num="0079"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 17</figref> is a bottom view of the internal mechanism for opening/closing a child-resistant medication container according to a third embodiment of the invention, said mechanism being shown in a rest position; and</p>
<p id="p-0068" num="0080"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 18 and 19</figref> are bottom views of the internal mechanism for opening/closing the child-resistant medication container according to the third embodiment of the invention, said mechanism being shown respectively during successive actions performed by the user to open the container.</p>
</description-of-drawings>
<?brief-description-of-drawings description="Brief Description of Drawings" end="tail"?>
<?DETDESC description="Detailed Description" end="lead"?>
<p id="p-0069" num="0081">With reference to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 1 and 2</figref>, a child-resistant medication container according to a first embodiment of the invention comprises a housing <b>1</b> made of a top part and a bottom part assembled together. The housing <b>1</b> is of a generally parallelepipedic shape and comprises a top wall <b>2</b> and a base wall <b>3</b> opposite to one another, a closed end <b>4</b> and an open end <b>5</b> opposite to one another, and two opposite side walls <b>6</b>. A tray <b>7</b> supporting blisters <b>8</b> is slidably guided in the housing <b>1</b> along a longitudinal axis A of the container. The tray <b>7</b> may take a locked position, corresponding to a closed position of the container, in which the tray <b>7</b> is locked inside the housing <b>1</b>, preventing access to the blisters <b>8</b> (<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2</figref>). The tray <b>7</b> may also be unlocked and then slid toward the outside of the housing <b>1</b> through the open end <b>5</b> to permit access to the blisters <b>8</b> (open position of the container; <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</figref>). A cap <b>9</b> is coupled to the front end of the tray <b>7</b>. The cap <b>9</b> closes the open end <b>5</b> when the tray <b>7</b> is in its locked position. The cap <b>9</b> may be of one-piece construction with the tray <b>7</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0070" num="0082">Each blister <b>8</b> contains a dose of solid medication. The tray <b>7</b> comprises holes (not shown) under the blisters <b>8</b> through which the doses of solid medication may be expelled when the container is in its open position, by applying a pressure on the blisters <b>8</b>. In the example shown, the blisters <b>8</b> are arranged in pairs, each pair being defined by a separate blister card <b>10</b> fixed, e.g. snapped, on the tray <b>7</b>. The blister pairs or cards <b>10</b> are aligned side by side so as to form two blister rows as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</figref>. Such an arrangement of the blisters <b>8</b>, comprising several separate blister cards <b>10</b>, facilitates the management of the quantities of medication and permits reducing medication wastage. In a variant, however, a single blister card could be provided on the tray <b>7</b>, as is conventional.</p>
<p id="p-0071" num="0083">The housing <b>1</b> includes opposite openings <b>11</b> in the side walls <b>6</b> and an opening <b>12</b> in the top wall <b>2</b>. Push buttons <b>13</b> are provided in the openings <b>11</b>, respectively, and a slide button <b>14</b> is provided in the opening <b>12</b>. In the context of the invention, the term &#x201c;button&#x201d; is to be understood in a broad sense, as covering any part on which a finger can rest to transmit a force. The lateral push buttons <b>13</b> are operable by being moved substantially perpendicularly to the longitudinal axis A toward the inside of the housing <b>1</b>. The slide button <b>14</b> is operable by being moved along the longitudinal axis A. To open the container, the user must perform the following sequence of operations:
<ul id="ul0011" list-style="none">
<li id="ul0011-0001" num="0000">
<ul id="ul0012" list-style="none">
<li id="ul0012-0001" num="0084">operate the slide button <b>14</b> as shown by arrow <b>15</b> in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 3</figref>,</li>
<li id="ul0012-0002" num="0085">then operate the lateral push buttons <b>13</b> as shown by arrows <b>16</b> in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 4</figref> while maintaining the slide button <b>14</b> in its operated position,</li>
<li id="ul0012-0003" num="0086">and then pull the tray <b>7</b> as shown by arrow <b>17</b> while maintaining the lateral push buttons <b>13</b> in their operated position.
<br/>
Once the lateral push buttons <b>13</b> are operated, the user may release the slide button <b>14</b>. Maintaining the lateral push buttons <b>13</b> in their operated position is required only at the beginning of pulling the tray <b>7</b>, to unlock the latter. Then the tray <b>7</b> may be freely moved toward the outside of the housing <b>1</b> without maintaining pressure on the push buttons <b>13</b>. Typically, the container is held in one hand with the thumb and another finger of the hand acting on the lateral push buttons <b>13</b> and a finger of the other hand acting on the top slide button <b>14</b>, the said other hand being used to pull the tray <b>7</b> after releasing the top slide button <b>14</b>. Recesses <b>18</b> are provided in the top and base walls <b>2</b>, <b>3</b> at the open end <b>5</b> to expose surface portions <b>19</b> of the cap <b>9</b> when the tray <b>7</b> is in its locked position and to thereby facilitate seizing the tray <b>7</b>.
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</p>
<p id="p-0072" num="0087">It will thus be appreciated that three successive actions have to be performed by the user, in a determined order, to unlock and move the tray <b>7</b>. As will be explained below, operating the lateral push buttons <b>13</b> while the slide button <b>14</b> is not in its operated position is not possible because the slide button <b>14</b>, in its rest position, blocks the lateral push buttons <b>13</b> and prevents them from moving beyond an intermediate pressed position in which the tray <b>7</b> is still locked. Operating the slide button <b>14</b> while a pressure is applied on one or two of the lateral push buttons <b>13</b> is not possible either, because the lateral push buttons <b>13</b>, in their intermediate pressed position, block the slide button <b>14</b>. Merely operating the slide button <b>14</b> frees the lateral push buttons <b>13</b> but does not free the tray <b>7</b>. Simultaneous pressure holding on the operated lateral push buttons <b>13</b> and pulling action on the tray <b>7</b> are required to initiate the movement of the tray <b>7</b>. A friction is preferably provided between the tray <b>7</b> and the housing <b>1</b> so that the tray <b>7</b> cannot be moved merely by inclining the container downward while the lateral push buttons <b>13</b> are in their operated position.</p>
<p id="p-0073" num="0088">A child will generally not have the manual dexterity nor the cognitive knowledge to perform the above-described sequence of operations required to unlock and move the tray <b>7</b>. Moreover, the housing <b>1</b> may be made sufficiently wide for the lateral buttons <b>13</b> to be separated by a large distance, thereby making it impossible for a child to hold the container in one hand and to press the lateral buttons <b>13</b> while holding the slide button <b>14</b> in its operated position or to pull the tray <b>7</b> while pressing the lateral buttons <b>13</b>. It should also be noted that in the closed position of the container the blisters <b>8</b> are fully encased in the housing <b>1</b> and thus cannot be accessed.</p>
<p id="p-0074" num="0089">The internal mechanism allowing the above-described sequence of operations is diagrammatically shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 5 to 8</figref>. The slide button <b>14</b> projects from and is rigidly connected to a plate <b>20</b> that is slidably guided in the housing <b>1</b> above the blisters <b>8</b> along the longitudinal axis A of the container. A return spring <b>21</b> is provided between the front end of the plate <b>20</b> and a bearing part <b>22</b> rigidly connected to the inner face of the top wall <b>2</b> of the housing <b>1</b>. The return spring <b>21</b> may be a leaf spring made of one-piece construction with the plate <b>20</b> and the button <b>14</b>, as shown. Alternatively, it could be a conventional metal leaf or helical spring disposed between the front end of the plate <b>20</b> and the bearing part <b>22</b>. The two side surfaces <b>23</b> of the plate <b>20</b> along the longitudinal axis A of the container include respective opposite holes <b>24</b> and, between the holes <b>24</b> and the front end of the plate <b>20</b>, respective stop projections <b>25</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0075" num="0090">Each lateral push button <b>13</b> is part of a piece <b>26</b> comprising, inside the housing <b>1</b>, a locking part <b>27</b> and a return U-bent leaf spring <b>28</b> extending between a corresponding side surface <b>23</b> of the plate <b>20</b> and the button <b>13</b>. The piece <b>26</b> is held by a part <b>29</b> rigidly connected to the housing <b>1</b>. The locking part <b>27</b> comprises a stop projection <b>30</b> extending toward the inside of the housing <b>1</b> perpendicularly to the longitudinal axis A and a locking member <b>31</b> extending toward the outside of the housing <b>1</b> perpendicularly to the longitudinal axis A. The locking member <b>31</b> engages a corresponding locking member <b>32</b> of the cap <b>9</b> to lock the tray <b>7</b>, as is shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref>. The locking member <b>32</b> extends toward the inside of the housing <b>1</b> perpendicularly to the longitudinal axis A and is located at the end of an arm <b>36</b> of the cap <b>9</b>. The stop projection <b>30</b> has two functions. A first function is to come into abutment against the corresponding side surface <b>23</b> of the plate <b>20</b> when the push button <b>13</b> is pressed and the slide button <b>14</b> is in its rest position, shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref>, to prevent the piece <b>26</b> and the push button <b>13</b> from going beyond the aforementioned intermediate pressed position in which the locking member <b>31</b> still engages the locking member <b>32</b>, in other words to prevent disengagement of the locking members <b>31</b>, <b>32</b>. The second function is to block the stop projection <b>25</b> when the slide button <b>14</b> is moved toward its operated position while the push button <b>13</b> is held in its intermediate pressed position, thereby preventing the slide button <b>14</b> from reaching its operated position.</p>
<p id="p-0076" num="0091">When the push buttons <b>13</b> are in their rest position, the stop projections <b>30</b> do not interrupt the paths of the stop projections <b>25</b> and therefore do not hinder the movement of the slide button <b>14</b>, which can thus be moved along the longitudinal axis A of the container up to its operated position. When the slide button <b>14</b> is in its operated position (<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 6</figref>), the stop projections <b>30</b> face the holes <b>24</b>. In this configuration, if the lateral push buttons <b>13</b> are pressed, the stop projections <b>30</b> will enter the holes <b>24</b>, enabling the pieces <b>26</b> and push buttons <b>13</b> to go beyond the aforementioned intermediate position and to reach their operated position, shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 7</figref>. In this operated position, the locking members <b>31</b> are out of engagement with the locking members <b>32</b> and the tray <b>7</b> is therefore free. The tray <b>7</b> may thus be slid out to expose the blisters <b>8</b> (<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 8</figref>). The side surfaces <b>23</b> of the plate <b>20</b>, with their holes <b>24</b> and their surfaces of contact with the stop projections <b>30</b>, thus constitute locking means serving to prevent the locking members <b>31</b> from disengaging from the locking members <b>32</b> or to enable such a disengagement.</p>
<p id="p-0077" num="0092">So long as the lateral push buttons <b>13</b> are held in their operated position, the slide button <b>14</b> is blocked in its operated position due to the cooperation between the stop projections <b>30</b> and the holes <b>24</b>. Once the buttons <b>13</b>, <b>14</b> have been released by the user, they are returned to their respective rest positions by the springs <b>28</b>, <b>21</b>. The tray <b>7</b> may be returned to its locked position merely by pushing it back toward the inside of the housing <b>1</b>. The internal faces of the side walls <b>6</b> of the housing <b>1</b> have recesses <b>33</b>. The locking members <b>31</b>, <b>32</b> have slanted surfaces <b>34</b>, <b>35</b> (see <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 8</figref>) that cooperate when the tray <b>7</b> is pushed back while the buttons <b>13</b> are in their rest position, causing the arms <b>36</b> of the cap <b>9</b> to deform externally into the recesses <b>33</b> until the locking members <b>32</b> recover their locked position in which they engage the locking members <b>31</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0078" num="0093">With reference to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 9</figref>, a child-resistant medication container according to a second embodiment of the invention comprises a housing <b>40</b> having a top wall <b>41</b>, a base wall <b>42</b> opposite to the top wall <b>41</b>, a closed end <b>43</b>, an open end <b>44</b> opposite to the closed end <b>43</b>, and two opposite side walls <b>45</b>. A tray <b>46</b> supporting blisters (not shown) is slidably guided in the housing <b>40</b> along a longitudinal axis A of the container between two guiding internal longitudinal walls <b>47</b> of the housing <b>40</b>. In the illustrated example, the base wall <b>42</b> of the housing <b>40</b> is transparent and the tray <b>46</b> is therefore visible when the container is viewed from below. As in the first embodiment, the tray <b>46</b> may take a locked position (<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 9</figref>) corresponding to a closed position of the container, in which the tray <b>46</b> is locked inside the housing <b>40</b>, preventing access to the blisters. The tray <b>46</b> may also be unlocked and slid toward the outside of the housing <b>40</b> through the open end <b>44</b> to permit access to the blisters (open position of the container). The tray <b>46</b> comprises holes <b>48</b> under the blisters through which the medication contained in the blisters may be expelled when the container is in its open position, by applying a pressure on the blisters. A cap <b>49</b> is coupled to the front end of the tray <b>46</b>. The cap <b>49</b> closes the open end <b>44</b> when the tray <b>46</b> is in its locked position. The cap <b>49</b> may be of one-piece construction with the tray <b>46</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0079" num="0094">The housing <b>40</b> includes opposite openings in the side walls <b>45</b> in which push buttons <b>50</b>, <b>51</b> are provided and an opening in the top wall <b>41</b> in which a slide button <b>52</b> is provided. The lateral push buttons <b>50</b>, <b>51</b> are operable by being moved perpendicularly to the longitudinal axis A toward the inside of the housing <b>40</b>. The slide button <b>52</b> is operable by being moved along the longitudinal axis A. To open the container, the user must perform the same sequence of operations as in the first embodiment, namely:
<ul id="ul0013" list-style="none">
<li id="ul0013-0001" num="0000">
<ul id="ul0014" list-style="none">
<li id="ul0014-0001" num="0095">operate the slide button <b>52</b>,</li>
<li id="ul0014-0002" num="0096">then operate the lateral push buttons <b>50</b>, <b>51</b> while maintaining the slide button <b>52</b> in its operated position,</li>
<li id="ul0014-0003" num="0097">and then pull the tray <b>46</b> while maintaining the lateral push buttons <b>50</b>, <b>51</b> in their operated position.</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</p>
<p id="p-0080" num="0098">The internal mechanism allowing the above-described sequence of operations in this second embodiment is shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 10 to 15</figref>. The lateral push buttons <b>50</b>, <b>51</b> are part of two respective pieces <b>53</b>, <b>54</b>. For the purpose of clarity, the pieces <b>53</b>, <b>54</b> are shown with different line thicknesses in the drawings. Each piece <b>53</b>, <b>54</b> comprises a pair of return springs <b>55</b>, <b>56</b> extending from opposite sides of the corresponding button <b>50</b>, <b>51</b>. The respective free ends of the springs <b>55</b> bear against the external face of one of the guiding walls <b>47</b>. The respective free ends of the springs <b>56</b> bear against the external face of the other guiding wall <b>47</b>. Each piece <b>53</b>, <b>54</b> comprises a U-shaped flat portion <b>57</b>, <b>58</b> located inside the housing <b>40</b> on or near the internal face of the top wall <b>41</b>, i.e. between the blisters and the top wall <b>41</b>. The U-shaped flat portions <b>57</b>, <b>58</b> are oriented along the longitudinal axis A of the container in an opposite manner to each other. Each U-shaped flat portion <b>57</b>, <b>58</b> is so wide as to connect the corresponding button <b>50</b>, <b>51</b> provided on one side of the tray <b>46</b> to a locking member <b>59</b>, <b>60</b> of the piece <b>53</b>, <b>54</b> provided on the other side of the tray <b>46</b>. Each locking member <b>59</b>, <b>60</b> is in the form of a hook projecting from the flat portion <b>57</b>, <b>58</b> toward the base wall <b>42</b>. In the closed position of the container, each locking member <b>59</b>, <b>60</b> engages a respective notch <b>61</b>, <b>62</b> formed in the respective lateral side of the tray <b>46</b> to lock the latter (<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 9 and 10</figref>).</p>
<p id="p-0081" num="0099">Each piece <b>53</b>, <b>54</b> further comprises a portion <b>63</b>, <b>64</b> located in the same plane as the U-shaped flat portion <b>57</b>, <b>58</b> and projecting toward the inside of the housing <b>40</b> in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal axis A of the container from the one of the two legs of the U-shaped flat portion <b>57</b>, <b>58</b> that is closer to the button <b>50</b>, <b>51</b>. Each projecting portion <b>63</b>, <b>64</b> is terminated by teeth <b>65</b>, <b>66</b> aligned in a direction parallel to the longitudinal axis A. The slide button <b>52</b> comprises an external portion (shown in dashed line) located on the external face of the top wall <b>41</b> to be directly accessible to the user and an internal portion <b>67</b> located and guided inside the housing <b>40</b>. A return spring <b>68</b> which may be of one-piece construction with the piece <b>54</b> is attached at one of its ends to the U-shaped flat portion <b>58</b> and at its other end to the internal portion <b>67</b> of the slide button <b>52</b>. The internal portion <b>67</b> comprises first teeth <b>69</b> at one its lateral sides and second teeth <b>70</b> at its other lateral side. In the rest position of the slide button <b>52</b> and of the lateral buttons <b>50</b>, <b>51</b>, the first teeth <b>69</b> respectively face the spaces between the teeth <b>65</b> of the piece <b>53</b> but do not engage them because a distance is provided in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal axis A between the teeth <b>65</b> and the teeth <b>69</b>. Likewise, in the rest position of the slide button <b>52</b> and of the lateral buttons <b>50</b>, <b>51</b>, the second teeth <b>70</b> respectively face the spaces between the teeth <b>66</b> of the piece <b>54</b> but do not engage them because a distance is provided in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal axis A between the teeth <b>66</b> and the teeth <b>70</b>. In the rest position of the slide button <b>52</b> (<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 12</figref>), if the lateral buttons <b>50</b>, <b>51</b> are pressed, the pieces <b>53</b>, <b>54</b> are moved in opposite directions perpendicular to the longitudinal axis A, namely in directions in which the locking members <b>59</b>, <b>60</b> start to disengage from the notches <b>61</b>, <b>62</b> respectively. However, the movement of the pieces <b>53</b>, <b>54</b> is stopped in an intermediate position thereof where the teeth <b>65</b>, <b>66</b> have respectively engaged the teeth <b>69</b>, <b>70</b>, i.e. have entered the spaces between the teeth <b>69</b>, <b>70</b>, and rest against the bottom of said spaces (<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 13</figref>). In this intermediate position, the locking members <b>59</b>, <b>60</b> are not fully disengaged from the notches <b>61</b>, <b>62</b> and, therefore, the tray <b>46</b> remains locked. Moreover, the slide button <b>52</b> is locked by the teeth <b>65</b>, <b>66</b> engaging the teeth <b>69</b>, <b>70</b> and, therefore, cannot be operated by the user.</p>
<p id="p-0082" num="0100">From the configuration of the container where the slide button <b>52</b> and the lateral buttons <b>50</b>, <b>51</b> are in their rest position (<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 12</figref>), the slide button <b>52</b> may be operated, i.e. moved along the longitudinal axis A up to a position where it is in abutment against a bearing portion (not shown) of the top wall <b>41</b> (<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 14</figref>). In this operated position, the teeth <b>69</b>, <b>70</b> are no longer on the path of the projecting portions <b>63</b>, <b>64</b>, respectively, and the pieces <b>53</b>, <b>54</b> may thus be moved beyond their intermediate position if the lateral buttons are pressed (<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 15</figref>). The limit position of the lateral buttons <b>50</b>, <b>51</b>, more generally of the pieces <b>53</b>, <b>54</b>, is defined by the teeth <b>65</b>, <b>66</b> abutting the sides of the internal portion <b>67</b> of the slide button <b>52</b> or by the lateral buttons <b>50</b>, <b>51</b> abutting the internal walls <b>47</b> of the housing <b>40</b>. This limit position is the operated position of the lateral buttons <b>50</b>, <b>51</b>. In this position, the locking members <b>59</b>, <b>60</b> are fully disengaged from the notches <b>61</b>, <b>62</b> respectively (<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 11</figref>). The tray <b>46</b> is therefore unlocked and may be pulled to the outside of the housing <b>40</b> through the open end <b>44</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0083" num="0101">One will note that full operation of the slide button <b>52</b> is necessary for unlocking the lateral buttons <b>50</b>, <b>51</b>, i.e. for allowing them to go beyond their intermediate position. If indeed the slide button <b>52</b> is not fully operated, some of the teeth <b>69</b> (respectively <b>70</b>) will remain on the path of the projecting member <b>63</b> (respectively <b>64</b>) and pressing the lateral buttons <b>50</b>, <b>51</b> will result in these buttons being stopped in their intermediate position and in the slide button <b>52</b> being locked.</p>
<p id="p-0084" num="0102">As soon as the lateral buttons <b>50</b>, <b>51</b> are released from their operated position or from their intermediate position, the return springs <b>55</b>, <b>56</b> bring them back to their rest position. Likewise, the slide button <b>52</b> is returned to its rest position by the return spring <b>68</b> as soon as it is released if the lateral buttons <b>50</b>, <b>51</b> are in their rest position. When the lateral buttons <b>50</b>, <b>51</b> are in their operated position, the slide button <b>52</b> is retained in its operated position by the projecting portions <b>63</b>, <b>64</b> as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 15</figref>.</p>
<p id="p-0085" num="0103"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 16</figref> shows a variant of the first and second embodiments in which the sole slide button <b>14</b>, respectively <b>52</b>, has been replaced by two slide buttons <b>14</b><i>a</i>, <b>14</b><i>b</i>, respectively <b>52</b><i>a</i>, <b>52</b><i>b</i>. These slide buttons are located on the top wall of the housing and are both operable along the longitudinal axis A. The internal locking/unlocking mechanism is identical to that of the first or the second embodiment described above, except that the part <b>20</b>, respectively <b>67</b>, is divided into two separate and independent parts rigidly connected with the slide buttons respectively and each comprising locking means for a respective lateral button.</p>
<p id="p-0086" num="0104">In each of the first and second embodiments, although it is preferable to have two lateral buttons and two corresponding locking members, one of these buttons and the corresponding piece could be suppressed. In this case, a high level of security would nevertheless still be achieved because a specific sequence of operations, namely operating a first button and then a second button, would be required to unlock the tray. The fact that said first and second buttons are operable in non-parallel directions still increases the security or child resistance. Moreover, at least one of said first and second buttons could be concealed, for example by being recessed with respect to the corresponding wall of the housing.</p>
<p id="p-0087" num="0105"><figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 17</figref> shows a child-resistant medication container according to a third embodiment of the invention. The container according to this third embodiment has a housing (not shown), a tray (not shown) for supporting blisters and an opening mechanism comprising a slide button <b>80</b> and pieces <b>81</b>, <b>82</b> defining lateral push buttons <b>83</b>, <b>84</b> respectively. The housing, the tray and the piece <b>81</b> are respectively identical to the housing <b>40</b>, the tray <b>46</b> and the piece <b>53</b> of the second embodiment. In particular, the piece <b>81</b> comprises a projecting portion <b>85</b> terminated by teeth <b>86</b> corresponding to the projecting portion <b>63</b> and its teeth <b>65</b> of the second embodiment. The piece <b>82</b> differs from the piece <b>54</b> of the second embodiment in that it does not have the projecting portion <b>64</b> but has another projecting portion <b>87</b> terminated by teeth <b>88</b> and located on the same side of the slide button <b>80</b> as the projecting portion <b>85</b> of the other piece <b>81</b>. The slide button <b>80</b> differs from the slide button <b>52</b> of the second embodiment in that it does not have the teeth <b>70</b> but comprises, in addition to teeth <b>89</b> identical to the teeth <b>69</b> of the second embodiment, teeth <b>90</b> located on the same side as the teeth <b>89</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0088" num="0106">In the rest position of the buttons <b>80</b>, <b>83</b>, <b>84</b>, the teeth <b>90</b> are engaged by the teeth <b>88</b> so that the slide button <b>80</b> is locked. Moreover, the lateral button <b>83</b> is locked by the slide button <b>80</b>, i.e. cannot be operated beyond an intermediate position where the teeth <b>86</b> engage the teeth <b>89</b> and where the corresponding locking member, designated by the reference numeral <b>91</b>, still engages the corresponding locking notch of the tray. Pressing the lateral button <b>84</b> disengages the teeth <b>88</b> from the teeth <b>90</b> and frees the slide button <b>80</b> (<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 18</figref>). This also disengages the locking member of the piece <b>82</b>, designated by the reference numeral <b>92</b>, from the corresponding locking notch of the tray. However, at this stage, the tray remains locked by the locking member <b>91</b> of the piece <b>81</b> still engaging the corresponding locking notch of the tray. Operating the slide button <b>80</b> while the lateral button <b>84</b> is operated unlocks the lateral button <b>83</b> which may then be pressed beyond its intermediate position up to a position where its locking member <b>91</b> is fully disengaged from the corresponding locking notch of the tray (<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 19</figref>). In the configuration where both lateral buttons <b>83</b>, <b>84</b> are in their operated position, the tray is unlocked and may therefore be slid out of the housing.</p>
<p id="p-0089" num="0107">Thus, in this third embodiment, four actions have to be performed by the user, in a determined order, to unlock and move the tray. This is one action more than in the first and second embodiments. The child resistance is therefore still improved.</p>
<p id="p-0090" num="0108">In a variant of this third embodiment, the locking member <b>92</b> could be suppressed and the tray could be locked only by the locking member <b>91</b>.</p>
<p id="p-0091" num="0109">In all three embodiments of the invention, the lateral push buttons <b>13</b>, <b>50</b>, <b>51</b>, <b>83</b>, <b>84</b> could be of one-piece construction with the housing and could be in the form of tabs defined by cut-outs made in the side walls of the housing and elastically hinged to the rest of the housing.</p>
<p id="p-0092" num="0110">Furthermore, the housing could have another shape than a parallelepipedic one, for example a cylindrical shape. Since the buttons are operable independently of the tray and are part of respective distinct pieces that are movable relative to each other, a great flexibility is achieved in the designing of the container.</p>
<p id="p-0093" num="0111">The medication container according to the invention may be made of plastics. Alternatively, the medication container, parts of it and/or the blisters can be made of a light-emitting material.</p>
<p id="p-0094" num="0112">It will be appreciated that the invention is not limited to containers for medication stored in blisters. The medication could be freely disposed in a tray or other receptacle. Alternatively, the medication could be stored in blisters that are disposed in a tray or other receptacle without being fixed. It could also be envisaged to use the container according to the invention to store a liquid medication container, such as a syringe.</p>
<p id="p-0095" num="0113">The medication container of the present invention is preferably used for dispensing medication, such as tablets, which may not be suitable or may be dangerous to children. The medication container is therefore most preferably used for anti-cancer drugs, drugs having an immediate toxic effect or drugs having an effect on the immune system, such as purine analogues, in particular Cladribine or derivatives thereof. Cladribine is a chlorinated purine analogue which has been suggested to be useful in the treatment of multiple sclerosis (EP 626 853) and cancer.</p>
<p id="p-0096" num="0114">The present invention has been described above by way of example only. It will be apparent to the skilled person that modifications may be made without departing from the invention as claimed. In the appended claims, reference numerals in parentheses have been inserted to facilitate the reading. These reference numerals however shall in no manner be construed as limiting the scope of the claims.</p>
<?DETDESC description="Detailed Description" end="tail"?>
</description>
<us-claim-statement>The invention claimed is:</us-claim-statement>
<claims id="claims">
<claim id="CLM-00001" num="00001">
<claim-text>1. Container for the delivery of medication, comprising:
<claim-text>a housing having an open end,</claim-text>
<claim-text>a support for supporting medication, said support being slidably mounted in the,</claim-text>
<claim-text>first locking means for locking the support in the housing and for unlocking the support so that the support may be slid to the outside of the housing through the open end, said first locking means comprising a first locking member coupled to the housing and a second locking member coupled to the support, said first and second locking members being engageable with each other, and</claim-text>
<claim-text>at least one button operable to act on the first locking means, said at least one button comprising a first button operable to act on the first locking member to disengage the first and second locking members,</claim-text>
<claim-text>characterised by further comprising:</claim-text>
<claim-text>second locking means for maintaining engagement between the first and second locking members, arranged to block the first locking member when an attempt is made to operate the first button while the second button is in a rest position, and</claim-text>
<claim-text>a second button operable to act on the second locking means to permit disengaging the first and second locking members by operating the first button.</claim-text>
</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00002" num="00002">
<claim-text>2. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, characterised in that the first and second buttons are operable in respective non-parallel directions.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00003" num="00003">
<claim-text>3. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, characterised in that the first and second buttons are operable independently of the support.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00004" num="00004">
<claim-text>4. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, characterised in that the first and second buttons are part of respective distinct pieces that are movable relative to each other.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00005" num="00005">
<claim-text>5. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, characterised in that the first button is a push button and the second button is a slide button.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00006" num="00006">
<claim-text>6. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, characterised in that the second locking means comprise a surface coupled to the second button and a stop projection coupled to the first locking member, in that said surface is arranged to block said stop projection when an attempt is made to operate the first button while the second button is in a rest position, and in that said surface comprises a hole into which the stop projection enters when the second button is in an operated position and the first button is moved to its operated position.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00007" num="00007">
<claim-text>7. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00006">claim 6</claim-ref>, characterised in that said surface further comprises a stop projection which is blocked by the stop projection coupled to the first locking member when the first button is in an intermediate position where the stop projection coupled to the first locking member is blocked by said surface, to prevent the second button from being operated.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00008" num="00008">
<claim-text>8. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, characterised in that the second locking means comprise first teeth coupled to the second button and second teeth coupled to the first button, in that the second teeth are out of engagement with the first teeth when the first and second buttons are in a rest position but engage the first teeth when an attempt is made to operate the first button while the second button is in a rest position, to block the first button in an intermediate position where the first locking member still engages the second locking member while locking the second button, and in that the first teeth are not on the path of the second teeth when the second button is in an operated position thus permitting the first button to be moved from its rest position to an operated position where the first locking member is disengaged from the second locking member.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00009" num="00009">
<claim-text>9. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, characterised in that the first button is provided at a side wall of the housing, in that said at least one button further comprises a third button provided at another, opposite side wall of the housing, in that the first locking means further comprise a third locking member coupled to the housing and a fourth locking member coupled to the support, said third and fourth locking members being engageable with each other, and in that the third button is operable to disengage the third and fourth locking members.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00010" num="00010">
<claim-text>10. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00009">claim 9</claim-ref>, characterised in that the third button is operable to act on the third locking member to disengage the third and fourth locking members.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00011" num="00011">
<claim-text>11. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00009">claim 9</claim-ref>, characterised in that the first and third buttons are arranged to unlock the support only when simultaneously in an operated position.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00012" num="00012">
<claim-text>12. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00009">claim 9</claim-ref>, characterised by further comprising third locking means for maintaining engagement between the third and fourth locking members and a fourth button operable to act on the third locking means to permit disengaging the third and fourth locking members by operating the third button.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00013" num="00013">
<claim-text>13. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00012">claim 12</claim-ref>, characterised in that the third button is operable to act on the third locking member to disengage the third and fourth locking members and the third locking means are arranged to block the third locking member when an attempt is made to operate the third button while the fourth button is in a rest position.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00014" num="00014">
<claim-text>14. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00012">claim 12</claim-ref>, characterised in that the first and third buttons are push buttons and the second and fourth buttons are slide buttons.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00015" num="00015">
<claim-text>15. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00014">claim 14</claim-ref>, characterised in that the second and fourth buttons are provided at a top wall of the housing.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00016" num="00016">
<claim-text>16. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00012">claim 12</claim-ref>, characterised in that the second locking means comprise a first surface coupled to the second button and a first stop projection coupled to the first locking member, in that the first surface is arranged to block the first stop projection when an attempt is made to operate the first button while the second button is in a rest position, in that the first surface comprises a hole into which the first stop projection enters when the second button is in an operated position and the first button is moved to its operated position, in that the third locking means comprise a second surface coupled to the fourth button and a second stop projection coupled to the third locking member, in that the second surface is arranged to block the second stop projection when an attempt is made to operate the third button while the fourth button is in a rest position, and in that the second surface comprises a hole into which the second stop projection enters when the fourth button is in an operated position and the third button is moved to its operated position.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00017" num="00017">
<claim-text>17. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00016">claim 16</claim-ref>, characterised in that the first surface further comprises a third stop projection which is blocked by the first stop projection when the first button is in an intermediate position where the first stop projection is blocked by the first surface, to prevent the second button from being operated, and in that the second surface further comprises a fourth stop projection which is blocked by the second stop projection when the third button is in an intermediate position where the second stop projection is blocked by the second surface, to prevent the fourth button from being operated.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00018" num="00018">
<claim-text>18. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00012">claim 12</claim-ref>, characterised in that the second locking means comprise first teeth coupled to the second button and second teeth coupled to the first button, in that the second teeth are out of engagement with the first teeth when the first and second buttons are in a rest position but engage the first teeth when an attempt is made to operate the first button while the second button is in a rest position, to block the first button in an intermediate position where the first locking member still engages the second locking member while locking the second button, in that the first teeth are not on the path of the second teeth when the second button is in an operated position thus permitting the first button to be moved from its rest position to an operated position where the first locking member is disengaged from the second locking member, in that the third locking means comprise third teeth coupled to the fourth button and fourth teeth coupled to the third button, in that the fourth teeth are out of engagement with the third teeth when the third and fourth buttons are in a rest position but engage the third teeth when an attempt is made to operate the third button while the fourth button is in a rest position, to block the third button in an intermediate position where the third locking member still engages the fourth locking member while locking the fourth button, and in that the third teeth are not on the path of the fourth teeth when the fourth button is in an operated position thus permitting the third button to be moved from its rest position to an operated position where the third locking member is disengaged from the fourth locking member.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00019" num="00019">
<claim-text>19. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00012">claim 12</claim-ref>, characterised in that the second and fourth buttons are one and a same button.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00020" num="00020">
<claim-text>20. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, characterised by further comprising third locking means for locking the second locking means and a third button operable to act on the third locking means to unlock the second locking means and permit acting on the second locking means by operating the second button.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00021" num="00021">
<claim-text>21. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00020">claim 20</claim-ref>, characterised in that the third locking means comprise a third locking member coupled to the second locking means and a fourth locking member coupled to the third button, and in that these third and fourth locking members are engaged with each other when the second and third buttons are in a rest position and may be disengaged from each other by operating the third button.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00022" num="00022">
<claim-text>22. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00021">claim 21</claim-ref>, characterised in that the third and fourth locking members each comprise teeth.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00023" num="00023">
<claim-text>23. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00020">claim 20</claim-ref>, characterised in that the first and third buttons are provided at side walls of the housing and the second button is provided at a top wall of the housing.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00024" num="00024">
<claim-text>24. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00020">claim 20</claim-ref>, characterised in that the first and third buttons are push buttons and the second button is a slide button.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00025" num="00025">
<claim-text>25. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00020">claim 20</claim-ref>, characterised in that the first locking means further comprise a fifth locking member coupled to the housing and a sixth locking member coupled to the support and the third button is arranged to also disengage the fifth and sixth locking members when operated.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00026" num="00026">
<claim-text>26. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00025">claim 25</claim-ref>, characterised in that the third button is arranged to act on the fifth locking member when operated, to disengage the fifth and sixth locking members.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00027" num="00027">
<claim-text>27. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, characterised in that said buttons are each subject to the action of elastic return means.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00028" num="00028">
<claim-text>28. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, characterised in that said buttons are each operable independently of the support.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00029" num="00029">
<claim-text>29. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, characterised in that said buttons are part of respective distinct pieces that are movable relative to each other.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00030" num="00030">
<claim-text>30. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, characterised by further comprising a cap coupled to the support and which closes the open end of the housing when the support is in its locked position.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00031" num="00031">
<claim-text>31. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, characterised in that the support supports at least one blister card containing said medication.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00032" num="00032">
<claim-text>32. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00031">claim 31</claim-ref>, characterised in that the blisters of said at least one blister card are fully encased in the housing when the support is in its locked position.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00033" num="00033">
<claim-text>33. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00031">claim 31</claim-ref>, characterised in that the support supports several separate blister cards containing said medication and placed side-by-side.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00034" num="00034">
<claim-text>34. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, characterised in that the medication is in the form of capsules or tablets.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00035" num="00035">
<claim-text>35. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00034">claim 34</claim-ref>, characterised in that it contains an even number of tablets.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00036" num="00036">
<claim-text>36. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, characterised in that it contains 2 to 14 tablets, preferably 6 to 10 tablets, most preferably 10 tablets.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00037" num="00037">
<claim-text>37. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, characterised in that said medication contains drug for the treatment of cancer, drug having an immediate toxic effect or drug having an effect on the immune system.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00038" num="00038">
<claim-text>38. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00037">claim 37</claim-ref>, characterised in that said medication comprises Cladribine or derivatives thereof.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00039" num="00039">
<claim-text>39. Container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref>, characterised in that it has a wallet size.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00040" num="00040">
<claim-text>40. Kit comprising separately a container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00001">claim 1</claim-ref> and medication.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00041" num="00041">
<claim-text>41. Kit according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00040">claim 40</claim-ref>, characterised by further comprising a description containing information on how to handle the container and on the administration and dosing of the medication.</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00042" num="00042">
<claim-text>42. Method of opening a container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00019">claim 19</claim-ref>, characterised by comprising the following steps:
<claim-text>holding the housing,</claim-text>
<claim-text>operating the second button,</claim-text>
<claim-text>operating the first and third buttons while the second button is in its operated position, and</claim-text>
<claim-text>pulling the support while the first and third buttons are in their operated position.</claim-text>
</claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00043" num="00043">
<claim-text>43. Method of opening a container according to <claim-ref idref="CLM-00020">claim 20</claim-ref>, characterised by comprising the following steps:
<claim-text>holding the housing,</claim-text>
<claim-text>operating successively the third button, the second button and the first button, and</claim-text>
<claim-text>pulling the support while the first and third buttons are in their operated position. </claim-text>
</claim-text>
</claim>
</claims>
</us-patent-grant>

1151
tests/data/uspto/ipgD0701016.xml Normal file
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

447
tests/data/uspto/pa20010031492.xml Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,447 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE patent-application-publication SYSTEM "pap-v15-2001-01-31.dtd" [
<!ENTITY US20010031492A1-20011018-M00001.NB SYSTEM "US20010031492A1-20011018-M00001.NB" NDATA NB>
<!ENTITY US20010031492A1-20011018-M00001.TIF SYSTEM "US20010031492A1-20011018-M00001.TIF" NDATA TIF>
<!ENTITY US20010031492A1-20011018-D00001.TIF SYSTEM "US20010031492A1-20011018-D00001.TIF" NDATA TIF>
<!ENTITY US20010031492A1-20011018-D00002.TIF SYSTEM "US20010031492A1-20011018-D00002.TIF" NDATA TIF>
<!ENTITY US20010031492A1-20011018-D00003.TIF SYSTEM "US20010031492A1-20011018-D00003.TIF" NDATA TIF>
<!ENTITY US20010031492A1-20011018-D00004.TIF SYSTEM "US20010031492A1-20011018-D00004.TIF" NDATA TIF>
<!ENTITY US20010031492A1-20011018-D00005.TIF SYSTEM "US20010031492A1-20011018-D00005.TIF" NDATA TIF>
<!ENTITY US20010031492A1-20011018-D00006.TIF SYSTEM "US20010031492A1-20011018-D00006.TIF" NDATA TIF>
<!ENTITY US20010031492A1-20011018-D00007.TIF SYSTEM "US20010031492A1-20011018-D00007.TIF" NDATA TIF>
<!ENTITY US20010031492A1-20011018-D00008.TIF SYSTEM "US20010031492A1-20011018-D00008.TIF" NDATA TIF>
]>
<patent-application-publication>
<subdoc-bibliographic-information>
<document-id>
<doc-number>20010031492</doc-number>
<kind-code>A1</kind-code>
<document-date>20011018</document-date>
</document-id>
<publication-filing-type>new</publication-filing-type>
<domestic-filing-data>
<application-number>
<doc-number>09728320</doc-number>
</application-number>
<application-number-series-code>09</application-number-series-code>
<filing-date>20001201</filing-date>
</domestic-filing-data>
<foreign-priority-data>
<priority-application-number>
<doc-number>9811845.8</doc-number>
</priority-application-number>
<filing-date>19980602</filing-date>
<country-code>GB</country-code>
</foreign-priority-data>
<technical-information>
<classification-ipc>
<classification-ipc-primary>
<ipc>C12N001/20</ipc>
</classification-ipc-primary>
<classification-ipc-secondary>
<ipc>C12N005/06</ipc>
</classification-ipc-secondary>
<classification-ipc-edition>07</classification-ipc-edition>
</classification-ipc>
<classification-us>
<classification-us-primary>
<uspc>
<class>435</class>
<subclass>252100</subclass>
</uspc>
</classification-us-primary>
<classification-us-secondary>
<uspc>
<class>435</class>
<subclass>325000</subclass>
</uspc>
</classification-us-secondary>
<classification-us-secondary>
<uspc>
<class>435</class>
<subclass>252330</subclass>
</uspc>
</classification-us-secondary>
</classification-us>
<title-of-invention>Assay reagent</title-of-invention>
</technical-information>
<continuity-data>
<continuations>
<continuation-of>
<parent-child>
<child>
<document-id>
<doc-number>09728320</doc-number>
<kind-code>A1</kind-code>
<document-date>20001201</document-date>
</document-id>
</child>
<parent>
<document-id>
<doc-number>PCT/GB99/01730</doc-number>
<document-date>19990601</document-date>
<country-code>US</country-code>
</document-id>
</parent>
<parent-status>UNKNOWN</parent-status>
</parent-child>
</continuation-of>
</continuations>
</continuity-data>
<inventors>
<first-named-inventor>
<name>
<given-name>Jay</given-name>
<family-name>Lewington</family-name>
</name>
<residence>
<residence-non-us>
<city>Bisley</city>
<country-code>GB</country-code>
</residence-non-us>
</residence>
<authority-applicant>INV</authority-applicant>
</first-named-inventor>
<inventor>
<name>
<given-name>Katherine</given-name>
<family-name>Isles</family-name>
</name>
<residence>
<residence-non-us>
<city>Oxon</city>
<country-code>GB</country-code>
</residence-non-us>
</residence>
<authority-applicant>INV</authority-applicant>
</inventor>
<inventor>
<name>
<given-name>Sandy</given-name>
<family-name>Primrose</family-name>
</name>
<residence>
<residence-non-us>
<city>High Wycombe</city>
<country-code>GB</country-code>
</residence-non-us>
</residence>
<authority-applicant>INV</authority-applicant>
</inventor>
</inventors>
<assignee>
<organization-name>Azur Environmental</organization-name>
<assignee-type>03</assignee-type>
</assignee>
<correspondence-address>
<name-1>FITCH EVEN TABIN AND FLANNERY</name-1>
<name-2></name-2>
<address>
<address-1>120 SOUTH LA SALLE STREET</address-1>
<address-2>SUITE 1600</address-2>
<city>CHICAGO</city>
<state>IL</state>
<postalcode>606033406</postalcode>
</address>
</correspondence-address>
</subdoc-bibliographic-information>
<subdoc-abstract>
<paragraph id="A-0001" lvl="0">A cell-derived assay reagent prepared from cells which have been killed by treatment with an antibiotic selected from the bleomycin-phleomycin family of antibiotics but which retain a signal-generating metabolic activity such as bioluminescence. </paragraph>
</subdoc-abstract>
<subdoc-description>
<summary-of-invention>
<paragraph id="P-0001" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0001&rsqb;</number> This application is a continuation of PCT/GB99/01730, filed Jun. 1, 1999 designating the United States (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference) and claiming priority from British application serial no. 9811845.8, filed Jun. 2, 1998. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0002" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0002&rsqb;</number> The invention relates to a cell-derived assay reagent, in particular to an assay reagent prepared from cells which have been killed but which retain a signal-generating metabolic activity such as bioluminescence and also to assay methods using the cell-derived reagent such as, for example, toxicity testing methods. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0003" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0003&rsqb;</number> The use of bacteria with a signal-generating metabolic activity as indicators of toxicity is well established. UK patent number GB 2005018 describes a method of assaying a liquid sample for toxic substances which involves contacting a suspension of bioluminescent microorganisms with a sample suspected of containing a toxic substance and observing the change in the light output of the bioluminescent organisms as a result of contact with the suspected toxic substance. Furthermore, a toxicity monitoring system embodying the same assay principle, which is manufactured and sold under the Trade Mark Microtox&reg;, is in routine use in both environmental laboratories and for a variety of industrial applications. An improved toxicity assay method using bioluminescent bacteria, which can be used in a wider range of test conditions than the method of GB 2005018, is described in International patent application number WO 95/10767. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0004" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0004&rsqb;</number> The assay methods known in the prior art may utilize naturally occurring bioluminescent organisms, including <highlight><italic>Photobacterium phosphoreum </italic></highlight>and <highlight><italic>Vibrio fischeri. </italic></highlight>However, recent interest has focused on the use of genetically modified microorganisms which have been engineered to express bioluminescence. These genetically modified bioluminescent microorganisms usually express lux genes, encoding the enzyme luciferase, which have been cloned from a naturally occurring bioluminescent microorganism (E. A. Meighen (1994) Genetics of Bacterial Bioluminescence. <highlight><italic>Ann. Rev. Genet. </italic></highlight>28: 117-139; Stewart, G. S. A. B. Jassin, S. A. A. and Denyer, S. P. (1993), Engineering Microbial bioluminescence and biosensor applications. In Molecular Diagnosis. Eds R. Rapley and M. R. Walker Blackwell Scientific Pubs/Oxford). A process for producing genetically modified bioluminescent microorganisms expressing lux genes cloned from <highlight><italic>Vibrio harveyi </italic></highlight>is described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,581,335. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0005" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0005&rsqb;</number> The use of genetically modified bioluminescent microorganisms in toxicity testing applications has several advantages over the use of naturally occurring microorganisms. For example, it is possible to engineer microorganisms with different sensitivities to a range of different toxic substances or to a single toxic substance. However, genetically modified microorganisms are subject to marketing restrictions as a result of government legislation and there is major concern relating to the deliberate release of genetically modified microorganisms into the environment as components of commercial products. This is particularly relevant with regard to toxicity testing which is often performed in the field rather than within the laboratory. The potential risk from release of potentially pathogenic genetically modified microorganisms into the environment where they may continue to grow in an uncontrollable manner has led to the introduction of legal restrictions on the use of genetically modified organisms in the field in many countries. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0006" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0006&rsqb;</number> It has been suggested, to avoid the problems discussed above, to use genetically modified bioluminescent microorganisms which have been treated so that they retain the metabolic function of bioluminescence but an no longer reproduce. The use of radiation (gamma-radiation), X-rays or an electron beam) to kill bioluminescent cells whilst retaining the metabolic function of bioluminescence is demonstrated in International patent application number WO 95/07346. It is an object of the present invention to provide an alternative method of killing bioluminescent cells whilst retaining the metabolic function of bioluminescence which does not require the use of radiation and, as such, can be easily carried out without the need for specialized radiation equipment and containment facilities and without the risk to laboratory personnel associated with the use of radiation. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0007" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0007&rsqb;</number> Accordingly, in a first aspect the invention provides a method of making a non-viable preparation of prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells, which preparation has a signal-generating metabolic activity, which method comprises contacting a viable culture of cells with signal-generating metabolic activity with a member of the bleomycin/phleomycin family of antibiotics. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0008" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0008&rsqb;</number> Bleomycin and phleomycin are closely related glycopeptide antibiotics that are isolated in the form of copper chelates from cultures of <highlight><italic>Streptomyces verticillus. </italic></highlight>They represent a group of proteins with molecular weights ranging from 1000 to 1000 kda that are potent antibiotics and anti-tumour agents. So far more than 200 members of the bleomycin/phleomycin family have been isolated and characterised as complex basic glycopeptides. Family members resemble each other with respect to their physicochemical properties and their structure, indicating that functionally they all behave in the same manner. Furthermore, the chemical structure of the active moiety is conserved between family members and consists of 5 amino acids, L-glucose, 3-O-carbamoyl-D-mannose and a terminal cation. The various different bleomycin/phleomycin family members differ from each other in the nature of the terminal cation moiety, which is usually an amine. A preferred bleomycin/phleomycin antibiotic for use in the method of the invention is phleomycin D<highlight><bold>1</bold></highlight>, sold under the trade name Zeocin&trade;. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0009" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0009&rsqb;</number> Bleomycin and phleomycin are strong, selective inhibitors of DNA synthesis in intact bacteria and in mammalian cells. Bleomycin can be observed to attack purified DNA in vitro when incubated under appropriate conditions and analysis of the bleomycin damaged DNA shows that both single-stranded and double-stranded cleavages occur, the latter being the result of staggered single strand breaks formed approximately two base pairs apart in the complementary strands. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0010" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0010&rsqb;</number> In in vivo systems, after being taken up by the cell, bleomycin enters the cell nucleus, binds to DNA (by virtue of the interaction between its positively charged terminal amine moiety and a negatively charged phosphate group of the DNA backbone) and causes strand scission. Bleomycin causes strand scission of DNA in viruses, bacteria and eukaryotic cell systems. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0011" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0011&rsqb;</number> The present inventors have surprisingly found that treatment of a culture of cells with signal-generating metabolic activity with a bleomycin/phleomycin antibiotic renders the culture non-viable whilst retaining a level of signal-generating metabolic activity suitable for use in toxicity testing applications. In the context of this application the term non-viable is taken to mean that the cells are unable to reproduce. The process of rendering cells non-viable whilst retaining signal-generating metabolic activity may hereinafter be referred to as &lsquo;inactivation&rsquo; and cells which have been rendered non-viable according to the method of the invention may be referred to as &lsquo;inactivated&rsquo;. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0012" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0012&rsqb;</number> Because of the broad spectrum of action of the bleomycin/phleomycin family of antibiotics the method of the invention is equally applicable to bacterial cells and to eukaryotic cells with signal generating metabolic activity. Preferably the signal-generating metabolic activity is bioluminescence but other signal-generating metabolic activities which are reporters of toxic damage could be used with equivalent effect. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0013" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0013&rsqb;</number> The method of the invention is preferred for use with bacteria or eukaryotic cells that have been genetically modified to express a signal-generating metabolic activity. The examples given below relate to <highlight><italic>E. coil </italic></highlight>which have been engineered to express bioluminescence by transformation with a plasmid carrying lux genes. The eukaryotic equivalent would be cells transfected with a vector containing nucleic acid encoding a eukaryotic luciferase enzyme (abbreviated luc) such as, for example, luciferase from the firefly <highlight><italic>Photinus pyralis. </italic></highlight>A suitable plasmid vector containing cDNA encoding firefly luciferase under the control of an SV40 viral promoter is available from Promega Corporation, Madison Wis., USA. However, in connection with the present invention it is advantageous to use recombinant cells containing the entire eukaryotic luc operon so as to avoid the need to add an exogenous substrate ( e.g. luciferin) in order to generate light output. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0014" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0014&rsqb;</number> The optimum concentration of bleomycin/phleomycin antibiotic and contact time required to render a culture of cells non-viable whilst retaining a useful level of signal-generating metabolic activity may vary according to the cell type but can be readily determined by routine experiment. In general, the lower the concentration of antibiotic used the longer the contact time required for cell inactivation. In connection with the production of assay reagents for use in toxicity testing applications, it is generally advantageous to keep the concentration of antibiotic low (e.g. around 1-1.5 mg/ml) and increase the contact time for inactivation. As will be shown in Example 1, treatment with Zeocin&trade; at a concentration of 1.5 mg/ml for 3 to 5 hours is sufficient to completely inactivate a culture of recombinant <highlight><italic>E. coli. </italic></highlight></paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0015" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0015&rsqb;</number> In the case of bacteria, the contact time required to inactivate a culture of bacterial cells is found to vary according to the stage of growth of the bacterial culture at the time the antibiotic is administered. Although the method of the invention can be used on bacteria at all stages of growth it is generally preferable to perform the method on bacterial cells in an exponential growth phase because the optimum antibiotic contact time has been observed to be shortest when the antibiotic is administered to bacterial cells in an exponential growth phase. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0016" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0016&rsqb;</number> Following treatment with bleomycin/phleomycin antibiotic the non-viable preparation of cells is preferably stabilised for ease of storage or shipment. The cells can be stabilised using known techniques such as, for example, freeze drying (lyophilization) or other cell preservation techniques known in the art. Stabilization by freeze drying has the added advantage that the freeze drying procedure itself can render cells non-viable. Thus, any cells in the preparation which remain viable after treatment of the culture with bleomycin/phleomycin antibiotic will be rendered non-viable by freeze drying. It is thought that freeze drying inactivates any remaining viable cells by enhancing the effect of antibiotic, such that sub-lethally injured cells in the culture are more sensitive to the stresses applied during freeze drying. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0017" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0017&rsqb;</number> Prior to use the stabilised cell preparation is reconstituted using a reconstitution buffer to form an assay reagent. This reconstituted assay reagent may then be used directly in assays for analytes, for example in toxicity testing applications. It is preferable that the stabilised (i.e. freeze dried) assay reagent be reconstituted immediately prior to use, but after reconstitution it is generally necessary to allow sufficient time prior to use for the reconstituted reagent to reach a stable, high level of signal-generating activity. Suitable reconstitution buffers preferably contain an osmotically potent non-salt compound such as sucrose, dextran or polyethylene glycol, although salt based stabilisers may also be used. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0018" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0018&rsqb;</number> Whilst the assay reagent of the invention is particularly suitable for use in toxicity testing applications it is to be understood that the invention is not limited to assay reagents for use in toxicity testing. The cell inactivation method of the invention can be used to inactivate any recombinant cells (prokaryotic or eukaryotic) with a signal generating metabolic activity that is not dependent upon cell viability. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0019" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0019&rsqb;</number> In a further aspect the invention provides a method of assaying a potentially toxic analyte comprising the steps of, </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0020" lvl="2"><number>&lsqb;0020&rsqb;</number> (a) contacting a sample to be assayed for the analyte with a sample of assay reagent comprising a non-viable preparation of cells with a signal-generating metabolic activity; </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0021" lvl="2"><number>&lsqb;0021&rsqb;</number> (b) measuring the level of signal generated; and </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0022" lvl="2"><number>&lsqb;0022&rsqb;</number> (c) using the measurement obtained as an indicator of the toxicity of the analyte. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0023" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0023&rsqb;</number> In a still further aspect, the invention provides a kit for performing the above-stated assay comprising an assay reagent with signal generating metabolic activity and means for contacting the assay reagent with a sample to be assayed for an analyte. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0024" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0024&rsqb;</number> The analytes tested using the assay of the invention are usually toxic substances, but it is to be understood that the precise nature of the analyte to be tested is not material to the invention. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0025" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0025&rsqb;</number> Toxicity is a general term used to describe an adverse effect on biological system and the term &lsquo;toxic substances&rsquo; includes both toxicants (synthetic chemicals that are toxic) and toxins (natural poisons). Toxicity is usually expressed as an effective concentration (EC) or inhibitory concentration (IC) value. The EC/IC value is usually denoted as a percentage response e.g. EC<highlight><subscript>50</subscript></highlight>, EC<highlight><subscript>10 </subscript></highlight>which denotes the concentration (dose) of a particular substance which affects the designated criteria for assessing toxicity (i.e. a behavioural trait or death) in the indicated proportion of the population tested. For example, an EC<highlight><subscript>50 </subscript></highlight>of 10 ppm indicates that 50% of the population will be affected by a concentration of 10 ppm. In the case of a toxicity assay based on the use of a bioluminescent assay reagent, the EC<highlight><subscript>50 </subscript></highlight>value is usually the concentration of sample substance causing a 50% change in light output.</paragraph>
</summary-of-invention>
<brief-description-of-drawings>
<paragraph id="P-0026" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0026&rsqb;</number> The present invention will be further understood by way of the following Examples with reference to the accompanying Figures in which: </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0027" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0027&rsqb;</number> <cross-reference target="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</cross-reference> is a graph to show the effect of Zeocin&trade; treatment on viable count and light output of recombinant bioluminescent <highlight><italic>E. coil </italic></highlight>cells. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0028" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0028&rsqb;</number> <cross-reference target="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2</cross-reference> is a graph to show the light output from five separate vials of reconstituted assay reagent. The assay reagent was prepared from recombinant bioluminescent <highlight><italic>E. coil </italic></highlight>exposed to 1.5 mg/ml Zeocin&trade; for 300 minutes. Five vials were used to reduce discrepancies resulting from vial to vial variation. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0029" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0029&rsqb;</number> FIGS. <highlight><bold>3</bold></highlight> to <highlight><bold>8</bold></highlight> are graphs to show the effect of Zeocin&trade; treatment on the sensitivity of bioluminescent assay reagent to toxicant (ZnSO<highlight><subscript>4</subscript></highlight>): </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0030" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0030&rsqb;</number> <cross-reference target="DRAWINGS">FIG. 3</cross-reference>: Control cells, lag phase. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0031" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0031&rsqb;</number> <cross-reference target="DRAWINGS">FIG. 4</cross-reference>: Zeocin&trade; treated cells, lag phase. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0032" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0032&rsqb;</number> <cross-reference target="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</cross-reference>: Control cells, mid-exponential growth. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0033" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0033&rsqb;</number> <cross-reference target="DRAWINGS">FIG. 6</cross-reference>: Zeocin&trade; treated cells, mid-exponential growth. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0034" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0034&rsqb;</number> <cross-reference target="DRAWINGS">FIG. 7</cross-reference>: Control cells, stationary phase. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0035" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0035&rsqb;</number> <cross-reference target="DRAWINGS">FIG. 8</cross-reference>: Zeocin&trade; treated cells, stationary phase.</paragraph>
</brief-description-of-drawings>
<detailed-description>
<section>
<heading lvl="1">EXAMPLE 1 </heading>
</section>
<section>
<heading lvl="1">(A) Inactivation of Bioluminescent <highlight><italic>E. coil </italic></highlight>Method </heading>
<paragraph id="P-0036" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0036&rsqb;</number> 1. Bioluminescent genetically modified <highlight><italic>E. coil </italic></highlight>strain HB101 (<highlight><italic>E. coli </italic></highlight>HB101 made bioluminescent by transformation with a plasmid carrying the lux operon of <highlight><italic>Vibrio fischeri </italic></highlight>constructed by the method of Shaw and Kado, as described in Biotechnology 4: 560-564) were grown from a frozen stock in 5 ml of low salt medium (LB (5 g/ml NaCl)&plus;glycerol&plus;MgSO<highlight><subscript>4</subscript></highlight>) for 24 hours. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0037" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0037&rsqb;</number> 2. 1 ml of the 5 ml culture was then used to inoculate 200 ml of low salt medium in a shaker flask and the resultant culture grown to an OD<highlight><subscript>630 </subscript></highlight>of 0.407 (exponential growth phase). </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0038" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0038&rsqb;</number> 3. 50 ml of this culture was removed to a fresh sterile shaker flask (control cells). </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0039" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0039&rsqb;</number> 4. Zeocin&trade; was added to the 150 ml of culture in the original shaker flash, to a final concentration of 1.5 mg/ml. At the same time, an equivalent volume of water was added to the 50 ml culture removed from the original flask (control cells). </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0040" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0040&rsqb;</number> 5. The time course of cell inactivation was monitored by removing samples from the culture at 5, 60, 120, 180, 240 and 300 minutes after the addition of Zeocin&trade; and taking measurements of both light output (measured using a Deltatox luminometer) and viable count (per ml, determined using the method given in Example 3 below) for each of the samples. Samples of the control cells were removed at 5 and 300 minutes after the addition of water and measurements of light output and viable count taken as for the Zeocin&trade; treated cells. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0041" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0041&rsqb;</number> <cross-reference target="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</cross-reference> shows the effect of Zeocin&trade; treatment on the light output and viable count (per ml) of recombinant bioluminescent <highlight><italic>E. coil. </italic></highlight>Zeocin&trade; was added to a final concentration of 1.5 mg/ml at time zero. The number of viable cells in the culture was observed to decrease with increasing contact cells with Zeocin&trade;, the culture being completely inactivated after 3 hours. The light output from the culture was observed to decrease gradually with increasing Zeocin&trade; contact time. </paragraph>
</section>
<section>
<heading lvl="1">(B) Production of Assay Reagent </heading>
<paragraph id="P-0042" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0042&rsqb;</number> Five hours after the addition of Zeocin&trade; or water the remaining bacterial cells in the Zeocin&trade; treated and control cultures were harvested by the centrifugation, washed (to remove traces of Zeocin&trade; from the Zeocin&trade; treated culture), re-centrifuged and resuspended in cryoprotectant to an OD<highlight><subscript>630 </subscript></highlight>of 0.25. 200 &mgr;l aliquots of the cells in cryoprotectant were dispensed into single shot vials, and freeze dried. Freeze dried samples of the Zeocin&trade; treated cells and control cells were reconstituted in 0.2M sucrose to form assay reagents and the light output of the assay reagents measured at various times after reconstitution. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0043" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0043&rsqb;</number> The light output from assay reagent prepared from cells exposed to 1.5 mg/ml Zeocin&trade; for 5 hours was not significantly different to the light output from assay reagent prepared from control (Zeocin&trade; untreated) cells, indicating that Zeocin&trade; treatment does not affect the light output of the reconstituted freeze dried assay reagent. Both Zeocin&trade; treated and Zeocin&trade; untreated assay reagents produced stable light output 15 minutes after reconstitution. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0044" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0044&rsqb;</number> <cross-reference target="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2</cross-reference> shows the light output from five separate vials of reconstituted Zeocin&trade; treated assay reagent inactivated according to the method of Example 1(A) and processed into assay reagent as described in Example 1(B). Reconstitution solution was added at time zero and thereafter light output was observed to increase steadily before stabilising out at around 15 minutes after reconstitution. All five vials were observed to give similar light profiles after reconstitution. </paragraph>
</section>
<section>
<heading lvl="1">EXAMPLE 2 </heading>
</section>
<section>
<heading lvl="1">Sensitivity of Zeocin&trade; Treated Assay Reagent to Toxicant Method </heading>
<paragraph id="P-0045" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0045&rsqb;</number> 1. Bioluminescent genetically modified <highlight><italic>E. coil </italic></highlight>strain HB101 (<highlight><italic>E. coli </italic></highlight>HB101 made bioluminescent by transformation with a plasmid carrying the lux operon of <highlight><italic>vibrio fischeri </italic></highlight>constructed by the method of Shaw and Kado, as described in Biotechnology 4: 560-564) was grown in fermenter as a batch culture in low salt medium (LB(5 g/ml NaCl)&plus;glycerol&plus;MgSO<highlight><subscript>4</subscript></highlight>). </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0046" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0046&rsqb;</number> 2. Two aliquots of the culture were removed from the fermenter into separate sterile shaker flasks at each of three different stages of growth i.e. at OD<highlight><subscript>630 </subscript></highlight>values of 0.038 (lag phase growth), 1.31 (mid-exponential phase growth) and 2.468 (stationary phase growth). </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0047" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0047&rsqb;</number> 3. One aliquot of culture for each of the three growth stages was inactivated by contact with Zeocin&trade; (1 mg Zeocin&trade; added per 2.5&times;10<highlight><superscript>6 </superscript></highlight>cells, i.e. the concentration of Zeocin&trade; per cell is kept constant) for 300 minutes and then processed into assay reagent by freeze drying and reconstitution, as described in part (B) of Example 1. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0048" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0048&rsqb;</number> 4. An equal volume of water was added to the second aliquot of culture for each of the three growth stages and the cultures processed into assay reagent as described above. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0049" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0049&rsqb;</number> 5. Samples of each of the three Zeocin&trade; treated and three control assay reagents were then evaluated for sensitivity to toxicant (ZnSO<highlight><subscript>4</subscript></highlight>) according to the following assay protocol: </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0050" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0050&rsqb;</number> ZnSO<highlight><subscript>4 </subscript></highlight>Sensitivity Assay </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0051" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0051&rsqb;</number> 1. ZnSO<highlight><subscript>4 </subscript></highlight>solutions were prepared in pure water at 30, 10, 3, 1, 0.3 and 0.1 ppm. Pure water was also used as a control. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0052" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0052&rsqb;</number> 2. Seven vials of each of the three Zeocin&trade; treated and each of the three control assay reagents (i.e. one for each of the six ZnSO<highlight><subscript>4 </subscript></highlight>solutions and one for the pure water control) were reconstituted using 0.5 ml of reconstitution solution (eg 0.2M sucrose) and then left to stand at room temperature for 15 minutes to allow the light output to stabilize. Base line (time zero) readings of light output were then measured for each of the reconstituted reagents. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0053" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0053&rsqb;</number> 3. 0.5 ml aliquots of each of the six ZnSO<highlight><subscript>4 </subscript></highlight>solutions and the pure water control were added to separate vials of reconstituted assay reagent. This was repeated for each of the different Zeocin&trade; treated and control assay reagents. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0054" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0054&rsqb;</number> 4. The vials were incubated at room temperature and light output readings were taken 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30 minutes after addition of ZnSO<highlight><subscript>4 </subscript></highlight>solution. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0055" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0055&rsqb;</number> 5. The % toxic effect for each sample was calculated as follows:
<math-cwu id="MATH-US-00001">
<number>1</number>
<math>
<mrow>
<mstyle>
<mtext>% toxic effect</mtext>
</mstyle>
<mo>=</mo>
<mrow>
<mn>1</mn>
<mo>-</mo>
<mrow>
<mrow>
<mo>(</mo>
<mfrac>
<mrow>
<msub>
<mi>S</mi>
<mi>c</mi>
</msub>
<mo>&times;</mo>
<msub>
<mi>C</mi>
<mi>o</mi>
</msub>
</mrow>
<mrow>
<msub>
<mi>S</mi>
<mi>o</mi>
</msub>
<mo>&times;</mo>
<msub>
<mi>C</mi>
<mi>t</mi>
</msub>
</mrow>
</mfrac>
<mo>)</mo>
</mrow>
<mo>&times;</mo>
<mn>100</mn>
</mrow>
</mrow>
</mrow>
</math>
<mathematica-file id="MATHEMATICA-00001" file="US20010031492A1-20011018-M00001.NB"/>
<image id="EMI-M00001" wi="216.027" he="18.00225" file="US20010031492A1-20011018-M00001.TIF" imf="TIFF" ti="MF"/>
</math-cwu>
</paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0056" lvl="7"><number>&lsqb;0056&rsqb;</number> where: C<highlight><subscript>o</subscript></highlight>&equals;light in control at time zero </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0057" lvl="2"><number>&lsqb;0057&rsqb;</number> C<highlight><subscript>t</subscript></highlight>&equals;light in control at reading time </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0058" lvl="2"><number>&lsqb;0058&rsqb;</number> S<highlight><subscript>o</subscript></highlight>&equals;light in sample at time zero </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0059" lvl="2"><number>&lsqb;0059&rsqb;</number> S<highlight><subscript>t</subscript></highlight>&equals;light in sample at reading time </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0060" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0060&rsqb;</number> The results of toxicity assays for sensitivity to ZnSO<highlight><subscript>4 </subscript></highlight>for all the Zeocin&trade; treated and control assay reagents are shown in FIGS. <highlight><bold>3</bold></highlight> to <highlight><bold>8</bold></highlight>: </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0061" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0061&rsqb;</number> <cross-reference target="DRAWINGS">FIG. 3</cross-reference>: Control cells, lag phase. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0062" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0062&rsqb;</number> <cross-reference target="DRAWINGS">FIG. 4</cross-reference>: Zeocin&trade; treated cells, lag phase. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0063" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0063&rsqb;</number> <cross-reference target="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</cross-reference>: Control cells, mid-exponential growth. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0064" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0064&rsqb;</number> <cross-reference target="DRAWINGS">FIG. 6</cross-reference>: Zeocin&trade; treated cells, mid-exponential growth. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0065" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0065&rsqb;</number> <cross-reference target="DRAWINGS">FIG. 7</cross-reference>: Control cells, stationary phase. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0066" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0066&rsqb;</number> <cross-reference target="DRAWINGS">FIG. 8</cross-reference>: Zeocin&trade; treated cells, stationary phase. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0067" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0067&rsqb;</number> In each case, separate graphs of % toxic effect against log<highlight><subscript>10 </subscript></highlight>concentration of ZnSO<highlight><subscript>4 </subscript></highlight>were plotted on the same axes for each value of time (minutes) after addition of Zeocin&trade; or water. The sensitivities of the various reagents, expressed as an EC<highlight><subscript>50 </subscript></highlight>value for 15 minutes exposed to ZnSO<highlight><subscript>4</subscript></highlight>, are summarised in Table 1 below.
<table-cwu id="TABLE-US-00001">
<number>1</number>
<table frame="none" colsep="0" rowsep="0">
<tgroup align="left" colsep="0" rowsep="0" cols="3">
<colspec colname="OFFSET" colwidth="91PT" align="left"/>
<colspec colname="1" colwidth="119PT" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="2" colwidth="7PT" align="left"/>
<tbody valign="top">
<row>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry></entry>
<entry namest="OFFSET" nameend="2" align="center" rowsep="1"></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry></entry>
<entry>SENSITIVITY-EC<highlight><subscript>50 </subscript></highlight>VALUES</entry>
<entry></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
<tgroup align="left" colsep="0" rowsep="0" cols="3">
<colspec colname="1" colwidth="91PT" align="left"/>
<colspec colname="2" colwidth="63PT" align="left"/>
<colspec colname="3" colwidth="63PT" align="left"/>
<tbody valign="top">
<row>
<entry>GROWTH STAGE OF</entry>
<entry>ZEOCIN&thinsp;&trade;</entry>
<entry>CONTROL</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>ASSAY REAGENT</entry>
<entry>TREATED</entry>
<entry>CELLS</entry>
</row>
<row><entry namest="1" nameend="3" align="center" rowsep="1"></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>Lag Phase</entry>
<entry>1.445 ppm ZnSO<highlight><subscript>4</subscript></highlight></entry>
<entry>1.580 ppm ZnSO<highlight><subscript>4</subscript></highlight></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>Expotential phase</entry>
<entry>0.446 ppm ZnSO<highlight><subscript>4</subscript></highlight></entry>
<entry>0.446 ZnSO<highlight><subscript>4</subscript></highlight></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>Stationary phase</entry>
<entry>0.426 ppm ZnSO<highlight><subscript>4</subscript></highlight></entry>
<entry>0.457 ppm ZnSO<highlight><subscript>4</subscript></highlight></entry>
</row>
<row><entry namest="1" nameend="3" align="center" rowsep="1"></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
</table-cwu>
</paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0068" lvl="7"><number>&lsqb;0068&rsqb;</number> Table 1: Sensitivity of the different assay reagents to ZnSo<highlight><subscript>4 </subscript></highlight>expressed as EC<highlight><subscript>50 </subscript></highlight>values for 15 minutes exposure to ZNSO<highlight><subscript>4</subscript></highlight>. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0069" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0069&rsqb;</number> The results of the toxicity assays indicate that Zeocin&trade; treatment does not significantly affect the sensitivity of a recombinant bioluminescent <highlight><italic>E. coli </italic></highlight>derived assay reagent to ZnSO<highlight><subscript>4</subscript></highlight>. Similar results could be expected with other toxic substances which have an effect on signal-generating metabolic activities. </paragraph>
</section>
<section>
<heading lvl="1">EXAMPLE 3 </heading>
</section>
<section>
<heading lvl="1">Method to Determine Viable Count </heading>
<paragraph id="P-0070" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0070&rsqb;</number> 1. Samples of bacterial culture to be assayed for viable count were centrifuged at 10,000 rpm for 5 minutes to pellet the bacterial cells. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0071" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0071&rsqb;</number> 2. Bacterial cells were washed by resuspending in 1 ml of M9 medium, re-centrifuged at 10,000 rpm for 5 minutes and finally re-suspended in 1 ml of M9 medium. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0072" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0072&rsqb;</number> 3. Serial dilutions of the bacterial cell suspension from 10<highlight><superscript>&minus;1 </superscript></highlight>to 10<highlight><superscript>&minus;7 </superscript></highlight>were prepared in M9 medium. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0073" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0073&rsqb;</number> 4. Three separate 10 &mgr;l aliquots of each of the serial dilutions were plated out on standard agar plates and the plates incubated at 37&deg; C. </paragraph>
<paragraph id="P-0074" lvl="0"><number>&lsqb;0074&rsqb;</number> 5. The number of bacterial colonies present for each of the three aliquots at each of the serial dilutions were counted and the values averaged. Viable count was calculated per ml of bacterial culture. </paragraph>
</section>
</detailed-description>
</subdoc-description>
<subdoc-claims>
<claim id="CLM-00001">
<claim-text><highlight><bold>1</bold></highlight>. A method of making a non-viable preparation of prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells, which preparation has a signal-generating metabolic activity, which method comprises contacting a viable culture of said cells having signal-generating metabolic activity with an antibiotic selected from the bleomycin/phleomycin family of antibiotics. </claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00002">
<claim-text><highlight><bold>2</bold></highlight>. The method as claimed in <dependent-claim-reference depends_on="CLM-00001"><claim-text>claim 1</claim-text></dependent-claim-reference> wherein following contact with antibiotic, said cells are subjected to a stabilization step. </claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00003">
<claim-text><highlight><bold>3</bold></highlight>. The method as claimed in <dependent-claim-reference depends_on="CLM-00002"><claim-text>claim 2</claim-text></dependent-claim-reference> wherein said stabilization step comprises freeze drying. </claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00004">
<claim-text><highlight><bold>4</bold></highlight>. The method as claimed in <dependent-claim-reference depends_on="CLM-00001"><claim-text>claim 1</claim-text></dependent-claim-reference> wherein said antibiotic is phleomycin D<highlight><bold>1</bold></highlight>. </claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00005">
<claim-text><highlight><bold>5</bold></highlight>. The method as claimed in <dependent-claim-reference depends_on="CLM-00005"><claim-text>claim 5</claim-text></dependent-claim-reference> wherein said signal-generating metabolic activity is bioluminescence. </claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00006">
<claim-text><highlight><bold>6</bold></highlight>. The method as claimed in <dependent-claim-reference depends_on="CLM-00005"><claim-text>claim 5</claim-text></dependent-claim-reference> wherein said cells are bacteria. </claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00007">
<claim-text><highlight><bold>7</bold></highlight>. The method as claimed in <dependent-claim-reference depends_on="CLM-00006"><claim-text>claim 6</claim-text></dependent-claim-reference> wherein said bacteria are in an exponential growth phase when contacted with said antibiotic. </claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00008">
<claim-text><highlight><bold>8</bold></highlight>. The method as claimed in <dependent-claim-reference depends_on="CLM-00006"><claim-text>claim 6</claim-text></dependent-claim-reference> wherein said bacteria are genetically modified. </claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00009">
<claim-text><highlight><bold>9</bold></highlight>. The method as claimed in <dependent-claim-reference depends_on="CLM-00008"><claim-text>claim 8</claim-text></dependent-claim-reference> wherein said genetically modified bacteria contain nucleic acid encoding luciferase. </claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00010">
<claim-text><highlight><bold>10</bold></highlight>. The method as claimed in <dependent-claim-reference depends_on="CLM-00009"><claim-text>claim 9</claim-text></dependent-claim-reference> wherein said bacteria are <highlight><italic>E. coli. </italic></highlight></claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00011">
<claim-text><highlight><bold>11</bold></highlight>. The method as claimed in <dependent-claim-reference depends_on="CLM-00005"><claim-text>claim 5</claim-text></dependent-claim-reference> wherein said cells are eukaryotic cells. </claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00012">
<claim-text><highlight><bold>12</bold></highlight>. The method as claimed in <dependent-claim-reference depends_on="CLM-00011"><claim-text>claim 11</claim-text></dependent-claim-reference> wherein said eukaryotic cells are genetically modified. </claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00013">
<claim-text><highlight><bold>13</bold></highlight>. The method as claimed in <dependent-claim-reference depends_on="CLM-00012"><claim-text>claim 12</claim-text></dependent-claim-reference> wherein said genetically modified eukaryotic cells contain nucleic acid encoding luciferase. </claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00014">
<claim-text><highlight><bold>14</bold></highlight>. A method of making a non-viable preparation of prokaryotic cells, which preparation has a signal-generating metabolic activity, which method comprises contacting a viable culture of a genetically modified <highlight><italic>E. coli </italic></highlight>strain made bioluminescent by transformation with a plasmid carrying the lux operon of <highlight><italic>Vibrio fischeri </italic></highlight>with an antibiotic selected from the bleomycin/phleomycin family of antibiotics. </claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00015">
<claim-text><highlight><bold>15</bold></highlight>. The method as claimed in <dependent-claim-reference depends_on="CLM-00014"><claim-text>claim 14</claim-text></dependent-claim-reference> wherein said cells are contacted with phleomycin D<highlight><bold>1</bold></highlight> at a concentration of at least about 1.5 mg/ml. </claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00016">
<claim-text><highlight><bold>16</bold></highlight>. The method as claimed in <dependent-claim-reference depends_on="CLM-00015"><claim-text>claim 15</claim-text></dependent-claim-reference> wherein said contact is maintained for at least about 3 hours. </claim-text>
</claim>
<claim id="CLM-00017">
<claim-text><highlight><bold>17</bold></highlight>. The method as claimed in <dependent-claim-reference depends_on="CLM-00016"><claim-text>claim 16</claim-text></dependent-claim-reference> wherein said antibiotic-treated cells are harvested, washed and freeze-dried.</claim-text>
</claim>
</subdoc-claims>
<subdoc-drawings id="DRAWINGS">
<heading lvl="0" align="CENTER">Drawings</heading>
<representative-figure>NONE</representative-figure>
<figure id="figure-D00001">
<image id="EMI-D00001" file="US20010031492A1-20011018-D00001.TIF" imf="TIFF" ti="DR"/>
</figure>
<figure id="figure-D00002">
<image id="EMI-D00002" file="US20010031492A1-20011018-D00002.TIF" imf="TIFF" ti="DR"/>
</figure>
<figure id="figure-D00003">
<image id="EMI-D00003" file="US20010031492A1-20011018-D00003.TIF" imf="TIFF" ti="DR"/>
</figure>
<figure id="figure-D00004">
<image id="EMI-D00004" file="US20010031492A1-20011018-D00004.TIF" imf="TIFF" ti="DR"/>
</figure>
<figure id="figure-D00005">
<image id="EMI-D00005" file="US20010031492A1-20011018-D00005.TIF" imf="TIFF" ti="DR"/>
</figure>
<figure id="figure-D00006">
<image id="EMI-D00006" file="US20010031492A1-20011018-D00006.TIF" imf="TIFF" ti="DR"/>
</figure>
<figure id="figure-D00007">
<image id="EMI-D00007" file="US20010031492A1-20011018-D00007.TIF" imf="TIFF" ti="DR"/>
</figure>
<figure id="figure-D00008">
<image id="EMI-D00008" file="US20010031492A1-20011018-D00008.TIF" imf="TIFF" ti="DR"/>
</figure>
</subdoc-drawings>
</patent-application-publication>

1380
tests/data/uspto/pftaps057006474.txt Normal file
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

3091
tests/data/uspto/pg06442728.xml Normal file
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

186
tests/data/uspto/tables_ipa20180000016.xml Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,186 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<table frame="none" colsep="0" rowsep="0" pgwide="1">
<tgroup align="left" colsep="0" rowsep="0" cols="5">
<colspec colname="offset" colwidth="42pt" align="left"/>
<colspec colname="1" colwidth="133pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="2" colwidth="63pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="3" colwidth="42pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="4" colwidth="91pt" align="center"/>
<thead>
<row>
<entry/>
<entry namest="offset" nameend="4" rowsep="1">TABLE 1</entry>
</row>
</thead>
<tbody valign="top">
<row>
<entry/>
<entry namest="offset" nameend="4" align="center" rowsep="1"/>
</row>
<row>
<entry/>
<entry>Fluorescent material</entry>
<entry/>
<entry/>
<entry/>
</row>
<row>
<entry/>
<entry>(parts by mass)</entry>
<entry>Photon flux</entry>
<entry>Ratio of</entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
<tgroup align="left" colsep="0" rowsep="0" cols="7">
<colspec colname="offset" colwidth="42pt" align="left"/>
<colspec colname="1" colwidth="70pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="2" colwidth="63pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="3" colwidth="63pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="4" colwidth="42pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="5" colwidth="42pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="6" colwidth="49pt" align="center"/>
<tbody valign="top">
<row>
<entry/>
<entry>First fluorescent</entry>
<entry>Second fluorescent</entry>
<entry>density</entry>
<entry>photon</entry>
<entry>Fresh weight</entry>
<entry>Nitrate nitrogen</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry/>
<entry>material</entry>
<entry>material</entry>
<entry>(&#x3bc;mol &#xb7; m<sup>&#x2212;2 </sup>&#xb7; s<sup>&#x2212;1</sup>)</entry>
<entry>flux densities</entry>
<entry>(Edible part)</entry>
<entry>content</entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
<tgroup align="left" colsep="0" rowsep="0" cols="10">
<colspec colname="offset" colwidth="42pt" align="left"/>
<colspec colname="1" colwidth="70pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="2" colwidth="63pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="3" colwidth="21pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="4" colwidth="21pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="5" colwidth="21pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="6" colwidth="21pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="7" colwidth="21pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="8" colwidth="42pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="9" colwidth="49pt" align="center"/>
<tbody valign="top">
<row>
<entry/>
<entry>(MGF/CASN = 95:5)</entry>
<entry>(YAG: Ce, Cr)</entry>
<entry>B</entry>
<entry>R</entry>
<entry>FR</entry>
<entry>R/B</entry>
<entry>R/FR</entry>
<entry>(g)</entry>
<entry>(mg/100 g)</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry/>
<entry namest="offset" nameend="9" align="center" rowsep="1"/>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
<tgroup align="left" colsep="0" rowsep="0" cols="10">
<colspec colname="1" colwidth="42pt" align="left"/>
<colspec colname="2" colwidth="70pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="3" colwidth="63pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="4" colwidth="21pt" align="char" char="."/>
<colspec colname="5" colwidth="21pt" align="char" char="."/>
<colspec colname="6" colwidth="21pt" align="char" char="."/>
<colspec colname="7" colwidth="21pt" align="char" char="."/>
<colspec colname="8" colwidth="21pt" align="center"/>
<colspec colname="9" colwidth="42pt" align="char" char="."/>
<colspec colname="10" colwidth="49pt" align="char" char="."/>
<tbody valign="top">
<row>
<entry>Comparative</entry>
<entry>&#x2014;</entry>
<entry>&#x2014;</entry>
<entry>35.5</entry>
<entry>88.8</entry>
<entry>0.0</entry>
<entry>2.5</entry>
<entry>&#x2014;</entry>
<entry>26.2</entry>
<entry>361.2</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>Example 1</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>Example 1</entry>
<entry>60</entry>
<entry>&#x2014;</entry>
<entry>31.5</entry>
<entry>74.9</entry>
<entry>12.6</entry>
<entry>2.4</entry>
<entry>6.0</entry>
<entry>35.4</entry>
<entry>430.8</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>Example 2</entry>
<entry>50</entry>
<entry>10</entry>
<entry>28.5</entry>
<entry>67.1</entry>
<entry>21.7</entry>
<entry>2.4</entry>
<entry>3.1</entry>
<entry>34.0</entry>
<entry>450.0</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>Example 3</entry>
<entry>40</entry>
<entry>20</entry>
<entry>25.8</entry>
<entry>62.0</entry>
<entry>28.7</entry>
<entry>2.4</entry>
<entry>2.2</entry>
<entry>33.8</entry>
<entry>452.4</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>Example 4</entry>
<entry>30</entry>
<entry>30</entry>
<entry>26.8</entry>
<entry>54.7</entry>
<entry>33.5</entry>
<entry>2.0</entry>
<entry>1.6</entry>
<entry>33.8</entry>
<entry>345.0</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>Example 5</entry>
<entry>25</entry>
<entry>39</entry>
<entry>23.4</entry>
<entry>52.8</entry>
<entry>38.1</entry>
<entry>2.3</entry>
<entry>1.4</entry>
<entry>28.8</entry>
<entry>307.2</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry namest="1" nameend="10" align="center" rowsep="1"/>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>

464
tests/test_backend_patent_uspto.py Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,464 @@
"""Test methods in module docling.backend.patent_uspto_backend.py."""
import json
import logging
import os
import unittest
from pathlib import Path
from tempfile import NamedTemporaryFile
import pytest
import yaml
from docling_core.types import DoclingDocument
from docling_core.types.doc import DocItemLabel, TableData, TextItem
from docling.backend.xml.uspto_backend import PatentUsptoDocumentBackend, XmlTable
from docling.datamodel.base_models import InputFormat
from docling.datamodel.document import (
ConversionResult,
InputDocument,
SectionHeaderItem,
)
from docling.document_converter import DocumentConverter
GENERATE: bool = True
DATA_PATH: Path = Path("./tests/data/uspto/")
GT_PATH: Path = Path("./tests/data/groundtruth/docling_v2/")
def _generate_groundtruth(doc: DoclingDocument, file_stem: str) -> None:
with open(GT_PATH / f"{file_stem}.itxt", "w", encoding="utf-8") as file_obj:
file_obj.write(doc._export_to_indented_text())
doc.save_as_json(GT_PATH / f"{file_stem}.json")
doc.save_as_markdown(GT_PATH / f"{file_stem}.md")
@pytest.fixture(scope="module")
def patents() -> list[tuple[Path, DoclingDocument]]:
patent_paths = (
sorted(DATA_PATH.glob("ip*.xml"))
+ sorted(DATA_PATH.glob("pg*.xml"))
+ sorted(DATA_PATH.glob("pa*.xml"))
+ sorted(DATA_PATH.glob("pftaps*.txt"))
)
patents: list[dict[Path, DoclingDocument]] = []
for in_path in patent_paths:
in_doc = InputDocument(
path_or_stream=in_path,
format=InputFormat.XML_USPTO,
backend=PatentUsptoDocumentBackend,
)
backend = PatentUsptoDocumentBackend(in_doc=in_doc, path_or_stream=in_path)
logging.info(f"Converting patent from file {in_path}")
doc = backend.convert()
assert doc, f"Failed to parse document {in_path}"
patents.append((in_path, doc))
return patents
@pytest.fixture(scope="module")
def groundtruth() -> list[tuple[Path, str]]:
patent_paths = (
sorted(GT_PATH.glob("ip*"))
+ sorted(GT_PATH.glob("pg*"))
+ sorted(GT_PATH.glob("pa*"))
+ sorted(GT_PATH.glob("pftaps*"))
)
groundtruth: list[tuple[Path, str]] = []
for in_path in patent_paths:
with open(in_path, encoding="utf-8") as file_obj:
content = file_obj.read()
groundtruth.append((in_path, content))
return groundtruth
@pytest.fixture(scope="module")
def tables() -> list[tuple[Path, TableData]]:
table_paths = sorted(DATA_PATH.glob("tables*.xml"))
tables: list[tuple[Path, TableData]] = []
for in_path in table_paths:
with open(in_path, encoding="utf-8") as file_obj:
content = file_obj.read()
parser = XmlTable(content)
parsed_table = parser.parse()
assert parsed_table
tables.append((in_path, parsed_table))
return tables
@pytest.mark.skip("Slow test")
def test_patent_export(patents):
for _, doc in patents:
with NamedTemporaryFile(suffix=".yaml", delete=False) as tmp_file:
doc.save_as_yaml(Path(tmp_file.name))
assert os.path.getsize(tmp_file.name) > 0
with NamedTemporaryFile(suffix=".html", delete=False) as tmp_file:
doc.save_as_html(Path(tmp_file.name))
assert os.path.getsize(tmp_file.name) > 0
with NamedTemporaryFile(suffix=".md", delete=False) as tmp_file:
doc.save_as_markdown(Path(tmp_file.name))
assert os.path.getsize(tmp_file.name) > 0
def test_patent_groundtruth(patents, groundtruth):
gt_stems: list[str] = [item[0].stem for item in groundtruth]
gt_names: dict[str, str] = {item[0].name: item[1] for item in groundtruth}
for path, doc in patents:
if path.stem not in gt_stems:
continue
md_name = path.stem + ".md"
if md_name in gt_names:
pred_md = doc.export_to_markdown()
assert (
pred_md == gt_names[md_name]
), f"Markdown file mismatch against groundtruth {md_name}"
json_name = path.stem + ".json"
if json_name in gt_names:
pred_json = json.dumps(doc.export_to_dict(), indent=2)
assert (
pred_json == gt_names[json_name]
), f"JSON file mismatch against groundtruth {json_name}"
itxt_name = path.stem + ".itxt"
if itxt_name in gt_names:
pred_itxt = doc._export_to_indented_text()
assert (
pred_itxt == gt_names[itxt_name]
), f"Indented text file mismatch against groundtruth {itxt_name}"
def test_tables(tables):
"""Test the table parser."""
# CHECK table in file tables_20180000016.xml
file_name = "tables_ipa20180000016.xml"
file_table = [item[1] for item in tables if item[0].name == file_name][0]
assert file_table.num_rows == 13
assert file_table.num_cols == 10
assert len(file_table.table_cells) == 130
def test_patent_uspto_ice(patents):
"""Test applications and grants Full Text Data/XML Version 4.x ICE."""
# CHECK application doc number 20200022300
file_name = "ipa20200022300.xml"
doc = [item[1] for item in patents if item[0].name == file_name][0]
if GENERATE:
_generate_groundtruth(doc, Path(file_name).stem)
assert doc.name == file_name
texts = doc.texts
assert len(texts) == 78
assert isinstance(texts[0], TextItem)
assert (
texts[0].text
== "SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING THE OPERATION OF AN ACTUATOR MOUNTED ON A SEED PLANTING IMPLEMENT"
)
assert texts[0].label == DocItemLabel.TITLE
assert texts[0].parent.cref == "#/body"
assert isinstance(texts[1], TextItem)
assert texts[1].text == "ABSTRACT"
assert texts[1].label == DocItemLabel.SECTION_HEADER
assert texts[1].parent.cref == "#/texts/0"
assert isinstance(texts[2], TextItem)
assert texts[2].text == (
"In one aspect, a system for controlling an operation of an actuator mounted "
"on a seed planting implement may include an actuator configured to adjust a "
"position of a row unit of the seed planting implement relative to a toolbar "
"of the seed planting implement. The system may also include a flow restrictor"
" fluidly coupled to a fluid chamber of the actuator, with the flow restrictor"
" being configured to reduce a rate at which fluid is permitted to exit the "
"fluid chamber in a manner that provides damping to the row unit. Furthermore,"
" the system may include a valve fluidly coupled to the flow restrictor in a "
"parallel relationship such that the valve is configured to permit the fluid "
"exiting the fluid chamber to flow through the flow restrictor and the fluid "
"entering the fluid chamber to bypass the flow restrictor."
)
assert texts[2].label == DocItemLabel.PARAGRAPH
assert texts[2].parent.cref == "#/texts/1"
assert isinstance(texts[3], TextItem)
assert texts[3].text == "FIELD"
assert texts[3].label == DocItemLabel.SECTION_HEADER
assert texts[3].parent.cref == "#/texts/0"
assert isinstance(texts[4], TextItem)
assert texts[4].text == (
"The present disclosure generally relates to seed planting implements and, "
"more particularly, to systems for controlling the operation of an actuator "
"mounted on a seed planting implement in a manner that provides damping to "
"one or more components of the seed planting implement."
)
assert texts[4].label == DocItemLabel.PARAGRAPH
assert texts[4].parent.cref == "#/texts/3"
assert isinstance(texts[5], TextItem)
assert texts[5].text == "BACKGROUND"
assert texts[5].label == DocItemLabel.SECTION_HEADER
assert texts[5].parent.cref == "#/texts/0"
assert isinstance(texts[6], TextItem)
assert texts[6].text == (
"Modern farming practices strive to increase yields of agricultural fields. In"
" this respect, seed planting implements are towed behind a tractor or other "
"work vehicle to deposit seeds in a field. For example, seed planting "
"implements typically include one or more ground engaging tools or openers "
"that form a furrow or trench in the soil. One or more dispensing devices of "
"the seed planting implement may, in turn, deposit seeds into the furrow(s). "
"After deposition of the seeds, a packer wheel may pack the soil on top of the"
" deposited seeds."
)
assert texts[6].label == DocItemLabel.PARAGRAPH
assert texts[6].parent.cref == "#/texts/5"
assert isinstance(texts[7], TextItem)
assert texts[7].text == (
"In certain instances, the packer wheel may also control the penetration depth"
" of the furrow. In this regard, the position of the packer wheel may be moved"
" vertically relative to the associated opener(s) to adjust the depth of the "
"furrow. Additionally, the seed planting implement includes an actuator "
"configured to exert a downward force on the opener(s) to ensure that the "
"opener(s) is able to penetrate the soil to the depth set by the packer wheel."
" However, the seed planting implement may bounce or chatter when traveling at"
" high speeds and/or when the opener(s) encounters hard or compacted soil. As "
"such, operators generally operate the seed planting implement with the "
"actuator exerting more downward force on the opener(s) than is necessary in "
"order to prevent such bouncing or chatter. Operation of the seed planting "
"implement with excessive down pressure applied to the opener(s), however, "
"reduces the overall stability of the seed planting implement."
)
assert texts[7].label == DocItemLabel.PARAGRAPH
assert texts[7].parent.cref == "#/texts/5"
assert isinstance(texts[8], TextItem)
assert texts[8].text == (
"Accordingly, an improved system for controlling the operation of an actuator "
"mounted on s seed planting implement to enhance the overall operation of the "
"implement would be welcomed in the technology."
)
assert texts[8].label == DocItemLabel.PARAGRAPH
assert texts[8].parent.cref == "#/texts/5"
assert isinstance(texts[9], TextItem)
assert texts[9].text == "BRIEF DESCRIPTION"
assert texts[9].label == DocItemLabel.SECTION_HEADER
assert texts[9].parent.cref == "#/texts/0"
assert isinstance(texts[15], TextItem)
assert texts[15].text == "BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS"
assert texts[15].label == DocItemLabel.SECTION_HEADER
assert texts[15].parent.cref == "#/texts/0"
assert isinstance(texts[17], TextItem)
assert texts[17].text == (
"FIG. 1 illustrates a perspective view of one embodiment of a seed planting "
"implement in accordance with aspects of the present subject matter;"
)
assert texts[17].label == DocItemLabel.PARAGRAPH
assert texts[17].parent.cref == "#/texts/15"
assert isinstance(texts[27], TextItem)
assert texts[27].text == "DETAILED DESCRIPTION"
assert texts[27].label == DocItemLabel.SECTION_HEADER
assert texts[27].parent.cref == "#/texts/0"
assert isinstance(texts[57], TextItem)
assert texts[57].text == (
"This written description uses examples to disclose the technology, including "
"the best mode, and also to enable any person skilled in the art to practice "
"the technology, including making and using any devices or systems and "
"performing any incorporated methods. The patentable scope of the technology "
"is defined by the claims, and may include other examples that occur to those "
"skilled in the art. Such other examples are intended to be within the scope "
"of the claims if they include structural elements that do not differ from the"
" literal language of the claims, or if they include equivalent structural "
"elements with insubstantial differences from the literal language of the "
"claims."
)
assert texts[57].label == DocItemLabel.PARAGRAPH
assert texts[57].parent.cref == "#/texts/27"
assert isinstance(texts[58], TextItem)
assert texts[58].text == "CLAIMS"
assert texts[58].label == DocItemLabel.SECTION_HEADER
assert texts[58].parent.cref == "#/texts/0"
assert isinstance(texts[77], TextItem)
assert texts[77].text == (
"19. The system of claim 18, wherein the flow restrictor and the valve are "
"fluidly coupled in a parallel relationship."
)
assert texts[77].label == DocItemLabel.PARAGRAPH
assert texts[77].parent.cref == "#/texts/58"
# CHECK application doc number 20180000016 for HTML entities, level 2 headings, tables
file_name = "ipa20180000016.xml"
doc = [item[1] for item in patents if item[0].name == file_name][0]
if GENERATE:
_generate_groundtruth(doc, Path(file_name).stem)
assert doc.name == file_name
texts = doc.texts
assert len(texts) == 183
assert isinstance(texts[0], TextItem)
assert texts[0].text == "LIGHT EMITTING DEVICE AND PLANT CULTIVATION METHOD"
assert texts[0].label == DocItemLabel.TITLE
assert texts[0].parent.cref == "#/body"
assert isinstance(texts[1], TextItem)
assert texts[1].text == "ABSTRACT"
assert texts[1].label == DocItemLabel.SECTION_HEADER
assert texts[1].parent.cref == "#/texts/0"
assert isinstance(texts[2], TextItem)
assert texts[2].text == (
"Provided is a light emitting device that includes a light emitting element "
"having a light emission peak wavelength ranging from 380 nm to 490 nm, and a "
"fluorescent material excited by light from the light emitting element and "
"emitting light having at a light emission peak wavelength ranging from 580 nm"
" or more to less than 680 nm. The light emitting device emits light having a "
"ratio R/B of a photon flux density R to a photon flux density B ranging from "
"2.0 to 4.0 and a ratio R/FR of the photon flux density R to a photon flux "
"density FR ranging from 0.7 to 13.0, the photon flux density R being in a "
"wavelength range of 620 nm or more and less than 700 nm, the photon flux "
"density B being in a wavelength range of 380 nm or more and 490 nm or less, "
"and the photon flux density FR being in a wavelength range of 700 nm or more "
"and 780 nm or less."
)
assert isinstance(texts[3], TextItem)
assert texts[3].text == "CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION"
assert texts[3].label == DocItemLabel.SECTION_HEADER
assert texts[3].parent.cref == "#/texts/0"
assert isinstance(texts[4], TextItem)
assert texts[5].text == "BACKGROUND"
assert texts[5].label == DocItemLabel.SECTION_HEADER
assert texts[5].parent.cref == "#/texts/0"
assert isinstance(texts[6], TextItem)
assert texts[6].text == "Technical Field"
assert texts[6].label == DocItemLabel.SECTION_HEADER
assert texts[6].parent.cref == "#/texts/0"
assert isinstance(texts[7], TextItem)
assert texts[7].text == (
"The present disclosure relates to a light emitting device and a plant "
"cultivation method."
)
assert texts[7].label == DocItemLabel.PARAGRAPH
assert texts[7].parent.cref == "#/texts/6"
assert isinstance(texts[8], TextItem)
assert texts[8].text == "Description of Related Art"
assert texts[8].label == DocItemLabel.SECTION_HEADER
assert texts[8].parent.cref == "#/texts/0"
assert isinstance(texts[63], TextItem)
assert texts[63].text == (
"wherein r, s, and t are numbers satisfying 0≦r≦1.0, 0≦s≦1.0, 0<t<1.0, and "
"r+s+t≦1.0."
)
assert texts[63].label == DocItemLabel.PARAGRAPH
assert texts[63].parent.cref == "#/texts/51"
assert isinstance(texts[89], TextItem)
assert texts[89].text == (
"Examples of the compound containing Al, Ga, or In specifically include Al₂O₃, "
"Ga₂O₃, and In₂O₃."
)
assert texts[89].label == DocItemLabel.PARAGRAPH
assert texts[89].parent.cref == "#/texts/87"
# CHECK application doc number 20110039701 for complex long tables
file_name = "ipa20110039701.xml"
doc = [item[1] for item in patents if item[0].name == file_name][0]
assert doc.name == file_name
assert len(doc.tables) == 17
def test_patent_uspto_grant_v2(patents):
"""Test applications and grants Full Text Data/APS."""
# CHECK application doc number 06442728
file_name = "pg06442728.xml"
doc = [item[1] for item in patents if item[0].name == file_name][0]
if GENERATE:
_generate_groundtruth(doc, Path(file_name).stem)
assert doc.name == file_name
texts = doc.texts
assert len(texts) == 108
assert isinstance(texts[0], TextItem)
assert texts[0].text == "Methods and apparatus for turbo code"
assert texts[0].label == DocItemLabel.TITLE
assert texts[0].parent.cref == "#/body"
assert isinstance(texts[1], TextItem)
assert texts[1].text == "ABSTRACT"
assert texts[1].label == DocItemLabel.SECTION_HEADER
assert texts[1].parent.cref == "#/texts/0"
assert isinstance(texts[2], TextItem)
assert texts[2].text == (
"An interleaver receives incoming data frames of size N. The interleaver "
"indexes the elements of the frame with an N₁×N₂ index array. The interleaver "
"then effectively rearranges (permutes) the data by permuting the rows of the "
"index array. The interleaver employs the equation I(j,k)=I(j,αjk+βj)modP) to "
"permute the columns (indexed by k) of each row (indexed by j). P is at least "
"equal to N₂, βj is a constant which may be different for each row, and each "
"αj is a relative prime number relative to P. After permuting, the "
"interleaver outputs the data in a different order than received (e.g., "
"receives sequentially row by row, outputs sequentially each column by column)."
)
# check that the formula has been skipped
assert texts[43].text == (
"Calculating the specified equation with the specified values for permuting "
"row 0 of array D 350 into row 0 of array D₁ 360 proceeds as:"
)
assert texts[44].text == (
"and the permuted data frame is contained in array D₁ 360 shown in FIG. 3. "
"Outputting the array column by column outputs the frame elements in the "
"order:"
)
def test_patent_uspto_app_v1(patents):
"""Test applications Full Text Data/XML Version 1.x."""
# CHECK application doc number 20010031492
file_name = "pa20010031492.xml"
doc = [item[1] for item in patents if item[0].name == file_name][0]
if GENERATE:
_generate_groundtruth(doc, Path(file_name).stem)
assert doc.name == file_name
texts = doc.texts
assert len(texts) == 103
assert isinstance(texts[0], TextItem)
assert texts[0].text == "Assay reagent"
assert texts[0].label == DocItemLabel.TITLE
assert texts[0].parent.cref == "#/body"
assert isinstance(texts[1], TextItem)
assert texts[1].text == "ABSTRACT"
assert texts[1].label == DocItemLabel.SECTION_HEADER
assert texts[1].parent.cref == "#/texts/0"
# check that the formula has been skipped
assert texts[62].text == (
"5. The % toxic effect for each sample was calculated as follows:"
)
assert texts[63].text == "where: Cₒ=light in control at time zero"
assert len(doc.tables) == 1
assert doc.tables[0].data.num_rows == 6
assert doc.tables[0].data.num_cols == 3
def test_patent_uspto_grant_aps(patents):
"""Test applications Full Text Data/APS."""
# CHECK application doc number 057006474
file_name = "pftaps057006474.txt"
doc = [item[1] for item in patents if item[0].name == file_name][0]
if GENERATE:
_generate_groundtruth(doc, Path(file_name).stem)
assert doc.name == file_name
texts = doc.texts
assert len(texts) == 75
assert isinstance(texts[0], TextItem)
assert texts[0].text == "Carbocation containing cyanine-type dye"
assert texts[0].label == DocItemLabel.TITLE
assert texts[0].parent.cref == "#/body"
assert isinstance(texts[1], TextItem)
assert texts[1].text == "ABSTRACT"
assert texts[1].label == DocItemLabel.SECTION_HEADER
assert texts[1].parent.cref == "#/texts/0"
assert isinstance(texts[2], TextItem)
assert texts[2].text == (
"To provide a reagent with excellent stability under storage, which can detect"
" a subject compound to be measured with higher specificity and sensitibity. "
"Complexes of a compound represented by the general formula (IV):"
)
assert len(doc.tables) == 0
for item in texts:
assert "##STR1##" not in item.text

69
tests/test_input_doc.py
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ from pathlib import Path
from docling.backend.pypdfium2_backend import PyPdfiumDocumentBackend
from docling.datamodel.base_models import DocumentStream, InputFormat
from docling.datamodel.document import InputDocument
from docling.datamodel.document import InputDocument, _DocumentConversionInput
def test_in_doc_from_valid_path():
@ -39,6 +39,73 @@ def test_in_doc_from_invalid_buf():
assert doc.valid == False
def test_guess_format(tmp_path):
"""Test docling.datamodel.document._DocumentConversionInput.__guess_format"""
dci = _DocumentConversionInput(path_or_stream_iterator=[])
temp_dir = tmp_path / "test_guess_format"
temp_dir.mkdir()
# Valid PDF
buf = BytesIO(Path("./tests/data/2206.01062.pdf").open("rb").read())
stream = DocumentStream(name="my_doc.pdf", stream=buf)
assert dci._guess_format(stream) == InputFormat.PDF
doc_path = Path("./tests/data/2206.01062.pdf")
assert dci._guess_format(doc_path) == InputFormat.PDF
# Valid MS Office
buf = BytesIO(Path("./tests/data/docx/lorem_ipsum.docx").open("rb").read())
stream = DocumentStream(name="lorem_ipsum.docx", stream=buf)
assert dci._guess_format(stream) == InputFormat.DOCX
doc_path = Path("./tests/data/docx/lorem_ipsum.docx")
assert dci._guess_format(doc_path) == InputFormat.DOCX
# Valid HTML
buf = BytesIO(Path("./tests/data/html/wiki_duck.html").open("rb").read())
stream = DocumentStream(name="wiki_duck.html", stream=buf)
assert dci._guess_format(stream) == InputFormat.HTML
doc_path = Path("./tests/data/html/wiki_duck.html")
assert dci._guess_format(doc_path) == InputFormat.HTML
# Valid MD
buf = BytesIO(Path("./tests/data/md/wiki.md").open("rb").read())
stream = DocumentStream(name="wiki.md", stream=buf)
assert dci._guess_format(stream) == InputFormat.MD
doc_path = Path("./tests/data/md/wiki.md")
assert dci._guess_format(doc_path) == InputFormat.MD
# Valid XML USPTO patent
buf = BytesIO(Path("./tests/data/uspto/ipa20110039701.xml").open("rb").read())
stream = DocumentStream(name="ipa20110039701.xml", stream=buf)
assert dci._guess_format(stream) == InputFormat.XML_USPTO
doc_path = Path("./tests/data/uspto/ipa20110039701.xml")
assert dci._guess_format(doc_path) == InputFormat.XML_USPTO
buf = BytesIO(Path("./tests/data/uspto/pftaps057006474.txt").open("rb").read())
stream = DocumentStream(name="pftaps057006474.txt", stream=buf)
assert dci._guess_format(stream) == InputFormat.XML_USPTO
doc_path = Path("./tests/data/uspto/pftaps057006474.txt")
assert dci._guess_format(doc_path) == InputFormat.XML_USPTO
# Valid XML, non-supported flavor
xml_content = (
'<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><!DOCTYPE docling_test SYSTEM '
'"test.dtd"><docling>Docling parses documents</docling>'
)
doc_path = temp_dir / "docling_test.xml"
doc_path.write_text(xml_content, encoding="utf-8")
assert dci._guess_format(doc_path) == None
buf = BytesIO(Path(doc_path).open("rb").read())
stream = DocumentStream(name="docling_test.xml", stream=buf)
assert dci._guess_format(stream) == None
# Invalid USPTO patent (as plain text)
stream = DocumentStream(name="pftaps057006474.txt", stream=BytesIO(b"xyz"))
assert dci._guess_format(stream) == None
doc_path = temp_dir / "pftaps_wrong.txt"
doc_path.write_text("xyz", encoding="utf-8")
assert dci._guess_format(doc_path) == None
def _make_input_doc(path):
in_doc = InputDocument(
path_or_stream=path,